PDS Data Manager PDF

Reference Data Manager
(PD_Data)
Reference Guide
Document Number Version Date Pages

DPDS3-PB-200034A PDS 7.1 April 2002 1-684
DPDS3-PB-200034B PDS 7.2 February 2003 685-694
Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or
implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and should not be considered
commitments by Intergraph Corporation. Intergraph Corporation assumes no responsibility for any error that may appear in this document.
The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this
license.
No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its
affiliated companies.
Trademarks
CLIX, Intergraph, and RIS are registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. DBACCESS, DesignReview, DIALOG, EE Raceway,
FrameWorks, Project Engineer, and SEE are trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. All other brands and product names are trademarks of
their respective owners.
Copyright
1984-2002 Intergraph Corporation
All Rights Reserved
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains
confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright and trade secret law and may not
be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization.
RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of The Rights in Technical
Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer
Software Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable.
Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001
________________ If You Need Assistance
If You Need Assistance
Intergraph Online
Our web site brings you fast, convenient, up-to-the-minute information about Intergraphs
products, services, and direction. Our web address is: http://www.intergraph.com.
Support
For the lasest Support Services information, use a World Wide Web browser to connect to
http://www.intergraph.com/ppo/services/support.asp.
If you are outside of the United States, please call your local Intergraph office. The most up-
to-date list of international offices and distributors is available on the web at
http://www.intergraph.com.
Intergraph Directory
The following numbers are only valid in the United States unless otherwise indicated. If you
are outside the United States, please call your local Intergraph office.
Intergraph General Information

All countries 1-256-730-2000
Training Registration
1-800-766-7701 (U.S. Only)
1-256-730-5400 (Outside the U.S.)
Mailing Address
Intergraph Process, Power & Offshore
300 Intergraph Way
Madison, Alabama 35758
U.S.A.
You can also reach us by electronic mail at info@intergraph.com.
3
________________
Documentation Contacts
We are constantly working on updates and improvements to the documents and other
educational media. If you have any suggestions on where we can improve the documentation
or where you think more information is needed, let us know. You can reach us by:
Mail Intergraph Process, Power & Offshore

Documentation Manager
300 Intergraph Way
Madison, AL 35758
4
________________ Table of Contents
Table of Contents
If You Need Assistance ........................................................................................................ 3
Intergraph Directory ............................................................................................................. 3
Preface ................................................................................................................................................. 15
General Conventions .................................................................................................................... 17
Keyboard Conventions ......................................................................................................... 18

Terminology ......................................................................................................................... 19
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 21
1.1 Project Organization ............................................................................................................ 22

1.2 Reference Data Overview ................................................................................................... 23
1.2.1 Piping Job Specification Introduction ..................................................................... 27

Graphic Commodity Data Introduction .............................................................................. 27
Material Description Data Introduction .............................................................................. 28
Standard Note Library Introduction .................................................................................... 28
Label Description Library Introduction .............................................................................. 29
Piping Assembly Library Introduction ................................................................................ 29
1.3 Reference Database Introduction ........................................................................................ 30

1.4 Delivered Reference Data ................................................................................................... 31
1.5 Reference Data Setup .......................................................................................................... 32
2. PDS Environment ........................................................................................................................ 33
PD Shell ....................................................................................................................................... 34
PD_Shell Form Conventions .............................................................................................. 37

Common Tools on the PD Shell Forms .............................................................................. 37
Batch Processes ................................................................................................................... 40
Help .............................................................................................................................................. 41
3. Reference Data Manager .............................................................................................................. 43
3.1 Data Security ....................................................................................................................... 45

3.2 Reference Data Archival ..................................................................................................... 46
4. Reference Data Location .............................................................................................................. 47
4.1 Reference Database Management Data ............................................................................... 48

4.2 Default Project Control Data ............................................................................................... 53
5
________________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
5. Piping Job Specification ............................................................................................................... 55
5.1 Material Reference Database Structure ............................................................................... 56

5.2 Neutral File Input ................................................................................................................ 59
5.2.1 Piping Materials Class Data (201) .......................................................................... 62

5.2.2 Piping Commodity Specification Data (202) .......................................................... 67
5.2.3 Piping Specialty Specification Data (203) .............................................................. 77
5.2.4 Instrument Component Specification Data (204) ................................................... 81
5.2.5 Tap Properties Data (205) ....................................................................................... 85
5.2.6 Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211) ....................................... 88
5.2.7 Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212) .................................................... 91
5.2.8 Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231) .......................................................... 95
5.2.9 Flange Insulation Exclusion Data (232) .................................................................. 98
5.2.10 Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data (233) .......................................... 101
5.3 Spec Writer .......................................................................................................................... 103
5.3.1 RDB Options File .................................................................................................... 105

5.3.2 Piping Materials Class Data Command .................................................................. 113
5.3.2.1 Create/Revise Piping Materials Class Data .............................................. 114
5.3.3 Piping Commodity Data Command ........................................................................ 117
5.3.3.1 Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data ............................. 119

5.3.3.2 Implied Data ............................................................................................. 126
5.3.3.3 Add Entry to Material Description Library .............................................. 128
5.3.4 Piping Specialty Data Command ............................................................................ 129
5.3.4.1 Create/Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data ................................. 130
5.3.5 Instrument Data Command ..................................................................................... 133
5.3.5.1 Create/Revise Instrument Specification Data .......................................... 134
5.3.6 Tap Properties Data Command ............................................................................... 137
5.3.6.1 Create/Revise Tap Properties Data .......................................................... 138
5.3.7 Commodity Implied Data Command ...................................................................... 140
5.3.7.1 Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied Material Data ....................... 141
5.3.8 Table Checker ......................................................................................................... 144
5.4 Piping Job Specification Manager ...................................................................................... 145
6
5.4.1 Load, Replace, and Replace Commodity Subset Options ....................................... 148
5.4.2 Delete Option .......................................................................................................... 151
5.4.3 Report Option .......................................................................................................... 152
5.5 Piping Job Spec Report Manager ........................................................................................ 154
5.5.1 Using the Report Commands .................................................................................. 155

5.5.2 Report Format Form ................................................................................................ 157
5.5.2.1 Format Creation/Revision Form .............................................................. 159

5.5.2.2 Format Deletion Form .............................................................................. 161
5.5.3 Report Discrimination Data Form ........................................................................... 163
5.5.3.1 Discrimination Data Creation Form ......................................................... 165

5.5.3.2 Search Criteria Form ................................................................................ 167
5.5.3.3 Discrimination Data Revision Form ........................................................ 169
5.5.3.4 Discrimination Data Deletion Form ......................................................... 171
5.5.4 Report Form ............................................................................................................ 173
5.5.4.1 Report Creation Form .............................................................................. 175

5.5.4.2 Revise Report Form ................................................................................. 178
5.5.4.3 Report Deletion Form .............................................................................. 181
5.5.4.4 Report Approval Form ............................................................................. 183
5.5.4.5 Report Multiple Submit Form .................................................................. 184
5.5.5 Report Management Defaults Form ........................................................................ 186
6. Piping Job Specification Tables ................................................................................................... 189
6.1 PJS Tables and Functions ................................................................................................... 190
6.1.1 Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table ..................................................... 191

6.1.2 Nominal Piping Diameters Table ............................................................................ 194
6.1.3 Thickness Data Tables ............................................................................................ 197
6.1.4 Materials Data Table ............................................................................................... 200
6.1.5 Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations ........................................... 203
Delivered Equations ........................................................................................ 204
6.1.6 Branch Insertion Tables .......................................................................................... 208

6.1.7 Gasket Separation Table ......................................................................................... 212
6.1.8 Fluid Code Table ..................................................................................................... 214
6.2 RDB Tables ......................................................................................................................... 215
6.2.1 Commodity Item Name Table (G02) ...................................................................... 216

6.2.2 Bend Deflection Table (G04) .................................................................................. 219
6.2.3 Segment Pipe Run Length Threshold Table (G06) ................................................. 221
7
________________
6.2.4 Pipe Length Threshold Table (G07) ....................................................................... 222

6.2.5 Preferred Bolt Length Table (G11) ......................................................................... 223
6.2.6 Weld Type Table ..................................................................................................... 226
6.2.7 Weld Clearance Table ............................................................................................. 228
6.2.8 Weld Graphics Dimensions Table .......................................................................... 229
6.2.9 Bolt Commodity Code Table .................................................................................. 230
6.2.10 Gasket Diameter Table .......................................................................................... 231
6.2.11 Field Fit Length Table ........................................................................................... 232
6.2.12 Component Mirror Table ...................................................................................... 233
6.2.13 Operator Mirror Table ........................................................................................... 234
6.2.14 Default End Preperation Table .............................................................................. 236
6.2.15 MTO Tables and Functions ................................................................................... 237
6.3 Piping Job Specification Tables Command ........................................................................ 239
6.3.1 Options .................................................................................................................... 240

6.3.2 Create Library ......................................................................................................... 242
6.3.3 Compress Library .................................................................................................... 242
6.3.4 Unapproved ==> Approved .................................................................................... 242
6.3.5 Create/Interactive Spec Tables ................................................................................ 243
6.3.6 Create/Batch Spec Tables ....................................................................................... 244
6.3.7 Revise Spec Tables ................................................................................................. 245
6.3.8 Delete Spec Tables .................................................................................................. 247
6.3.9 Report on Spec Tables ............................................................................................ 248
6.3.10 List Spec Tables .................................................................................................... 250
6.3.11 Extract Spec Tables ............................................................................................... 251
7. Graphic Commodity Data ............................................................................................................ 253
7.1 Graphic Commodity Library ............................................................................................... 254
7.1.1 Symbol Processors .................................................................................................. 256

7.1.2 Sub-Symbol Processor ............................................................................................ 258
7.1.3 Physical Data Definitions ........................................................................................ 259
7.1.4 Parametric Shape Definitions .................................................................................. 263
7.2 Physical Data Tables ........................................................................................................... 266
7.2.1 Data Retrieval from the Physical Data Library ....................................................... 267
7.2.2 Example of Physical Data Look-Up ....................................................................... 268
7.3 Notes for Graphic Commodity Data ................................................................................... 270
7.3.1 Connect Point Data ................................................................................................. 270

7.3.2 Bends and Branches ................................................................................................ 271
7.3.3 Bolts, Gaskets, and Flanges .................................................................................... 272
7.3.4 Pipe, Tubing, and Hose ........................................................................................... 273
7.4 Graphic Commodity Library Manager ................................................................................ 275
8
7.4.1 Create Library ......................................................................................................... 277

7.4.2 Compress ................................................................................................................. 277
7.4.4 Create/Interactive Graphic Commodity Data .......................................................... 278
7.4.5 Create/Batch Graphic Commodity Data ................................................................. 279
7.4.6 Revise Graphic Commodity Data ........................................................................... 281
7.4.7 Delete Graphic Commodity Data ............................................................................ 283
7.4.8 Report Graphic Commodity Data ........................................................................... 284
7.4.9 List Graphic Commodity Data ................................................................................ 285
7.4.10 Extract Graphic Commodity Data ......................................................................... 286
7.5 Physical Data Library Manager ........................................................................................... 287
7.5.1 Create Library ......................................................................................................... 290

7.5.2 Compress ................................................................................................................. 290
7.5.4 Create/Interactive Physical Commodity Data ......................................................... 291
7.5.5 Create/Batch Physical Commodity Data ................................................................. 292
7.5.6 Revise Physical Commodity Data ........................................................................... 294
7.5.7 Delete Physical Commodity Data ........................................................................... 296
7.5.8 Report Physical Commodity Data ........................................................................... 297
7.5.9 List Physical Commodity Data ............................................................................... 299
7.5.10 Extract Physical Commodity Data ........................................................................ 300
8. Table Formats and Naming Conventions ..................................................................................... 303
8.1 Table Conventions .............................................................................................................. 304
8.1.1 Table Names ............................................................................................................ 304

8.1.2 Comments ............................................................................................................... 304
8.1.3 Revision Markers .................................................................................................... 305
8.1.4 Component Tables .................................................................................................. 305
8.1.5 Units ........................................................................................................................ 306
8.1.6 Fields (Input/Output Columns) ............................................................................... 308
8.1.7 NPD Values ............................................................................................................. 309
8.1.8 Rating ...................................................................................................................... 309
8.1.9 Schedule/Thickness ................................................................................................. 310
8.1.10 Weight Tables ....................................................................................................... 313
8.1.11 Abbreviations ........................................................................................................ 314
8.2 Table Requirements ............................................................................................................ 315
8.2.1 Tables Required for Piping Components ................................................................ 315
8.2.1.1 Fittings (6P2C, 6P3C, 6Q2C and 6Q3C) ................................................. 316

8.2.1.2 Specialty Piping Components (6P6C and 6Q6C) .................................... 317
8.2.2 Tables Required for Instrument Components ......................................................... 318
9
________________
8.3 Generic Tables .................................................................................................................... 319
8.3.1 Variables for Generic Tables ................................................................................... 320

8.3.2 Generic Table for Bolted Ends (G10) ..................................................................... 324
8.3.3 Generic Table for Studs used in Bolted Connections (G12) ................................... 326
8.3.4 Generic Table for Studs in Bolted Connections w/ Term Type (G12T) ................. 328
8.3.5 Generic Table for Male Ends (G20) ........................................................................ 330
8.3.6 Generic Table for Female Ends (G30) .................................................................... 332
8.3.7 Generic Table for Weight and Thickness Data, Male Ends (G50) ......................... 333
8.4 Piping Component Tables ................................................................................................... 334
8.4.1 Variables for Specific Tables .................................................................................. 336

8.4.2 Piping Component Table for GCP Data (P11A, P15A) .......................................... 339
8.4.3 Piping Component Table GCP Overflow Data (P11B, P15B) ............................... 341
8.4.4 Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Data
(P21A,P25A,P26A,P27A,P28A,P29A) .................................................................. 342
8.4.5 Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Overflow Data
(P21B,P25B,P26B,P27B,P28B) ............................................................................. 344
8.4.6 Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators (P31A) .............................. 345
8.4.7 Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators, Overflow Data (P31B) .... 347
8.4.8 Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP Data
(P51,P52,P59) ......................................................................................................... 348
8.4.9 Piping Component Table For Empty Weight of Valves (P60A) ............................ 350
8.4.10 Piping Component Table For Empty Weight of Valves, Overflow Data
(P60B) ................................................................................................................... 351
8.4.11 Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP and RCP Data
(P61,P62,P63,P64,P65) ......................................................................................... 352
8.4.12 Piping Component Tables for Specialty Components .......................................... 354
8.5 Instrument Component Tables ............................................................................................ 355
8.5.1 Instrument Body (I80 and P80) ............................................................................... 355

8.5.2 Instrument Operator (I81 and P81) ......................................................................... 358
9. Material Description Data ............................................................................................................ 361
9.1 Material Data in the Material Reference Database ............................................................. 366

9.2 Short Material Description Library ..................................................................................... 367
9.3 Long Material Description Library ..................................................................................... 372
9.4 Specialty Material Description Library ............................................................................... 374
9.5 Material Description Library Manager ............................................................................... 376
9.5.1 Create Library ......................................................................................................... 378

9.5.3 Load/Revise Interactive .......................................................................................... 379
9.5.4 Load/Revise Batch .................................................................................................. 380
9.5.5 Replace Interactive .................................................................................................. 381
9.5.6 Replace Batch .......................................................................................................... 382
9.5.7 Report Option .......................................................................................................... 383
10
10. Table Checker ............................................................................................................................ 385
10.1 Table Checker Form ........................................................................................................ 389
10.1.1 Using the Report Commands ............................................................................ 390

10.1.2 Report Format Form .......................................................................................... 392
10.1.2.1 Format Creation/Revision Form ...................................................... 394

10.1.2.2 Format Deletion Form ...................................................................... 396
10.1.3 Discrimination Data Form ................................................................................. 398
10.1.3.1 Discrimination Data Creation Form ................................................. 400

10.1.3.2 Discrimination Data Revision Form ................................................ 402
10.1.3.3 Discrimination Data Deletion Form ................................................. 404
10.1.4 Report Form ...................................................................................................... 406
10.1.4.1 Report Creation Form ...................................................................... 408

10.1.4.2 Revise Report Form ......................................................................... 411
10.1.4.3 Report Deletion Form ...................................................................... 414
10.1.4.4 Report Approval Form ..................................................................... 416
10.1.4.5 Report Multiple Submit Form .......................................................... 418
10.1.5 Report Management Defaults Form .................................................................. 420
10.2 Sample Table Checker Output ........................................................................................ 422
11. Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Manager ................................................................................ 437
11.1 Support Tutorial Definition Manager .............................................................................. 438
11.1.1 Create Library ................................................................................................... 440

11.1.2 Compress ........................................................................................................... 440
11.1.3 Unapproved ==> Approved .............................................................................. 440
11.1.4 Create Data ........................................................................................................ 441
11.1.5 Revise Data ....................................................................................................... 442
11.1.6 Report Data ....................................................................................................... 444
11.1.7 List Data ............................................................................................................ 445
11.1.8 Delete Data ........................................................................................................ 446
11.1.9 Extract Data ....................................................................................................... 447
12. Standard Note Library ................................................................................................................ 449
12.1 Standard Note Library Manager ...................................................................................... 453
12.1.1 Create Library ................................................................................................... 455

12.1.2 Compress ........................................................................................................... 455
12.1.4 Create Standard Note Type ............................................................................... 456
11
________________
12.1.5 Revise Standard Note Type ............................................................................... 457

12.1.6 Report Standard Note Library Contents ............................................................ 459
12.1.7 List Standard Note Data .................................................................................... 460
12.1.8 Delete Standard Note Data ................................................................................ 461
12.1.9 Extract Standard Note Type .............................................................................. 462
12.1.10 Load Database ................................................................................................. 463
13. Label Description Library .......................................................................................................... 465
13.1 Label Types ..................................................................................................................... 466
13.1.1 Displayable Attribute Labels ............................................................................. 466

13.1.2 Alphanumeric Labels ........................................................................................ 466
13.1.3 Displayable Attribute Message ......................................................................... 466
13.1.4 Commodity Code Attribute Message ................................................................ 467
13.1.5 Isometric Drawing Labels ................................................................................. 467
13.1.6 Report Labels .................................................................................................... 468
13.1.7 Clash Management Labels ................................................................................ 468
13.2 Label Description Library Manager ................................................................................ 471
13.2.1 Create Library ................................................................................................... 472

13.2.2 Compress Library .............................................................................................. 472
13.2.4 Create Label Data .............................................................................................. 473
13.2.4.1 Create Label Graphic Data ............................................................... 475

13.2.4.2 Create Label Attribute Data ............................................................. 478
13.2.4.3 Mass Annotation Options ................................................................. 484
13.2.5 Revise Label Data ............................................................................................. 485

13.2.6 Delete Label Data .............................................................................................. 487
13.2.7 Report Label Data ............................................................................................. 489
13.3 Label Library Merger ...................................................................................................... 495
13.3.1 Label Library Merger Interface ......................................................................... 495
13.3.1.1 File Menu ......................................................................................... 497
13.3.1.1.1 Open Source Label Library 1 ....................................... 497

13.3.1.1.2 Open Source Label Library 2 ....................................... 497
13.3.1.1.3 Open Destination Library ............................................. 497
13.3.1.1.4 Information ................................................................... 497
13.3.1.1.5 Exit ............................................................................... 498
13.3.1.2 Edit Menu ......................................................................................... 499
13.3.1.2.1 Select All ...................................................................... 499

13.3.1.2.2 Unselect All .................................................................. 499
12
13.3.1.2.3 Invert Selection ............................................................ 499

13.3.1.2.4 Edit Label Number ....................................................... 499
13.3.1.2.5 Edit Label Description ................................................. 499
13.3.1.2.6 Delete ........................................................................... 499
13.3.1.2.7 Validate ........................................................................ 499
13.3.1.2.8 Compress Destination Library ..................................... 500
13.3.1.2.9 Copy to Destination ..................................................... 500
13.3.1.2.10 Clear Error Messages ................................................. 500
13.3.1.3 Help Menu ........................................................................................ 501
13.3.1.3.1 Contents ....................................................................... 501

13.3.1.3.2 About Library Merger .................................................. 501
13.3.2 Workflow .......................................................................................................... 502
14. Piping Assembly Library ........................................................................................................... 505
14.1 Piping Assembly Language ............................................................................................. 506
14.1.1 PAL Keywords .................................................................................................. 506

14.1.2 Placing Taps in Assemblies .............................................................................. 520
14.1.3 Sample Piping Assembly Files ......................................................................... 521
14.2 Piping Assembly Library Manager ................................................................................. 525
14.2.1 Options .............................................................................................................. 525

14.2.2 Create Library ................................................................................................... 527
14.2.3 Compress ........................................................................................................... 527
14.2.5 Create/Interactive Piping Assembly Data ......................................................... 528
14.2.6 Create/Batch Assembly Data ............................................................................ 529
14.2.7 Revise Piping Assembly Data ........................................................................... 530
14.2.8 Delete Piping Assembly Data ........................................................................... 532
14.2.9 Report Assembly Data ...................................................................................... 533
14.2.10 List Assembly Data ......................................................................................... 534
14.2.11 Extract Assembly Data .................................................................................... 535
15. Reference Database Revision Manager ...................................................................................... 537
15.1 Reference Data Conflict Report ...................................................................................... 540

15.2 Table Change Report ....................................................................................................... 546
15.3 Reference Data Impact Report ........................................................................................ 551
15.3.1 Examples ........................................................................................................... 551
15.4 Proposed RDB Changes Report ...................................................................................... 555
16. Verify RDB Library ................................................................................................................... 561
13
________________
Appendix A: Reference Data Manager Error Messages .................................................................. 565
Appendix B: Codelists ..................................................................................................................... 567
B.1 General Comments .................................................................................................................... 569

B.2 Comments Specific to Units of Measure Codelist Sets ............................................................. 569
Glossary ............................................................................................................................................... 667
Index .................................................................................................................................................... 675
14
________________ Preface
Preface
Document Purpose
This document is a reference guide for the Reference Data Manager module of the
PDS 3D products. PDS 3D uses interactive graphics and database management
techniques to integrate the engineering and design/drafting execution of plant design.
The Reference Data Manager module is one part of the overall Plant Design System.
It is specifically designed to define and modify the reference data for the PDS 3D
modules. It enables you to control and standardize the PDS 3D tasks. You can also
modify the reference data to reflect company practices and standards.
This document is designed as a reference; it is organized around the structure of the

product rather than presenting a typical work flow. Use this guide when you need to
look up a specific Reference Data Manager function.
Document Prerequisites / Audience

This document is intended for project managers who have a working knowledge of
the PDS 3D Modules. Knowledge of relational database systems and basic file
manipulations is recommended. You should also be familiar with a text editor, such
as Notepad, vi, or EMACS.
Related Documents/Products
Intergraph Corporations Relational Interface System (RIS)TM is required to operate
PDS 3D, along with a relational database management system (RDBMS) supported
by RIS. Currently, these include Informix, Oracle, and Ingres. Information
about RIS capabilities can be found in the following documents:
Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual
Relational Interface System (RIS) Operator Training Guide
For more information on related aspects of the PDS 3D products, consult the
following documents:
Project Administrator Reference Guide
Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide
Equipment Modeling Reference Guide
15
________________
Report Manager Reference Guide
About this Document

This document contains front matter, numbered sections, appendices, a glossary, and
an index. Much of this document is devoted to a description of the forms used to
setup and maintain reference data.
Section 1 Provides an overview of the product. It describes general

information, terms, and work flow.
Section 2 Describes the product environment. This includes information

on accessing the product and common conventions for working
in the PDS 3D modules.
Section 3 Describes the main Reference Data Manager form used to access
the product.
Sections 4-16 Describe the individual libraries and managers which make up
the Reference Data Manager including operating steps for each
form within the manager.
Appendices Provide additional information related to the Reference Data

Manager such as error messages, and file listings.
Additional Information
The following informational files are delivered with the software in the directory.
File Name Contents
readme.txt Describes changes and additions to the product since the last
version. For a fixes release, the fixes are appended to the top of
the initial file to provide a history of all changes to the product.
Includes Comments and Trouble Report numbers which describe
what problems have been fixed. Provides special notices to the
customer. Lists any exceptions made to the certification.
16
________________ Preface
General Conventions
This document contains many visual cues to help you understand the meaning of certain
words or phrases. The use of different fonts for different types of information allows you to
scan the document for key concepts or commands. Symbols help abbreviate and identify
commonly used words, phrases, or groups of related information.
Typefaces
Italic Indicates a system response, which is an explanation of what the software is
doing. For example,
The text is placed in the viewing plane.
Bold Indicates a command name, parameter name, or dialog box title. Command
paths are shown using an arrow between command names. For example,
Choose File > Open to load a new file.
Sans serif Indicates a system prompt or message, which requires an action be taken by
the user. For example,
Select first segment of alignment
Bold Typewriter
Indicates what you should literally type in. For example,
Key in original.dat to load the ASCII file.
Normal Typewriter
Indicates an actual file or directory name. For example,
The ASCII report is stored in the layout.rpt file.
17
________________
Symbols
This document uses the following symbols to represent mouse buttons and to identify special
information:
<C> Command button

<D> Data button (usually the left mouse button)
<R> Reset/reject button (usually the right mouse button)
<T> Tentative button (usually the center mouse button)
Note Important supplemental information.
Warning Critical information that could cause the loss of data if not followed.
Technical tip or information provides information on what the software is

doing or how it processes information.
Map or path shows you how to get to a specific command or form.
More information indicates there is additional or related information.
Need a hint used with activities and labs, provides a tip or hint for doing the
exercises.
Keyboard Conventions
The following list outlines the abbreviations this document uses for keyboard keys and
describes how to use them in combination. You can make some menu selections through the
use of keyboard accelerators, which map menu selections to key combinations.
ALT Alternate key

CTRL Control key
DEL Delete key
ENTER Enter key
ESC Escape key
CTRL+z To hold down the Control key and press Z.

ESC,k To press the Escape key, then K.
18
________________ Preface
Terminology
Click To use a mouse or key combination to pick an item that begins an
action. For example,
Click Apply to save the changes.
Select To mark an item by highlighting it with key combinations or by picking

it with your cursor. Selecting does not initiate an action. After
selecting an item, you click the action you want to affect the item. For
example,
Select the file original.dat from the list box, then click Delete to
remove it from the directory.
In addition, you would select items to define parameters, such as

selecting toggle buttons. This also applies to selecting graphic
elements from the design file. For example,
Select the line string to define the graphic template.
Tentative-select To place a tentative point on an existing graphic element in a design

file. If you are using the CLIX operating system, you tentative-select
by double-clicking with a mouse or pressing <T> on a hand-held
cursor. If you are using the Windows NT operating system, you
tentative-select by pressing a left-button, right-button chord.
Double-click To select and execute a command by clicking the mouse or hand-held

cursor button twice in rapid succession. This term implies that you are
clicking the data button (<D>) as part of a menu or dialog box action.
For example,
Double-click on the file original.dat to load it into the new surface.
Drag To press and hold the data button (<D>) while moving the mouse or
hand-held cursor.
Type To key a character string into a text box.
Key in To type in data and press ENTER to enter the data and execute the
default action.
In a dialog box, pressing TAB after keying in data will

enter the data and move the cursor to the next field.
19
________________
20
________________ Introduction
1. Introduction
1. Introduction
Welcome to the Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) module of the Plant Design System of software.
Intergraphs plant design software can be used to design any type of plantfrom petrochemical plants, offshore
platforms, chemical and pharmaceutical plants, consumer products (food, beverages, cosmetics, soap, paper, and
so forth), to power plants, waste water treatment plants, and cogeneration facilities.
Specifically, the Plant Design System (PDS) integrates many discipline-specific software modules; these
modules automate the many phases of a plant design project. Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) is one of
these modules.
In PDS, placement of piping components is driven by the specification. The PDS reference data provides the
selection criteria for the piping commodity items that are found in the piping job specification and the piping
commodity libraries that are delivered with the product. This data is contained in the reference database (RDB)
and can be used by other projects.
The Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) is specifically designed to define and modify the reference data for the
PDS 3D modules. This reference data ensures consistency in the definition of piping specifications and
commodity libraries. It is used to control and standardize the PDS 3D modules to reflect company practices and
standards.
21
________________
1.1 Project Organization

Since a process plant such as a refinery can be extremely large, PDS uses the following
organization to break the plant into smaller pieces that can be handled more easily.
A project is a convenient grouping of either all or part of the items that constitute a plant. The
project is the fundamental structure for working in PDS. Each project contains all the
information required to work in a PDS task.
The Project Administrator controls the creation and modification of Piping projects. Each
Piping project consists of a project control database, project design database, piping and
equipment models, reference models (structural, HVAC, and electrical raceway), a set of
drawings, and a collection of reference data. The reference data may be specific to one
project or shared by more than one project.
A project and all of its accompanying files must be defined with the Project Administrator
before you can use any of the other 3D PDS modules. Refer to the Project Administrator
Reference Guide for more information on setting up a project.
22
________________ Reference Data Overview
1.2 Reference Data Overview
1. Introduction
The Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) enables you to define and modify the reference
data for the PDS 3D modules. This reference data is used to ensure consistency in the
definition of piping specifications and commodity libraries. It enables you to control and
standardize the PDS 3D tasks. You can also modify the reference data to reflect company
practices and standards.
The Reference Data for PDS 3D is composed of the following basic components:
Spec/Material Database
Table 201 - Piping Material Class Data
Table 202 - Piping Commodity Specification Data
Table 203 - Piping Specialty Specification Data
Table 204 - Instrument Component Specification Data
Table 205 - Tap Properties Data
Table 211 - Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data
Table 212 - Piping Commodity Implied Material Data
Table 231 - Component Insulation Exclusion Data
Table 232 - Flange Insulation Exclusion Data
Practice Specific Reference Data

Physical Dimension Tables
Piping Job Specification Tables
Short Material Descriptions
Long Material Descriptions
Specialty Material Descriptions
23
________________
Practice Independent Reference Data

Graphic Commodity Data
Standard Note Library
Label Description Library
Piping Assembly Library
The Reference Data Manager supports both approved and unapproved reference data for a
project. The Project Control Database contains complete file management data for both an
approved and unapproved version of each type of reference data such as the Piping Job
Specification or the Graphic Commodity Library. This allows revisions to take place in
unapproved files while other processes read the approved files. Once the information in the
unapproved files has been verified, it can be posted to the approved reference data files.
The following figure illustrates the various pieces of reference data required to place a 6" gate
valve in a piping model and report on the placed component. It depicts how the various parts
that make up PDS work together. Whenever possible, this placement example will be used
throughout the rest of this document. For example, the discussion of the physical dimension
tables will use the tables called to place the gate valve as examples.
24
________________
Reference Data Overview
1. Introduction
25
________________
26
________________ Piping Job Specification Introduction
1.2.1 Piping Job Specification Introduction
1. Introduction
The Piping Job Specification (PJS) provides selection criteria for piping commodity items,
piping specialty items, and instruments. The information for the Piping Job Specification is
contained in the following files:
Specification/Material Reference Database - database containing the definitions for

piping materials classes, commodity items, specialty items, and tap properties tables.
Spec Table Library - library containing the specification tables referenced in the PJS.
The information in the Specification/Material Reference database and Spec Table Library
tables is also delivered in the form of neutral files which you can extract and modify.
The Piping Job Specification Manager enables you to create or revise the specificaton data
in the Material Reference Database. You can use the interactive (forms-driven) specification
writer or define/revise the data using ASCII neutral files.
The Piping Job Spec Tables command enables you to create, revise, and delete tables in the
Spec Table Library.
Graphic Commodity Data Introduction

The graphic commodity data is used to define commodity items, specialty items, and
instruments. The Graphic Commodity Library contains the parametric symbol definitions
required to place piping and instrument components in a 3D model. When you place a
component the system uses the Piping Job Specification to select the appropriate component
from the parametric symbol definition library which then accesses the component dimensional
data.
The graphic commodity data is contained in the following object libraries:
Graphic Commodity Library - contains the parametric definitions for the commodity
items.
Physical Dimension Libraries - contains dimension data for the commodity items. (A
different Physical Dimension Library is required for each type of practice such as, U.S.,
DIN, or British Standard)
Spec Table Library - contains the specification tables referenced in the PJS.
The parametric descriptions and dimension tables are also delivered in the form of text
libraries which you can extract and modify using the Graphic Commodity Library
Manager and Physical Data Library Manager.
27
________________
Material Description Data Introduction

The Material Description Data is accessed for
Material Take-off (MTO) reporting from the Design Database
Other miscellaneous reporting
Interfaces to the material control system
Stress analysis
Isometric drawing extraction.
The Material Description Data consists of the commodity item data which is not stored in the
Design Database, which is not required for the creation of graphic symbologies, and which is
not part of the geometric data. This data is contained in the following files:
Material Data in the Specification/Material Database - database tables containing

definitions for commodity items, criteria for implied material, and weld data.
Short Material Description Library - contains the short material descriptions for
commodity items and taps.
Long Material Description Library - contains the long material descriptions for
commodity items.
Specialty Material Description Library - contains the material descriptions for specialty
items.
The material descriptions are also delivered in the form of neutral files which you can modify
and post to the libraries.
The Material Description Library Manager enables you to create, revise, and delete data in
the Material Description Libraries. You can use the Piping Job Specification Manager to
load the material data tables in the Specification/Material Database.
Standard Note Library Introduction

The text for code-listed attributes and standard notes is stored in the Standard Note Library.
All attributes identified as code-listed are actually stored as integer values. The code list text
associated with the integer is stored in the Standard Note Library. Information in the Standard
Note Library is identified by note number and note type. Output from the library consists of
free-format text which forms the standard note.
28
________________ Piping Job Specification Introduction
Label Description Library Introduction
1. Introduction
The Label Description Library contains the definitions for the following label types used in
PDS 3D:
Orthographic drawing view specific labels
Orthographic drawing view identification labels
Orthagraphic drawing - user input
Displayable attribute messages
Commodity code attribute messages
Isometric drawing labels
Report labels
Clash management labels
These labels are intelligent graphics with links to the material database.
The Label Description Library Manager enables you to define the graphic parameters for a
label (such as level, line weight, and color code) and to define the format of the label (what
information comprises the label.)
Piping Assembly Library Introduction

The Piping Assembly Library contains the piping assembly definitions which define the
parameters necessary to place a piping assembly (group of components) automatically in the
model.
A Piping Assembly object library and text library which contain the definitions for basic
assemblies are included in the product delivery.
29
________________
1.3 Reference Database Introduction

A database is a collection of formatted data which conforms to a set of predefined rules. The
Specification/Material Reference Database is composed of a set of tables (entities) which
represent categories of data. A table is a defined set of attributes which describe an item, such
as the Piping Commodity Data table.
An attribute is a single type of information to be stored about an item, such as nominal

diameter or end preparation. Each attribute has a column number in the database table and a
name which describes the piece of information to be stored. The actual information stored in
the database is referred to as the attribute value. This value is a fixed data type; it can be
either numeric, alphanumeric, or code-listed.
numeric data types can be either real (decimal) or integer. These attributes are used for
quantitative values such as pressure or temperature.
alphanumeric data types (also called character) are used for textual information such as
component names or descriptions.
code-listed data types are a special integer values which help standardize and speed up
data entry. A code list is a set of acceptable values for a particular attribute which can
be referred to by an index number. A code-listed attribute is an attribute whose value is
defined using one of the selections from a particular code list set.
30
________________ Delivered Reference Data
1.4 Delivered Reference Data
1. Introduction
The following reference data is delivered in the reference database products for the
corresponding practices (such as RDUSRDB or RDDINRDB).
Library
File Description Object Text
Physical Dimension Table Library us_pcdim.l us_pcdim.l.t
Piping Job Specification Table Library us_pjstb.l us_pjstb.l.t
Short Material Description Library us_shbom.l -
Long Material Description Library us_lgbom.l -
Specialty Material Description Library us_spbom.l -
For the DIN RDB substitute din_ for us_ in the listed library file names.
The following reference data, which is not unique to any specific practice, is delivered in the
PD Shell product in the \win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib directory.
Library
File Description Object Text
Graphic Commodity Library pip_gcom.l pip_gcom.l.t
Piping Assembly Library assembly.l assembly.l.t
Label Description Library labels.l -
Standard Note Library std_note.l std_note.l.t
31
________________
1.5 Reference Data Setup

A project and all of its accompanying files must be defined with the Project Administrator
before you can use the Reference Data Manager. Refer to the Project Administrator
Reference Guide for information on
Loading PDS 3D products.
Editing the control script to identify the location of the project data.
Setting up a project and creating the associated database schemas.
Accessing the PDS 3D products remotely using NFS.
In addition to the information specified in the Project Administrator Reference Guide, you
should complete the following steps before using the Reference Data Manager.
Load the appropriate Reference Data product (such as RDUSRDB for U.S. Practice or
RDDINRDB for DIN Practice).
Edit the pds.cmd file to identify the text editor to be used when revising reference data
through the Reference Data Manager forms. You can specify any text editor that has
been loaded on the workstation. The default setting for Windows NT systems is
Notepad.
$ENV {PD_EDITOR} = <absolute path to preferred editor executable>;
Edit the pds.cmd file to define PD_COMMIT_INTERVAL to control the commit

interval for use in loading specification data into the Material Reference Database. This
has the same impact as adjusting the -c option in a risload command line. The default
commit value is 25. Increasing this variable may improve performance.
Identify the location of the Reference Data files as described in Reference Data
Location, page 47.
32
________________ PDS Environment
2. PDS Environment
The PDS 3D software supports a variety of applications. All the supported applications use a
common interface that is controlled by the PD Shell program. This ensures consistency
across applications and minimizes the amount of time required to learn the product.
The PDS 3D modules provide a simple user interface through extensive use of forms. The
modules also provide an on-line Help capability for easy access to information while working
in the product.
The PDS 3D software uses available nucleus tools such as MicroStation and FORMS. It
2. Environment
supports standard software such as NFS, NQS, and RIS required to set up data across a
network. This design facilitates the use of non-PDS tools such as relational databases and
third party software.
The PD_Shell Environment and all batch jobs in the PDS 3D products interface to
Intergraphs Network Licensing System.
33
________________
PD Shell
The PD Shell program provides access to the various functions that are associated with the
PDS 3D Modules. You can access the Plant Design System Environment form by
Double-clicking the PD_Shell icon on Windows NT workstations.
This executes a control script that defines all of the environment variables that are needed to
run the product, and it identifies the location of the product files. These files can be located
on the workstation or a server on the network. See pds.cmd in the Project Administrator
Reference Guide for more information on this file. The script also activates the Plant Design
System Environment form.
This form identifies the active project(s) and provides access to all the PDS functions.
Options
Schematics Environment Provides access to the PDS 2D modules that are used to
create and modify piping and instrumentation diagrams, process flow diagrams, and
instrumentation database records.
Equipment Modeling Provides access to the Equipment Modeling module, which

provides an interactive graphics environment that is used to create and revise equipment
model graphics and database information.
FrameWorks Environment Provides access to the FrameWorks module, which

provides an environment that is used to create and revise structural models, create and
revise structural drawings, and propagate structural models.
34
________________ PD Shell
Piping Designer Activates an interactive command environment that is used to

create piping and in-line instrumentation in the model; revise existing model graphics
and database information; and verify the integrity of the data in the model.
Electrical Raceway Environment Provides access to the Electrical Raceway

module, which provides an interactive environment that is used to create and revise
raceway models and access raceway utilities.
Piping Design Data Manager Provides access to a set of options that are used to
verify the integrity of the graphic and database information that is associated with a
model.
Piping Model Builder Enables you to create piping graphics from a nongraphics
2. Environment
environment. This module is used with PD_Design to create an accurate 3D model of
the piping network.
Pipe Support Designer Activates an interactive command environment that is used

to create pipe supports in the model, and revise existing pipe support model graphics
and database information.
Pipe Stress Analysis Activates a set of forms that are used to extract information
from piping models for input to third-party pipe stress analysis products.
Interference Manager Activates a set of forms that are used to check for
interferences among project models and to control approved interferences.
Isometric Drawing Manager Activates a set of forms that are used to extract
isometric drawings from piping models and to review or plot the created isometric
drawings.
Drawing Manager Activates a set of forms that are used to create and manipulate
drawings and drawing views; provide access to the interactive graphics environment for
drawings; and provide access to a plot manager and vector hiddenline manager.
DesignReview Integrator Activates a set of forms that are used to extract

information to form label files for use in DesignReview and to review data from a
DesignReview session.
Report Manager Activates a set of forms that are used to create and revise report
format files and report on information in a project including Material Take-Off reports.
Project Administrator Provides access to a set of forms that are used to create a
project, create and revise project files, define project seed data, and control the project.
Reference Data Manager Provides access to a set of forms that are used to control
the reference data for a project including Piping Job Specification data, Graphic
Commodity Data, Alphanumeric Commodity Data, Standard Note Library, Label
Description Library, and Piping Assembly Library.
35
________________
Other Fields
User ID Used for access control. This field also sets the Review User ID for use in
the Interference Manager module.
If access control has been defined, you must key in a valid user ID as defined by your
system manager to gain access to the projects. Refer to the Access Control Manger in
the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide, for more information on
using access control.
If access control has not been defined, no entry is required for this field.
Password Key in the password for the specified user ID.
Project List Field Displays the defined projects for the network and allows you to
select the active project. The system lists all the defined PDS projects (2D-only, 3D-
only, and 2D & 3D). An error is displayed if you select an option that is incompatible
with the active project. For example, if the active project is a 2D-only project, you
cannot access the the Interference Manager module.
If access control has been defined, only those projects for which you have some level of
access are displayed.
Message Area Displays prompts and messages that are associated with the active
process. Error messages are displayed in red.
36
________________ PD_Shell Form Conventions
PD_Shell Form Conventions

The following Conventions describe how to respond to the various buttons, lists, and prompts
that make up the environments. The display size of forms and dialog boxes in the non-
Microstation graphics environment are independent of the size of the workstations display
system. Most forms contain the same basic features: buttons, fields, text, and other gadgets.
In general, anything you find on a form is called a gadget.
Selecting Options
You move through the PD Shell forms by selecting function buttons or other gadgets from the
2. Environment
form. Select means to place the screen cursor (which appears as an arrow) on top of a screen
gadget and press <D>.
For most of the forms with scrolling lists, you can double-click on a row to select and accept
the data in that row. This performs the same action as selecting a row (which highlights) and
then selecting the Accept button.
You use the select action to select functions, access other forms, activate data fields, toggle
buttons, select from lists, scroll through data displayed on the screen, and so on.
The following summarizes other basic actions you use in the environments:
Enter When keying in any data in a key-in field, press the <ENTER> or <Tab> key
for the data to be entered into the system. You can also press <ENTER> or <Tab> to
move through a set of key-in fields.
Delete If you make a mistake while keying in text, press the <Delete> key to erase
character(s) to the left of the cursor.
Common Tools on the PD Shell Forms

There are many gadgets in the environments that are common to most or all of the forms. The
following describes these tools.
Standard Commands
The PD Shell forms have a set of standard buttons in the upper right corner of most of the
form windows. The available commands vary from form to form depending on the type of
operation.
The Help button activates on-line Help for the active form. Help remains active until you
delete the Help window.
37
________________
The Shell button exits the active form and returns control to the base manager that is
associated with the active form. For most forms this returns to the Plant Design System
Environment form.
The Top button exits the active form and returns control to the top form of the active branch.
The Cancel button cancels or exits from the active form. Control returns to the immediately
preceding form in the hierarchy.
The Accept button accepts a selection or operation. Depending on the active form or option,
the active form remains active so that you can repeat a similar operation or control returns to
the preceding form.
The Restart button clears any key-in fields on the form that have values you can modify.
Scrolling List
Some screen menus have a scrolling list of projects or applications. You need to scroll a list
only if more options are available than can be displayed in the window. To scroll a list, select
the arrow buttons on the side of the list. The list scrolls up or down depending on which
arrow you select.
The scrolling list has an arrow pointing up and an arrow pointing down. These
arrows scroll lists line by line. There is a button that slides between these two
arrows to indicate your position on the list. To page through the list, select the
space above or below the sliding button. The list pages up or down
accordingly.
You can also select the slider and, while pressing <D>, slide the button up or down the bar.
The items scroll through the window as you move the button. The size and position of the
button on the scroll bar is an indication of the number of lines and the relative position within
the list.
All commands that display a list of design areas or models order the list alphanumerically by
the design area number or model number in ascending order.
In some forms with scrolling lists, you can double-click on a row to select and accept the data
in that row. This performs the same action as selecting a row (which highlights) and then
selecting the Accept button.
38
________________ PD_Shell Form Conventions
Key-in Fields
Screens that accept keyboard input have key-in fields. These fields are box-
shaped and dark gray. You can select a key-in field and key in a new value. A
bar cursor appears in the active key-in field. Key in your input, and press
<Return>. To change a field, reselect the field and key in the new information.
Key-in fields have a maximum number of characters depending on the item that
is being defined.
If you select a key-in field for a code-listed attribute, the system activates a form that lists the
code list values for the selected field.
MicroStation requires lowercase characters for the file specification and path name of all
2. Environment
design files. Therefore, the system automatically converts any input for the file specification
and path name of a design file (such as a model or drawing) to lowercase before loading into
the Project Control Database.
Display-List Boxes
A display-list box is located at the end of some key-in fields. It lets you select
data from a list instead of keying in information. For example, there is a
display list associated with the Authorization key-in field shown. At the end of
the field, there is a small box with horizontal dashes. When you select this
display list box with the screen cursor, an associated list of valid input values
displays. Select an item from the list to enter its value into the field.
Shift Left and Shift Right buttons
At the bottom of some key-in and display fields, there are two buttons marked with
arrows. These buttons are called shift left and shift right buttons.
Often, you can key in more characters than a field display shows. Shift Left moves the text
display to the front of the field; Shift Right moves the text display to the end of the field.
Toggle
A toggle field on a screen menu enables you to select one of two possible choices, one of
which is always displayed. Place a data point on the toggle field to toggle between the two
choices.
Roll-Through List
A roll-through list shows one choice at a time of a list that can be several items long.
Place a data point on the roll-through list to scroll through the available options. The
option displayed is active.
39
________________
Standard Window Icons
When using this software in the CLIX environment, you can press <D> along the edge of a
form or any area not occupied by a button, key-in field, or other gadget, to display a box of
icons. You can manipulate form windows just like any other workstation window.
The following list defines the available window icons.
Collapse/Restore Pop-to-bottom Pop-to-top

Repaint Modify/Resize Restore Size
Batch Processes
When you install the PDS 3D applications, the system creates the necessary batch queues for
that application. Refer to Loading PDS Products in the Project Administrator Reference
Guide for a listing of the batch queues.
PDS 3D uses these batch queues to allow you to continue working in the environment while
the system processes a request. Many of the batch processes can be delayed for submission at
a specified time.
When you submit a batch process the system sends an electronic mail message to the mail
path of the default login reporting the jobs completion status. The mail message also includes
any error log information.
40
________________ Help
Help
On-line Help is a special feature of your application software. Help provides instant access to
information from the application reference documents, such as command descriptions and
explanations, prompt sequences, and much more.
There are several avenues you can take to find information about a command or subject. For
instance, Help provides
A table of contents that lists subjects by topic and subtopic (in a hierarchy).
An alphabetized index of every command or subject that has been documented for the
2. Environment
software.
A glossary to help you become familiar with product-specific terms.
The ability to move up, down, back, and forth through Help by using cross-references
and links to primary and secondary commands.
The ability to quickly search through Help for information on a specific subject or
command.
When you first select Help, the Help Table of Contents is displayed in a pop-up window.
Select a topic from this list or select a command from the menu to display an article in the
pop-up window.
Whenever possible, PDS Help is context sensitive. For example, if you select the help icon
for a given form, Help that is specific to that form is displayed.
The Help window has buttons that you can use to manipulate either Help or the window itself
as follows:
41
________________
Scroll Bar Moves up or down in an article that is displayed in the Help window.
Help Command Buttons Enable you to move around in the Help file.
Cancel or File > Exit exits Help and closes the Help window.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Help button from the command window or form.
If you select Help while using a command, help on the active command is displayed. If
no command is active, the table of contents is displayed.
2. Use the command buttons or scroll bar to move around in Help.
OR
Exit Help.
42
________________ Reference Data Manager
3. Reference Data Manager

The Reference Data Manager provides access to the various functions associated with the
PDS 3D Reference Database. Select the Reference Data Manager option from the PD Shell
form.
Data Manager
3. Reference
Select the option to be performed.
Spec Writer Used to create, modify, and delete information in the Material
Reference Database using a forms interface. See Spec Writer, page 103.
Piping Job Specification Manager Used to create, modify, and delete information
in the Material Reference Database using neutral files. See Piping Job Specification,
page 55 and Piping Job Specification Manager, page 145.
Piping Job Specification Tables Used to create, modify, and delete information in
the Piping Job Spec Table Library. See Piping Job Specification Tables, page 189 and
Piping Job Specification Tables Command, page 239.
Piping Job Spec Report Manager Used to define and generate reports of data in
the Material Reference Database. See Piping Job Spec Report Manager, page 154.
Graphic Commodity Library Manager Used to create, modify, and delete graphic
commodity library data (Eden modules). See Graphic Commodity Library, page 254
and Graphic Commodity Library Manager, page 275.
Physical Data Library Manager Used to create, modify, and delete physical data
(dimension tables) in object and text libraries. See Physical Data Tables, page 266 and
Physical Data Library Manager, page 287.
43
________________
Material Description Library Manager Used to create and modify alphanumeric

commodity data. See Material Description Data, page 361 and Material Description
Library Manager, page 376.
Support Tutorial Definition Manager Used to create, revise, and delete data in the
Tutorial Definition Library. See Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Manager, page 437.
Standard Note Library Manager Used to create, revise, and report the code lists
and standard notes associated with the PDS 3D modules. See Standard Note Library,
page 449 and Standard Note Library Manager, page 453.
Label Description Library Manager Used to define the graphic parameters for a
label (such as level, line weight, and color code) and to define the format of the label
(what information comprises the label). See Label Description Library, page 465 and
Label Description Library Manager, page 471.
Piping Assembly Library Manager Used to create, revise, and delete piping
assembly definitions in the Piping Assembly Library. The Piping Assembly Language
(PAL) enables you to define the parameters necessary to place a piping assembly (group
of components) automatically in the model. See Piping Assembly Library, page 505
and Piping Assembly Library Manager, page 525.
Table Checker Used to verify that all the commodity spec tables, entries, and Eden
modules for a piping materials class exist in the graphic data libraries for the project.
See Table Checker Form, page 389.
Reference Database Revision Manager Used to create a set of reports for

coordinating revisions in the Reference Database and the implied changes which are
required in the model. See Reference Database Revision Manager, page 537.
Reference Database Management Data Used to define the filenames for Reference
Database Files, graphic commodity data, dimension tables, and spec tables. You can
define both approved or unapproved RDB data for each item. See Reference Database
Management Data, page 48.
Default Project Control Data Used to define the default location for the source
files used to load the RDB files (such as neutral files, program files, and report files).
See Default Project Control Data, page 53.
44
________________ Data Security
3.1 Data Security

The Reference Data Manager provides data security features for the following reference data
libraries in the event of accidents such as, electrical power surges and network failures. These
features also protect the libraries in the event that a library is being shared by multiple
projects, and different users in different projects mistakenly attempt to revise one of the
libraries simultaneously.
Graphic Commodity Library

Physical Data Library
Piping Job Specification Table Library
Short Material Description Library
Long Material Description Library
Specialty Material Description Library
Standard Note Library
Label Description Library
Piping Assembly Library
When you enter the Reference Data Manager to create, revise, or delete data in any of the
these libraries, the system creates a temporary file for that library. This temporary file is
named <library_specification>.c and will be created in the same directory location as the
Data Manager
3. Reference
object libary. Once you successfully exit the applicable library manager, the system deletes
the temporary file. If a PDS user is unable to exit the Reference Data Manager for any
reason (such as a power failure), the system displays a dialog box when the next user enters
the Reference Data Manager to revise that library. You must decide which of the following
situations applies and respond accordingly.
If you are certain that the warning results from a previous unusual exit, make one of the
following decisions.
If a corrupted library (including the corresponding source library and revision

library) has been restored from a backup, select the accept option.
If you are concerned with the integrity of the library for any reason, select the exit
option. Then restore the library, the corresponding source library, and the
corresponding revision library to their previous state (before the last revisions).
If you are aware that a different user may be revising that library within a different
project, select the exit option.
This feature requires that PDS users have write access to the directory in which
the libraries reside. The Reference Data Manager will display an error
message, if the user does not have privileges for write access to the applicable
directory and the user will not be able to revise that library.
When a PDS user exits a data creation or revision session, the Reference Data Manager
verifies the integrity of the binary tree structure within the library. The system displays an
error if the Reference Data Manager determines that an error exists in the binary tree structure.
In this event, you should contact Intergraph immediately for assistance in repairing the library.
45
________________
3.2 Reference Data Archival

PDS includes a Project Archival Manager to provide archival and retrieval facilities for
projects, including reference data. For more information about the Project Archival
Manager, see Project Archival Manager in the Project Administrator Reference Guide. For
specific information about archiving reference data, see Reference Data in the Project
Administrator Reference Guide.
46
________________ Reference Data Location
4. Reference Data Location

This section describes the options used to define the location of the Reference Data files on
the network.
Reference Database Management Data Defines the location for Reference

Database Files, graphic commodity data, dimension tables, and spec tables. You can
define both approved or unapproved RDB data for each item. See page 48.
Default Project Control Data Defines the default location for the source files used
to load the RDB files (such as neutral files, language files, and report files). See page
53.
Data Location
4. Reference
47
________________
4.1 Reference Database Management

Data
This option activates the Reference Database Management Data form used to define the
filenames for Reference Database Files, graphic commodity data, dimension tables, and spec
tables. You can define both approved or unapproved RDB data for each item.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Reference Database Management Data from the Reference Data Manager
form.
2. Select RDB File Type
Select the RDB file from the list of files. You can use the scroll arrows to scroll
through the listed files.
The system identifies the file for the selected field in the fields at the bottom of the form.
There are no default settings for these files; you must define the applicable file
locations before you can continue.
Material/Specification Reference Database This field identifies the Material

Reference Database for the project. Refer to the Project Setup Manager in the
Project Administrator Reference Guide for more information on this database.
Piping Job Specification Table Library This field identifies the location of
the Piping Job Spec Table library.
48
________________ Reference Database Management Data

This field identifies the library which contains the short bill-of-material
description for all piping commodity items and the BOM description addenda for
taps.

This field identifies the library which contains the long BOM description for
all piping commodity items. The long BOM description is only used for
requisitions.
Specialty Material Description Library This field identifies the library

which contains the BOM description for engineered items, in-line instruments,
and pipe supports. This library tends to be customer-specific.
Standard Note Library This field identifies the location of the standard
note library.
Label Description Library This field identifies the location for the label
description library.
Piping Assembly Library This field identifies the location for the Piping
Assembly library. This library contains the symbol definitions for assemblies.
Graphic Commodity Library This field identifies the library which

contains the Eden modules used to place components in the model.
Physical Data Library These fields identify the library files which contain
the physical data tables for a range of geometric industry standards.
Commodity Synonym Library This field identifies the user-defined library

which contains the map for translating the default piping commodity names used
in the P&ID Task to names specified by the user in the Piping Job Specification.
Data Location
4. Reference
Orthographic Drawing Borders This field identifies the drawing border files
to be used when creating drawings. A set of border files are delivered to the
directory win32app\ingr\pddraw\border. You must specify which style of
borders is to be used.
3. Key in any changes to the selected RDB files. Refer to Delivered Reference Data, page
31, for a listing of the delivered reference data files.
If you specify an unapproved file, the system will use the unapproved file for all
Reference Data Manager operations (such as revising entries in a library.)
Refer to the Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for
information on setting the choice of data for a model file or drawing.
4. You can select Approved > Not Approved to copy the approved definition of the
selected RDB file to the Not Approved fields. Select confirm to update the information.
49
________________
Refer to the individual managers for information on posting the unapproved

information to the approved files.
5. You can select Default All Library Locations to define a default location for all
approved and all unapproved library files.
6. You can select Copy All Standard Libraries to copy the delivered library files to a
specified location.
7. Select Accept following each change to the reference data to accept the specified file
location.
THEN
Select Cancel to exit the form.
Options
Default All Library Locations

This option assigns a default network address, pathname, and file specification to the various
Reference Database libraries for both the approved and unapproved libraries. You can
override any of these default specifications by selecting the appropriate library and keying in
the file information.
Specify Default Nodename
Key in a default network address and pathname to be used for all approved Reference
Database libraries and a network address and pathname to be used for all unapproved
libraries.
The file specifications for all libraries are determined automatically on the basis of the
industry practice and the following naming convention.
When copying the Not Approved library to the Approved library, the copy will not
occur if the approved library is the most recent or has the same date as the
unapproved library.
50
________________ Reference Database Management Data
Library Filename
Graphic Commodity Library pipe_gcom.l

Label Description Library labels.l
Standard Note Library std_note.l
Piping Assembly Library assembly.l
Piping Spec Table Library pjs_tbl.l
Short Material Description Library short_bom.l
Long Material Description Library long_bom.l
Specialty Description Library spclty_bom.l
Physical Data Library <standard>_pcdim.l
The text to be used for the <standard> is determined in the following manner.
Practice Prefix
U.S. Practice us
European - DIN din
European - British Standard bs
European - Practice A eua
European - Practice B eub
International - JIS jis
International - Australian aus
International - Practice A ina
International - Practice B inb
Company Practice cmp
Copy All Standard Libraries

This option copies the delivered Reference Database libraries from the applicable product
directories to the disk locations specified in the Reference Database Management data of the
Data Location
4. Reference
Project Control database.
This option provides a new user with a simple method to create a Reference Database using
RDB products delivered by Intergraph. This is not intended for use in a production
environment.
The following Reference Database libraries are copied from the PD Shell product.
Graphic Commodity Library Standard Note Library

Label Description Library Piping Assembly Library
The following Reference Database libraries are copied from the applicable Reference
Database product (such as, rdusrdb or rddinrdb).
Physical Data Library Long Material Description Library

Piping Spec Table Library Specialty Description Library
51
________________
The system also copies the applicable Table Revision Management Libraries for the Piping
Spec Table Library and Physical Data Libraries.
The text to be used for the standard is determined in the following manner.
Practice Prefix
U.S. Practice us
European - DIN din
European - British Standard bs
International - JIS jis
International - Australian aus
The list of available products is determined from the list of exported variables as specified in
the pds.cmd shell script. Therefore, this command presently searches for the following
exported variables:
Product Practice
RD_USRDB U.S. Practice

RD_DINRDB DIN
RD_BSRDB British Standards
RD_JISRDB JIS
RD_AUSRDB Australian
The file specification recorded in the Project Control Database, and not that of the library in
the delivered product, will be used for the destination library.
If the RDB product resides on a remote server (or workstation), you must
manually mount the directory that includes the RDB product and change the
exported variable in the pds.cmd shell script accordingly.
The system will display an error message for any of the following conditions.
Any of the active Reference Database libraries for the project are in use (locked). None
of the libraries are copied.
The network address for any of the active Reference Database libraries for the project
are undefined. None of the libraries are copied.
The network address and path name for any of the active Reference Database libraries
for the project cannot be mounted. None of the subsequent libraries are copied.
52
________________ Default Project Control Data
4.2 Default Project Control Data

This option defines the default location for common reference files used by the project (such
as neutral files, report files, and library files). You can also change these file locations during
the operation of the applicable managers.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Default Project Control Data from the Reference Data Manager form to
define the default location for the RDB source files.
Data Location
4. Reference
2. Select the field to be defined and key in the location of the source files and the
associated node name.
Piping Eden Path / Node The default location for the Eden source files.
Dimension/Spec Table Path / Node The default location of the Dimension

Table and Spec Table source files.
Piping Spec Path / Node The default location for the neutral files to be used
to load the Specification/Material Reference Database and Material Description
Libraries.
Assembly Path / Node The default location for the Piping Assembly
Language source files.
Standard Note Library Path / Node The default location for the Standard
Note (code list) source files.
53
________________
Equipment Eden Path / Node The default location for the Equipment Eden
source files.
TDF Table Path / Node The default location for the Equipment table
definition files.
Model Builder Path / Node The default location for the model builder
language source files.
3. Accept any changes to the Project Control Data.
54
________________ Piping Job Specification
5. Piping Job Specification

The Piping Job Specification (PJS) defines the characteristics, properties, design standards,
and company practices associated with piping commodity items, piping engineered items, and
instruments. When you select an item for placement in the model, the system uses the active
parameters (such as piping materials class and nominal diameter) to search the Piping Job
Specification for the selected item. Then the system reads the PJS for the parameters required
to define the item.
Specification
5. Piping Job
55
________________
5.1 Material Reference Database

Structure
The Material Reference Database contains a set of tables which define the Piping Job
Specification data. The numbers in parentheses indicate the database table number.
Piping Materials Class Data (201) - see page 62.
Piping Commodity Specification Data (202) - see page 67.
Piping Specialty Specification Data (203) - see page 77.
Instrument Component Specification Data (204) - see page 81.
Tap Properties Data (205) - see page 85.
Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211) - see page 88.
Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212) - see page 91.
Reference Database Revision Management Data (213)
Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231) - see page 95.
Flange Insulation Exclusion Data (232) - see page 98.
Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data (233) - see page 101.
The Piping Commodity Specification Data is linked to the Piping Materials Class Data.
The Reference Database Revision Management Data table is totally system-

defined. It stores the revision dates for the other database tables in the
Material Reference Database. The revision dates are updated automatically
when you use the Piping Job Spec Manager to load, revise, or delete data in
these database tables.
Attribute Types
The following conventions are used to designate the field type for database attributes.
character(n) alphanumeric field n characters in length
integer long (double word) integer
short short integer
56
________________ Material Reference Database Structure
double real (floating point) value
standard note nnnn Standard Note Type for code-listed attribute
Code-Listed Attributes
A code-listed attribute is an attribute whose value must be defined using one of the selections
from a particular code list in the Standard Note Library. In the following database
descriptions attributes which are code-listed are identified by a standard note number at the
end of the line following the field type description. For example, the line
6. fluid_code , character(6) , SN 125
indicates that fluid_code is defined in terms of code list numbers belonging to Standard
Note 125, Fluid Code/Connector Type. A possible entry for this attribute would be 197 for
chlorine gas (GCL). Refer to Appendix B for a listing of the code list sets associated with
PDS 3D.
Connect Point Data

The Piping Commodity, Piping Specialty, and Instrument database tables classify connect
point dependent data about a component in terms of green and red connect points. The
following conventions are used to coordinate the two sets of data:
If data is only shown under the green connect point, it applies to all ends of the
component.
If a component has ends with different nominal diameters (regardless of other end
properties) the larger nominal diameter is designated as the green connect point.
If a component has ends with the same nominal diameter but other end properties which
differ, the following rules apply:
If the ends have different termination types (regardless of the values for
schedule/thickness) the end(s) whose end preparations have the lowest codelist
number are designated as the green connect point.
If the termination types are the same but the values for rating, schedule, or thickness
differ, the "stronger" ends(s) are designated as the green connect point.
Specification
5. Piping Job
57
________________
NPD Units
Nominal piping diameter is defined as a special coded number (NPD units) with the following
formula.
For metric units, the coded number equals the size (in millimeters)
For English units, the coded number equals the size (in inches) times 32 plus 5000.
This allows nominal piping diameter to range from 1 mm to 5000 mm in 1 mm increments for
metric units, and to range from 1/32" to at least 200" in 1/32" increments for English units.
58
________________ Neutral File Input
5.2 Neutral File Input

A neutral file is an ASCII text file used to load information into the the Material Reference
Database. The neutral file must conform to the following rules:
There must be an entry for each user-defined parameter in the Material Reference
Database. For certain attributes you can use a dash (-) to indicate that a default value be
used.
The SEQUENCE statement can be used to define the order of entries in the neutral file.
The system_unique_no attribute is never user-defined. Therefore, it

should not be included in the neutral file data or in the list of attributes
defined by the SEQUENCE statement.
Each entry (attribute) can begin at any point along the input. You can set the spacing
between each entry by specifying SINGLE_SPACING or DOUBLE_SPACING as the
first item in the file. If you do not define the spacing, double spacing is used.
For single line comments, place an exclamation point (!) at the beginning of the line.
All comments are disregarded by the system.
You can place blank lines anywhere in the file for readability. These lines do not effect
the information being copied.
You can use any of the three PDS conventions to enter fractional Nominal Piping
Diameters. The entries
2-1/2 2.5 2 1/2
are all equivalent ways of entering the same figure.
If you use the SINGLE_SPACING option 2 1/2 can be used only if

enclosed by single quotes (2 1/2)
You can use both metric and English units. The default system of units must be
declared once in the beginning and each time the default system is changed. Entries are
automatically interpreted as English. To declare the system of units add the appropriate
units marker to the entry:
Specification
5. Piping Job
mm for metric
" for English
The Tap Properties Table must include the Table Name along with other data by using
the TABLE statement.
59
________________
SEQUENCE Statement
The SEQUENCE statement is an optional statement which can be used to define the order of
the parameters in the neutral file. If the SEQUENCE statement is used it must be placed
before any entries. The SEQUENCE statement can only be used once per file.
If the SEQUENCE statement is omitted, it is assumed that the parameters

appear in the order defined by PDS.
Format
SEQUENCE= P1 P2 P3 P4 ... Pn
where:
SEQUENCE= keyword which can be entered in either upper or lower case letters.
P1,P2,...Pn parameters 1 through n. The values of P1...Pn are the parameter numbers
assigned by PDS, and their position tells the system the order in which to
enter them.
At least two spaces must separate the keyword and each parameter.
Examples
SEQUENCE= 5 3 4 1 2
The first parameter read corresponds to PDS parameter #5, the second to PDS parameter #3,
the third to PDS parameter #4, the fourth to PDS parameter #1, and the fifth to PDS parameter
#2.
You can use the convention *Pn to indicate an attribute that is not defined in the neutral file.
All of the *Pn attributes should be placed at the end of the SEQUENCE statement following
the list of included attributes. For example,
SEQUENCE= 2 3 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 *4 *5
*21 *22
ORDER Statement
Neutral files translated from VAX PDS data may contain an ORDER statement rather than a
SEQUENCE statement. This statement performs the same function as the SEQUENCE
statement except that it lists the order of the attributes as they were defined in the VAX Piping
Job Specification Database.
60
________________ Neutral File Input
TABLE Statement
The TABLE statement defines a table name to be associated with a particular set of data. The
active table name remains unchanged until another TABLE statement is encountered. The
TABLE statement can be used more than once in a neutral file.
Format
TABLE= table_name
where
TABLE= keyword which can be entered in upper or lower case letters.

table_name the name of the table associated with the following data.
There must be at least one/two spaces (depending on the default spacing selected) between the
keyword and the table_name.
For example, the Tap Properties Table below defines two tables (C001, and C002) by using
the Table keyword to segregate the data for each table being defined.
Double_Spacing
Order= 2 3 5 4 6 7
! By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=2 Date=12-May-1995
Table= C001
! Description= SWE CL3000 default taps
! Diam Opt Rating Prp Sc/Th Tap Code
0.375 691 - 591 NREQD E$37591XXX
> 0.5 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E$50421064
0.5 691 - 591 NREQD E$50591XXX
:
:
30 691 - 591 NREQD E030591XXX
32 691 - 591 NREQD E032591XXX
34 691 - 591 NREQD E034591XXX
36 691 - 591 NREQD E036591XXX
42 691 - 591 NREQD E042591XXX
48 691 - 591 NREQD E048591XXX
Table= C002
0.375 691 - 591 NREQD E$37591XXX
> 0.5 1 CL6000 421 NREQD E$50421072
Specification
5. Piping Job
0.5 691 - 591 NREQD E$50591XXX
:
:
34 691 - 591 NREQD E034591XXX
36 691 - 591 NREQD E036591XXX
42 691 - 591 NREQD E042591XXX
48 691 - 591 NREQD E048591XXX
61
________________
5.2.1 Piping Materials Class Data (201)

The piping materials class data is independent of nominal piping diameter and commodity
item. A piping materials class defines a classification of components based on design data
and service limits. Much of the design data is stored in tables so that common information
can be accessed by more than one piping materials class.
The Piping Materials Class Data table contains 23 attributes.
1. system_unique_no , integer
2. piping_mater_class , character(16)
This attribute identifies the service number, spec class, spec name, or spec number.
3. revision_no , character(2)
This attribute identifies the revision number for the data in the piping materials class. It
is user-defined and is not updated automatically when the piping commodity data for
that piping materials class is revised.
The revision number of the unapproved Material Reference Database is

incremented only, when you specify a new revision number in the neutral file.
The revision number of the approved Material Reference Database is updated to

that of the unapproved Material Reference Database, when the unapproved data is
posted to the approved Material Reference Database.
4. version_no , character(2)
This attribute represents the version number, as determined by the system, for the data
in this piping materials class (including the Commodity Item data). The version
number starts with A and is incremented (B,C,D,...) when you revise the piping
materials class. This attribute is under the complete control of the system.
The Piping Job Spec Manager increments this attribute when the piping commodity
data for that piping materials class is revised or reloaded. When that piping materials
class is posted from the unapproved to the approved Material Reference Database, the
version number for that piping materials class is reset to A in the unapproved Material
Reference Database.
5. revision_date , character(10)
This user-defined attribute can be used to define a date for the latest revision to the data
in a piping materials class.
6. fluid_code , character(6) , SN 125
This attribute can be used to define the type of fluid for which the piping materials class
is intended.
62
________________ Piping Materials Class Data (201)
You can specify
a single fluid code value (such as 521 for process) from code list set 125.
the name of a fluid code table to define a set of fluid code values. Refer to Fluid
Code Table, page 214, for more information.
To use the specified fluid code(s), you must also set the Fluid Code Control toggle to
Yes on the Piping Data Control form of the Project Data Manager. Refer to the
Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide for more information on this
form.
7. mater_of_construct , character(6)
This attribute defines the materials of construction class for the piping materials class.
This code has a detailed definition outside the scope of PDS that represents the decision
of the Project Metallurgist regarding the piping system. It is required for reporting and
making matches and comparisons with values for this parameter from the Piping Design
Database. This parameter includes the material code.
8. corrosion_allow , double
This attribute defines the corrosion/erosion allowance that applies to the piping
materials class. It is required for reporting and to calculate the wall thickness of piping
components whose thickness is not specifically included in the piping materials class.
9. mat_description , short , SN 148
This code-listed attribute is a generic description of the materials used for this piping
materials class (such as carbon steel). This attribute is only used for reporting.
10. service_lim_table , character(6)
This attribute identifies the table used to determine maximum pressure as a function of
temperature. This table includes the pressure and temperature sets that form the
boundary for which the commodity items, engineered items, and instruments included
in this piping materials class are suitable (unless you define a lower maximum
temperature limit for a specific commodity item). You must insure that all commodity
items within the piping materials class are acceptable within the boundary of this table.
Refer to Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table, page 191, for more
information on this table.
Specification
5. Piping Job
11. diameter_table , character(6)
This attribute identifies the nominal piping diameter table used to verify valid nominal
piping diameters in this piping materials class. Refer to Nominal Piping Diameters
Table, page 194, for more inforamtion.
63
________________
12. thickness_table , character(6)
This attribute identifies the thickness data table used in piping wall thickness
calculations for this piping materials class. Refer to Thickness Data Tables, page 197,
for more information.
13. materials_table , character(6)
This parameter defines the materials data table used to determine the material properties
required for piping wall thickness calculations in the piping materials class. Refer to
Materials Data Table, page 200, for more information.
14. thickness_equation , character(6)
This attribute identifies the default piping wall thickness equation to be used for this
piping materials class. If a schedule/thickness parameter for an item specifies the
default calculation, then this equation is used to perform the piping wall thickness
calculation. Refer to Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations, page 203,
15. branch_table , character(6)
This attribute identifies the branch insertion table used to determine the name of the
branch commodity item to be used for tee and lateral branches. The item name is
determined as a function of branch geometry, run size, and branch size. The output of
the branch table is the item name of a commodity item (AABBCC code).
Refer to Branch Insertion Tables, page 208, for more information.
16. tap_data_table , character(6)
This attribute defines the name of the tap properties table which includes those
parameters required to define a tap on a specific commodity item. Refer to Tap
Properties Data (205), page 85, for more information.
17. vent_drain_macro , character(6)
This attribute is not currently used by the PDS software. Several vent and drain
definitions are contained in the delivered Piping Assembly Library.
18. gasket_separation , character(8)
This attribute is used to determine the actual gap that is assumed between seating
surfaces of two mating bolted ends. It can coincide with, but is not necessarily the
compressed gasket thickness. You can override this value during a design session by
changing the type of gasket that applies to the joint. (You cannot override this value by
defining a specific gasket gap override value.)
This attribute exists as alphanumeric data.
64
________________ Piping Materials Class Data (201)
A value with all numeric characters is interpreted as a gasket separation value in

the physical subunits specified for the model.
All other values are assumed to identify a table name for gasket separation data as
a function of nominal piping diameter in the Piping Graphic Commodity Library.
Refer to Gasket Separation Table, page 212, for more information.
Refer to the description of gaskets in the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide
for more details.
19. standard_note_no_a , short , SN 499
20. standard_note_no_b , short , SN 499
These code-listed attributes provide the index numbers to CL499 for notes that apply to
this piping materials class. The input to the Standard Note Library is the note number.
The output is the free- format text which forms the standard note.
In the delivered data, note numbers 1 through 199 are allocated for defining the PJS.
21. revision_mngt_date , integer
This system-defined attribute identifies the date of the latest revision for the data in this
piping materials class.
22. bend_deflect_table , character(6)
This attribute identifies the Bend Deflection Table to be used for this piping materials
class. This attribute is useful for defining specs for underground piping.
If this column is undefined (blank), the system will use the default Bend Deflection
Table specified in the Type 63 data through the Project Data Manager. Therefore,
you need not define a Bend Deflection Table for each piping materials class in the
Material Reference Database. Likewise, you need not revise any existing neutral files
to include this column.
Note that the Bend Deflection Table name in the Piping Materials Class data is limited
to 6 characters to be consistent with the other tables referenced in this data. The
maximum length of the default Bend Deflection Table name, as specified with the
Project Data Manager can be as many as 20 characters.
Refer to Bend Deflection Table (G04), page 219, for more information.
Specification
5. Piping Job
23. pipe_length_table , character(6)
This attribute identifies the Pipe Length Threshold Table to be used for this piping
materials class. This attribute is useful in defining specs for underground piping.
If this column is undefined (blank), the system will use the default Pipe Length
Threshold Table specified in the Type 63 data through the Project Data Manager.
Therefore, you need not define a Pipe Length Threshold Table for each piping materials
class in the Material Reference Database.
65
________________
Note that the Pipe Length Threshold Table name in the piping materials class data is
limited to 6 characters to be consistent with the other tables referenced in this data. The
maximum length of the default Pipe Length Threshold Table name, as specified with
the Project Data Manager can be as many as 13 characters.
Refer to Pipe Length Threshold Table (G07), page 222, for more information.
Neutral File Format

The following is a sample neutral file for the Piping Material Class database table. Entries in
this table should be sorted alphanumerically by Piping Materials Class.
The Sequence= keyword in a piping materials class data neutral file does not require *21 for
the revision management date. Any previously created piping materials class data neutral
files will not require any revision as a result of this change.
Sample Files
A sample neutral file for US practice is delivered in the file
\win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data\classes.pmc. A set of sample files depicting various
options are delivered in the \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data directory.
bend_tbl.pmc gasket.pmc pharm.pmc

equiv_npd.pmc gskt_tbl.pmc piplen_tbl.pmc
fluid_code.pmc metric_npd.pmc thickness.pmc
fpipe.pmc
66
________________ Piping Commodity Specification Data (202)
5.2.2 Piping Commodity Specification Data (202)

The Piping Commodity Specification Data defines all the components, pipes, bolts, and
gaskets associated with a particular Piping Materials Class. It defines the standard
components found in a manufacturers catalog (commonly referred to as off-the-shelf
components). Because the Piping Commodity Specification Data is linked to the Piping
Materials Class, a separate set of commodity items must be defined for each Piping Materials
Class.
Information for connect point data is defined in terms of two types of connect points known as
green and red connect points. Refer to Connect Point Data, page 270, for more information
on green and red connect points.
The Piping Commodity Specification Data table contains 28 attributes:
2. piping_mater_class , character(16) , index 1
This attribute identifies the Piping Materials Class for the piping commodity.
3. commodity_name , character(6)
This attribute identifies the commodity item name. This can be
a PDS commodity item name. Refer to the PDS Piping Component Data
Reference Guide for more information on item names.
a Piping Job Specification access name. If you do not use the AABBCC code,
you must define a Commodity Synonym Library for proper communication with
the P&ID Task. The PDS commodity item names are also used with the
delivered Place Component forms. If you use a different code, you should create
a forms customization file as defined in the Piping Designer.
4. option_code , short , SN 400
This code-listed attribute identifies the option code which determines the search criteria.
This parameter enables you to request that the system retrieve the primary commodity
item, a secondary commodity item, or another special option from the Piping Job
Specification.
Specification
5. Piping Job
This parameter is used as a commodity override in Piping Design. You can select the
unique options (as defined in CL400) from a form. If no option is specified at
placement, this attribute defaults to option 1 (primary commodity item). Option 2 is
reserved as the secondary commodity item.
Option codes 4001 to 4010 are used to specify manual input of bend data for pipe
bends.
67
________________
Option codes 4500 to 4999 are reserved for company practice (user-defined).
Option codes 5000 to 5999 are used to refer to implied components.
5. maximum_temp , double
This attribute is used if the commodity item is temperature dependent. It represents the
maximum temperature for which this commodity item is acceptable. When a
commodity item is retrieved from the Piping Job Specification, the system verifies that
the normal operating temperature, the alternate operating temperature, the normal
design temperature, and the alternate design temperature are less than this maximum
allowable temperature. If this maximum is exceeded by any of these temperatures, the
system automatically searches for another occurrence of the same commodity item.
For gaskets, to help determine the gap thickness at bolted joints, the maximum
temperature value is used as an input to the Gasket Gap Table. Proper entry of
temperature values in the PJS assists the definition of gap thicknesses when
gaskets with different gap thicknesses are used in the same piping materials class.
If you specify the default value (-9999), no test is performed. Any reports created
from the Piping Job Specification depict this default value as alphanumeric
blanks.
The order in which entries of the same piping commodities with different maximum
temperature values are made in the PJS (PDtable_202) is not considered by the system;
however, these entries must have the same option code in order to be considered by the
commodity selection in the Place Component command. When you do define the piping
commodity, a maximum temperature value must be defined for each entry or an error
message is displayed. To define the highest maximum temperature for the same piping
commodity, set the maximum temperature equal to or greater than the maximum
temperature of the spec limits table for the applicable piping materials class instead of
using an undefined value (-).
6. gcp_from_nom_diam , short (NPD Units)
7. gcp_to_nom_diam , short (NPD Units)
These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to
higher bound) for the green connect point (first size) in NPD units. The to value must
equal or exceed the from value. These values are not necessarily the same as the range
in Tables 211 and 212. The applicable NPD value specified at placement is used to
search for the suitable component in the Piping Job Specification.
The default system of units (" for inches, or mm for millimeters) must be declared once
in the beginning and each time the default system is changed. If no units are given, the
value is automatically interpreted as inches.
8. gcp_end_prep , short , SN 330
68
This code-listed attribute identifies the end preparation for the green connect point. The
system determines the termination type based on the range of values
2 - 199 bolted terminations

300 - 399 male terminations
400 - 599 female terminations
You can define end compatibilities by using the End Preparation Compatibility Table.
(Refer to the Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator Reference Guide.)
9. gcp_rating , character(8)
This attribute identifies the pressure rating for the green connect point. This parameter
exists as alphanumeric data. The system interprets the first set of sequential numeric
characters as being the pressure rating value.
Ratings can be expressed in any of the following formats: CLxxxx, xxxx#, or OTxxxx.
However, table entries and file names representing the rating exclude the CL, #, or OT
characters. This enables the same table to be used regardless of how the rating is
defined. In the delivered PJS, these rating formats are used in accordance with the
following criteria:
CLxxxx refers to an ANSI or API pressure rating
xxxx# refers to a pressure rating defined by an organization other than ANSI or

API.
OTxxxx refers to the rating of a connect point that meets the applicable ANSI or
API rating geometrically but not from a pressure carrying standpoint. An
example is a valve supplied with flanged ends that meets the bolting pattern of
ANSI CL150 pressure rating but has pressure carrying characteristics different
from those of that ANSI rating.
For bolts and gaskets, you must use a numeric pressure rating (do not
use the characters CL, #, or OT). If any character entries are
encountered, the system will be unable to locate the proper information.
Female ends for plastic pipe are usually defined in terms of schedule/thickness and not
in terms of rating. To make female ends for plastic pipe follow the rules for other
female ends, the applicable schedule/thickness is used as the value for rating. If such
rating values consist of alphanumeric characters, the system strips all alpha characters
Specification
5. Piping Job
from the rating value and uses only the numeric values in accessing the applicable
tables.
If the rating in the PJS is expressed in terms of alphabetic characters only, the system
uses the characters in accessing the data tables. The names of the data tables include all
the alphabetic characters included in the PJS.
GRAVHD can be used to identify the rating for components rated to sustain a
nominal fluid head. This value can be used in the PJS and in the data tables.
69
________________
OTHER can be used to identify a non standard rating value.
NONE can be used to identify the rating for components whose ends would
normally require the attribute rating as part of the table name, but for which a
rating does not apply. This value can be used in the PJS and in the data tables.
10. gcp_sch_thk , character(8)
This attribute identifies the schedule thickness value for the green connect point. This
parameter exist as alphanumeric data. (Refer to Wall Thickness and Branch
Reinforcement Equations, page 203, for more information on this attribute.) In order of
preference, schedule and thickness are expressed in terms of:
A generic schedule such as S-STD, S-XS and S-XXS. If a schedule name

exceeds the provided field length (for example S-SDR13.5) it is defined in terms
of its wall thickness.
A specific schedule such as S-40, S-40S and S-80.
NREQD is used in cases where all of the following conditions apply:
The thickness value is not required in purchasing the component.
Empty weights are not significantly affected by actual thickness values.
Either stress analysis is not applicable or, if applicable, the component is to be

considered infinitely rigid in stress analysis calculations.
A value with all numeric characters is interpreted as a wall thickness value in the
same physical units as nominal piping diameter. To insure compatibility between
the PJS, data tables, and wall thickness calculations, thickness is expressed in the
form:
.xxxx if the thickness is less than 1 inch

x if the thickness is an even inch
x.xxx if the thickness is 1 inch or larger
Trailing zeroes are not included. Decimal points are not included for numbers
without decimals.
An asterisk (*) followed by a name (of the form Cyyy) defines the specific
calculation or table lookup to be used for wall thickness. Refer to Wall Thickness
and Branch Reinforcement Equations, page 203 for a more detailed description of
the naming conventions for these calculations.
MATCH indicates the need to match the thickness of a component to that of the
pipe of the same diameter and of option 1.
11. gcp_table_suffix , short , SN 576
70
This code-listed attribute is used to further reference the source of the generic
dimensional data, such as flange data or piping outside diameter data. This attribute is
also referred to as the table suffix.
For AMS standards, it represents the table suffix for the green connect point.
For DIN standards, it represents the piping outside diameter selection flag (reihe
number) for pipes and fittings.
12. rcp_from_nom_diam , short
13. rcp_to_nom_diam , short
higher bound) for the red connect point (second size). The to value must equal or
exceed the from value. These values are not necessarily the same as the range in Tables
211 and 212.
For a full size component, you should set these parameters to - (hyphen). In cases such
as a concentric reducer or weldolet, this value must be less than the corresponding green
value.
14. rcp_end_prep , short , SN 330
See gcp_end_prep.
15. rcp_rating , character(8)
See gcp_rating.
16. rcp_sch_thk , character(8)
See gcp_sch_thk.
17. rcp_table_suffix , short , SN 577
This attribute is used to further reference the dimensional data for a specific component.
For AMS standards, it represents the table suffix for the red connect point.
For DIN standards, it represents the built-in length selection flag (or reihe
number) for valves and wall thickness selection flag for pipes and fittings.
Specification
5. Piping Job
A parametric definition is used when connection graphics are required in the model and
orthographic drawings.
18. commodity_code , character(16)
The commodity code is a user-assigned code that together with the NPD and
schedule/thickness uniquely defines the component. It defines the customers
commodity code (or part number). This attribute is the index into the Material Data
Tables and the Material Description Library. The commodity code can be defined in
one of three ways:
71
________________
Commodity codes with neither an * or a + prefix, indicate a commodity item that

has no associated implied components.
Commodity codes prefixed by an *, indicate a commodity item (primary

component) which has one associated implied component (such as a lap joint
flange and stub end). For more information on defining * implied items, refer to
the PD_Report Users Guide.
It is not recommended that specification implied (*) items be generated

by size change components (i.e. reducers, reducing flanges, etc.) as the
NPD assigned by the system for the implied component can be either
the larger or smaller (green or red) NPD of the implying item based on
how the system traces the line.
Commodity codes prefixed by a +, indicate a commodity item (primary

component) which has one or more associated implied components as defined in
Table 212.
The default length for a commodity code is 16 characters, but you can modify this
length if needed. This value is specified in two files: design.ddl and reference.ddl. To
customize the character length, modify the design.ddl file as follows:
In table 34 (Piping Component Data), modify the value in column 8.
In table 50 (Piping/Tubing Data), modify the value in column 12.
Modify the reference.ddl file as follows:
In table 202 (Piping Commodity Specification Data), modify the value in column
18.
In table 211 (Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data), modify the

values in column 2 and column 7.
In table 212 (Piping Commodity Implies Material Data), modify the values in
column 2 and column 7.
When you modify these values, set the character limit to be one more
than the number of characters you actually want in the commodity code.
This is necessary for you to add a * or + prefix if needed. For example,
to create a 20-character commodity code, set the specified values to 21.
You must make these modifications before the project is created.
For valves, the commodity code also defines the name of the dry weight table (required
for stress analysis). For large diameter valves (25"+) it is used to build the name of the
operator dimension table.
72
19. model_code , character(6)
This attribute identifies the specific item name for generic bends, spec flanges, or spec
valves. Each model code is classified by
- Item name
- option
- size ranges
- end preparations
- ratings
The model code includes the definition of the graphic representation of the component
in the piping model. Depending upon the circumstances:
One or more model codes can be assigned to to a single Item Name (for example,
GAT, GATR, and GATF are all used for 6Q1C01).
The same model code can be assigned to different Item Names.
For gaskets, this attribute can be used to prioritize gasket entries in the Piping Materials
Class. The priority is set with a numeric value (integer or decimal) greater than zero.
Non-numeric values are ignored by MTO and not considered to be a priority selection.
The smaller the value the higher the priority. A value of 999999 is interpreted as an
undefined priority.
20. PDS_sort_code , character(6)
This field can be used to specify the length (in subunits) for Purchased length pipe, or
to specify the gasket diameter for gaskets. The gasket diameter table is used if the
pds_sort_code for the gasket spec entry is set to _GKT. The system uses the NPD to
determine the gasket inside and outside diameters.
If the pds_sort_code for the gasket spec entry is set to "_GKT", the gasket outside
and inside diameters are generated using the table
gasket_commodity_code_GKT.TBL.
If the pds_sort_code for the gasket spec entry is not "_GKT", the gasket outside
diameter is equivalent to the NPD of the rated component and the gasket inside
diameter is undefined.
21. modifier , double

Specification
5. Piping Job
This attribute is used for pipe bends, elbows, miters, and valves. It has various uses
depending on the type of commodity item as defined below.
For pipe bends, it defines the bend radius of the pipe in terms of the numeric
factor by which the nominal diameter of the pipe is to be multiplied to obtain the
bend radius.
For pipe, it defines the joint quality factor (E) times 100 to be used during branch
reinforcement calculations in those cases where the wall thickness is not
calculated.
73
________________
For orifice flanges and drip ring tees, it defines the number of taps to be provided.
A value of 1 defines a single tap. A value of 2 defines 2 taps, 180 degrees apart.
A value of negative 2 (-2) defines 2 taps, 90 degrees apart.
For nippolets and nipples, it defines the length of the component.
For reinforcing pads and welds, it defines whether data about the component is to
be derived from tables in the system (0) or from the user by prompting (1).
For gaskets, it defines the gasket thickness to be used in procuring the gasket.
This is the actual gasket thickness for MTO reports - not the compressed gasket
thickness (gasket separation), which is derived from the Piping Materials Class
data.
For bolts, it defines whether the bolt is a stud bolt (0 or positive), or machine bolt
(negative). The absolute value of this modifier, which ranges from 0 to 5,
determines the applicable bolt extension.
For valves, it represents the code list number from CL550 (operator/actuator
type) which defines the symbol description and the source of the physical data for
the valve operator. If this value is a negative number (such as -3) the operator is
not displayed when placing the component.
22. geometric_standard , short , SN 575
This code-listed attribute identifies the source of the data (which is usually an industry
standard, such as ANSI, ISO, or DIN, or a company standard) from which the specific
geometry of the commodity item can be deduced. This parameter represents the vendor
or industry standard, and the material if either affects the dimensions of the commodity
item.
Code list numbers 2-6999 are reserved for geometry standards that apply to US piping
practices. Numbers 7000-27999 are reserved for geometry standards that apply to
European piping practices. Numbers 28000-31999 are reserved for specific company
practices.
23. weight_code , short , SN 578
This code-listed attribute defines the weight code for the component. It determines the
table to be used in finding the dry weight of the component. It is required for those
cases where material causes the dry weight data but not the dimensional data to differ
for a specific geometric industry standard.
24. fabrication_cat , short , SN 180
This code-listed attribute identifies the shop/field fabrication and purchase status of a
component. It defines how the component was supplied and how the component was
fabricated (for example, Shop Supplied, Field Fabricated).
25. materials_grade , short , SN 145
74
This code-listed attribute identifies the material code, specification, grade-temper, and
joint efficiency for the component. This data is used in wall thickness calculations. It
can also be used to access physical data in the Physical Data Library.
These code-listed attributes provide index numbers to standard notes in standard note
type 499 that apply to this commodity item. The input to the Standard Note File is the
note number. The output is the free- format text which forms the standard note.
In the delivered data, note numbers 200 through 599 are allocated for piping commodity
items.
28. input_form_type , short , SN 990
This code-listed attribute defines the type of input form to be used to define data with
the Spec Writer command.
Neutral File Format

The following is a partial listing of the sample neutral file for the Piping Commodity
Specification Data. Entries in this table should be sorted alphanumerically by
commodity_name.
The Sequence= keyword in a piping commodity data neutral file does not require the *2 for
the piping materials class name. Any previously created piping commodity data neutral files
will not require any revision as a result of this change.
Specification
5. Piping Job
75
________________
Sample Files
A set of neutral file for US practice are delivered in the files
\win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data\*.pcd (one for each piping materials class specified in the
classes.pmc file).
A set of sample files depicting various options are delivered in the

\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data directory.
bend_tbl.pcd gasket.pcd pharmf.pcd

equiv_npd.pcd gskt_tbl.pcd pharmk.pcd
fluid_code.pcd metric_npd.pcd piplen_tbl.pcd
fpipe.pcd pharm.pcd thickness.pcd
76
________________ Piping Specialty Specification Data (203)
5.2.3 Piping Specialty Specification Data (203)

This database table contains data for a specific specialty item. It is used to define those
specialty items which are used frequently by a particular company or installation. The
specialty items are defined for the entire project, they are not partitioned by Piping Materials
Class.
The Piping Specialty Specification Data table contains 26 attributes.
You can also place specialty items interactively in the model by defining the
necessary parameters at the time of placement. No entries in the PJS database
are required for these interactive definitions. Refer to the Piping Design
Graphics Reference Guide for more information on placing specialty items.
2. piping_comp_no , character(20)
This attribute uniquely identifies the specialty component number. It is sometimes

referred to as Item Number.
This attribute identifies the piping specialty name. This can be a Piping Job
Specification access name or a PDS commodity item name.
This parameter enables you to request that the system retrieve the primary item, a
secondary item, or another special option from the Piping Job Specification. You can
select the unique options (as defined in standard note 400) from a form. If no option is
specified at placement, the primary item is used. Option 2 is reserved as the secondary
item. This parameter is used as a component override in the Piping Designer.
Specification
5. Piping Job
higher bound) for the green connect point.
77
________________
These attributes identify the end preparation for the green/red connect point. This value
is an intelligent code list. The system determines the termination type based on the
range of values

These attributes identify the pressure rating for the green/red connect point. This
parameter exists as alphanumeric data. The system interprets the first set of sequential
numeric characters as being the pressure rating value. (Refer to the description of
pressure rating under Piping Commodity Data for more information on standard
formats.)
These attributes identify the schedule or thickness value for the green/red connect point.
This parameter exist as alphanumeric data. (Refer to the description of schedule and
thickness for more information on standard formats.)
These code-listed attributes identify the source of the generic dimensional data, such as
flange data or piping outside diameter data.
For AMS standards, it represents the table suffix for the connect point.
11. rcp_from_nom_diam , short (NPD Units)
12. rcp_to_nom_diam , short (NPD Units)
higher bound) for the red connect point. For a full size component, these values are set
to zero.
See gcp_end_prep.
See gcp_rating.
78
________________ Piping Specialty Specification Data (203)
See gcp_sch_thk.
16.
rcp_table_suffix , short , SN 577
See gcp_table_suffix
17. physical_data_id , character(8)
This parameter can be used to identify the name of the physical dimension table in the
Physical Data Library to be used for this engineered item.
This attribute can be used to define an arbitray index to a geometric data table for
piping specialties. This is an optional input.
This attribute is used for pipe bends, elbows, and miters. It represents the bend radius in
terms of the nominal piping diameter.
This attribute provides a reference to the source of the data (which is usually an industry
standard, such as ANSI, ISO, or DIN, or a company standard) from which the specific
geometry of the commodity item can be deduced.
This code-listed attribute defines the weight code for the component. It determines the
table to be used in finding the dry weight of the component. It is required for those
Specification
5. Piping Job
joint efficiency for the component. It can be used to access physical data in the Graphic
Commodity Library.
79
________________
These attributes provide index numbers to standard notes in 499 that apply to this
specialty item. The input to the Standard Note File is the note number. The output is
the free-format text which forms the standard note.
In the delivered data, note numbers 600 through 799 are allocated for piping specialties.
Neutral File Format
Sample Files
A sample neutral file is delivered in the file
\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\specialty.data.
A sample file containing various bio-pharmaceutical specialty items is delivered in the file
\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pharms.data.
80
________________ Instrument Component Specification Data (204)
5.2.4 Instrument Component Specification Data

(204)
This table contains the data for a specific instrument item. It is used to define the instruments
which are used frequently by a particular company or installation. The instruments are
defined for the entire project, they are not partitioned by PMC. The following data exists in
the Instrument table.
The Instrument Component Specification Data table contains 26 attributes.
You can also place instruments interactively in the model by defining the
necessary parameters at the time of placement. No entries in the PJS database
are required for these interactive definitions. Refer to the Piping Design
Graphics Reference Guide for more information on placing instruments.
2. instrument_comp_no , character(20)
This attribute identifies the tag number for the instrument item. You can modify the
character length for this attribute.
This attribute identifies the specific item name for generic bends, spec flanges, or spec
valves. This can be a Piping Job Specification access name, or a PDS commodity item
name. Refer to the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for more
information on item names.
secondary item, or another special option from the Piping Job Specification. You can
select the unique options (defined in a standard note) from a form. If no option is
specified at placement, the default option 1 is used. Option 2 is reserved as the
secondary item. This parameter is used as a component override in Piping Design.

Specification
5. Piping Job
These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (low bound to
high bound) for the green connect point.
81
________________
These code-listed attributes identify the end preparation for the green/red connect point.
The system determines the termination type based on the range of values

These attributes identify the pressure rating for the green/red connect point. This
parameter exists as alphanumeric data. The system interprets the first set of sequential
numeric characters as being the pressure rating value. (Refer to the description of
pressure rating for more information on standard formats.)
These attributes identify the schedule thickness value for the green/red connect point.
(Refer to the description of schedule and thickness for more information on standard
formats.)
These code-listed attributes reference the source of the generic dimensional data, such
as flange data or piping outside diameter data.
For AMS standards, it represents the table suffix for the connect point.
11. rcp_from_nom_diam , short (NPD Units)
12. rcp_to_nom_diam , short (NPD Units)
These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (low bound to
high bound) for the red connect point. For a full size component, these parameters are
set to zero.
See gcp_end_prep.
See gcp_rating.
See gcp_sch_thk.
82
________________ Instrument Component Specification Data (204)
16. rcp_table_suffix , short , SN 577
See gcp_table_suffix.
17. physical_data_id , character(8)
This parameter can be used to reference the set of physical data from the Physical Data
Library to be used for this instrument item.
This attribute can be used to define an arbitrary index in the geometric data table for
instruments. This is an optional input.
This parameter, if applicable, is used to determine the type of valve operator for
instrument valves. It specifies the identification of the symbol description and the
source of the physical data for a valve operator.
This code-listed attribute identifies the source of the data (which is usually an industry
standard such as ANSI, ISO, or DIN; or a company standard) from which the specific
geometry of the commodity item can be deduced.
This code-listed attribute defines the weight code for the instrument. It determines the
table to be used in finding the dry weight of the instrument. It is required for those
Specification
5. Piping Job
joint efficiency for the instrument. It can be used to access physical data in the Piping
Graphic Commodity Library.
These code-listed attributes provide the index number to standard notes in NL499 that
apply to this instrument. The input to the Standard Note File is the note number. The
output is the free- format text which forms the standard note.
83
________________
In the delivered data, note numbers 800 through 999 are allocated for instruments.
Neutral File Format
Sample Files
\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\instrment.data.
A sample file containing various bio-pharmaceutical instruments is delivered in the file

\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pharmi.data.
84
________________ Tap Properties Data (205)
5.2.5 Tap Properties Data (205)

This table contains the tap properties data that is a function of the tap properties table name
and the nominal piping diameter. These tables define the piping taps which can be added to
any of the components included in a piping materials class. The system uses the information
in these tables and the nominal diameter to provide values for rating, end preparation,
schedule/thickness, and tap code. Tap tables do not allow a NPD range; there must be an
individual entry for each tap diameter.
The NPD entry in the tap table should be either imperial units or metric units depending on
the NPD requirements of the project. For imperial units, enter the specified NPD, such as
0.375. The software will provide a default unit of inches when the value is loaded into the
project. For metric NPD units, enter the units after the value on the first NPD entry.
For example:
! Diam Opt Rating Prp SC/Th Tap Code

10mm 1 - 591 NREQD E$37591XXX
20 691 - 591 NREQD E$37581XXX
The Tap Properties Data table contains 8 attributes.
The following kinds of taps may be defined in this table:
No-hole taps that permit the subsequent placement of a pipe support trunnion. For
example, a no-hole tap may be placed on an elbow or tee to allow the subsequent
placement of a pipe trunnion for a pipe support; the diameter of this no-hole tap must be
defined to have the same nominal diameter as the component part on which placed.
Hole taps that permit the subsequent placement of piping, piping components, and
instrument components. For example, a hole tap may be placed on a cap to allow the
subsequent placement of a reducing component such as a flatolet; the diameter of this
hole tap must be defined to have the same nominal diameter as the component part on
which placed. A hole tap can also be placed on a blind flange to allow the placement of
plain piping; the diameter of this hole tap must be defined to have the same nominal
diameter as the plain piping.
Hole taps that permit the venting or draining of a piping and/or instrument component.
For example, a hole tap can be placed on an elbow downstream of a relief valve; the
diameter of this hole tap must be defined to have the same nominal diameter as the
Specification
5. Piping Job
desired drain hole.
Component taps that represent a tap connection, rather than a hole. For example, a
socketwelded component tap may be placed on a gate valve to represent a socketwelded
connection furnished by the valve manufacturer. The diameter of this component tap
must be defined to have the same nominal diameter as the desired connection.
85
________________
2. tap_table_name , character(6)
This attribute identifies the name of the Tap Properties Data Table. These tables use the
following naming conventions:
first character: C
next three characters: numbers from 001 through 999 used to make the table
name unique.
The combination of the tap properties table name, the tap NPD, and the tap option, must
be unique.
3. nominal_piping_dia , short
This attribute defines the value for the nominal tap diameter.
secondary item, or another special option from the Piping Job Specification. If no
option is specified at placement, this attribute defaults to option 1 (primary item). This
parameter is used as a component override in Piping Design.
5. end_preparation , short , SN 330
This code-listed attribute identifies the end preparation. The system recognizes a
certain range of values as being flanged termination types, another range as being butt
welded termination types, etc.
6. rating , character(8)
This attribute exists as alphanumeric data. The system interprets the first set of
sequential numeric characters as being the pressure rating value. (Refer to the
description of pressure rating for Piping Commodity Data for more information on
standard formats.)
7. sched_thick , character(8)
This attribute identifies the generic or specific schedule, a thickness value, or a

calculation. (Refer to the description of schedule and thickness for Piping Commodity
Data for more information on standard formats.)
8. tap_material_code , character(10)
This optional attribute can be used to access the Material Description Library for the
taps material description addendum. It must be a unique reference to the Material
Description Library, including material descriptions for commodity items. In reporting
or isometric extraction, this text can be appended to either the short or long descriptions
of the component to which the tap applies.
86
________________ Tap Properties Data (205)
This attribute is also referred to as the Tap Code. Refer to the listing of the tap
descriptions in the Short Material Description Library, page 367, for more information
on the tap commodity code.
Neutral File Format

Double_Spacing
Sequence= 3 4 6 5 7 8
! By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=2 Date=12-May-1988
Table= C001
0.375 691 - 591 NREQD E$37591XXX
> 0.5 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E$50421064
0.5 691 - 591 NREQD E$50591XXX
> 0.75 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E$75421064
0.75 691 - 591 NREQD E$75591XXX
> 1 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E001421064
1 691 - 591 NREQD E001591XXX
> 1.25 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E1$2421064
1.25 691 - 591 NREQD E1$2591XXX
> 1.5 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E1$5421064
1.5 691 - 591 NREQD E1$5591XXX
> 2 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E002421064
2 691 - 591 NREQD E002591XXX
2.5 691 - 591 NREQD E2$5591XXX
> 3 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E003421064
3 691 - 591 NREQD E003591XXX
3.5 691 - 591 NREQD E3$5591XXX
> 4 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E004421064
4 691 - 591 NREQD E004591XXX
5 691 - 591 NREQD E005591XXX
6 691 - 591 NREQD E006591XXX
8 691 - 591 NREQD E008591XXX
10 691 - 591 NREQD E010591XXX
12 691 - 591 NREQD E012591XXX
14 691 - 591 NREQD E014591XXX
16 691 - 591 NREQD E016591XXX
18 691 - 591 NREQD E018591XXX
20 691 - 591 NREQD E020591XXX
24 691 - 591 NREQD E024591XXX
26 691 - 591 NREQD E026591XXX
28 691 - 591 NREQD E028591XXX
30 691 - 591 NREQD E030591XXX
32 691 - 591 NREQD E032591XXX
34 691 - 591 NREQD E034591XXX
36 691 - 591 NREQD E036591XXX
42 691 - 591 NREQD E042591XXX
48 691 - 591 NREQD E048591XXX
Sample Files
Specification
5. Piping Job
\win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data\taps.data.
A sample file containing various bio-pharmaceutical tap properties is delivered in the file
\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pharm_tap.data.
87
________________
5.2.6 Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material

Data (211)
The Size-Dependent Data table contains the data for a specific commodity item that is
dependent on the commodity code, nominal piping diameter, and schedule/thickness.
This table is used for miscellaneous batch reporting, such as construction cost reports and
requisition orders, and interfaces to material control, stress analysis, and isometric drawing
extraction.
There are multiple occurrences for a specific commodity code and a specific pair of green and
red nominal piping diameters in the Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data table
because schedule/thickness is not included in the commodity code.
The Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data table contains 10 attributes.
2. sys_commodity_code , character(16)
This parameter identifies the customers commodity code (or part number). You can
modify the character length for this attribute.
3. gcp_nom_diam , short
4. rcp_nom_diam , short
These coded attributes identify the nominal piping diameter for the green/red connect
point in NPD Units.
These attributes identify the schedule thickness value for the green/red connect point.
This parameter exist as alphanumeric data.
A generic schedule such as S-STD, S-XS and S-XXS. If the schedule name
exceeds the provided field length it is defined in terms of its wall thickness.
A specific schedule such as S-40, S-60 and S-80.
NREQD is used if the thickness value is not required in purchasing the

component, empty weights are not significantly affected by actual thickness
values, stress analysis is not applicable.
A value with all numeric characters is interpreted as a wall thickness value in the
same physical units as nominal piping diameter.
88
________________ Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211)
An asterisk (*) followed by a name (of the form Cyyy) defines the specific
calculation or table lookup to be used for wall thickness.
7. commodity_code , character(16) , index 1
This attribute identifies the customers commodity code or vendors part number. It is
not required for the customers commodity code, if the customers commodity code is
not dependent upon nominal piping diameter or thickness.
8. weld_weight , double
This parameter represents the total weld required at all welded ends of the commodity
item.
9. unit_price , double
This attribute identifies the unit price (materials cost) for the commodity item.
10. manhours , double
This attribute identifies the unit manhours associated with the commodity item.
Neutral File Format

\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pcd_size.data.
Specification
5. Piping Job
Data Retrieval
The data retrieval from the Size-Dependent Data table involves data for a commodity item
that is dependent upon nominal piping diameter and schedule/thickness. This form of data
retrieval is used during the MTO report creation process.
89
________________
inputs (search criteria)

pointer to the commodity item dependent data
NPD green - first size
NPD red - second size
schedule/thickness - green connect point
schedule/thickness - red connect point
outputs
customers commodity code or vendors part number
weld data
price data (materials cost) - unit price
labor data - unit manhours
90
________________ Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212)
5.2.7 Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212)

The Implied Material Data table contains the implied material data for a specific commodity
item that is dependent on both the Piping Commodity Library code and nominal piping
diameter range.
This data is used strictly for generating implied material for MTO reporting and material
control. It is reserved for spec implied material, such as caps or stubs, for a specific
commodity item. It is also used for reporting the implied components of a commodity item
(for example, cap screws).
The Piping Commodity Implies Material Data table contains 10 attributes.
The entries in this tables should not be confused with mating implied items
(such as welds, bolts, nuts, or gaskets) which are generated automatically by
the system. Refer to the Report Manager (PD_Report) Users Guide for more
information on implied items.
A unique commodity code must be defined for each commodity definition. For example, if a
commodity code is defined for gate valves from 2" to 14", but you want a different description
for an 11" gate valve, you must assign a new commodity code to the 11" valve.
2. sys_commodity_code , character(16)
This parameter identifies the customers commodity code (or part number), if it is not
dependent upon nominal piping diameter. You can modify the character length for this
attribute.
3. gcp_from_nom_diam , short
4. gcp_to_nom_diam , short
These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters for the green
connect point in NPD units. These values are not necessarily the same as the range in
the Piping Job Specification.
NPD is defined as a special coded number with the following formula.
for Metric units, the coded number equals the size (in millimeters)
Specification
5. Piping Job
for English Units, the coded number equals the size (in inches) times 32 plus
5000. coded number = 32*diameter + 5000 (in)
This allows nominal piping diameter to range from 1 mm to 5000 mm in 1 mm

increments for metric units, and to range from 1/32" to at least 200" in 1/32" increments
for the English System of Units.
91
________________
5. rcp_from_nom_diam , short
6. rcp_to_nom_diam , short
These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters for the red
connect point in NPD units. These values are not necessarily the same as the range in
the Piping Job Specification. For a full size component, these parameters should be set
to -.
7. commodity_code , character(16) , index 1
This attribute identifies the Piping Commodity code of the implied material. It is used
to generate an MTO line item as a result of a piping commodity item in the Piping
Design model. The implied material is generated by accessing the Piping Commodity
Library - not by accessing the Piping Design database.
8. quantity , double
This attribute identifies the quantity of the implied material.
9. fabrication_cat , short
10. standard_note_no , short
This code-listed attribute provides index numbers to standard notes in CL499 that apply
to this implied material.
92
________________ Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212)
Neutral File Format
Sample Files
\win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data\implied.data.
A sample file containing various bio-pharmaceutical gasket data is delivered in the file
Specification
5. Piping Job
\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pharm_212.data.
Data Retrieval
Data retrieval from the Implied Material Data table involves implied material data for a
commodity item that is dependent on nominal piping diameter range. This form of data
retrieval is used during the MTO Report Creation process and Material Control.
93
________________
inputs (search criteria)

pointer to the commodity item dependent data
outputs
Commodity code of the implied material
Quantity of the implied material
Fabrication category of the implied material
Standard note for the implied material
94
________________ Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231)
5.2.8 Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231)

The Component Insulation Exclusion Data is used to completely or partially exclude the
insulation of components on insulated lines with respect to interference checking.
For each piping component, piping specialty, or instrument component (excluding pipes) on
an insulated line, the Piping Envelope Builder will search the Component Insulation
Exclusion Data Table on the basis of the following data to determine whether or not insulation
should be completely excluded from that components interference envelope.
green nominal piping diameter of the component (range search)
red nominal piping diameter of the component (range search)
heat tracing requirements (range search)
insulation purpose (range search)
normal operating temperature (range search)
For piping commodities, the Piping Envelope Builder searches for the components
commodity name in the Component Insulation Exclusion Data Table using the preceding data.
If the piping commodity is defined in the exclusion table for those conditions, the
applicable insulation thickness will not be added to the components interference
envelope.
If the commodity name is not specified in the exclusion table for those conditions, the
Piping Envelope Builder searches for the components model code using the same data.
If a match for those conditions is found on the basis of model code, the applicable
insulation thickness will not be added to the components interference envelope.
Otherwise, the insulation thickness will be included in the components interference

envelope.
For piping specialties and instrument components, the Piping Envelope Builder searches for
the components model code in the Component Insulation Exclusion Data Table using the
preceding data. If the component is defined in the exclusion table for those conditions, the
applicable insulation thickness will not be added to the components interference envelope.
Otherwise, the insulation thickness will be included in the components interference envelope.
Specification
5. Piping Job
The piping segment data (heat tracing requirements, insulation purpose, and normal operating
temperature) are determined on the basis of the piping segment that is associated with the first
connect point of the applicable component.
The Component Insulation Exclusion Data table contains 13 attributes.
95
________________
This attribute identifies the commodity item name of a piping component as defined in
the Piping Commodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute 3).
If this attribute is blank, the system will search for a match by model code.
For piping commodities, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the Piping
Commodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute 19).
For piping specialties, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the Piping
Specialty Specification Data (Table 203 attribute 3).
For instruments, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the Instrument
Component Specification Data (Table 204 attribute 3).
4. gcp_npd_from , short
5. gcp_npd_to , short
higher bound) for the green connect point of the component or instrument in NPD units.
6. rcp_npd_from , short
7. rcp_npd_to , short
higher bound) for the red connect point of the component or instrument in NPD units.
For full size components use a dash (-) for these attributes.
8. heat_tracing_from , short , SN 200
9. heat_tracing_to , short , SN 200
These code-listed attributes identify the range of heat tracing values (lower bound to
higher bound) using values from code list set 200, Heat Tracing Requirements.
A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that heat tracing requirements are
not to be considered as part of the discrimination process.
10. insul_purpose_from , short , SN 220
11. insul_purpose_to , short , SN 220
These code-listed attributes identify the range of insulation purpose values (lower
bound to higher bound) using values from Standard Note type 220, Insulation Purpose.
96
________________ Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231)
A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that insulation purpose is not to be
considered as part of the discrimination process.
12. nor_oper_temp_from , double
13. nor_oper_temp_to , double
These attributes identify the range of temperature values (lower bound to higher bound)
for the component or instrument.
A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that temperature is not to be
The system of units for the temperature range is the same as the system of units for the
maximum temperature in the Piping Commodity Specification Data Table. Note that
normal design temperature, alternate operating temperature, and alternate design
temperature are not considered.
Neutral File Format

! DEFINE COMPONENT INSULATION EXCLUSION DATA
Single_Spacing
Sequence= 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
- I15AS 4 12 - - 3 3 5 5 150 200

6Q2C76 - 4 12 - - 3 3 5 5 150 200
- REDE 4 12 2 10 3 3 5 5 150 200

\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\component.data.
Specification
5. Piping Job
97
________________
5.2.9 Flange Insulation Exclusion Data (232)

The Flange Insulation Exclusion Data provides for partial exclusion of flange insulation
thickness from the generation of interference envelopes. This is an optional data table; if no
data is defined for this table the Piping Envelope builder will continue to function as it has in
previous releases of PDS.
The Piping Envelope Builder searches for matching data in this table for each bolted end of
each piping component or instrument component on an insulated line that are determined to
be insulated. The system only searches for components that passed the component insulation
exclusion test, as described in Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231), page 95.
The Piping Envelope Builder searches for matching data on the basis of the following data to
determine whether or not insulation should be excluded from the flange outside diameter of
that bolted end of the component.
nominal piping diameter of the bolted end (range search)
heat tracing requirements (range search)
insulation purpose (range search)
normal operating temperature (range search)
If matching criteria is found in the exclusion table for these conditions, the applicable
insulation thickness will not be added to the flange outside diameter of the bolted end of that
components interference envelope. Otherwise, the insulation thickness will be included in
the components interference envelope.
The piping segment data (heat tracing requirements, insulation purpose, and normal operating
temperature) are determined on the basis of the piping segment associated with the first
connect point of the applicable component.
The Piping Eden modules for the interference envelopes that are to consider the partial
exclusion of insulation from the flange outside diameter of a bolted end, must be
revised to accommodate this option. If you do not change any or all of the Piping
Eden modules for the interference envelopes, this table will have no impact and the
interference envelopes will include complete insulation, when applicable.
For example, the required modification to the interference parametric for the weldneck
flange (FWN) is as follows:
!FLANGE - Interference Module

Interference_Parametric_Shape_Definition F1A
Call Define_Connect_Point_Geometry ( LINEAR )
Thickness_1 = Thickness_1 + CP_Offset_1

Thickness_2 = Thickness_2 + CP_Offset_2
!Original Line
! Facing_OD_1 = Facing_OD_1 + Insulation * 2
!Modified Line
Facing_OD_1 = Facing_OD_1 + Insulation_1 * 2
Facing_OD_2 = Facing_OD_2 + Insulation * 2
98
________________ Flange Insulation Exclusion Data (232)
Call Draw_Cylinder ( Thickness_1, Facing_OD_1 )

Call Draw_Cylinder ( Thickness_2, Facing_OD_2 )
RETURN
END
The Flange Insulation Exclusion Data table has 9 attributes.
2. bolted_npd_from , short
3. bolted_npd_to , short
higher bound) for the bolted end of the component or instrument in NPD units.
4. heat_tracing_from , short , SN 200
5. heat_tracing_to , short , SN 200
These code-listed attributes identify the range of heat tracing values (lower bound to
higher bound) using values from code list set 200, Heat Tracing Requirements.
A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that heat tracing requirements are
not to be considered as part of the discrimination process.
6. insul_purpose_from , short , SN 220
7. insul_purpose_to , short , SN 220
These code-listed attributes identify the range of insulation purpose values (lower
bound to higher bound) using values from Standard Note type 220, Insulation Purpose.
A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that insulation purpose is not to be
8. nor_oper_temp_from , double
9. nor_oper_temp_to , double
Specification
5. Piping Job
These attributes identify the range of temperature values (lower bound to higher bound)
for the bolted end of the component or instrument.
A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that temperature is not to be
The system of units for the temperature range is the same as the system of units for the
maximum temperature in the Piping Commodity Specification Data Table. Note that
normal design temperature, alternate operating temperature, and alternate design
temperature are not considered.
99
________________
Neutral File Format

! DEFINE FLANGE INSULATION EXCLUSION DATA
Single_Spacing
Sequence= 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4 12 3 3 5 5 150 200
4 12 3 3 5 5 150 200
4 12 3 3 5 5 150 200
100
________________ Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data (233)
5.2.10 Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion

Data (233)
The Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data can be used to completely or partially
exclude construction tolerance from the generation of interference envelopes. This feature
only applies to Piping vs. Piping construction tolerances.
This is an optional data table; if no data is defined for this table the Piping Envelope builder
will continue to function as it has in previous releases of PDS.
For each piping or instrument component, excluding pipes, the Piping Envelope Builder
searches Table 233 on the basis of the following data to determine whether the Piping versus
Piping construction tolerance should be excluded from that components interference
envelope.
green NPD of the component (range search)
red NPD of the component (range search)
For piping commodities, the Piping Envelope Builder searches for the components
commodity name in the Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data Table using the
preceding data.
If the piping commodity is defined in the exclusion table for those conditions, the
applicable construction tolerance will not be added to the components interference
envelope.
If the commodity name is not specified in the exclusion table for those conditions, the
Piping Envelope Builder will search for the components model code using the same
data. If a match for those conditions is found on the basis of the model code, the
applicable construction tolerance will not be added to the components interference
envelope.
Specification
5. Piping Job
Otherwise, the construction tolerance will be included in the components interference

envelope.
For piping specialties and instrument components, the Piping Envelope Builder searches for
the components model code in the Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data Table
using the preceding data. If the component is defined in the exclusion table for those
conditions, the applicable construction tolerance will not be added to the components
interference envelope. Otherwise, the construction tolerance will be included in the
components interference envelope.
101
________________
The Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data table has 7 attributes.
This attribute identifies the commodity item name of a piping component as defined in
the Piping Commodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute 3).
If this attribute is blank, the system will search for a match by model code.
For piping commodities, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the Piping
Commodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute 19).
For piping specialties, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the Piping
Specialty Specification Data (Table 203 attribute 3).
For instruments, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the Instrument
Component Specification Data (Table 204 attribute 3).
4. gcp_npd_from , short
5. gcp_npd_to , short
higher bound) for the green connect point of the component or instrument in NPD units.
6. rcp_npd_from , short
7. rcp_npd_to , short
higher bound) for the red connect point of the component or instrument in NPD units.
For full size components use a dash (-) for these attributes.
Neutral File Format

! PIPING CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCE EXCLUSION DATA
Single_Spacing
Sequence= 2 3 4 5 6 7
- I15AS 4 12 - -
6Q2C76 - 4 12 - -
- REDE 4 12 2 10
A sample neutral file is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\constol.data.
102
________________ Spec Writer
5.3 Spec Writer

This command provides a forms interface for interactively creating, revising, and managing
the following specification data. This interface provides more simplicity and flexibility to a
beginner or a casual user, than defining specs with their respective neutral files:
Piping Materials Class Data (PDtable_201)
Piping Commodity Specification Data (PDtable_202)
Piping Specialty Specification Data (PDtable_203)
Instrument Specification Data (PDtable_204)
Tap Properties Data (PDtable_205)
Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (PDtable_212)
Features
Specification
5. Piping Job
The Spec Writer provides the following general features:
User-specified options for customizing the input of data (RDB_options).
A direct interface to the unapproved Specification Material Reference Database.
On-line validation for the existence of a material description, once the commodity code
(or component number) has been defined.
103
________________
Optional on-line Table Checker validation using pre-defined Table Checker reports.
Automated selections from the Standard Note Library for code-listed data. The
approved Standard Note Library must have been defined to include the correct data for
use in the Material Reference Database.
Selectable list of acceptable model codes for a specified commodity name.
Context-sensitive user interface. The form options will vary depending on the item
being defined. For example, the creation (and revision) of specification data for bolts
and gaskets, will display only those inputs relevant for bolts or gaskets.
Context-sensitive on-line help that is linked to the Component Data Reference Guide
and the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide.
104
________________ RDB Options File
5.3.1 RDB Options File

The RDB Options File allows you to customize the data input operations for the Interactive
Spec Writer. You should define an RDB options list, named RDB_options in the project
directory. A default RDB options list is included in the PD_Data sample/data/ directory.
! RDB_options
!
! general items = three main toggles
!
SHORT_COMMODITY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = OFF
LONG_COMMODITY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = OFF
SPECIALTY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = OFF
!
! PDtable_201 items
!
SERVICE_LIMITS_TABLE = LIST, L
NOMINAL_PIPING_DIAMETER_TABLE = LIST, D
BRANCH_TABLE = LIST, B
TAP_PROPERTIES_TABLE = DATABASE
GASKET_SEPARATION_TABLE = KEYIN
THICKNESS_DATA_TABLE = LIST, T
MATERIALS_DATA_TABLE = LIST, M
FLUID_CODE = VALUE
MATERIALS_DESCRIPTION = LIST
!BEND_DEFLECTION_TABLE = LIST, BENDEF
!PIPE_LENGTH_TABLE = LIST, PIPLEN
STANDARD_NOTE = LIST
PROMPT_FOR_TAP_ORIENTATION
!
! PDtable_202 items
!
MODEL_CODE = LIST
VALVE_OPERATOR = LIST
!
!
COMMODITY_NAME<===>MODEL_CODES
!
! Pipe/Tube
PIPING = PIPE, TUBE
!
! Valves (6Q1C)
!
6Q1C01 = GATSP, GAT, GATF, GATR
6Q1C02 = GATEX, GATEXB, GATEXBB
6Q1C03 = GATCON
6Q1C04 = GATBL
!
! Generic 3-way
6Q1C05 = BAL3P, GLO3W, PLU3W, SLI3W, 3WRV1
!
6Q1C06 = BALF, BALR, BALSP, BALLP, BALVP
6Q1C08 = BAL3P
6Q1C11 = GLOSP, GLO, GLOF, GLOR
6Q1C12 = GLOASP, GLOA
6Q1C13 = GLO3W
6Q1C14 = GLOY, GLOYF, GLOYR
6Q1C16 = PLUSP, PLU, PLUVP, PLUFB, PLUF, PLUR
Specification
5. Piping Job
6Q1C18 = PLU3W
6Q1C19 = PLU4W
6Q1C22 = NEE
6Q1C26 = BFYLP, BFYHP
6Q1C30 = DIA, DIASP, DIAPL, DIAGL
6Q1C32 = KNF
6Q1C33 = SLI
6Q1C34 = SLI3W
6Q1C37 = CKALSP, CKAL, CKST, BDA, HOSA
6Q1C38 = CKLSP, CKSSP, CKL, CKLF, CKLR, CKS, CKSF, CKSR, CKSY, CKLRY
6Q1C39 = CKWF, CKWFSP
6Q1C40 = CKALSP, CKAL
6Q1C41 = CKST
6Q1C42 = CKAST
6Q1C43 = CKYST
105
________________
6Q1C50 = CKBP
6Q1C51 = CKAR
6Q1C53 = BDA
6Q1C54 = BDY
6Q1C56 = PIN
6Q1C57 = FLO
6Q1C58 = FOOT
6Q1C62 = TKDR
6Q1C69 = DEL
6Q1C72 = HOS
6Q1C73 = HOSA
!
! Generic Vent/Drain Valve
6Q1C76 = GATSP, GAT, GATF, GATR, BALF, BALR, BALSP, BALLP, BALVP
!
! Generic Instrument Root Valve
6Q1C80 = GATSP, GAT, GATF, GATR, BALF, BALR, BALSP, BALLP, BALVP
!
6Q1C81 = 3WRV1
6Q1C82 = 4WRV1
!
! On-line Fittings (6P2C) and In-line Fittings (6Q2C)
!
6Q2C01 = FWN, FLWN, FSO, FL, FPL, FSSSO, FSSL, FSSPL, FLSSO, FLSL, FFIL, FS, FSW, FTHD, FCP
6Q2C03 = FRWN, FRSO, FRPL, FRS, FRSW, FRTHD
6Q2C04 = FEWN
6Q2C06 = FOWNA, FOWNAW, FOWNB, FOWNBW, FOSOA, FOSOAW, FOSOB, FOSOBW, FOSWA, FOSWAW, FOSWB, FOSWBW, FOTHDA
6Q2C08 = FBLD
6Q2C10 = BLSPO
6Q2C11 = BLSPC
6Q2C12 = BDISC
6Q2C13 = BLPAD
6Q2C14 = T1SPA, T2SPA1
6Q2C15 = BLSPA, OPSPA
!
! Generic End
6Q2C16 = FBLD, HDHEMI, HDELIP, HD21, PLUG, CAPBV, CAPOT
!
6Q2C17 = HDHEMI, HDELIP, HD21
6Q2C19 = PLUG
6Q2C21 = CAPBV, CAPOT
!
! Generic Conentric Diameter Change
6Q2C23 = REDC, SWGC, CPLR, INSR1, INSR2
!
! Generic Eccentric Diameter Change
6Q2C24 = REDE, SWGE
!
6Q2C25 = CPL
6Q2C26 = CPLH
6Q2C27 = REDC
6Q2C28 = REDE
6Q2C32 = CPLR
6Q2C35 = SWGC
6Q2C36 = SWGE
6Q2C39 = UN
6Q2C40 = UNO
6Q2C41 = UND
6Q2C43 = HC
6Q2C44 = BUSH
6Q2C46 = INSR1, INSR2
6Q2C47 = PIPB, PIPB2
6Q2C49 = E5
6Q2C51 = E11
6Q2C53 = E22
!
! Generic <45 Degree Direction Change
6Q2C55 = E5, E11, E22, E45TLR, PIPB, PIPB2
!
! Generic 45 Degree Direction Change
6Q2C56 = E45LR, E45, PIPB, PIPB2, E45LT, E453D, E45T3D, E45U, E45ST, E45S, E45L, M451, M452
!
6Q2C57 = E45
6Q2C59 = E45LR, E45TLR
6Q2C60 = E45LT
6Q2C61 = E453D, E45T3D
6Q2C63 = E45U
6Q2C65 = E45ST
106
6Q2C66 = E45S
6Q2C68 = E45L
6Q2C73 = E60
!
! Generic 45-90 Degree Direction Change
6Q2C75 = E90TLR, PIPB, PIPB2
!
! Generic 90 Degree Direction Change
6Q2C76 = E90LR, E90, E90SR, E90LT, E90R, E903D, E903T3D, E90U, E90ST, E90RST, E90S, E90L, PIPB, PIPB2, E90LT, M901, M902, M903, M9
!
6Q2C77 = E90
6Q2C79 = E90SR
6Q2C80 = E90LR, E90TLR
6Q2C82 = E90LT
6Q2C84 = E90R
6Q2C86 = E903D, E903T3D
6Q2C88 = E90U
6Q2C90 = E90ST
6Q2C91 = E90RST
6Q2C93 = E90S
6Q2C94 = E90L
!
! On-line Fittings (6P3C) and In-line Fittings (6Q3C)
!
6Q3C01 = R180
6Q3C03 = R180SR
6Q3C05 = R180LR
6Q3C07 = R180CL
6Q3C08 = R180MD
6Q3C09 = R180OP
6Q3C14 = M1, M2, M3, M4
6Q3C16 = M451, M452
6Q3C18 = M901, M902, M903, M904
6Q3C22 = T, TBT
6Q3C24 = TRB, TRBT
6Q3C25 = TRRB
6Q3C27 = TUOR
6Q3C28 = TUOB
6Q3C31 = TST
6Q3C34 = TRI
6Q3C36 = TDRA, TDRAW, TDRB, TDRBW
6Q3C38 = TBA
6Q3C45 = Y
6Q3C47 = L
6Q3C49 = LRB
6Q3C50 = LRRB
6Q3C52 = S90YB
6Q3C53 = S90YRB
6Q3C54 = L90YB
6Q3C55 = L90YRB
6Q3C60 = X
6Q3C62 = XRB
6Q3C63 = XRRB
6Q3C64 = XBA
6Q3C70 = SAD
6Q3C72 = SWOL
6Q3C73 = WOL
6Q3C74 = SOL
6Q3C75 = TOL
6Q3C76 = NOL
6Q3C77 = EOLLR, EOLSR
6Q3C78 = LOL
6Q3C79 = FOLHC
Specification
5. Piping Job
6Q3C80 = RPAD, RPAD2
6Q3C82 = RWELD, RWELD2
6Q3C84 = BWELD, BWELD2, BWELD3
6Q3C88 = NIP
6Q3C89 = NIPIL
!6Q3C95 = GASKET
!6Q3C97 = STUD
!6Q3C98 = NUT
!
!
!
VALVE_OPERATOR_LIST
!
! Handwheels
!
107
________________
OP_0 = None Required

OP_3 = Handwheel
OP_4 = Handwheel if GCP>RCP
OP_5 = Handwheel, inclined
OP_9 = Wrench, short
OP_11 = Wrench, long
OP_17 = Lever
OP_19 = T-handle, short
OP_21 = T-handle, long
OP_25 = Handwheel, special
OP_27 = Wrench, special
OP_29 = Gear, top mounted handwheel
OP_31 = Gear, top mounted inclined handwheel
OP_33 = Gear, side mounted handwheel
OP_35 = Gear, side mounted inclined handwheel
OP_39 = Lever, quick-action
OP_40 = Post indicator
!
! Actuators
!
OP_411 = Diaphragm, type 1
OP_431 = Press-balanced diaphragm type 1
OP_451 = Regulator type 1
OP_491 = Single acting cylinder type 1
OP_511 = Doulble acting cylinder type 1
OP_531 = Pilot operated cylinder type 1
OP_571 = Motor type 1
OP_611 = Digital type 1
OP_651 = Electro-hydraulic type 1
OP_652 = Electro-hydraulic type 2
OP_811 = Weight type 1
OP_851 = Manual type 1
OP_891 = Spring type 1
END_VALVE_OPERATOR_LIST
You can use the following keywords to customize the settings in the RDB options file.
General Items
For piping commodities, you can verify that a material description has been defined in the
Short Material Description Library and/or the Long Material Description Library. For piping
specialties and instruments, you can verify that a material description has been defined in the
Specialty Material Description Library.
SHORT_COMMODITY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = ON or OFF If set to ON,

the short material description is displayed when you specify the commodity code.
108
If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default setting is OFF.
LONG_COMMODITY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = ON or OFF If set to ON,

the long material description is displayed when you specify the commodity code.
SPECIALTY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = ON or OFF If set to ON, the

specialty material description is displayed when you specify the commodity code.
PDtable_201 items
SERVICE_LIMITS_TABLE = LIST, <prefix> If set to LIST, a list of
Service Limits Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table
Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to use as a substring search to
determine the list of tables. (Use L for the delivered tables.)
If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in
the table name.
NOMINAL_PIPING_DIAMETER_TABLE = LIST, <prefix> If set to

LIST, a list of Nominal Piping Diameter Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job
Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to use as a
substring search to determine the list of tables. (Use D for the delivered tables.)
the table name.
BRANCH_TABLE = LIST, <prefix> If set to LIST, a list of Branch Tables

(as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You
must specify a prefix to be used as a substring search to determine the list of tables.
(Use B for the delivered tables.) The list is filtered to only include the unique tables,
where the branch angle is 90 degrees.
the table name.
You should not assign the same Branch Table to be used in two different
piping materials classes if, for example, one allows intersections at both
Specification
5. Piping Job
45 degrees and 90 degrees, and the other only allows 90 degree

intersections. The Reference Data Manager will not detect this problem.
TAP_PROPERTIES_TABLE = KEYIN or DATABASE If set to DATABASE, a

list of Tap Properties Data Tables (as defined in PDtable_205 of the unapproved
Material Reference Database) is displayed.
109
________________
the table name.
GASKET_SEPARATION_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, <prefix> If set to

LIST, a list of Gasket Separation Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job
Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as a
substring search to determine the list of tables. (Use G for the delivered tables.)
the table name.
When listing the Gasket Separation Tables, the list of tables is restricted
to unique names, excluding the underbar (_) and the pressure rating
value that follows. In other words, the list of Gasket Separation Tables
will not include the pressure rating (G001 instead of G001_1500).
THICKNESS_DATA_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, <prefix> If set to LIST,

a list of Thickness Data Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification
Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as a substring search
to determine the list of tables. (Use T for the delivered tables.)
the table name.
MATERIALS_DATA_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, <prefix> If set to LIST,

a list of Materials Data Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification
to determine the list of tables. (Use M for the delivered tables.)
the table name.
FLUID_CODE = VALUE Specify a default fluid code value to be used for the
piping materials class.
If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is that you do
not intend to define this data, unless you specify the name of a Fluid Code Table.
FLUID_CODE_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, <prefix> If set to LIST, a list

of Fluid Code Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table
Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix (such as FC) to be used as a substring
search to determine the list of tables.
the table name.
MATERIALS_DESCRIPTION = KEYIN or LIST If set to LIST, a list of

materials descriptions (as defined in the approved Standard Note Library) is displayed.
the value.
110
BEND_DEFLECTION_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, <prefix> If set to LIST,

a list of Bend Deflection Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification
to determine the list of tables.
the table name.
PIPE_LENGTH_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, <prefix> If set to LIST, a list

of Pipe Length Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table
Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as a substring search to
determine the list of tables.
the table name.
STANDARD_NOTE = KEYIN or LIST If set to LIST, a list of standard notes (as

defined in the approved Standard Note Library) is displayed.
If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode will to key in
the value of the standard note.
PDtable_202 items
MODEL_CODE = KEYIN or LIST If set to LIST, a list of acceptable model
codes (determined by the commodity name) is displayed. (See keyword
COMMODITY_NAME <===> MODEL_CODES for more information.)
If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file or the list of acceptable model
codes is not defined, the default mode is to key in the value.
VALVE_OPERATOR = KEYIN or LIST If set to LIST, a list of valve operator

types (as defined in the RDB options file) is displayed. (See keyword
VALVE_OPERATOR_LIST for more information.)
If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file or the list of valve operator
types is not defined, the default mode is to key in the value.
PROMPT_FOR_TAP_ORIENTATION This keyword is used if you require that all

(or some) orifice flanges have two taps oriented 90 degrees apart. By default orifice
taps are oriented 180 degrees apart on the outside diameter of the flange.
Specification
5. Piping Job
If this keyword is not included in the RDB options list, the relative tap orientation for
two taps will always be 180 degrees.
COMMODITY_NAME <===> MODEL_CODES This keyword precedes the list of

associations between commodity names and their acceptable model codes. This list
must be defined to use the LIST option for MODEL_CODE.
111
________________
The association between a commodity name and the acceptable model codes for that
commodity name is defined as follows.
<commodity_name> = <model_code_A>,<model_code_B>, ...
6Q1C01 = GATSP, GAT, GATF, GATR

6Q1C02 = GATEX, GATEXB, GATEXBB
You can define as many as 50 model codes, separated by a comma, for each commodity
name.
The delivered RDB options list includes a list of acceptable model codes for the
reference data provided with PDS.
VALVE_OPERATOR_LIST This keyword precedes the list of valve operator types

and their corresponding descriptions.
The list of valve operator types is defined as follows.
<valve operator type> = <description>
OP_0 = None Required

OP_3 = Handwheel
The delivered RDB options file includes a list of valve operator types for the reference
data provided with PDS. The description is for information only to aid the user in
selecting the proper valve operator type.
END_VALVE_OPERATOR_LIST This keyword must follow the valve operator list

as a delimiter.
112
________________ Piping Materials Class Data Command
5.3.2 Piping Materials Class Data Command

The Piping Materials Class Data command can be used to create a piping materials class
definition in Table 201 of the Material Reference Database or revise and existing piping
materials class definition.
Options
Create The system activates the Create Piping Materials Class Data form.
Revise By Keyin The system activates the Revise Piping Materials Class
Data form. Key in the name of the piping materials class to revise in the
Piping Materials Class field.
Revise By List Select the piping materials class to be revised from the
displayed list of piping materials classes (as defined in the Unapproved
Material Reference Database) and select Accept. The system activates the
Revise Piping Materials Class Data form with the data for the selected piping
materials class.
Specification
5. Piping Job
113
________________
5.3.2.1 Create/Revise Piping Materials Class Data

The Create/Revise Piping Materials Class Data form is used to create or modity the definition
of a piping materials class. When creating a new definition, the system will jump to the input
fields for the mandatory data. You must specify a value for all the mandatory fields.
Field Descriptions
The system highlights the mandatory input fields (those that must be specified). Once you
define a valid input for a mandatory field the system will drop the highlight for that field.
Refer to RDB Options File, page 105 for information on defining list options for the
applicable input fields.
Refer to Piping Materials Class Data (201), page 62 for more information on the attributes
for the Piping Materials Class Data table (201).
Mandatory Input Fields

Piping Materials Class (keyin) Key in up to 16 alphanumeric characters for the
piping materials class to be defined. The system verifies that specified piping materials
class does not already exist in the Unapproved Material Reference Database.
Gasket Separation (keyin) Key in the value for the gasket separation for this piping
materials class.
OR
114
________________ Create/Revise Piping Materials Class Data
Gasket Table (keyin or list) Key in the table name or select from the list of tables
(as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library). The list of Gasket
Separation Tables will exclude the pressure rating value.
Service Limits (keyin or list) Key in the name of the Service Limits Table for this
piping materials class or select from a list of Service Limits Tables (as defined in the
approved Piping Job Specification Table Library).
Diameter (keyin or list) Key in the name of the Nominal Piping Diameter Table for
this piping materials class or select from a list of Nominal Piping Diameter Tables (as
defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library).
Branch Table (keyin or list) Key in the name of the Branch Table for this piping
materials class or select from a list of Branch Tables (as defined in the approved Piping
Job Specification Table Library). The list will only include the unique tables, where the
branch angle is 90 degrees.
You should not assign the same Branch Table to be used in two different piping
materials classes if, for example, one allows intersections at both 45 degrees and 90
degrees, and the other only allows 90 degree intersections. The Reference Data
Manager will detect this problem.
Tap Data (keyin or list) Key in the name of the Tap Properties Data Table for this
piping materials class or select from a list of Tap Properties Data Tables (as defined in
PDtable_205 of the unapproved Material Reference Database).
The unapproved tap properties data is referenced, since all specification data within the
Material Reference Database is approved in one operation.
Optional Data - Wall Thickness

This data is required for piping commodities, where the schedule or thickness is not explicitly
defined in the piping materials class or in a wall thickness table.
Corrosion Allowance (keyin) Key in a numeric value, if wall thickness calculations

are to be used.
Thickness Equation (list) Select one of the displayed wall thickness equations.
ANSI B31.3-1987 EL01

ANSI B31.1a-1986 EJ01
Specification
5. Piping Job
The corresponding name for the thickness equation is loaded into the Piping Materials
Class Data Table.
Thickness Table (keyin or list) Key in the name of the Thickness Data Table for
this piping materials class or select from a list of Thickness Data Tables (as defined in
the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library).
115
________________
Materials Data Table (keyin or list) Key in the name of the Materials Data Table
for this piping materials class or select from a list of Materials Data Tables (as defined
in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library).
Optional Data
The following data is not not required and can be defined or not defined based on your
company practices.
Materials Description (keyin or list) Key in the numeric value for the materials
description in the Standard Note Library for this piping materials class or select from
the list of materials descriptions (as defined in the approved Standard Note Library).
Revision (keyin) Key in up to two alphanumeric characters for the revision number.
Revision Date (keyin) Key in up to ten alphanumeric characters for the date. The
current date will not be entered automatically.
Note that the Reference Data Manager creates and maintains a separate revision
management date on the basis of the current date and time which can be used in the
reporting of reference data.
Fluid Code (keyin list) Define a default fluid code to be used for the piping
materials class.
OR
Fluid Code Table (keyin list) Key in the name of the Fluid Code Table for this
piping materials class or select from a list of Fluid Code Tables (as defined in the
Materials of Construction (keyin) Key in upt to six alphanumeric characters.
Bend Deflect Table (keyin or list) Key in the name of the Bend Deflection Table
for this piping materials class or select from a list of Bend Deflection Tables (as defined
in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library).
Pipe Length Table (keyin or list) Key in the name of the Pipe Length Table for this
piping materials class or select from a list of Pipe Length Tables (as defined in the
Standard Note Number (keyin or list) Key in the note number in the Standard
Note Library for this piping materials class or select from the list of standard notes (as
defined in the approved Standard Note Library).
116
________________ Piping Commodity Data Command
5.3.3 Piping Commodity Data Command

The Piping Commodity Data command can be used to create a piping commodity definition
in Table 202 of the Material Reference Database or revise an existing piping commodity
definition.
Options
Create Select the Piping Materials Class for the commodity item to be
created from the list of piping materials classes (as defined in the Unapproved
Material Reference Database) and select Accept. The system activates the
Create Piping Commodity Specification Data form.
Revise By Keyin Key in the name of the piping materials class for the
commodity item to be modified. Then select the piping commodity to be
revised from the displayed List of Piping Commodities and select Accept.
The system activates the Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data form
with the data for the selected piping commodity.
Revise By List Select the piping materials class for the commodity item to
be revised from the displayed list of piping materials classes and select
Accept. Then select the piping commodity to be revised from the displayed
List of Piping Commodities and select Accept. The system activates the
Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data form with the data for the
selected piping commodity.
Copy You can use the Copy option in conjunction with the Revise options
as a cut-and-paste feature. This command requires that both the source piping
materials class data and the destination piping materials class have been
created.
You can copy a complete piping materials class, including the piping
commodity specification data or selectively copy specific commodities. Select
the option for the items to be copied.
Source and Destination Piping Materials Class - These are active fields that,
when selected, display the piping materials class list. Select the source piping
materials class from the displayed list, then select Accept. Select the
destination piping materials class from the displayed list and select Accept.
Specification
5. Piping Job
Select All - This option copies the specification data for all piping
commodities within the selected source piping materials class to the specified
destination piping materials class.
Select From List - Select the source piping materials class from the displayed
list and select Accept. Select the destination piping materials class from the
displayed list and select Accept. Then select the piping commodity to be
copied from the list of all piping commodities within the source piping
materials class.
117
________________
Select Gaskets - Select the source piping materials class from the displayed
list and select Accept. Select the destination piping materials class from the
displayed list and select Accept. The system copies the specification data for
all gaskets within the source piping materials class to the destination piping
materials class. Gaskets are recognized on the basis of the gasket commodity
name, as specified through the Project Data Manager.
Select Bolts - Select the source piping materials class from the displayed list
and select Accept. Select the destination piping materials class from the
displayed list and select Accept. The system copies the specification data for
all bolts within the source piping materials class to the destination piping
materials class. Bolts are recognized on the basis of the bolt commodity name,
as specified through the Project Data Manager.
Short Commodity Material Description ON/OFF You can set this toggle
to ON to verify that the material description for a specified commodity code
has been defined in the Short Material Description Library.
Long Commodity Material Description ON/OFF You can set this toggle
to ON to verify that the material description for a specified commodity code
has been defined in the Long Material Description Library.
If the Material Description toggle is set to ON and no corresponding material

description is found for a specified commodity code, the system activates the
Add Entry to Material Description Library form. See Add Entry to Material
Description Library, page 128.
118
________________ Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data
5.3.3.1 Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification

Data
The Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data form is used to create or modify the
definition of a piping commodity within a specified piping materials class. When creating a
new definition, the system will jump to the input fields for the mandatory data. You must
specify a value (by keyin or selection from a list) for all the mandatory fields.
Field Descriptions
Refer to RDB Options File, page 105, for information on defining options for the applicable
input fields.
Refer to Piping Commodity Specification Data (202), page 67, for information on the
attributes for the Piping Commodity Specification Data table.
Where possible, the system verifies that the specified value is valid for the applicable piping
materials class. For example, NPD values are checked against the associated diameters table
in the approved Piping Job Spec Table Library.
Commodity Type This field can be used to select the type of piping commodity
data to be created based on the settings in Standard Note Type 990 of the Standard Note
Library.
General Fittings Piping

Pipe Bends Tubing
Specification
5. Piping Job
Orifice Flanges Gaskets

Branch Nipples Bolts
Branch Reinforcement Nuts
Valves
The system will modify the form fields to reflect the data that is specific to that type of
component. The system stores the commodity type as the input_form_type within the
Piping Commodity Specification Data Table of the Material Reference Database.
119
________________
Any input fields that are not used for a specific piping commodity type will be de-
activated. The General Fittings category will allow input in all the input fields. This
form is used for any piping commodity that does not fall within any of the other types.
General Fittings, Pipe Bends, Orifice

Flanges, Branch Nipples, Branch
Reinforcement, and Valves
Commodity Name (keyin)
From NPD - First Size (keyin)
To NPD - First Size (keyin)
End Preparation - First Size (list)
Pressure Rating - First Size (keyin) This data is automatically set to undefined
(blank) for the branch reinforcement commodity type.
Table Suffix - First Size (list)
Schedule/Thickness - First Size (list) Attribute 10. This data is automatically set
to undefined (blank) for the branch reinforcement commodity type.
Commodity Code (keyin) Key in the commodity code for the piping commodity.
When size-dependent commodity codes are required, this will represent a system
commodity code and will be used by the Report Manager to reference the size-
dependent commodity code in the Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data
Table.
The system automatically translates the specified commodity code to be upper-case.
You can use the Implied Data option to specify implied data for this piping
commodity. Refer to Commodity Implied Data Command, page 140 for information on
project-specific implied data. Refer to Implied Data, page 126 for information on
class-specific implied data. The default is that implied data does not apply.
For the revise command, the prefixes for implied data are not displayed as part of the
commodity code, although the prefix will be loaded in the database. For implied data
(project-wide or class-specific), the system will display the toggle setting rather than
showing the prefix in the commodity code field.
Model Code (keyin or list) Attribute 19. Key in the model code or select the model
code from a list of acceptable model codes (as defined by commodity name in the RDB
options file).
Geometric Industry Standard (list)

Weight Code (list)
fabrication category (list)
120
Define the following data for any reducing components. This data will not apply to either the
orifice flange or branch nipple commodity type.
From NPD - Second Size (keyin) Attribute 12. Key in the lowest second size for
which this specification data applies.
To NPD - Second Size (keyin) Attribute 13. Key in the highest second size for
which this specification data applies.
You can optionally define the following fields when two ends of that component require
different data. By PDS convention, if you specify a red End Preparation, you must specify the
corresponding pressure rating, table suffix, and schedule/thickness.
End Preparation - Second Size (list)
Pressure Rating - Second Size (keyin) This data is set to undefined (blank) for the
branch reinforcement commodity type.
Table Suffix - Second Size (list)
Schedule/Thickness - Second Size (list) This data is set to undefined (blank) for
the branch reinforcement commodity type.
The following data must be defined for the designated [component types]. The setting is
stored in the modifier attribute.
Bend Radius (keyin) [Pipe Bend] Key in the bend radius for the pipe bend.
Number of Taps (toggle) [Orifice Flanges] Set the toggle for the number of taps (1
or 2) on the orifice flange. If applicable, set the orientation of the taps as 90 degrees or
180 degrees. This toggle only appears for orifice flanges that have two taps.
Nipple Length (keyin) [Branch Nipples] Key in length of the branch nipple.
Reinforcement Data (toggle) [Branch Reinforcement] Set the toggle for the source
of the branch reinforcement data to By System or By User.
If you select the by user branch reinforcement option, the commodity option code is
automatically defined with a value of 699 (User-defined), as required by PDS.
Valve Operator (keyin or list) [Valves] Key in the valve operator type or select the
valve operator type from a list of valve operator types. The list of valve operator types
Specification
5. Piping Job
and the corresponding descriptions are defined in the RDB options list.
Valve Operator Display (toggle) [Valves] Set the toggle to ON or OFF to

determine whether the valve operator is displayed in the model.
Modifier (keyin) You can define this value for specific piping commodities not
covered by the previous list.
121
________________
You can define the following optional data depending on your requirements.
Commodity Option (list) Attribute 4.
Max Temperature (keyin) Attribute 5. If no value is specified, the default value

(undefined) is assigned automatically.
Materials Grade (list) Attribute 25.
Standard Note Number (list) Attributes 26 and 27. Select the note for this
commodity from the list of standard notes defined in the approved Standard Note
Library.
PDS Sort Code (keyin) Attribute 20. The specified value is automatically converted
to upper-case.
Specification data for piping

You must define the following data for piping. The piping commodity name is defined
automatically, as specified through the Project Data Manager.

End Preparation (list)
Pressure Rating (keyin)
Table Suffix (list)
Schedule/Thickness (list)
Joint Quality Factor (keyin) (For wall thickness calculations) In lieu of the
schedule/thickness, you can request that the wall thickness be computed automatically
by the system by specifying the joint quality factor for wall thickness calculations. The
system multiplies the joint quality factor by 100, add a *C prefix to designate that the
default calculation is to be used, and loads the value into the schedule/thickness
column. For example, if the joint quality factor is 0.95, this value will be *C095.
Note that this is not the joint quality factor that is to be used in the branch reinforcement
calculations.
Commodity Code (keyin)
Model Code (toggle) Set the toggle to By System (PIPE) or By User (*FPIPE).

Weight Code (list)
Fabrication Category (list)
You can optionally define the following data for piping.
122

Commodity Option (list)
Max Temperature (keyin)
E, Reinforcement (keyin) Define the joint quality factor (E) for piping for which
branch reinforcement calculations apply. The system multiplies the joint quality factor
by 100 and loads it in the modifier column.
This is not the joint quality factor that is to be used in the wall thickness calculations for
the piping.
Purchased Length (keyin) You can key in the purchased length of the piping in
sub-units. This value is stored in the PDS sort code attribute.
Materials Grade (list)

Standard Note Number (list)
End Preparation - Other (list)
Specification data for tubing

Define the following data for tubing. The tubing commodity name is defined automatically,

Pressure Rating - First Size (keyin)
Schedule/Thickness - First Size (list)
Joint Quality Factor (keyin)
Weight Code (list)
You can optionally define the following data for tubing.

Maximum Temperature (keyin)
E, Reinforcement (keyin)
Specification
5. Piping Job
Purchased Length (keyin)

End Preparation - Other (list)
123
________________
Specification data for gaskets

Define the following data for gaskets. The gaskets commodity name is defined
automatically, as specified through the Project Data Manager. The system displays the active
projects selection of MTO options applicable to gaskets for reference.

Gasket Thickness (keyin) Key in the gasket thickness to be reported through the
Report Manager. This value is loaded into the modifier column.
You must define the following specification data for gaskets, when the alternate gasket search
option has been enabled for MTO through the Project Data Manager. Otherwise, the input
fields will be disabled.
Alternate End Preparation (list) Select from the list of end preparation values as
defined in the approved Standard Note Library.
Alternate Pressure Rating (keyin) Key in up to eight characters to define the

pressure rating.
Alternate Table Suffix (list) Select from the list of table suffix values as defined in
the approved Standard Note Library.
You can optionally define the following data on the basis of the user-specific requirements for
gaskets.

Specification data for bolts

You must define the following data for bolts. The bolts commodity name is defined
automatically, as specified through the Project Data Manager. The system displays the active
projects selection of MTO options applicable to bolts for reference.

Bolt Extension (keyin)
124
You can optionally define the following data on the basis of user-specific requirements for
bolts.

Specification data for nuts

You must define the following data for nuts. The commodity name is defined automatically,

You can optionally define the following data on the basis of user-specific requirements for
nuts.

Specification
5. Piping Job
125
________________
5.3.3.2 Implied Data

When defining a piping commodity, you can select the Implied Data option to indicate that
the commodity will have an associated implied item that will be included in MTO reports.
After selecting the option, set the toggle to Class Specific.
This option is intended for implied components that are not unique within the project. A lap-
joint flange is an example of the primary component, where the stub-end is the implied
component.
Refer to Commodity Implied Data Command, page 140 for information on Project Specific
implied data.
When you select Accept to define a primary component, the system modifies the form display
to allow you to define the specification data for the implied component.
When you accept the specification data for the implied component, the system prefixes an
asterisk (*) to the commodity code of the primary component to indicate that implied data is
present.
Field Descriptions
The following specification data for the implied component are determined by the
corresponding data for the primary component. This data is displayed in review only fields.
Commodity Name Same as the primary component.
Commodity Option The commodity option code for the implied component is set to
the primary components commodity option code plus 5000.
126
________________ Implied Data
From NPD same as the primary component.
To NPD same as the primary component.
Model Code same as the primary component.
You can optionally define the following specification data for the implied component based
on your reporting requirements. The values for the implied component default to the
corresponding values for the primary component, except for the commodity code.

Table Suffix (list)
Commodity Code (keyin) Key in the commodity code for the implied item. The
system converts this value to upper-case.
When size-dependent commodity codes are required, this will represent a somewhat
arbitrary value, referred to as the system commodity code, and will be used by the
Report Manager to reference the size-dependent commodity code.

Weight Code (list)
Modifier (keyin)
PDS Sort Code (keyin) (optional). The system converts the value to upper-case.
Specification
5. Piping Job
127
________________
5.3.3.3 Add Entry to Material Description Library

This form is used to define the material description for a specified commodity code in the
appropriate Material Description Library (short, long, or specialty). Refer to Material
Description Data, page 361, for more information on material descriptions.
Requirements
The Material Description toggle must be set to ON.
If you have defined size-dependent commodity codes, this option will be ignored, unless both
of the following conditions are met:
The option for MTO to use the system commodity code to reference the material
description has been enabled through the Material Takeoff Options of the Project Data
Manager.
The material descriptions have been created with embedded commodity code labels as
the means of inserting the size-dependent data into the material description.
Description Key in the material description for the specified commodity code and
select Accept.
The system adds the specified entry to the Material Description Library.
128
________________ Piping Specialty Data Command
5.3.4 Piping Specialty Data Command

The Piping Specialty Data command can be used to create a piping specialty definition in
Table 203 of the Material Reference Database or revise an existing piping specialty definition.
You can also add specialty descriptions to the Material Description Library.
Options
Create Select the type of specialty (Piping Specialty or Valves from the
list. Then key in the component number for the specialty item to be created
and select Accept. The system activates the Create Piping Specialty
Specification Data form.
Revise By Keyin Key in the component number of the specialty to be

modified and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Piping Specialty
Specification Data form with the data for the selected piping specialty.
Revise By List Select the piping specialty to be revised from the displayed
List of Piping Commodities and select Accept. The system activates the
Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data form with the data for the selected
piping specialty.
Specialty Material Description You can set this toggle to ON to verify

that the material description for a specified commodity code has been defined
in the Specialty Material Description Library.
If no corresponding material description is found, the system activates the Add

Entry to Material Description Library form. See Add Entry to Material
Specification
5. Piping Job
129
________________
5.3.4.1 Create/Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data

The Create/Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data form is used to create or modify the
definition of a piping commodity within a specified piping materials class. When creating a
new definition, the system will jump to the input fields for the mandatory data. You must
specify a value (by keyin or selection from a list) for all the mandatory fields.
Field Descriptions
input fields.
Refer to Piping Specialty Specification Data (203), page 77, for information on the attributes
for the Piping Specialty Specification Data table.
Mandatory Input Fields

Piping Component Number (keyin) Key in the piping component number, which
uniquely identifies the piping specialty. The system verifies that the piping component
number does not already exist in the Unapproved Material Reference Database.
From NPD - First Size (keyin) Key in the first size value for the piping specialty.
Both the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input.
To NPD - First Size (keyin) Key in the first size value for the piping specialty.
Both the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input. The TO NPD field is
only visible if an applicable specialty type is selected.
130
________________ Create/Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data
End Preparation - First Size (list) Select from the list of end preparation values as
Pressure Rating - First Size (keyin) Key in up to eight characters to define the
pressure rating.
Table Suffix - First Size (list) Select from the list of table suffix values as defined
in the approved Standard Note Library.
Schedule/Thickness (list) Select from the list of schedule/thickness values as

Model Code (keyin) Key in the model code to be used to parametrically define the
piping specialty.
Physical Data ID (keyin) Key in the ID to be used as an arbitrary index into the
geometric data table for piping specialties.
Sort Code (keyin) Key in the sort code to be used as an arbitrary index into the
geometric data table for piping specialties. The system will convert the value to upper-
case.
Fabrication Category (list) Select from the list of fabrication category values as
You must define the following data for any reducing component.
NPD - Second Size (keyin) Key in the second size value for the piping specialty.
Both the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input.
You must define the following data for valves. This data is stored in the modifier attribute.
Valve Operator (keyin or list) Key in the valve operator type or select the valve
operator type from a list of valve operator types (as defined in the RDB options file).
Valve Operator Display ON/OFF (toggle) Set the toggle to determine whether the
valve operator will be displayed in the model.
Specialty Type (field) This field can be used to select the type of piping specialty
data to be created based on settings in Standard Note Type 990 of the Standard Note
Library. Place a data point in this field to activate the Spec Writer Data Form Type
pick list, then select the preferred data type.
Specification
5. Piping Job
131
________________
The system stores the specialty type as the input_form_type within the Piping Specialty
Data Table as a code-listed attribute for Standard Note Type 990.
Optional Input Fields

You can optionally define the following data, when two ends of the component require
different data. By PDS convention, if you specify the red end preparation, you must specify
the corresponding pressure rating, table suffix, and schedule/thickness.

Table Suffix (list)
You can optionally define the following data depending on you requirements for piping
specialties.
Weight Code (list)

Modifier (keyin)
132
________________ Instrument Data Command
5.3.5 Instrument Data Command

The Instrument Data command can be used to create an instrument definition in Table 204
of the Material Reference Database or revise an existing instrument definition. You can also
add descriptions to the Material Description Library.
Options
Create Select the type of instrument (Instruments or Valves) from the list.
Then key in the component number for the instrument to be created and select
Accept. The system activates the Create Instrument Specification Data form.
Revise By Keyin Key in the component number of the instrument to be

modified and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Instrument
Specification Data form with the data for the selected instrument.
Revise By List Select the instrument to be revised from the displayed List
of Instruments and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Instrument
Specification Data form with the data for the selected instrument.
Specialty Material Description You can set this toggle to ON to verify

that the material description for a specified commodity code has been defined
in the Specialty Material Description Library.
If no corresponding material description is found, the system activates the Add

Entry to Material Description Library form. See Add Entry to Material
Specification
5. Piping Job
133
________________
5.3.5.1 Create/Revise Instrument Specification Data

The Create/Revise Instrument Specification Data form is used to create or modify the
definition of an instrument. When creating a new definition, the system will jump to the input
fields for the mandatory data. You must specify a value (by keyin or selection from a list) for
all the mandatory fields.
Field Descriptions
input fields.
Refer to Instrument Component Specification Data (204), page 81, for information on the
attributes for the Instrument Specification Data table.
Instrument Component Number (keyin) Key in the component number, which

uniquely identifies the instrument. The system verifies that the component number
does not already exist in the Unapproved Material Reference Database.
From NPD - First Size (keyin) Key in the first size value for the instrument. Both
the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input.
To NPD - First Size (keyin) Key in the first size value for the instrument. Both the
from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input. The TO NPD field is only
visible if an applicable instrument type is selected.
End Preparation - First Size (list) Select from the list of end preparation values as
134
________________ Create/Revise Instrument Specification Data
Pressure Rating - First Size (keyin) Key in up to eight characters to define the
pressure rating.
Table Suffix - First Size (list) Select from the list of table suffix values as defined
in the approved Standard Note Library.

Model Code (keyin) Key in the model code to be used to parametrically define the
instrument.
Physical Data ID (keyin) Key in the ID to be used as an arbitrary index into the
geometric data table for instruments.
Sort Code (keyin) Key in the code to be used as an arbitrary index into the
geometric data table for instruments. The system will convert the value to upper-case.
You must define the following data for any reducing component.
NPD - Second Size (keyin) Key in the second size value for the instrument. Both
the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input.
Instrument Type (field) This field can be used to select the type of instrument
component data to be created based on settings in Standard Note Type 990 of the
Standard Note Library. Place a data point in this field to activate the Spec Writer Data
Form Type pick list, then select the preferred data type.
The system stores the specialty type as the input_form_type within the Piping Specialty
Specification
5. Piping Job
Data Table as a code-listed attribute for Standard Note Type 990.
You can optionally define the following data, when two ends of the component require
different data. By PDS convention, if you specify the red end preparation, you must specify
the corresponding pressure rating, table suffix, and schedule/thickness.

Table Suffix (list)
135
________________
You must define the following data for valves. This information is stored in the modifier
attribute.
Valve Operator (keyin or list) Key in the valve operator type or select the valve
operator type from a list of valve operator types (as defined in the RDB options file).
Valve Operator Display ON/OFF (toggle) Set the toggle to determine whether the
valve operator will be displayed in the model.
You can optionally define the following data depending on your requirements for instruments.
Weight Code (list)

Modifier (keyin)
136
________________ Tap Properties Data Command
5.3.6 Tap Properties Data Command

The Tap Properties Data command can be used to create a tap properties definition in Table
205 of the Material Reference Database or revise and existing tap properties definition.
Options
Create Key in the name of the tap table to be defined. The system activates
the Create Tap Properties Data form.
Revise By Keyin Key in the name of the tap table to be modified. The
system activates the Revise Tap Properties Data form with the data for the
selected tap table.
Revise By List Select the tap table to be revised from the displayed List of
Tap Properties Data (as defined in the Unapproved Material Reference
Database) and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Tap Properties
Data form with the data for the selected tap table.
Specification
5. Piping Job
137
________________
5.3.6.1 Create/Revise Tap Properties Data

The Create/Revise Tap Properties Data form is used to create or modity the specification data
for taps. When creating a new definition, the system will jump to the input fields for the
mandatory data. You must specify a value for all the mandatory fields.
Field Descriptions
Refer to Tap Properties Data (205), page 85 for more information on the attributes for the
Tap Properties Data.
Tap Table Name (keyin) Key in up to six characters for the table name. The
combination of the tap properties table name, the tap nominal piping diameter, and the
tap option code must be unique.
Nom Piping Diameter (keyin) Key in the nominal piping diameter for this tap
properties definition.
Tap Option (list) Select from the list of tap option codes as defined in the approved
Standard Note Library. If you do not select a tap option code, the default value (one) is
assigned automatically.
End Preparation (list) Select from the list of end preparation values as defined in
the approved Standard Note Library.
138
________________ Create/Revise Tap Properties Data
Rating (keyin) Key in up to eight characters to define the pressure rating.

Tap Material Code (keyin) During the tap properties data creation process, if the
Short and Long Commodity Description toggles are set to ON, you are allowed to
insert Tap Material Code data into the Short Material Description Library. This is the
code that may optionally be used by MTO for appending the taps material description
to that of the component which has been tapped.
If you have defined size-dependent commodity codes, this option will be ignored,
unless both of the following conditions are met:
description has been enabled through the Material Takeoff Options of the Project
Data Manager.
The material descriptions have been created with embedded commodity code labels
as the means of inserting the size-dependent data into the material description.
This form is used to define the material description for a specified commodity code in
the appropriate (short) Material Description Library. Refer to Material Description
Data, page 361, for more information on material descriptions.
Specification
5. Piping Job
Key in the material description for the specified commodity code and select Accept.
This code must be a unique index into the projects Material Description Libraries.
The system converts the specified tap material code to upper-case, then adds the
specified entry into the appropriate Material Description Libraries.
139
________________
5.3.7 Commodity Implied Data Command

The Commodity Implied Data command defines the specification data for implied
components in Table 212 or the Material Reference Database. These implied components are
reported by MTO with the primary component in situations where the implied data is
independent of the piping materials class (used throughout the project).
Options
Create Key in the system commodity code of the implied component to be
created. The system activates the Create Piping Commodity Implied Material
Data form.
Revise By Keyin Key in the name of the piping materials class for the
commodity item to be modified. Then select the piping commodity to be
revised from the displayed List of Piping Commodities and select Accept.
The system activates the Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data form
with the data for the selected piping commodity.
Revise By List Select the implied component definition to be revised from

the displayed list of Commodity Implied Data and select Accept. The system
activates the Revise Piping Commodity Implied Data form with the data for
the implied component definition.
140
________________Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied Material Data
5.3.7.1 Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied Material

Data
The Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied Material Data form is used to create or modify
the definition of an implied component. When creating a new definition, the system will
jump to the input fields for the mandatory data. You must specify a value (by keyin or
selection from a list) for all the mandatory fields.
Field Descriptions
Refer to Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212), page 91 for more information on the
attributes for the Piping Commodity Implied Material Data table.
System Commodity Code Key in the commodity code for the primary component.
The system converts the value to upper-case.
For this type of implied data to be reported with the primary component, the
Specification
5. Piping Job
specification data for the primary component must have enabled the option in each
piping materials class for which this implied data applies.
From Diameter (First Size) Key in the lowest first size value for which this implied
specification data applies.
To Diameter (First Size) Key in the highest first size value for which this implied
specification data applies. The to value must equal or exceed the from value.
141
________________
From Diameter (Second Size) For reducing components, key in the lowest second
size value for which this implied specification data applies. In cases where the piping
commodity represents both a full-size component and a reducing component, this value
should equal the corresponding first size NPD. Otherwise, for a reducing component,
this value must be less than the corresponding first size value.
To Diameter (Second Size) For reducing components, key in the highest second
size value for which this implied specification data applies. The to value must equal or
exceed the from value.
Commodity Code (keyin) During the commodity implied data creation process, if
the Short and Long Commodity Description toggles are set to ON, you are allowed to
insert Commodity Code data into the Short and Long Material Description Libraries.
If you have defined size-dependent commodity codes, this option will be ignored,
unless both of the following conditions are met:
description has been enabled through the Material Takeoff Options of the Project
Data Manager.
The material descriptions have been created with embedded commodity code labels
as the means of inserting the size-dependent data into the material description.
This form is used to define the material description for a specified commodity code in
the appropriate Material Description Library (short or long). Refer to Material
Description Data, page 361, for more information on material descriptions.
Key in the material description for the specified commodity code and select Accept.
This code must be a unique index into the projects Material Description Libraries.
142
________________
Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied Material Data
The system converts the specified commodity code to upper-case, then adds the
specified entry into the appropriate Material Description Libraries.
Quantity (keyin) Key in a whole number or a decimal value for the quantity of the
implied component per primary component.
Standard Note Number (list) You can optionally select from the list of standard
notes as defined in the approved Standard Note Library.
Specification
5. Piping Job
143
________________
5.3.8 Table Checker

You can use the Table Checker option to perform on-line Table Checker validation for the
defined piping commodity specification data. When this option is enabled, table checker
validation will be performed for all piping commodities, except:
implied data specific to the piping materials class
gaskets
bolts
nuts
When you enable this option, the system displays a list of the defined Table Checker reports
for the project. Select the report validation to be performed and select Accept.
Refer to Table Checker Form, page 389 for more information on creating a Table Checker
report definition.
144
________________ Piping Job Specification Manager
5.4 Piping Job Specification Manager

This command enables you to load all of the database tables which make up the Piping Job
Specification portion of the Material Reference Database. You can also extract neutral files of
the data contained in the Material Reference Database.
Before Using This Command

Refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on creating a
project and creating the approved and unapproved Specification/Material Reference
Database.
You must have installed the applicable reference database files (such as USRDB or
DINRDB).
Use the Default Project Control Data option to set default settings for Piping
Spec Path and Piping Spec Node to point to the location of the neutral files.
The default settings are maintained in the Project Control Database.
You can also change these settings during the operation of the Piping Job Spec
Manager. However, such changes are temporary; they will not update the default
locations.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Piping Job Specification Manager option from the Reference Data
Manager form.
The system displays the Piping Job Specification Manager main form used to select the
type of data to process.
Specification
5. Piping Job
145
________________
The data manipulation procedure for each of the database tables is similar. You can
perform the following activities for each of the entities.
2. Select Option
Select Unapprove ==> Approve to post the data from the unapproved
Specification/Material Reference Database to the approved database.
Accept to Create New Records or Exit
Toggle between Submit Immediately to submit the report for immediate processing, or
Delayed Submit to specify a time to submit the report for delayed processing.
When delayed submission is selected, you will be prompted Accept Time or Re-
specify Submit Time. Enter the day, hour, and minute, then select AM or PM.
OR
Select the command for the database table to be loaded.
The system displays the options for the selected item. The following illustration reflects
the screen for Piping Materials Class.
146
________________ Piping Job Specification Manager
Select Option
Select the option for the type of action to be performed.
Load, Replace, or Replace Commodity Subset from a neutral file. See page 148.
Delete existing entries. See page 151.
Report on the entity data (create a neutral file). See page 152
Specification
5. Piping Job
147
________________
5.4.1 Load, Replace, and Replace Commodity

Subset Options
These options enable you to load entries from a neutral ASCII file into the Material Reference
Database.
The Replace Commodity Subset option is only available for the Size
Dependent Material Data and Project Implied Material Data commands.
Refer to the database descriptions earlier in this section for a listing of the neutral file formats
used in defining the delivered PJS and material data.
Load adds the contents of the neutral file(s) to the information currently in that
database table of the Specification/Material Reference Database.
Replace deletes all entries in the respective database table and then loads new entries
from the neutral file.
Replace Commodity Subset revises (deletes and replaces) previously created size-
dependent or implied commodity data for a specific commodity or group of commodity
codes specified in a neutral file. This option is only available for the Size Dependent
Material Data and Project Implied Material Data commands.
The neutral files for the delivered USRDB data are in the directory
\win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data
classes.pmc the neutral file for the Piping Materials Class Data.
*.pcd The neutral files for the Piping Commodity Data are stored in a set of files of
the format pmcname.pcd. (For example, 1c0031.pcd defines all the commodity items
for piping materials class 1c0031.)
list.pcd a file that lists the neutral file names of all the delivered pcd files for the
different piping materials classes.
taps.data the neutral file for Tap Properties Data.
implied.data the neutral file for Project Implied Material Data.
A set of sample neutral files are delivered in the directory
\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data
specialty.data a sample neutral file for Piping Specialty Data.
instrment.data a sample neutral file for Instrument Data.
148
________________
Load, Replace, and Replace Commodity Subset Options
pcd_size.data a sample neutral file for Size Dependent Material Data.
You can copy the files and make changes before loading the information into the database.

You can define the variable PD_COMMIT_INTERVAL= in the control.sh file to control the
commit interval in loading specification data into the Material Reference Database. This has
the same impact as adjusting the -c option in a risload command line. The default commit
value is 25. Increasing this variable may improve performance.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Load/Replace (or other load or replace) option. See the description above,
for differences in Load, Replace, and Replace Commodity Subset.
2. Specify Neutral File Name
Key in the file specification for the neutral file that contains the data to be copied.
For Piping Commodity Data you can load or replace a single file or a list of files.
To process a list of files, create a list file which list each neutral file on a separate
line. The file list.pcd contains a list of all the delivered neutral files.
For Size-Dependent or Implied Commodity Data, you can replace specific

commodity codes or all the entries in the database. To replace specific
commodity codes, create a neutral files which contains only the commodity codes
to be replaced.
For the Load option, the system displays a dialog box to indicate that the data loaded
will be appended to existing data. Select Accept to continue.
Specification
5. Piping Job
3. Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit.
For Delayed Submit, set the time to process the neutral file(s).
149
________________
4. Accept to Create New Records or Exit
Select Accept to begin processing the request.
Job Has Been Submitted
The system submits the load/replace request as a batch job. Once the job is completed
the system sends a mail message indicating the completion status of the load (successful
or unsuccessful).
The system also creates a set of log files in the \tmp directory.
pmc.log Piping Materials Class Data
pcd.log Piping Commodity Data
specialty.log Piping Specialty Data
instrument.log Instrument Data
taps.log Tap Properties Data
pcd_size.log Size-Dependent Material Data
implied.log Project Implied Material Data
These log files contain the following information.
The name of the neutral file being loaded
The completion status of the load (successful or unsuccessful)
The line number that caused the failure if the neutral file was not loaded.
150
________________ Delete Option
5.4.2 Delete Option

This option enables you to delete entries from the Piping Job Specification.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Delete option.
The system displays a list of all the items in the database for the selected class of data.
2. Select the item to be deleted from the database.
3. Accept to Delete Materials Class
Select Accept to begin deleting the data.
Specification
5. Piping Job
151
________________
5.4.3 Report Option

The Report options enable you to create neutral files using the information in the
Specification/Material Reference database. The order and field lengths of the data in the
neutral file is determined by a format file named spec_order.max. This format file is expected
to reside in the same network address and directory specified for the report output. A default
format file is delivered with the PD_Data product in the file
\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\format\spec_order.max.
If the spec_order.max file is not found at the specified output directory, the system will use
the default spec order.
If an unapproved Specification/Material Reference database exists for the active project, you
can select the database to process: approved or unapproved.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Report option from one of the data forms (such as the Piping Commodity
Data form).
For Piping Commodity Data select the appropriate PCD from the list.
Key in the name of the neutral file to be created. You can change the Node Name and
File Path information.
3. Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit.
For Delayed Submit, set the time to process the neutral file(s).
4. Accept to Create Report
Select Accept to create the specified neutral file.
Job Has Been Submitted
The system creates the neutral file and a log file named specmgr.log.
152
________________ Report Option
Example spec_order.max File

!
! This file contains the spec attribute order and their maximum attribute
! lengths required for creating spec output neutral files. When creating
! spec reports the system will default an attribute order and set of
! attribute lengths. The user can edit these attribute orders and
! lengths in this file ( spec_order.max ). If this file is in the
! directory where the software is being run the orders defined in
! this file will be used as the default attribute order and lengths.
201 = 2,16 3,3 4,3 5,10 6,7 7,7 8,8 9,6 10,6 11,6 12,6 13,6 14,6 15,6 16,6 17,6 18,8 19,6 20,6
202 = 3,6 4,6 5,7 6,6 7,6 8,6 9,8 10,8 11,8 12,8 13,8 14,8 15,8 16,8 17,6 18,16 19,6 20,6 21,7 22,6 23,6 24,6 25,6 26,6 27,6
203 = 2,20 3,6 4,6 5,8 6,8 7,6 8,8 9,8 10,6 11,8 12,8 13,8 14,8 15,8 16,6 17,8 18,6 19,7 20,6 21,6 22,6 23,6 24,6 25,6
204 = 2,20 3,6 4,6 5,8 6,8 7,6 8,8 9,8 10,6 11,8 12,8 13,8 14,8 15,8 16,6 17,8 18,6 19,7 20,6 21,6 22,6 23,6 24,6 25,6
205 = 3,8 4,6 5,8 6,8 7,8 8,10
211 = 2,16 3,8 4,8 5,8 6,8 7,16 8,8 9,8 10,8
212 = 2,16 3,8 4,8 5,8 6,8 7,16 8,8 9,6 10,6
Specification
5. Piping Job
153
________________
5.5 Piping Job Spec Report Manager

This command activates the Piping Job Spec Report Manager form. It is used to generate
reports from the Specification/Material Reference Database with the report definition data.
The Piping Job Spec Report Manager stores the report record and location records for each
discrimination data file and format file in the Project Control Database. The numbered records
are used to locate ASCII files on their specified nodes.
Options
Report Format Displays the Report Format form, which you can use to create,
revise, copy, or delete the record of a format file (not the format file). For more
information, see Report Format Form, page 157.
Report Discrimination Data Displays the Discrimination Data form, which you
can use to create, revise, copy, or delete the record of a discrimination data file as well
as the file itself. For more information, see Report Discrimination Data Form, page
163.
Report Displays the Report form, which you can use to create, revise, delete, and
approve report records and report files. For more information, see Report Form, page
173.
Report Management Data Displays the Report Management Defaults form,

which you can use to create a record in the project control database of the default
nodename and path for the report definition files. This option is primarily used for
setup. For more information, see Report Management Defaults Form, page 186.
154
________________ Using the Report Commands
5.5.1 Using the Report Commands
Understanding Report Files and Records

The Piping Job Spec Report Manager uses the discrimination data files, format files, and
database records that represent these files to generate reports. The following definitions
explain all of the files and records in the reporting process.
Format File and Record

The format file is a user-defined, ASCII file which must be created with a text editor outside
of the Piping Job Spec Report Manager. It contains special indices identifying what data
appears in the report and how the data is sorted. It also defines how the data is formatted in
the report. Without the format file(s), Piping Job Spec Report Manager reports cannot be
processed. A set of basic format files is delivered for each type of reporting.
Using the Report Format option, you can create a numbered record for each format file so
that it can be accessed for report processing. The format record is a record in the Project
Control Database used to name and locate a specific format file. Unlike the format file, the
format record is created interactively. It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that
is used for report processing but is not an actual file.
Discrimination Data File and Record

The discrimination data file limits the report to only the specified database occurrences. It is
an ASCII file that is created interactively using the Piping Job Spec Report Manager.
The discrimination data record is a record in the Project Control Database used to name and
locate a specific discrimination data file. There is a uniquely-numbered record for each
discrimination data file so that it can be accessed for report processing. This is the same way
that the format record is used to access a format file.
Report Output and Record

The Piping Job Spec Report Manager creates a report using the specified
Specification
5. Piping Job
format,discrimination, and search criteria data files, and places it in the specified directory on
the specified node.
The report record names or defines locations for all of the files that are necessary to generate a
report, including the report output. (It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that is
used for report processing but is not an actual file.)
155
________________
Group Workflow
There is a definite workflow for at least the first time you create a report. First, use the
Report Management Data option to specify defaults for the nodename and path of the report
definition files. By defining the defaults first, you can prevent keying in a nodename and path
on each form. If you want to use a different nodename or path than the defined default,
simply place a data point in that field and key in the modification.
The following steps can be done in any order: create your format record, discrimination data
record, and discrimination data file using the Report Format and Report Discrimination
Data options. Reports cannot be generated until the format file, the discrimination data file,
and their corresponding records have been established.
Finally, use the Report option to create the actual report.
156
________________ Report Format Form
5.5.2 Report Format Form

When you select the Report Format option from the Piping Job Spec Report Manager
form, the Report Format form is displayed.
This form enables you to create, copy, revise, or delete a record of the location of the format
file in the project control database. An option is also provided that enables you to copy a
record and its corresponding ASCII format files.
The format file defines the data that will be reported and the way in which that data will be
displayed. Reports cannot be generated unless a format file exists and a record of the files
location has been entered into the project control database.
Options
Create Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which enables you to add a
new record of a format file in the project control database. For more information, see
Format Creation/Revision Form, page 159.
Specification
5. Piping Job
Copy Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which copies the record of an
existing format file from the project control database along with the corresponding
ASCII format file. For more information, see Format Creation/Revision Form, page
159.
Revise Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which modifies a record of an

existing format file in the project control database. For more information, see Format
Creation/Revision Form, page 159.
157
________________
Delete Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing record of a format file
from the project control database. If the record of the format file is deleted, reporting
cannot be performed. For more information, see Format Deletion Form, page 161.
158
________________ Format Creation/Revision Form
5.5.2.1 Format Creation/Revision Form

When you select Create, Copy, or Revise from the Report Format form, the Piping Job
Spec Report Manager form is displayed.
This form creates, copies, or revises a record in the project control database; this record
defines the location of a format file. The format file itself defines the contents and format of
the report. Both the location specification and the format file must exist to report on PDS
data.
Field Descriptions
Number A unique number of up to 24 characters. Specifies the short name in the
project control database used to identify the record of the format file.
Description A description of up to 40 characters for the format file.
File Specification The file name of the format file to reference.
File Path The disk location of the format file. This field retains the active setting.
File Node The nodename of the system on which the format file is located. This
field retains the active setting.
Before Using this Form

Specification
5. Piping Job
You must have created an ASCII format file. A set of basic format files is delivered with the
PD_Report product in the win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\format directory. The file for
Spec Reporting reporting is named piping_rdb.fmt.
For more information on the delivered sample format files, see the PD_Report Users Guide.
159
________________
Operating Sequence
1. Select Create, Copy, or Revise.
A list of available records displays for copy or revision. To create a database record,
go to Step 3.
2. Select Report Format
From the displayed list, select the record to be copied or revised. Then select Accept.
Key-in fields are displayed for you to specify the required database information.
3. Specify Report Format Data
Type information in each of the displayed fields, taking care to press return in each
field. Then select Accept.
The project control database is updated.
160
________________ Format Deletion Form
5.5.2.2 Format Deletion Form

When you choose Delete, the Deletion form is displayed.
This form deletes a report record from the project control database and can optionally delete
the associated file. This form is used with format files and their database records,
discrimination data files and their database records, and search criteria files and their database
records.
Fields and Options

Number/Description Displays the 24-character short name and the 40-character
description of a report record in the project control database.
Delete File/Do Not Delete File Determines whether the associated file is deleted.
When set to Delete File, the database record is deleted along with the associated file.
When set to Do Not Delete File, only the database record is deleted.
Specification
5. Piping Job
Operating Sequence
From the displayed list, select the database record to be deleted.
161
________________
2. Set the Delete File/Do Not Delete File toggle as needed. Then click Accept.
The specified record is deleted. If specified, the associated file is also deleted.
162
________________ Report Discrimination Data Form
5.5.3 Report Discrimination Data Form

When you select Report Discrimination Data from the Report Manager form, the
Discrimination Data form is displayed.
This form creates, copies, revises, and deletes a discrimination data file from the specified
directory. The associated record in the project control database is also copied, revised, or
deleted as needed.
A discrimination data file is an ASCII file that designates which models will be included in a
report. That is, discrimination data specifies the scope of the report. The project control
database record specifies the name and location of the discrimination data file that is to be
associated with a specific report.
Options
Create Displays the Discrimination Data Creation form, which creates a new
discrimination data file. The associated project control database record is also created.
Specification
5. Piping Job
For more information, see Discrimination Data Creation Form, page 165.
Copy Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which copies an existing
data file. The associated project control database record is also copied. For more
information, see Discrimination Data Revision Form, page 169.
Revise Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which modifies

discrimination data. You can use this option to revise the contents of the discrimination
data file, the location of the discrmination file, and the associated record in the project
control database. For more information, see Discrimination Data Revision Form, page
169.
163
________________
Delete Displays the Deletion form, which deletes a discrimination data file as well
as its associated record in the project control database. For more information, see
Discrimination Data Deletion Form, page 171.
164
________________ Discrimination Data Creation Form
5.5.3.1 Discrimination Data Creation Form
Commands
Approved Piping Job Spec Defines the database to be reported: approved or
unapproved.
Search Criteria Defines search criteria for specified attributes in the

Specification/Material Reference Database.
Field Descriptions
Number Key in a unique number to name the discrimination data record to be
created by discrimination. The number can be up to 24 characters in the Project Control
Database. This number is a short name to identify the record of the discrimination data
file.
Specification
5. Piping Job
Description Key in a description of the discrimination data file with up to 40

characters in the Project Control Database.
File Specification Key in the filename of the discrimination data file to create.
The system verifies that the file does not already have a record in the project.
165
________________
File Path Displays the disk location of the discrimination data file. This field
retains the active setting.
File Node Displays the nodename where the discrimination data file is located. This
166
________________ Search Criteria Form
5.5.3.2 Search Criteria Form

You can define search criteria to restrict the elements to be reported based on database
attributes. The default is no search criteria. This option enables you to define search criteria
for specified attributes in the Spec Database.
If you do not restrict the piping materials class attribute for Piping Commodity
Data, all piping materials classes will be reported.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Search Criteria option from the Discrimination Data form.
2. Select Entity
Select the database entity that contains the data to be restricted.
The system displays the attributes for the selected entity.

Specification
5. Piping Job
3. Select Attribute
Select the attribute to be restricted.
The system displays the selected attribute and displays a list of operators.
167
________________
4. Select Operator
Select the required operator to define the search criteria.
The system displays the selected operator and prompts you to key in an attribute value.
5. Enter Attribute Value
Key in the attribute value. For a sub-string search, key in a string to appear anywhere
within the attribute value (do not use wild cards).
If the attribute is code-listed, the system displays a list of values from the standard note
library. Select the value and select Accept.
The system validates the input and displays the defined search criteria.
6. Accept or Select And/Or Operator
Select AND to specify an additional condition or select OR to specify an alternative

condition.
OR
Accept the defined search criteria.
168
________________ Discrimination Data Revision Form
5.5.3.3 Discrimination Data Revision Form

When you select Copy or Revise from the Discrimination Data form, the Discrimination
Data Revision form displays. This form enables you to copy or revise a discrimination data
file from the specified directory and its record from the Project Control Database. The copied
discrimination data file can then be modified.
First, the system displays the Record Number display list as shown below on the left. After
you select and Accept the discrimination data file you need, the system then displays the
discrimination data identification fields. These fields are used to define the record as shown
below on the right.
Commands
unapproved.
Search Criteria Defines search criteria for specified attributes in the

Specification/Material Reference Database.
Field Descriptions
Number Key in a unique number to name the discrimination data record with up to
Specification
5. Piping Job
24 characters in the Project Control Database. This number is a short name to identify
the record of the discrimination data file.
Description Key in a description of the discrimination data file with up to 40

characters in the Project Control Database.
File Specification Key in the filename of the discrimination data file to reference.
169
________________
The system verifies that the file does not already have a record in the project.
File Path Displays the disk location of the discrimination data file. This field
File Node Displays the nodename where the discrimination data file is located. This
If prompted to... Do this:

Select Discrimination Data Select the record number of the discrimination data
file to revise and select Accept.
Specify Discrimination Data Key in any changes to the discrimination data record
displayed in the information fields, and select as
many of the Discrimination Data options as necessary
to define the discrimination data file.
170
________________ Discrimination Data Deletion Form
5.5.3.4 Discrimination Data Deletion Form

records.
Fields and Options

Specification
5. Piping Job
Operating Sequence
171
________________
172
________________ Report Form
5.5.4 Report Form

When you select Report from the Report Manager form, the Report form is displayed.
This form creates, revises, and deletes report records and report files. A report record holds
specifications for a report; these specifications include the report name, the report description,
and which format file, discrimination data file, and search criteria data file to use to generate a
report.
The report name is not the title that is printed on the report; the title is included
in the format file.
At the end of each report, a parameters page is included that contains the following
information:
Report Output The report number, report title, report creation/revision date, and
report node, path, and file name.
Format The report format number, description, and node, path, and file name.
Specification
5. Piping Job
Discrimination Data The report discrimination data number, description, and file
location (network address, path, and file name). The following discrimination data is
also included: list of model numbers (with discipline), volume (if applicable), search
criteria (if applicable), and sorting sequence.
Search Criteria The report search criteria number, description, and file location
(node, path, and file name. The following search criteria data is also included: list of
model numbers (with discipline), volume (if applicable), search criteria (if applicable),
and sorting sequence.
173
________________
Options
Create Displays the Report Creation form, which creates a report record and
generates a report. For more information, see Report Creation Form, page 175.
Revise Displays the Revise Report form, which regenerates a report from an
existing or revised report record. For more information, see Revise Report Form, page
178.
Delete Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing report record and the
corresponding report. For more information, see Report Deletion Form, page 181.
Approve Displays the Report Approval form, which approves an existing report.
For more information, see Report Approval Form, page 183.
Multi-Create Displays the Report Multiple Submit form, which submits multiple
reports to the printer. For more information, see Report Multiple Submit Form, page
184.
174
________________ Report Creation Form
5.5.4.1 Report Creation Form

When you select Create from the Report form, the Report Creation form is displayed.
Use this form to create a report record and to generate a report. Because report records are
stored in the project control database, you can use them repeatedly.
Fields and Options

Report Number The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the
report file in the project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the report
file short name.
Report Title The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. This is not the
title in the actual report, but is rather the title of the report record. The title of the report
is contained in the format file.
Report File Spec The name of the report output file (up to 14 characters).
Specification
5. Piping Job
Report File Path The disk location for the report output file. This field retains the
active settings, and it is automatically populated if you have specified this data on the
Report Management Dataform. For more information, see Report Management
Defaults Form, page 186.
Report Node The name of the system on which the report output file will be
located. This field retains the active settings, and it is automatically populated if you
have specified this data on the Report Management Data form. For more information,
see Report Management Defaults Form, page 186.
175
________________
Report Format File The name of the format file to be used to generate the active
report. When you select this field, a list of available format files is displayed. Select
the appropriate format file, and click Accept.
Report Discrimination File The name of the discrimination data file to be used to
generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available discrimination
data files is displayed. Select the appropriate discrimination data file, and click Accept.
Report Search Criteria The name of the search criteria data file to be used to
generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available search criteria
files is displayed. Select a search criteria file, and click Accept.
Select this field a second time to specify a different search criteria file. To clear a
specification, click Accept without selecting a file.
If the report discrimination data selected for the active report has search
criteria data defined within it, and you specify a search criteria in this
field, the search criteria specified in the Report Search Criteria field
takes precedence over the search criteria contained in the discrimination
data.
Revision Number The revision number (up to three characters) for the report.
Last Revision Number The revision number of the last report generated. This is a
read-only field; you cannot edit it.
Revised By The user (up to five characters) who checked the report. This field is
optional.
Revision Description The description (up to 40 characters) of the report revision.

This field is optional.
Print/Delete Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and then
deletes the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print
queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it.
Print/Save Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and saves the
report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is
displayed. Click on a queue to select it.
Save Saves the report output file without printing the report.
Submit Immediately/Submission is Delayed Specifies when the report will be

processed. When this toggle is set to Submission is Delayed, additional fields display
for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated.
176
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report form, select Create.
The Report Creation form is displayed.
2. Specify Report Data
Key in the report record information. Then select the appropriate report format file,
discrimination data file, and search criteria data file.
3. Select the appropriate print/save/delete option, and select a queue if the report is to be
printed.
4. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit Immediately) or later

(Submission is Delayed). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date and time
that the report is to be submitted.
5. Click Accept to save the report file.
Specification
5. Piping Job
177
________________
5.5.4.2 Revise Report Form

When you select Revise from the Report form, the Revise Report form is displayed.
This form revises an existing report record and generates a report from the project control
database. An option is also provided to update (in some cases) the report record without
generating a report output file. Similarly, you can choose to generate an updated report output
file without updating the report record.
Fields and Options

file short name.
active settings.
located. This field retains the active settings.
178
________________ Revise Report Form
data.
optional.

Submit to Batch Immediately/Delayed Submit to Batch Specifies when the report

will be processed. When this toggle is set to Delayed Submit to Batch, additional
fields display for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated.
Revise Data Only/Revise Report and Data Specifies revision of the report data
only (Revise Data Only) or revision of the report data and the report output file (Revise
Report and Data). To revise the report specification without updating the report
output file, make the necessary changes, set this toggle to Revise Data Only, and click
Specification
5. Piping Job
Accept. To revise the report output file only, set this toggle to Revise Report and
Data without modifying any of the fields, and click Accept. To modify both the report
file and the report output file, make the necessary changes, set this toggle to Revise
Data Only, and click Accept.
If you update any field other than Report Number and Report Title,
this toggle is automatically set to Revise Report and Data, and the
report output file is generated.
179
________________
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report form, select Revise.
The Report Creation form is displayed with a list of available report files.
2. Select Report
From the displayed list, select the report to be revised. Then click Accept.
The fields update to display the selected report file specifications.
3. Revise Report Information
Update the report record information as needed.
printed.

180
________________ Report Deletion Form
5.5.4.3 Report Deletion Form

records.
Fields and Options

Specification
5. Piping Job
Operating Sequence
181
________________
182
________________ Report Approval Form
5.5.4.4 Report Approval Form

When you select Approve from the Report form, the Report Approval form is displayed.
Use this form to select a report to approve. Approving a report means that a database attribute
is set from not approved (the default) to approved. This approval status provides a way for
you to flag reports that you have run and verified that the output data is valid. When a report
is revised, the approval status is automatically reset to not approved.
Options
Number The 24-character unique name (also called short name) of the report record.
Description The 40-character description of the report record.
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report form, select Approve.
The Report Approval form is displayed.
2. From the displayed list, select a report to approve. Then click Accept.
The Approval form is displayed.

Specification
5. Piping Job
For more information, see the Approve Report section of the PD_Report Users
Guide.
183
________________
5.5.4.5 Report Multiple Submit Form

When you select Multi-Create from the Report form, the Report Multiple Submit form is
displayed.
Use this form to submit multiple reports at the same time.
Fields and Options

Number The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the report
file in the project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the report file short
name.
Description The 40-character descriptive name of the report file.

184
________________ Report Multiple Submit Form
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report form, select Multi-Create.
The Report Multiple Submit form is displayed.
2. Select Reports for Submission
From the displayed list, select the reports to submit. Highlighed reports are selected;
select a highlighted report to remove the highlight and to not submit the report.
printed.
4. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit to Batch Immediately) or

later (Delayed Submit to Batch). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date
and time that the report is to be submitted.
5. Click Accept to submit the reports.
Specification
5. Piping Job
185
________________
5.5.5 Report Management Defaults Form

When you select Report Management Data from the Report Manager form, the Report
Management Defaults form is displayed.
This form creates a record in the project control database of the node name and path of the
report definition files. This option is used primarily for setup.
Fields
Report Path Specifies the default path of the report output files.
It is recommended that you not send output reports to your systems

temporary (that is, tmp or temp) directory.
Report Node Specifies the default node name of the system on which report output
files are located.
Report Format Path Specifies the default path of the format files.
Report Format Node Specifies the default node name of the system on which
format files are located.
Report Discrimination Data Path Specifies the default path of the discrimination
data files.
186
________________ Report Management Defaults Form
Report Discrimination Data Node Specifies the default node name of the system
on which discrimination data files are located.
Report Search Criteria Data Path Specifies the default path of the report search
criteria data files.
Report Search Criteria Data Node Specifies the default node name of the system
on which report search criteria data files are located.
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report Manager form, select Report Management Data.
The Report Management Defaults form is displayed.
2. Accept or Exit
In the fields provided, key in the default paths and node names for the report output
files, format files, discrimination data files, and search criteria data files. Then click
Accept.
Specification
5. Piping Job
187
________________
188
________________ Piping Job Specification Tables
6. Piping Job Specification Tables

Nonphysical data such as branch calculations or gasket separation are stored in the Spec Table
Library or hard-coded in the system. The Spec Tables for US practice are delivered in the
following files:
\win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pjstb.l - object library

\win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pjstb.l.t - text library
These libraries contain the Piping Job Specification tables and the other special tables which
contain nonphysical data.
The data in the Spec Table Library falls into two basic categories.
Specification Tables - Referenced in the Piping Materials Class Specification Data of

the Material Reference Database. See page 190.
RDB Tables - Referenced in the Component Placement and Material TakeOff forms
of the Project Data Manager. See page 215.
You can use the Piping Job Specification Tables command to create a new Piping Job
Specification Table library or to create, modify, or delete tables in an existing library. See
page 239.
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
189
________________
6.1 PJS Tables and Functions

The following special tables and functions are provided in the Spec Table Library. These
table/equation names are defined in the Piping Materials Class Specification Table of the
Specification Material Reference Database.
Temperature and Pressure Service Limits table
Nominal Piping Diameter table
Thickness Data table
Materials Data table
Piping Wall Thickness equation
Branch Reinforcement calculation
Branch Insertion table
Gasket Separation table
Fluid Code table
190
________________ Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table
6.1.1 Temperature and Pressure Service Limits

Table
The temperature and pressure service limits table includes the sets of temperatures and
pressures that define the boundaries of acceptability for a piping materials class. These limits
can be dictated by factors such as strength of components and materials used. You must
insure that each of the components included in the piping materials class meet the indicated
temperature and pressure limits.
You can define both positive and negative values for temperature. However, you can only
define positive values for pressure. The units of measure for the pressure and temperature
values in the table are defined as a part of the table description.
The system uses the information in this table to insure:
The highest temperature from the TDB does not exceed the highest temperature value in
the table
The lowest temperature in the TDB is not less than the lowest value in the table
For a given temperature, the pressure from the table is not less than any of the
corresponding pressure(s) from the TDB.
This table is limited to 100 temperature and pressure values.
Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition LWWWW
! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ
! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ
No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1
Input_Interpolation 1, Next_One
Units= DF, PSIG
! Temperature Pressure
WWWW ZZZZZZ
WWWW ZZZZZZ
WWWW ZZZZZZ
WWWW ZZZZZZ
WWWW ZZZZZZ
WWWW ZZZZZZ
WWWW ZZZZZZ
WWWW ZZZZZZ
WWWW ZZZZZZ
END
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
191
________________
Example
Table_Data_Definition L1001
! Description= B16.5 CL150-1.1, -20 to 800
! By=DCG Ckd By=DG Rev=0 Date=13-Feb-1987
Units= DF, PSIG
! Temperature Pressure
-20 285
100 285
200 260
300 230
400 200
500 170
600 140
650 125
700 110
750 95
800 80
END
Parameters
Table_Data_Definition (character-6) This parameter specifies the name of the
Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table. These tables use the following naming
conventions.
first character: L
second character: the pressure rating of the piping materials class as defined by the
following code:
1= CL150 8= GRAVHD K= CL5000

2= CL300 9= OTHER L= CL6000
3= CL400 A= CL125 M= CL9000
4= CL600 F= CL800 N= CL10000
5= CL900 G= CL2000 R= CL15000
6= CL1500 H= CL3000 T= CL20000
7= CL2500 J= CL4500 V= CL30000
third, fourth, and fifth characters: numbers from 001 through 999 used to make the
table name unique.
Input_Interpolation 1, Next_One This statement tells the system to interpolate

between known values for the temperature value. The statement must be included as
shown in the table format for the desired interpolation to take place.
Temperature (real) This field identifies the maximum temperature value. You
can use both positive (+) and negative (-) values. Values are assumed to be positive
unless otherwise indicated.
192
________________ Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table
Pressure (real) This field identifies the value for pressure corresponding to the
previously defined temperature. Negative (-) values are not accepted in this field.
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
193
________________
6.1.2 Nominal Piping Diameters Table

The NPD Tables consists of the diameters for piping and tubing which are valid within any
piping materials class which references this table. The system verifies any NPD input in the
Piping Design TDB.
Neutral File Format
Table_Data_Definition DWWW
Units= NPD_IN
! Diam
WWWWW
WWWWW
WWWWW
WWWWW
WWWWW
WWWWW
WWWWW
END
This table can also be used to define the equivalency for English and metric diameters. The
output column defines the English equivalent for the matching metric size.
Neutral File Format - English/Metric

Equivalency
Table_Data_Definition DWWW
Units= NPD_MM, NPD_IN
! Metric Diam
WWWWW WWWWW
WWWWW WWWWW
WWWWW WWWWW
WWWWW WWWWW
WWWWW WWWWW
END
194
________________ Nominal Piping Diameters Table
Examples
Table_Data_Definition D036
! Description= From 0.5 to 36
! By=NP Ckd By=DG Rev=0 Date=22-Jan-1987
Units= NPD_IN
! Diam
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
END
Table_Data_Definition DB001
! Description= From 6mm to 900mm (0.375 to 36)
! By=aw Ckd By= Rev=1 Date=17_jul 1989
Units= NPD_MM, NPD_IN
! metric diam, imperial diam

10 0.375
15 0.5
20 0.75
25 1
40 1.5
50 2
80 3
100 4
150 6
200 8
250 10
300 12
350 14
400 16
450 18
500 20
550 22
600 24
650 26
700 28
750 30
800 32
850 34
900 36
END
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
195
________________
Parameters
Table_Data_Definition (character 6) This field identifies the name of the NPD
table. These tables use the following naming conventions:
first character: D
second, third, and fourth characters: numbers from 001 through 999 used to make
the table name unique.
Diam - Nominal Piping Diameter (integer) This field identifies the value for
nominal diameter. You can use the value ET_AL to indicate that any nominal diameter
value from the TDB which is equal to or greater than the value in the preceding line is
an acceptable nominal diameter for the PMC.
196
________________ Thickness Data Tables
6.1.3 Thickness Data Tables

Thickness data is determined as a function of the table name and nominal piping diameter.
These tables include the minimum, retirement, thread, and preferred thicknesses required in
the calculation of piping wall thickness. The tables provide the actual thickness; not a
schedule. Therefore, there must be an individual entry for each diameter. You cannot use an
NPD range. PDS requires that the schedule/thickness values be in inches.
Neutral File Format
Table_Data_Definition TWWWW
Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN
! Diam Min Thick Ret Thick Thread Thick Preferred Schedules/Thicknesses
WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ
END
Example
Table_Data_Definition TA501
! Description= A,0.063CA,0.0071D<=24, 0.0075D>=26
! By=DCG Ckd By=DG Rev=0 Date=31-Jan-1987
Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN
! Diam Min Thick Ret Thick Thread Thick Preferred Schedules/Thicknesses
0.5 .147 .06 - S-160 - - - -
0.75 .154 .06 - S-XS - - - -
1 .179 .06 - S-XS - - - -
1.5 .2 .06 - S-XS - - - -
2 .154 .06 - S-STD - - - -
3 .216 .06 - S-STD - - - -
4 .237 .07 - S-STD - - - -
6 .28 .1 - S-STD - - - -
8 .250 .1 - S-STD - - - -
10 .250 .1 - S-STD - - - -
12 .250 .1 - S-STD - - - -
14 .250 .12 - S-STD - - - -
16 .250 .12 - S-STD - - - -
18 .250 .12 - S-STD - - - -
20 .250 .13 - S-STD - - - -
22 .250 .15 - S-STD - - - -
24 .250 .15 - S-STD - - - -
26 .3125 .17 - S-10 S-STD - - -
28 .3125 .19 - S-10 S-STD - - -
30 .3125 .20 - S-10 S-STD - - -
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
197
________________
32 .3125 .21 - S-10 S-STD - - -

34 .3125 .23 - S-STD - - - -
36 .3125 .24 - S-STD S-XS - - -
END
Parameters
Table_Data_Definition - Thickness Data Table Name (character 6) This field
identifies the name of the table. These tables use the following naming conventions:
first character: T
second character: code which combines the criteria type with the maximum size for
which threaded components are used in the piping materials class, as defined below.
Criteria 1 applies to carbon steels and low-alloy steels; criteria 2 applies to
aluminum alloys, stainless steels, and non-ferrous alloys.
A= Criteria 1 with no threaded components

B= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 1 inch diameter
C= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 1.5 inch diameter
D= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 2 inch diameter
F= Criteria 2 with no threaded components
G= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 1 inch diameter
H= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 1.5 inch diameter
I= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 2 inch diameter
Z= Special criteria
third character: the corrosion allowance of the piping materials class for which the
table is intended, per the following criteria:
1= None C= 304 clad P= Polyester lined

2= 0.020" D= 304L clad Q= Polypropylene lined
3= 0.030" E= 316 clad R= PTFE lined
4= 0.050" F= 316L clad S= Saran lined
5= 0.063" G= 317 clad T= Teflon lined
6= 0.10" H= 317L clad U= TK31 lined
7= 0.125" J= 321 clad V= R11 lined
8= 0.188" L= Cement lined W= R15 lined
9= 0.250" M= Epoxy lined X= R18 lined
A= 405 clad N= Glass lined Y= Other 1
B= 410S clad O= Kynar lined Z= Other 2
fourth and fifth characters: numbers from 01 through 99 used to make the table
name unique.
Diam - Nominal Piping Diameter (integer) This parameter identifies the desired
value for nominal diameter.
198
________________ Thickness Data Tables
Min Thick - Minimum Required Thickness (real) This parameter represents the
least thickness, inclusive of corrosion allowance and mill tolerance, which is acceptable
for a given NPD. Either a positive number or a blank entry must be provided. This
value is only used in piping wall thickness calculations.
Ret Thick - Retirement Thickness (real) This parameter represents the least
thickness, exclusive of corrosion allowance, thread allowance, or mill tolerance, which
is acceptable for a given NPD. Either a positive number or a blank entry must be
provided. This value is only used in piping wall thickness calculations.
Thread Thick - Thread Thickness (real) This parameter represents the thickness
for threaded pipe that must be added to the calculated wall thickness to account for the
presence of threads. Either a positive number or a blank entry must be provided. It is
only used in piping wall thickness calculations.
Preferred Schedule/Thicknesses 1 through 6 (real) These parameters represent

the schedules and/or thicknesses you prefer be used as a result of a piping wall
thickness calculation. Values in the table are arranged in ascending thickness sequence.
The system rounds the calculated wall thickness to the next higher preferred thickness.
You are restricted to a limit of six preferred thicknesses. PDS requires that these values
be in inches.
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
199
________________
6.1.4 Materials Data Table

The Materials Data Table consists of the materials data that is a function of the table name,
material grade, wall thickness range, and temperature. These tables include the properties
which are required for the calculation of piping wall thickness. You must insure that units of
measure used in the Materials Table are consistent with those used in the corresponding
Temperature-Pressure Table(s).
Note that you can express the mill tolerance as either a thickness percentage or a tolerance
value. Only one value can exist per table entry. If values exist for both, the system only uses
the mill thickness percentage.
The system uses the materials grade and temperature to access the information in the table and
provide the values of thickness range, coefficient Y, allowable stress (S), and the applicable
mill tolerance. Once the actual thickness is calculated for the component, the calculation
software compares that value with the thickness range. If the thickness range is exceeded, the
next entry in the materials table for the applicable materials grade and temperature is sought
and the calculation process is repeated.
Neutral File Format
Table_Data_Definition MWWW
Units= INT, DF, IN, IN, DEC, PSI, DEC, IN
! Mill Tol
! Mat Gr Temp Thick Range Y S % Value
WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ
END
200
________________ Materials Data Table
Example
Table_Data_Definition ML01
! Description= ASTM A53-B, A106, API 5L-B
! By=DCG Ckd By=DG Rev=0 Date=24-Feb-87
Units= INT, DF, IN, IN, DEC, PSI, DEC, IN
! Mill Tolrnce
! Mat Gr Temp Thick Range Y S % Value
142 -20 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
142 100 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
142 200 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
142 300 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
142 400 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
142 500 - - .4 18900 12.5 -
142 600 - - .4 17300 12.5 -
142 650 - - .4 17000 12.5 -
142 700 - - .4 16500 12.5 -
142 750 - - .4 13000 12.5 -
142 800 - - .4 10800 12.5 -
162 -20 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
162 100 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
162 200 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
162 300 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
162 400 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
162 500 - - .4 18900 12.5 -
162 600 - - .4 17300 12.5 -
162 650 - - .4 17000 12.5 -
162 700 - - .4 16500 12.5 -
162 750 - - .4 13000 12.5 -
162 800 - - .4 10800 12.5 -
116 -20 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
116 100 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
116 200 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
116 300 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
116 400 - - .4 20000 12.5 -
116 500 - - .4 18900 12.5 -
116 600 - - .4 17300 12.5 -
116 650 - - .4 17000 12.5 -
116 700 - - .4 16500 12.5 -
116 750 - - .4 13000 12.5 -
116 800 - - .4 10800 12.5 -
END
Parameters
Table_Data_Definition - Materials Data Table Name (character 6) This field
identifies the number of the table. These tables use the following naming conventions:
first character: M
second character: the applicable design code, per the following convention:
A= ASME Section I [Power Boilers] D= ASME Section VIII-1 [Unfired

B= ASME Section III [Nuclear] Vessels]
C= Do not use
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
201
________________
E= ASME Section VIII-2 [Unfired N= ANSI-B31.5 [Refrigeration]

Vessels] P= ANSI-B31.8 [Gas Transmission]
J= ANSI-B31.1 [Power] Q= ANSI-B31.9 [Building Services]
K= ANSI-B31.2 [Fuel Gas] T= API
L= ANSI-B31.3 [Petroleum] V= AWWA
M= ANSI-B31.4 [Oil Transport]
third and fourth characters: numbers from 01 through 99 used to make the table
name unique.
Input_Interpolation 2, Next_One This statement must be included as shown for

interpolation to take place. Interpolation is used for all the output fields, if required.
Mat Gr - Material Grade (integer - standard note 145) This code-listed

parameter identifies the materials grade. This compound attribute includes the code,
specification, grade, temper, and joint efficiency to be used for the component.
Temp - Temperature (real) This field identifies the applicable temperature for a
set of material properties.
Thick - Wall Thickness Range - low (real)
Range - Wall Thickness Range - high (real) These fields identify the lower and
upper wall thickness bounds for a set of material properties. You can enter positive
numbers or blanks. A blank indicates that the properties apply regardless of the
thickness of the component. You cannot define this range in terms of schedule.
Y - Coefficient Y (real) This parameter represents the coefficient Y corresponding

to the previously defined parameters in the line. You can enter a positive number or a
blank.
S - Allowable Stress (real) This parameter represents the allowable stress

corresponding to the previously defined parameters in the line. You can enter a positive
number or a blank. S is the basic allowable stress for the material excluding casting,
joint or structural grade quality factor (E).
Mill Tol % - Mill Thickness Percentage (real) This parameter represents the per
cent of the wall thickness that is to be considered as mill tolerance for pipe material.
Enter the mill tolerance to be considered for the material as a percent of nominal
thickness; such as 12.5%.
Mill Tol Value - Mill Thickness Value (real) This parameter represents the actual
wall thickness that is to be considered as mill tolerance for plate material. Enter the
value of mill tolerance to be considered for the material; such as 0.01 inch.
202
________________ Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations
6.1.5 Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement

Equations
These equations define formulas for the calculation of piping wall thickness and branch
reinforcement to resist positive pressure. The actual equations and their logic are hardcoded
in the software. PDS requires that the thickness value be defined in inches.
Thickness equations have project unique names which must follow the following convention:
first character: E
second character: the applicable design code, per the following convention:
A= ASME Section I [Power Boilers]

B= ASME Section III [Nuclear]
C= Do not use
D= ASME Section VIII-1 [Unfired Vessels]
E= ASME Section VIII-2 [Unfired Vessels]
J= ANSI-B31.1 [Power]
K= ANSI-B31.2 [Fuel Gas]
L= ANSI-B31.3 [Petroleum]
M= ANSI-B31.4 [Oil Transport]
N= ANSI-B31.5 [Refrigeration]
P= ANSI-B31.8 [Gas Transmission]
Q= ANSI-B31.9 [Building Services]
T= API
V= AWWA
third and fourth characters: numbers from 01 through 99 used to make the equation
name unique.
If the equation name is provided as part of the definition *Cyyy in the

Schedule/Thickness attribute of the Piping Commodity Specification Data table, the
equation name must be limited to the format Ex; no third or fourth character can be
defined.
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
203
________________
Delivered Equations
The thickness and branch reinforcement logic for the following equations are hardcoded in the
software.
EJ01
Source - ANSI-B31.1.1986 [Power Piping]

Thickness logic from paragraph 104.1, equation 3
Reinforcement logic from paragraph 104.3.1(D)
PD
tm = _________ + A
2(SE+Py)
EL01
Source - ANSI-B31.3c.1986 [Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping]

Thickness logic from paragraph 304.1, equation 3a
Reinforcement logic from paragraph 304.3.3 & Code - Appendix H
PD
t = _________
2(SE+PY)
where
P Design pressure
D Pipe outside diameter
S Allowable stress read from the Materials table
E Joint quality factor determined from the wall thickness attribute Cxxx where
xxx is 100 times E
Y Coefficient Y read from the Materials table
A Additional Thickness (in inches)
Refer to the spec access example below for more information on how the wall thickness
equation is used to determine the actual wall thickness value.
General Considerations
The following considerations apply to both thickness equations and branch reinforcement
calculations.
Pressures and temperatures used in thickness/branch reinforcement calculations are

derived from data in the Piping Design TDB. Both normal and alternate pressure and
temperature conditions are considered. If actual values exist for the normal design or
the alternate design pressure/temperatures, the corresponding operating conditions are
ignored. If default values exist for BOTH sets of design conditions, both normal and
alternate operating conditions are used. At least one complete set of conditions must be
defined.
204
________________ Delivered Equations
Once the proper pressure and temperature sets are determined, their units of measure are
converted to those used in the Temperature-Pressure Table associated with the Piping
Materials Class to which the component belongs. Refer to the descriptions of the
Temperature-Pressure Table and Materials Table to insure consistency between units of
measure. Conversions are performed using the procedures and conversion factors
defined for the Units of Measure in the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide.
Only positive pressure is considered. The system reports an error if you request a
thickness calculation involving a vacuum condition (negative pressure).
Independent sets of thickness/reinforcement calculations are carried out for each

applicable pressure/temperature set. In each calculation set, table values that are
temperature dependent are determined on the basis of the temperature applicable to the
calculation set being considered. The thicker calculated thickness is used.
Thickness Equations
The following considerations apply to thickness equations.
Thickness calculations are triggered by specifying an equation name in the

Schedule/Thickness attribute of the Piping Commodity Specification Data table. An
asterisk (*) followed by a name (of the form Cyyy) defines the specific calculation or
table lookup to be used for wall thickness. The letters that form this code have the
following meaning:
C is the schedule/thickness for the applicable end of the component is determined

by calculations using the thickness equation defined in the thickness_equation
attribute of the Piping Materials Class Data table.
yyy is the casting, joint or structural grade quality factor (E) times 100. This factor is
one of the parameters used in the thickness calculation. If you are defining a
calculation to be performed on a seamless fitting (E=1) but want to match the
thickness for the mating welded pipe (E=0.85), the quality factor for the pipe should
be entered here.
For components with ends having different nominal diameters, independent sets of
thickness determinations are performed for each NPD. One or more ends may need to
be calculated, as determined by specific *Cyyy entries in the Piping Commodity
Specification Data table. The larger thickness (calculated or predefined) is used. For
example:
A 20" x 10" reducer is defined in the Piping Commodity Table to have a *Cyyy, 20"
end and a 0.55" thick, 10" end. The calculation of the 20" end results in a 0.5"
thickness. A 0.55" thick reducer is used.
A 24" x 20" reducer is defined in the Piping Commodity Table to have a *Cyyy, 24"
end and a *Cyyy, 20" end. The calculation of the 24" end results in a 0.6"
thickness. The calculation of the 20" end results in a 0.5" thickness. A 0.6" thick
reducer is used.
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
205
________________
All thickness calculations involve a casting, joint, or structural grade quality factor (E).
The value for this factor is yyy/100, where yyy is defined in the entry *Cyyy made
under the Schedule Thickness attribute for the Commodity Item under consideration.
Branch Reinforcement
The following considerations apply to branch reinforcement calculations.
The need to perform a branch reinforcement calculation is triggered by
the placement of a generic branch component with the actual item name determined
from a branch table. (See Branch Insertion Tables.)
the presence of more than one item name in the Preferred Branch AABBCC Codes
fields of the applicable branch table.
the applicable branch reinforcement being either a reinforcing weld or a reinforcing

pad.
All calculations involve a casting, joint, or structural grade quality factor (E). The value
for this factor is yyy/100, where yyy is defined in the Modifier attribute for entries with
an item name of PIPING.
The fillet welds joining reinforcing pads to the header and to the branch are considered
in determining the available reinforcement area.
Spec Access
The execution of a pipe wall thickness calculation is performed when the variable
PIPE_OD_n is encountered in the physical data definition of a pipe or component. Therefore,
pipe outside diameter must be calculated or retrieved from a table before the wall thickness
can be used as part of a table name.
Once the actual thickness is calculated, it is compared against the thickness range in the
Materials table and the retirement thickness in the Thickness Data table. The system uses the
greater of these values as the uncorroded wall thickness. Then the system adds the corrosion
allowance from the PMC, the thread thickness from the wall thickness table, and the mill
tolerance from the Materials table. This revised thickness is compared against the minimum
thickness value in the Thickness Data table. The larger of these two values is compared
against the preferred thickness value in the Thickness Data table, and the next largest
preferred value is used for table look-ups and is stored in the design database.
If the Thickness Data table uses schedules as preferred thickness, the schedules are translated
to an actual thickness by a table look-up from a table of the form
MALWT//Term_type//shc_thick//generic_flag//weight_code
206
________________ Delivered Equations
and output 2 gives the actual wall thickness.
Verification of Schedule Thickness

You can set an option in the RDB to determine how the piping segment override
schedule/thickness value will be handled during wall thickness calculations. By default, the
piping segment schedule/thickness override is used in place of the value determined from the
Piping Job Specification.
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
207
________________
6.1.6 Branch Insertion Tables

A branch insertion table defines the selection criteria for tee and lateral branches. You must
specify the type of wye or cross to be placed in the model and specify the reinforcement data.
Branch tables define the reinforcement to be used at tee and lateral branches in the piping
system as a function of the acute angle of intersection and the nominal diameters for the
intersecting lines. These tables do not include the reinforcement required at Ys and crosses.
For them, the required reinforcement must be specified in Piping Design.
The types of tee branch connections include branch weld, coupling, threadolet, reducing tee,
tee with reducing insert, nipolet, branch weld with reinforcing pad, sockolet, tee, weldolet, tee
with reducing bushing, and reducing tee with reducer(s).
The system accesses the branch table when placing a component at an intersection when no
reinforcement component has been specifically defined.
The system uses the information in this table and the header nominal diameter (first size) and
branch nominal diameter (second size) to provide the item name of the component to be used
at the intersection. Neither interpolation nor extrapolation is allowed.
Neutral File Format
Table_Data_Definition BWWWW_WW
Units= NPD_IN, NPD_IN, AN*6, AN*6, AN*6
! Nom Diam Preferred Branch
! Header Branch AABBCC Codes
WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ
END
208
________________ Branch Insertion Tables
Example
Table_Data_Definition BA501_90
! Description= A,0.063CA, Use with TA501
! By=DCG Ckd By=DCG Rev=3 Date=17-Aug-1988
0.75 0.75 6Q3C22 - -
1 0.75 6Q3C24 - -
1 1 6Q3C22 - -
1.5 0.75 6Q3C24 - -
1.5 1 6Q3C24 - -
1.5 1.5 6Q3C22 - -
2 0.75 6Q3C74 - -
2 1 6Q3C74 - -
2 1.5 6Q3C74 - -
2 2 6Q3C22 - -
3 0.75 6Q3C74 - -
3 1 6Q3C74 - -
3 1.5 6Q3C74 - -
> 3 2 6Q3C73 - -
3 3 6Q3C22 - -
4 0.75 6Q3C74 - -
4 1 6Q3C74 - -
4 1.5 6Q3C74 - -
> 4 2 6Q3C73 - -
> 4 3 6Q3C73 - -
4 4 6Q3C22 - -
6 0.75 6Q3C74 - -
6 1 6Q3C74 - -
6 1.5 6Q3C74 - -
> 6 2 6Q3C73 - -
> 6 3 6Q3C73 - -
> 6 4 6Q3C73 - -
6 6 6Q3C22 - -
8 0.75 6Q3C74 - -
8 1 6Q3C74 - -
8 1.5 6Q3C74 - -
> 8 2 6Q3C73 - -
> 8 3 6Q3C73 - -
> 8 4 6Q3C73 - -
> 8 6 6Q3C73 - -
8 8 6Q3C22 - -
10 0.75 6Q3C74 - -
10 1 6Q3C74 - -
10 1.5 6Q3C74 - -
> 10 2 6Q3C73 - -
> 10 3 6Q3C73 - -
> 10 4 6Q3C73 - -
10 6 6Q3C82 - -
10 8 6Q3C82 - -
10 10 6Q3C22 - -
12 0.75 6Q3C74 - -
12 1 6Q3C74 - -
12 1.5 6Q3C74 - -
> 12 2 6Q3C73 - -
> 12 3 6Q3C73 - -
> 12 4 6Q3C73 - -
12 6 6Q3C82 - -
12 8 6Q3C82 - -
12 10 6Q3C82 - -
12 12 6Q3C22 - -
END
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
209
________________
Parameters
Table_Data_Definition - Branch Insertion Table Name (character 6) This field
identifies the name of the table. This name results from the compounding of the Branch
Table entry defined in the Piping Materials Class with the acute angle of intersection
between the header and the branch.
These tables use the following naming conventions:
first character: B
second character: a code which combines the criteria type with the maximum size
for which threaded components are used in the PMC, as defined below. Criteria 1
applies to carbon steels and low-alloy steels; criteria 2 applies to aluminum alloys,
stainless steels and non-ferrous alloys.

Z= Special criteria
third character: the corrosion allowance of the piping materials class for which the
table is intended, per the following criteria:

7= 0.125" J= 321 clad V= R11 lined
fourth and fifth characters: numbers from 01 through 99 used to make the table
name unique.
The second part of the table name defines the acute angle of intersection. Negative
values and values less than 45 degrees or greater than 90 degrees are not valid.
However, when dealing with branch reinforcements, negative values and values less
than 20 degrees or greater than 90 degrees are not valid (per ANSI B31.1 and ANSI
B31.3).
210
________________ Branch Insertion Tables
The data fields are sorted by header NPD and then by branch NPD.
Nom Diam Header - NPD for Run (integer) This field identifies the nominal
diameter of the header at the intersection. This is the member with the largest nominal
diameter.
Nom Diam Branch - NPD for Branch (integer) This field identifies the nominal
diameter of the branch member at the intersection. This is the member with the
smallest nominal diameter.
Preferred Branch AABBCC Codes (character 6) These field identify the

commodity item name of the component used to reinforce the intersection.
If only one item name is listed, no branch reinforcement calculation is performed.

The specified item is placed at the intersection.
If two or more item names apply in one line, the system calculates the branch
reinforcement thickness. The system tests the listed item names sequentially (from
left to right) until the applicable strength criteria are satisfied.
Therefore, these codes should be arranged in ascending strength sequence (for

example, reinforcing welds, followed by reinforcing pads, followed by weldolets.)
Typically, the codes are from one of the following types:
Reinforcing elements, such as reinforcing welds and pads.
Weld-on components reinforcing the intersection such as saddles and weldolets.
Weld-in components actually making the intersection such as laterals and tees.
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
211
________________
6.1.7 Gasket Separation Table

These tables define the gasket gap to be used for a given nominal diameter and maximum
temperature.
For each bolted end, the system uses the applicable table, the NPD of the end, and the
maximum temperature for the gasket to be used at the end, to determine the gap thickness to
be used at the end. Lines in this table are sorted by NPD first and maximum temperature
second.
Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition GWWW_WWWWWW
Units= NPD_IN, DF, IN
! Diam TMx Gaskt Gap
WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ
WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ
WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ
WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ
WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ
WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ
WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ
WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ
WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ
END
Example
Table_Data_Definition G001_1500
! Description= SP-1000 deg F , RJ-1001 deg F
! By=DCG Ckd By=DCG Rev=0 Date=24-Jun-1987
Units= NPD_IN, DF, IN
! Diam TMx Gaskt Gap
0.5 1000 .125
0.75 1000 .125
1 1000 .125
1.5 1000 .125
2 1000 .125
3 1000 .125
4 1000 .125
6 1000 .125
8 1000 .125
10 1000 .125
12 1000 .125
14 1000 .125
16 1000 .125
18 1000 .125
20 1000 .125
24 1000 .125
0.5 1001 .16
0.75 1001 .16
1 1001 .16
1.5 1001 .16
2 1001 .12
3 1001 .12
212
________________ Gasket Separation Table
4 1001 .12
6 1001 .12
8 1001 .16
10 1001 .16
12 1001 .19
14 1001 .22
16 1001 .31
18 1001 .31
20 1001 .38
24 1001 .44
END
Parameters
Table_Data_Definition - Gasket Gap Table Name (character 6) This field
identifies the name of the table. This name results from the compounding of the entry
defined in the Piping Materials Class with the rating of the bolted end to which the
gasket gap applies. These tables use the following naming conventions:
first character: G
next three characters: numbers from 001 through 999 used to make the table name
unique.
The second part of the table name is the rating of the components to which it
applies. The characters CL and # are not included in the rating designation.
Diam - Nominal Piping Diameter This field identifies the applicable NPD value.
The units of measure used to define the NPD must match the NPD units to be used in
the Piping model.
TMx - Maximum Temperature This field identifies the maximum temperature for
the gasket as defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute
5). (The system must find a match of the commodity item temperature and the value in
this column for successful retrieval of data.)
The units of measure used to define the temperature must be the same as the units used
in the Temperature Pressure Service Limits table.
Gasket Gap This field identifies the full gasket gap to be used.
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
213
________________
6.1.8 Fluid Code Table

Fluid Code tables can be used to limit the number of fluid codes which are valid for a
particular Piping Material Class. A Fluid Code table works much like the Diameters table.
Where the Diameters Table contains a valid set of diameters for a PMC, the Fluid Code table
contains a set of valid Fluid Codes for a PMC.
To use a Fluid Code table,
Specify the name of the Fluid Code Table in the fluid_code attribute of the Piping
Materials Class definition.
Set the Fluid Code Control toggle to Yes on the Piping Data Control form of the
Project Data Manager. Refer to the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference
Guide for more information on this form.
Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition FC001
! Description= By Process Vendor
! By=SCC Ckd By=SCC Rev=1 Date=12-OCT-90
Units= INT
521
522
524
527
530
533
536
539
542
545
550
END
Parameters
Table_Data_Definition (character 6) This field identifies the name of the Fluid
Code table. These tables use the following naming conventions:
first and second character: FC
third, forth, and fifth characters: numbers from 001 to 999 used to make the table
name unique.
Fld Cd (integer) This field list the code list numbers for the valid fluid codes from
code list set 125.
214
________________ RDB Tables
6.2 RDB Tables

The following reference data tables are defined in the Spec Table Library. These tables
required to provide basic data for the performance of the software.
TNF Table Name
G02 COMMODITY_ITEM_NAME
G04 BEND_DEFLECTION
G06 PIPE_RUN_LENGTH
G07 PIPE_LENGTH
G11 BOLT_LENGTH
WELD_TYPE_TABLE
WELD_C10031
DRV_WELD_DEF
CommodityCode_BLT (Bolt Commodity Code Table)
CommodityCode_GKT (Gasket Diameter Table)
FIELD_FIT_LENGTH
Component_Mirror_Table
Operator_Mirror_Table
Default_End_Prep
MTO Tables and Functions
The system uses the settings in the Component Placement and Material TakeOff forms of the
Project Data Manager to determine the applicable names for these basic tables.
Refer to Table Formats and Naming Conventions, page 303, for information
on the basic conventions used for PDS tables.
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
215
________________
6.2.1 Commodity Item Name Table (G02)

The commodity item name table is used when placing a component at the vertex of an
existing piping segment (in either automatic or manual component placement). It enables you
to relate the component types (1 to 70) hard-coded in the software with the applicable Item
Names. As the system processes the segment for component placement, it uses the derived
Item Name from this table to reference the Piping Commodity Specification data in the
Specification Material Reference Database.
When placing change of direction components, this table is used in conjunction with the Bend
Deflection Table.
The table name format that applies to this table is:
TNF=G02 COMMODITY_ITEM_NAME
Example
Table_Data_Definition COMMODITY_ITEM_NAME
! Description= Correlation of hardcoded component types and AABBCC codes
! By=GJH Ckd By=DCG Rev=2 Date=16-May-1989
Units= INT, AN*6
! Comp AABBCC
! Type Code
1 PIPING
2 TUBING
3 HOSE
4 6Q2C23
5 6Q2C01
6 6Q2C01
7 6Q2C76
8 6Q2C75
9 6Q2C56
10 6Q2C55
11 6Q3C45
12 6Q3C60
13 6Q2C47
14 6Q2C84
15 6Q3C47
16 6Q3C49
17 6Q3C50
18 6Q3C25
19 6Q3C47
20 6Q3C77
21 6Q3C82
22 6Q3C80
> 23 6Q3C88
> 24 6Q2C24
25 6Q1C76
26 -
27 -
28 6Q2C16
29 6Q2C19
30 6Q2C21
31 6Q2C08
32 -
33 -
34 -
216
________________ Commodity Item Name Table (G02)
35 -
36 -
37 -
38 IND
39 -
40 -
41 6Q2C49
42 6Q2C51
43 6Q2C53
44 6Q2C06
45 6Q3C89
END
The meaning of the various component types is outlined below:
Comp Type Definition

1 Piping (not used by the software)
2 Tubing (not used by the software)
3 Hose (not used by the software)
4 Concentric diameter change
5 Flange in bends
6 Flange in other components
7 90 degree directional change
8 45-90 degree directional change
9 45 degree directional change
10 < 45 degree directional change
11 True Y
12 Equal size cross (if not equal size, software will handle as a branch)
13 > 90 pipe bend
14 90 degree reducing elbow
15 Lateral (not used by the software)
16 Reducing lateral
17 Reducing run and branch lateral
18 Reducing run and branch tee
19 Lateral (not used by the software)
20 Elbolet (used by Compute for Elbolet under the Tap command)
21 Reinforcing weld
22 Reinforcing pad
23 Branch nipple
25-27 vent/drain valve A - C
28 end
29 plug
30 cap
31 blind flange
32-37 Closing component A - F
38-40 Instrument indicator A - C
41 5.625 degree bend
42 11.25 degree bend
43 22.5 degree bend
44 Orifice flange
45 In-line nipple
51-60 Pipe-like commodity item 1 - 10
61-70 Pipe-like model code 1 - 10
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
217
________________
If you do not want to place one of the above component types as part of automatic component
placement, place a hyphen (-) for the Item Name.
218
________________ Bend Deflection Table (G04)
6.2.2 Bend Deflection Table (G04)

The bend deflection table is used when placing a component at the vertex of an existing
piping segment (in either automatic or manual component placement). The system uses the
bend angle at the segment vertex to determine the type of component to be placed.
This table contains the following data
bend angle - low
bend angle - high
index into the Commodity Item Name table for a full size bend
index into the Commodity Item Name table for a reducing bend
This table defines which full size and reducing size component types will be placed for a
specified angle range. The angle is defined as the smallest angle that the continuation of one
pipe run makes with the other run. The component types are defined in the commodity item
name table. (See Commodity Item Name Table (G02), page 216.) A value of 0 for the type
indicates that no reducing component should be placed for an angle range.
The system uses the bend angle to search this table for the matching range of bend angles.
The system uses the index into the Commodity Item Name table for either a full size bend or a
reducing bend depending upon the nominal piping diameters of the line route segments that
form the bend. The system searches for an entry in the table where the angle is greater than or
equal to the low bend angle and less than the high bend angle.
You can define more than one bend deflection table for a project provided they are given
different names. For example, one table can apply to underground piping and the other to
aboveground piping. Refer to the Component Placement form in the Project Data
Manager for information on defining the bend deflection table for a project or model.
TNF=G04 BEND_DEFLECTION
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
219
________________
Example
Table_Data_Definition BEND_DEFLECTION
! Description= Component type to use as function of angle between runs
! By=EPZ Ckd By=DCG Rev=2 Date=09-Nov-1987
Units= DEC, DEC, INT, INT
! Angle Comp Type To Use
! Low High Full Red
0.1 44.9 10 0
44.9 45.1 9 0
45.1 89.9 8 0
89.9 90.1 7 14
90.1 179.9 13 0
END
The following listing shows the component types used in this example.
bend angle index

low high full size reducing size
0.1 44.9 10 ( < 45 trimmed bend) N/A
44.9 45.1 9 (45 bend) N/A
45.1 89.9 8 (45-90 trimmed bend) N/A
89.9 90.1 7 (90 bend) 14 (reducing 90 bend)
90.1 179.9 13 ( > 90 trimmed bend) N/A
220
________________ Segment Pipe Run Length Threshold Table (G06)
6.2.3 Segment Pipe Run Length Threshold Table

(G06)
This table enables you to define the minimum allowable segment run length which can be
placed in the model during centerline routing. The values defined in this table do not apply to
the segment run automatically created by the software when placing components end to end.
The Piping Designer insures that the length of any pipe run of a piping segment exceeds the
active segment run length threshold. The threshold is determined from this table as a function
of nominal piping diameter. The only exception to this is for the small pipe run required for
the offset of an eccentric reducer. This threshold is used to insure that the pipe run between
two connected bends exceeds the fabrication length of the two bends.
The value for nominal diameter is interpreted as follows:
Diam
Entry Range of Diameters Covered
n1 nominal diameter < n1
n2 n1 <= nominal diameter < n2
....
n8
n9 n8 <= nominal diameter
Using this scheme, you should look on the line following the actual segment NPD to
determine the minimum length. Only lengths greater than the minimum length in the table are
allowed. For example, if you are placing a segment with 12 inch NPD, you can only place
segments greater than .75 inches in length.
TNF=G06 PIPE_RUN_LENGTH
Example
Table_Data_Definition PIPE_RUN_LENGTH
! Description= Minimum allowable piping segment run length
! By=DCG Ckd By=GJH Rev=1 Date=04-Aug-1987
Units= NPD_IN, IN
! Diam Min Length
2 0.25
6 0.50
12 0.50
24 0.75
36 1.00
96 1.00
144 1.00
192 1.00
END
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
221
________________
6.2.4 Pipe Length Threshold Table (G07)

This table enables you to define the minimum and preferred allowable pipe lengths which can
be placed (manually or by automatic component placement).
The Piping Designer insures that the length of any pipe or tube exceeds the pipe length
threshold, as defined in this table. The threshold is determined as a function of the nominal
piping diameter. This table is used during model creation and model revision activities to
verify the nominal or theoretical pipe (or tube) length.
Any value for nominal diameter is interpreted as follows:
Diam
Entry Range of Diameters Covered
n1 nominal diameter < n1
....
n8
n9 n8 <= nominal diameter
Using this scheme, you should look on the line following the actual NPD to determine the
minimum length. Only lengths greater than the minimum length in the table are allowed. For
example, if you are placing a pipe with 12 inch NPD, you can only place pipe runs greater
than 3 inches in length.
For TNF=G07 PIPE_LENGTH
Example
Table_Data_Definition PIPE_LENGTH
! Description= Minimum and preferred allowable plain piping length
! By=DCG Ckd By=GJH Rev=1 Date=04-Aug-1987
Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN
! Min Preferred
! Diam Length Length
2 2 2
6 2 3
12 2 4
24 3 6
36 3 9
96 3 12
144 6 12
192 6 12
END
222
________________ Preferred Bolt Length Table (G11)
6.2.5 Preferred Bolt Length Table (G11)

The data for bolts and gaskets is a function of nominal diameter, end preparation for each
mating flange, and pressure rating for each mating flange. The bolt length table supplies data
for machine bolts, stud bolts, and cap screws. It determines the bolt data required for both
regular and bolt-thru bolts. This table enables you to define the low and high range for
calculated bolt lengths and the corresponding preferred or purchased lengths of the bolt.
You can define up to 300 entries in this table.
For TNF=G11 BOLT_LENGTH
Refer to the Report Manager Reference Guide for more information on bolt tables and bolt
table logic.
Example
Table_Data_Definition BOLT_LENGTH
! Description= Preferred bolt lengths (maximum of 300 entries)
! By=GJH Ckd By=DCG Rev=1 Date=04-Aug-1987
Units= IN, IN, IN
! Bolt Length Preferred
! Low High Bolt Length
0.0 1.5 1.5
1.5001 1.75 1.75
1.7501 2 2
2.0001 2.25 2.25
2.2501 2.5 2.5
2.5001 2.75 2.75
2.7501 3 3
3.0001 3.25 3.25
3.2501 3.5 3.5
3.5001 3.75 3.75
3.7501 4 4
4.0001 4.25 4.25
4.2501 4.5 4.5
4.5001 4.75 4.75
4.7501 5 5
5.0001 5.25 5.25
5.2501 5.5 5.5
5.5001 5.75 5.75
5.7501 6 6
6.0001 6.25 6.25
6.2501 6.5 6.5
6.5001 6.75 6.75
6.7501 7 7
7.0001 7.25 7.25
7.2501 7.5 7.5
7.5001 7.75 7.75
7.7501 8 8
8.0001 8.25 8.25
8.2501 8.5 8.5
8.5001 8.75 8.75
8.7501 9 9
9.0001 9.25 9.25
9.2501 9.5 9.5
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
223
________________
9.5001 9.75 9.75

9.7501 10 10
10.0001 10.25 10.25
10.2501 10.5 10.5
10.5001 10.75 10.75
10.7501 11 11
11.0001 11.25 11.25
11.2501 11.5 11.5
11.5001 11.75 11.75
11.7501 12 12
12.0001 12.25 12.25
12.2501 12.5 12.5
12.5001 12.75 12.75
12.7501 13 13
13.0001 13.25 13.25
13.2501 13.5 13.5
13.5001 13.75 13.75
13.7501 14 14
14.0001 14.25 14.25
14.2501 14.5 14.5
14.5001 14.75 14.75
14.7501 15 15
15.0001 15.25 15.25
15.2501 15.5 15.5
15.5001 15.75 15.75
15.7501 16 16
16.0001 16.25 16.25
16.2501 16.5 16.5
16.5001 16.75 16.75
16.7501 17 17
17.0001 17.25 17.25
17.2501 17.5 17.5
17.5001 17.75 17.75
17.7501 18 18
18.0001 18.25 18.25
18.2501 18.5 18.5
18.5001 18.75 18.75
18.7501 19 19
19.0001 19.25 19.25
19.2501 19.5 19.5
19.5001 19.75 19.75
19.7501 20 20
20.0001 20.25 20.25
20.2501 20.5 20.5
20.5001 20.75 20.75
20.7501 21 21
21.0001 21.25 21.25
21.2501 21.5 21.5
21.5001 21.75 21.75
21.7501 22 22
22.0001 22.25 22.25
22.2501 22.5 22.5
22.5001 22.75 22.75
22.7501 23 23
23.0001 23.25 23.25
23.2501 23.5 23.5
23.5001 23.75 23.75
23.7501 24 24
24.0001 24.25 24.25
24.2501 24.5 24.5
24.5001 24.75 24.75
24.7501 25 25
25.0001 25.25 25.25
25.2501 25.5 25.5
25.5001 25.75 25.75
25.7501 26 26
26.0001 26.25 26.25
26.2501 26.5 26.5
26.5001 26.75 26.75
224
________________
Preferred Bolt Length Table (G11)
26.7501 27 27
27.0001 27.25 27.25
27.2501 27.5 27.5
27.5001 27.75 27.75
27.7501 28 28
28.0001 28.25 28.25
28.2501 28.5 28.5
28.5001 28.75 28.75
28.7501 29 29
29.0001 29.25 29.25
29.2501 29.5 29.5
29.5001 29.75 29.75
29.7501 30 30
30.0001 30.25 30.25
30.2501 30.5 30.5
30.5001 30.75 30.75
30.7501 31 31
31.0001 31.25 31.25
31.2501 31.5 31.5
31.5001 31.75 31.75
31.7501 32 32
32.0001 32.25 32.25
32.2501 32.5 32.5
32.5001 32.75 32.75
32.7501 33 33
33.0001 33.25 33.25
33.2501 33.5 33.5
33.5001 33.75 33.75
33.7501 34 34
34.0001 34.25 34.25
34.2501 34.5 34.5
34.5001 34.75 34.75
34.7501 35 35
35.0001 35.25 35.25
35.2501 35.5 35.5
35.5001 35.75 35.75
35.7501 36 36
END
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
225
________________
6.2.6 Weld Type Table

This table defines the weld type code for a given pair of fabrication category values. The
fabrication category values are determined from the connect point data at each of the mating
welded ends.
WELD_TYPE_TABLE
Example
Table_Data_Definition Weld_Type_Table
! This Table nas NOT been Checked
Units= INT, INT, INT
! Fab Cat Fab Cat Weld Type
1 1 1
1 5 21
1 7 21
1 15 21
1 16 21
1 17 21
1 25 21
1 27 21
1 35 21
1 37 21
1 45 21
1 47 21
1 95 21
1 97 21
5 5 11
5 7 21
5 15 11
5 16 21
5 17 21
5 25 11
5 27 21
5 35 11
5 37 21
5 45 11
5 47 21
5 95 11
5 97 21
7 7 21
7 15 21
7 16 21
7 17 21
7 25 21
7 27 21
7 35 21
7 37 21
7 45 21
7 47 21
7 95 21
7 97 21
15 15 11
15 16 21
15 17 21
15 25 11
226
________________
Weld Type Table
15 27 21
15 35 11
15 37 21
15 45 11
15 47 21
15 95 11
15 97 21
16 16 12
16 17 21
16 25 21
16 27 21
16 35 21
16 37 21
16 45 21
16 47 21
16 95 21
16 97 21
17 17 21
17 25 21
17 27 21
17 35 21
17 37 21
17 45 21
17 47 21
17 95 21
17 97 21
25 25 11
25 27 21
25 35 11
25 37 21
25 45 11
25 47 21
25 95 11
25 97 21
27 27 21
27 35 21
27 37 21
27 45 21
27 47 21
27 95 21
27 97 21
35 35 11
35 37 21
35 45 11
35 47 21
35 95 11
35 97 21
37 37 21
37 45 21
37 47 21
37 95 21
37 97 21
45 45 11
45 47 21
45 95 11
45 97 21
47 47 21
47 95 21
47 97 21
95 95 11
95 97 21
97 97 21
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
227
________________
6.2.7 Weld Clearance Table

This table contains information obtained from the NPD and the Weld Type table, which are
retrieved from the piping model. Add a version of this table to the Physical Data Library for
each spec.
WELD_SpecName
Example
Table_Data_Definition WELD_1C0031
! Description= Weld Clearance Table
! By=XXX Ckd By=XXX Rev=1 Date=01-22-1999
Units= NPD_IN, INT, NPD_IN, INT, IN, IN
! Weld Weld
! NPD Type NPD Type Radius Overall
! From From To To Increase Length
1 1 2 25 6 18
3 1 4 25 8 24
5 1 6 25 10 30
7 1 8 25 6 18
9 1 10 20 10 18
9 21 10 22 12 24
9 23 10 25 14 30
11 1 12 25 10 30
END
Parameters
NPD From - NPD To (integer) These parameters identify the range of nominal
piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the weld in NPD units. The To
value must equal or exceed the From value.
Weld_Type_From - Weld_Type_To (integer) These parameters identify the range

of weld type values (from standard note 1100). The To value must equal or exceed the
From value.
Radius_Increase (integer - NPD Units) This parameter identifies the increase to

be applied to the NPD of the weld for use in generating a cylinder to represent the
construction tolerance envelope for the weld.
Overall_Length (integer) This parameter identifies the length of the cylinder for
the weld construction tolerance envelope.
228
________________ Weld Graphics Dimensions Table
6.2.8 Weld Graphics Dimensions Table

This table provides the dimensions used to generate the graphical representation of welds in a
DesignReview session. You may customize this table to modify the appearance of weld
graphics by weld type and diameter. The table name format that applies to this table is:
DRV_WELD_DEF
Example
Table_Data_Definition DRV_WELD_DEF
! Description= WELD GRAPHICS DIMENSIONS
! TNF=G12T By=XXX Ckd By=XX Rev=0 Date= 04-Oct-2000
Units= NPD_IN, INT, NPD_IN, INT, DEC, DEC
! From_NPD From_Weld_Type TO_NPD To_Weld_Type Weld_Dia_Increase Weld_Thickness_NPD_Units
2 10 7 22 0.25 0.25
6 12 10 22 0.25 0.25
8 10 12 22 0.25 0.25
END
Parameters
From NPD - TO _NPD (integer) These parameters identify the range of nominal
piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the weld in NPD units. The To
value must equal or exceed the From value.
From_Weld_Type - To_Weld_Type (integer) These parameters identify the range

of the weld type values (from standard note 1100). The To value must equal or exceed
the From value.
Weld_Dia_Increase (decimal) This parameter identifies the percentage increase to

be applied to the NPD of the weld for use in displaying a cylinder to represent the weld
in SmartPlant Review. For example, if the NPD is 6" and the increase is .25, the
diameter of the weld cylinder would be 7 1/2" (6 x 1.25 = 7.5).
Weld_Thickness (decimal) This parameter identifies the percentage to be applied

to the NPD of the weld to determine the thickness of the cylinder.
If this table is absent or if there is no NPD range encapsulating the WELD

NPD, the weld graphics dimensions will be determined as follows:
Diameter = 130% of the NPD at the weld.
Thickness = 25% of the NPD at the weld.

Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
229
________________
6.2.9 Bolt Commodity Code Table

This table is used if the Basis of Bolt Commodity Code is set to Bolt Commodity Code Table
in the Project Data Manager. The system uses the bolt length and bolt diameter to find the
commodity code in the table.
If you define a bolt commodity code which is less than 17 characters, you should code a
hyphen (-) in the third column.
Cmdty Code_BLT
Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW_BLT
! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ
! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ
Units= IN, IN, IN, AN*8, AN*8, AN*8
! Bolt Bolt Length Bolt Commodity Code
! Diam Low High 1 2 3
WWWWW WWWWWWW WWWWWWW ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ
END
230
________________ Gasket Diameter Table
6.2.10 Gasket Diameter Table

This table is used if the pds_sort_code for the gasket spec entry is set to _GKT. The system
uses the NPD to find the gasket outside and inside diameters.
Cmdty Code_GKT
Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW_GKT
! Gasket Diameter
! NPD Inside Outside
WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ
END
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
231
________________
6.2.11 Field Fit Length Table

This table defines the pipe length adjustment for a given weld type. The weld type is
determined from the connect point data at the mating welded ends.
This table is only used if the Field Fit Length option is activated on the Material Takeoff
Options form in the Project Data Manager. MTO reads the specified table and increases the
pipe length at each welded end of the pipe based on the weld type at that specific end.
Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition Fit_Length_Table
! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ
Units= INT, IN
! Weld Type Adjust.
1 ZZZZZZZ
11 ZZZZZZZ
21 ZZZZZZZ
22 ZZZZZZZ
232
________________ Component Mirror Table
6.2.12 Component Mirror Table

This table is used for components which require non-symmetrical mirroring. It defines a
mirror option for a given eden module. This table is called through the use of the Eden
keyword TOGGLE_<INT>, where <INT> is an integer value as defined below for Option 1.
Example
Table_Data_Definition Component_Mirror_Table
Units= AN*6, INT, INT, INT
! Model Code Option 1 Option 2 Option 3
Parameters
Model Code This columns list the model codes for components which require non-
symmetrical mirroring. The model codes is used as input by the calling Eden module.
Option 1 This column represents the TOGGLE_<INT> Eden variable or specific

command instruction used to control a non symmetrical mirror operation. This column
can have any of the following values.
mirror logic in the Eden module. All items with these setting must have a tutorial
accessed in the Eden module to allow the user to change the TOGGLE during
placement.
For example, if Option 1 = 1 check the TOGGLE_1 Eden variable in the Eden
module to perform specific logic to compensate for a mirrored component.
degrees instead of mirroring it.
The Model Code item will be rotated due to a specific non symmetrical definition
where there are no non symmetrical connect points involved.
the specific item.
The item will not be mirrored due to specific non symmetrical definition. In other
words, the item is only stocked in one non symmetrical configuration which has non
symmetrical connect points involved.
Option 2 & Option 3 These columns are not currently used.

Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
233
________________
6.2.13 Operator Mirror Table

This table is used for operators that require non-symmetrical mirroring. It defines a mirror
option for a given eden module. This table is called through the use of the Eden keyword
TOGGLE_<INT>, where <INT> is an integer value as defined below for Option 1.
Example
Table_Data_Definition Operator_Mirror_Table
! This Table has NOT been Checked

!
Units= AN*6, INT, INT, INT
! Model Code Option 1 Option 2 Option 3
OI_33 1 - -
OI_35 1 - -
OI_43 1 - -
OI_53 1 - -
A_1033 1 - -
OP_331 1 - -
OP_332 1 - -
OP_333 1 - -
OP_334 1 - -
OP_351 1 - -
OP_493 1000 - -
OP_494 1000 - -
OP_573 1000 - -
OP_574 1000 - -
OP_711 1000 - -
OP_853 1000 - -
OP_854 1000 - -
Parameters
Model Code This columns list the model codes for operator which support
mirroring. The model codes is used as input by the calling Eden module.
Option 1 This column represents the TOGGLE_<INT> Eden variable or specific

command instruction used to control a non symmetrical mirror operation. This column
can have any of the following values.
mirror logic in the Eden module. All items with these setting must have a tutorial
accessed in the Eden module to allow the user to change the TOGGLE during
placement.
For example, if Option 1 = 1 check the TOGGLE_1 Eden variable in the Eden
module to perform specific logic to compensate for a mirrored component.
degrees instead of mirroring it.
234
________________ Operator Mirror Table
For example, if Option 1 = 1000 the Model Code item will be rotated due to a
specific non symmetrical definition where there are no non symmetrical connect
points involved.
tell the Mirror command to rotate the component 180 degrees instead of mirroring
it.
The item is only stocked in one non symmetrical configuration and does not have
non symmetrical connect points involved.
Option 2 & Option 3 These columns are not currently used.
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
235
________________
6.2.14 Default End Preperation Table

The Default End Preparation Table is an optional table that can be used to automatically set
the end preparation of instruments and piping specialties that are being placed in a piping
model.
The system looks for a table with the name Default_End_Prep in the spec table library.
If the table does not exist in the library, the end prep for the instrument/specialty
defaults to the end prep of the connected piping component.
If the table exists in the spec table library and the active placement point is connected to
previously placed piping or a nozzle, the end preparation for the instrument or piping
specialty is set based on entries in the table.
Example
Table_Data_Definition Default_End_Prep
!
Units= INT, INT
!
!E_P_in E_P_out
331 441
392 421
441 331
421 391
Data Retrieval
The system performs a table look-up using the active end preparation value. In the table
above, the last line (421 391) indicates that the end prep for an instrument/specialty
connected to a SWE (421) component, will default to PE (391).
If the table does not exist in RDB, the end prep for the instrument/ specialty defaults to the
end prep of the connected piping component. In the example above, the instrument/specialty
end prep would default to SWE (421).
236
________________ MTO Tables and Functions
6.2.15 MTO Tables and Functions

The following special tables and functions are used by the system during Material Take-Off.
Refer to the Report Manager Reference Guide for more information on the reporting process.
field fit length tables (not currently implemented)
preferred bolt length tables
preferred bolt length roundoff factor
nut allowance table
bolt diameter and bolt pattern specification
Gasket Outside and Inside diameter tables
Bolt Length/Diameter Commodity Code tables
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
237
________________
238
________________ Piping Job Specification Tables Command
6.3 Piping Job Specification Tables

Command
This command enables you to access the library management options for the Piping Job
Specification Table Library. You can create a new library file or create, modify, or delete data
in an existing Library. You can also create reports of the data in the library and post data
from the unapproved library to the approved library.
The spec tables for US practice are delivered in the file us_pjstb.l in the RDUSRDB product
directory.
The system tracks revision dates for table entries when a table is revised. This revision
management data is recorded in a separate Table Revision Management Library, named
<table_library>.l.r. If the library has been removed or deleted, the software regenerates the
library file.
With the 4.2 release, the limitation on the size of tables in the Piping Job Spec Table Library
was increased from approximately 16,000 bytes per table to 20,000 bytes per table.
With the 7.1 release, the limitation on the size of tables in the Piping Job Spec Table Library
was increased from approximately 20,000 bytes to 60,000 bytes or 750 lines.

Define the location of the approved and unapproved (if applicable) Piping Job Spec
Table library files in the Reference Database Management Data.
You must have write access to the specified file and directory path.
Operating Sequence
The Piping Job Specification Tables command activates the Specification Tables
Library/Data Management form used to control the contents of the spec table library.
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
239
________________
6.3.1 Options
Create Library used to create a new Piping Job Spec Table Library. See page
242.
Compress Library used to compress the Piping Job Spec Table library. See page
242.
Unapproved ==> Approved used to copy the unapproved Piping Job Spec Table
library to the approved library. See page 242.
Create/Interactive used to compile table files and add the resulting code to the
Piping Job Spec Table library. You can create a single table or specify a list of tables
to be created. See page 243.
Create/Batch used to compile and add tables to the library via batch processing.
See page 244.
Revise used to select a table from the library for editing and compile the revised
table definition. See page 245.
Delete used to delete a specified table from the library. See page 247.
Report used to create a report of the library contents. See page 248.
List used to list the files contained in the library. See page 250.
Extract used to extract a table file from the library for editing or printing. See
page 251.
240
________________ Piping Job Specification Tables Command
Field Descriptions
Refer to Default Project Control Data, page 53, for information on defining the default
location for library files. You can also change the default file locations for each option at any
time.
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
241
________________
6.3.2 Create Library

This option is used to create a new Piping Job Spec Table Library. It automatically creates
the object library (.l), the text library (.l.t), and table revision management library (.l.t.r) for
the library that is being created.
The system displays the approved and unapproved Piping Job Spec Table Library names as
defined in the RDB Management Data.
Accept to Create or Exit to Avoid Creating New Library
Select Accept to create the specified library files. If you specify an existing library file, the
system displays an error indicating the library already exists.
6.3.3 Compress Library

This option is used to compress the Piping Job Spec Table library. Any tables which have
been deleted from the library will be removed.
6.3.4 Unapproved ==> Approved

This option copies the unapproved Piping Job Spec Table library to the approved library.
Accept to Copy or Exit to Avoid Copying
Select Accept to copy the unapproved library file to the approved library.
242
________________ Create/Interactive Spec Tables
6.3.5 Create/Interactive Spec Tables

This option enables you to compile tables and add the resulting code to the spec table library.
You can create a single table or specify a list of tables to be created.

To add more than one table to the library, create a list file in the Piping Spec Path directory
which identifies the names of the table files to be added. This file should list one filename per
line with no directory paths. All of the listed files must reside in the Piping Spec Path
directory.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Create option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Management form.
2. Set the toggle to Single to process a single table file or to List to process a list file.
3. Specify Filename for processing
Key in the name of the table file or list file to be compiled and added to the active
library. (Refer to PJS Tables and Functions, page 190, for information on the table
formats.)
4. Accept or Select Other Option
Accept the file and begin processing.
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
243
________________
6.3.6 Create/Batch Spec Tables

This option enables you to load table files into the Spec Table Library as a batch operation at
a specified time.

To add more than one table file to the library, create a list file which identifies the names of
the table files to be added. The list file should contain one entry (filename) per line.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Create/Batch option from the Specification Tables Library/Data
Management form.
2. Set the toggle to Single to process a single table file or to List to process a list file.
3. Specify Filename for Processing
Key in the name of the table file or list file to be added to the active library.
4. Accept to Submit or Set Submit Time
Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit.
For Delayed Submit, set the time to process the table files.
5. Accept the file and begin processing.
The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreference.
244
________________ Revise Spec Tables
6.3.7 Revise Spec Tables

This option enables you to revise selected table files from the library. For each table to be
edited, select the table, edit the file, and then compile the table and put it back in the library.
The system updates the revision date for revised table in the Table Revision Management
Library.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Revise option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Management form.
2. Select Table for Revision
Select the table file to be revised and select Accept.
3. The system extracts the specified table from the library and activates the text editor
(specified for PD_EDITOR in the control.sh file) to enable you to modify the file.
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
245
________________
Make any changes to the displayed file.
When you exit the text editor, the system compiles the revised file and inserts it back
into the library.
If an error occurs in revising a table, the editor screen is invoked automatically to give
you an opportunity to correct the problem.
4. The system redisplays the list of table files.
You can select another table to be revised as specified in step 2.
246
________________ Delete Spec Tables
6.3.8 Delete Spec Tables

This option enables you to delete tables from the Piping Job Spec Table Library. It also
deletes the revision date for the table from the Table Revision Management Library.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Delete option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Management form.
2. Select Module Name
Select the table files to be deleted from the list of tables. You can use the scroll bar to
scroll through the available tables.
3. Select Module Name, Accept or Exit
Accept the selected tables.
The system deletes the tables from the Spec Table Library. Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
247
________________
6.3.9 Report on Spec Tables

This option creates a report of information in the Spec Table Library. You can create a list
file of all the table files in the Spec Table library or create a detailed report of all the tables
modified since a specified date.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Report option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Management
form.
2. Set the toggle to Default Report to create a list file of all the table files in the library.
OR
Set the toggle to Revision Dates Report and key in a revision date to process all tables
modified since the specified revision date. The report lists the full contents of the
modified tables with individual revision dates per line.
3. Set the toggle to Report on Unapproved or Report on Approved to define the source
of information to be reported. This toggle is only displayed when both the approved
and the unapproved library are being used.
4. Accept to Form Report or Revise Report Parameters
Select Accept to form the report using the default parameters, and proceed to step 6.
OR
Key in the file information (Node Name and File Path) for the location of the neutral
file to be created.
248
________________ Report on Spec Tables
5. Select Save, Print or Print/Save.
For Print or Print/Save, select the print queue from the list of displayed queues. Refer
to the section on Plot and Print Queues in the Project Administrator Reference Guide
for more information on setting up multiple print queues.
If you select the Save or Print/Save option, the system creates a file named spec_tables
in the default source file location or in the location you specified.
6. Accept to Submit or Specify Submit Time
Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit. For Delayed Submit, set
the time to process the request.
7. Accept to Create Report
Select Accept to create the specified report file.
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
249
________________
6.3.10 List Spec Tables

This option displays all the tables for the Spec Table Library with the revision date of each
table.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the List option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Management form.
2. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available tables.
250
________________ Extract Spec Tables
6.3.11 Extract Spec Tables

This option enables you to extract a table file or set of table files from the Spec Table Library
for editing or printing.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Extract option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Management
form.
2. Select the tables from the list of files and select Accept. You can use the scroll bar to
scroll through the available files. You can extract multiple tables at one time.
OR
Select Extract All to to bulk extract all the tables in one operation.
The system pulls the files out of the library and places them in the default directory for
Piping Spec Data. The system also writes the names of the extracted files to a file
named PD_tbl_list.
If the list file is less than 24 hours old, the system appends the entries to the file,
otherwise it overwrites the file.
Spec Tables
6. Piping Job
251
________________
252
________________ Graphic Commodity Data
7. Graphic Commodity Data
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
The graphic commodity data is contained in the following object libraries:
Graphic Commodity Library - The delivered file

\win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\pip_gcom.l contains parametric definitions for the
components. See page 254.
Physical Data (Dimensions) Library - The delivered file

\win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pcdim.l contains American dimension data for components.
See page 266.
Piping Job Specification Table Library - The delivered file

\win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pjstb.l contains specification tables referenced in the Piping
Job Specification. See page 189.
Refer to Reference Data Overview, page 23, for an illustration of the relationships among
these libraries.
When you select a component for placement in the model, the system
uses the active parameters (such as piping materials class and nominal diameter) to
search the Piping Job Specification (PJS) for the selected item name. If the selected
item is found in the PJS database, the system reads the PJS for the parameters required
to place the component. Included in this information is the model code (or specialty
item number) for the selected component and the names of the spec tables defined for
the Piping Materials Class.
uses the model code (or specialty item number), derived from the PJS, to access the
graphic commodity library. The definitions in the graphic commodity library determine
the physical tables required to place the component and call the tables in the physical
commodity library.
places the symbol graphics in the model design file and writes the nongraphic
information for the component in the database.
This section describes the graphic commodity data used in placing components in the piping
model. Refer to the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide for a detailed description of the
actual placement process.
253
________________
7.1 Graphic Commodity Library

The Graphic Commodity Library (GCL) provides data for commodity items, engineered
items, and instruments. It is basically a catalog of component data which is accessed to
determine physical data based on user specifications (such as NPD and end preparation)
assign connect point data from the Piping Job Specification
define the parametric shape for the model graphics. The Graphic Commodity Library
includes data required for model creation, resymbolization for model presentation,
interference detection, and any special functions of the Piping Job Specification, piping
industry standards, or company design practices.
PDS Piping uses the Eden Parametric Language to define and place components, specialty
items, operators, and envelopes. Eden is a high- level language (similar to FORTRAN) which
uses information from the Piping Job Specification and model to access parametric and
dimensional data.
Eden is composed of three major modules
Symbol Processors
Physical Data Subroutines
Parametric Shape Definitions
These modules are designed to carry out two functions: data definition and graphic
presentation.
The data associated with these modules is delivered in the following files:
\win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\pip_gcom.l - object library

\win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\pip_gcom.l.t - text library
The modular approach provides for more efficient storage of information in these libraries by
enabling common information to be shared by different symbols.
The first line of each Eden module defines the type of module (such as symbol processor) and
the module name. This statement determines a two- character category code to be prefixed to
the module name in the object library. This prefix is only used by the system; it should not be
keyed-in as part of the module name.
254
________________ Graphic Commodity Library
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
The entries in the library use the following prefixes to identify the type of data.
SP Symbol Processor
PD Physical Data Definition Module
UF User Function Module
MG Model Parametric Shape Definition Module
DG Detailed Parametric Shape Definition Module
IG Interference Envelope Parametric Shape
Definition Module
SS Sub-Symbol Processor Module
Each module must be given a unique name within the graphic commodity library. Refer to
the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide for information on creating or modifying these
modules.
255
________________
7.1.1 Symbol Processors

A symbol processor is the controlling function or logic used to produce the graphics for a
commodity item, piping specialty, instrument, pipe support, or interference envelope. During
component placement, the symbol processor
accesses the active component design parameters
assigns connect points
Calls the required physical data modules
determines and calls the required parametric shape modules.
The system retrieves the active component parameters which are dependent upon a connect
point from the PJS in terms of green, red, or tap connect point properties. The symbol
definition assigns the data corresponding to these connect point types (green, red, or tap) to
the physical connect point numbers (CP1, CP2, CP3, CP4 or CP5).
The first line of the Eden module defines the type of module and the module name. The
following statement is used in the Eden modules to indicate a symbol processor module.
Symbol_Processor module name
This statement tells the system to use the category code SP for the prefix. You should use the
following conventions in assigning the module name. The module name is determined by the
type of component being placed (commodity item or specialty item).
For a commodity item, the system searches for the New Item Name (model code) of the
commodity item as the module name. If the New Item Name is blank in the
Commodity Item entity, the system searches for the Item Name as the module name.
For a specialty item, the system searches for the specialty item name (derived from the
PJS) as the module name.
For an instrument, the system searches for the instrument name (derived from the PJS)
as the module name.
The delivered symbol processors are identified in the library with the prefix SP.
The following lists the symbol processor SPGAT which is used to control the placement of a
gate valve.
256
________________ Symbol Processors
! REGULAR PATTERN, BOLTED OR MALE ENDS GATE VALVE

Symbol_Processor GAT
Call Assign_Connect_Point ( GREEN, CP1 )
Call Assign_Connect_Point ( RED, CP2 )
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
physical_data_source = V1 // Standard_Type
Call Get_Physical_Data ( physical_data_source )
parametric_shape = V1
Call Draw_Parametric_Shape ( parametric_shape )
Valve_Operator = DABS ( Valve_Operator )
If ( Valve_Operator .NE. 0 ) Then
If ( Valve_Operator .LT. 1000 ) Then
Subcomponent = OP // Valve_Operator
Else
Subcomponent = A // Valve_Operator
EndIf
Operator_Orient = FALSE
EndIf
Stop
End
257
________________
7.1.2 Sub-Symbol Processor

A subcomponent call in a symbol processor module indicates a sub-symbol processor.
Subcomponents are additions to symbols such as an operator on a valve.
The first line of a sub-symbol processor module indicates the module type and the module
name.
Sub_Symbol_Processor module name
This statement tells the system to use the category code SS for the prefix.
The sub-symbol processor name for operators is a concatenation of the characters OP_ and the
modifier value from the Commodity Item entity in the PJS database. The value is expressed
as a code list number from CL550 (operator/actuator type). If the value is a positive number
(such as 3) the operator is placed with the valve. If the value is a negative number (such as -3)
the operator is not placed with the valve. (This is useful in segregating large diameter valves
which almost always have a valve operator from small diameter valves which frequently do
not have an operator.)
The symbol processor for the gate valve calls a sub-symbol processor (Subcomponent = OP
// Valve_Operator) which places an operator on the valve. The following depicts the sub-
symbol processor SSOP_3 which is used to control the placement of a hand wheel operator on
the valve.
! HANDWHEEL OPERATOR
Sub_Symbol_Processor OP_3
If ( Operator_Orient .EQ. TRUE ) Then
prompt = 1.0
Call Prompt_to_Orient_Operator ( prompt )
EndIf
physical_data_source = OPERATOR_3
parametric_shape = OP3
Call Draw_Parametric_Shape ( parametric_shape )
Stop
End
258
________________ Physical Data Definitions
7.1.3 Physical Data Definitions
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
The system uses the physical data definitions to determine the dimension data, weight data,
and surface area data using the active design parameters. Physical data modules are identified
by the statement
Physical_Data_Definition module name
as the first line in the Eden module. This statement tells the system to use the category code
PD for the prefix. This prefix is only used by the system; it should not be keyed-in as part of
the module name.
The module name for a physical data module consists of a symbol type (such as V1, V2,... for
valves) and a generic type of geometric industry standard (such as AMS or DIN). You can
define multiple physical data modules for the same symbol depending on the type of standard
being referenced (for example, V1_AMS for American standards and V1_DIN for European
standards).
You can manage ten different sets of logic for table naming conventions for the following
industry practices. The corresponding table suffix ranges and the suffix for the Piping Eden
physical data modules are indicated below.
Practice Range Suffix

U.S. Practice 1-99 AMS
European - DIN 100-199 DIN
European - British Standard 200-299 BRITISH_STD
European - Practice A 300-399 EURO_A
European - Practice B 400-499 EURO_B
International - JIS 500-599 JIS
International - Australian 600-699 AUS
International - Practice A 700-799 INT_A
International - Practice B 800-899 INT_B
Company Practice 900-999 COMPANY
The geometric industry standard for a component is defined in the Piping Commodity Data
table of the Material Reference Database. Each component must be assigned a geometric
industry standard if it is to use physical data tables.
For most of the delivered symbols, the physical data modules are classified into two
categories: specific and generic. The specific physical data module is called by the symbol
processor. This module then calls a generic physical data module.
Specific Physical Data Modules

The physical data module PDV1_AMS determines the specific dimensions (face-to-center and
face-to-face) and other physical properties for a gate valve. This is the module called by the
symbol processor SP_GAT
259
________________
Physical_Data_Definition V1_AMS
physical_data_source = VALVE_2_AMS
Call Read_Table ( Table_Name_A, input, output )
Surface_Area = Output_1
Wet_Weight = Output_2
F_to_C_Dim_1 = Output_3
If ( Term_Type_1 .EQ. Term_Type_2 ) Then
F_to_C_Dim_2 = F_to_C_Dim_1
Else
F_to_C_Dim_2 = Output_4
EndIf
F_to_F_Dim = F_to_C_Dim_1 + F_to_C_Dim_2
If ( Valve_Operator .LE. 24.0 ) Then
Call Read_Table ( Table_Name_W, input, output )
Dry_Weight = Output_1
EndIf
Return
End
Generic Physical Data Modules

The generic modules contain information which is common to more than one symbol such as
flange thickness, gasket separation, and outside diameter. The physical data module
V1_AMS calls another physical data module VALVE_2_AMS which contains the generic
dimension data for all valves with two connect points.
Physical_Data_Definition VALVE_2_AMS
Input_1 = Nom_Pipe_D_1
If ( Gen_Type_1 .EQ. BOLTED ) Then
table_name = BLT // Term_Type_1 // Pr_Rating_1 // Gen_Flag_Green
Call Read_Table ( table_name, input, output )
Facing_OD_1 = Output_1
Thickness_1 = Output_2
Seat_Depth_1 = Output_3
Thickness_1 = Thickness_1 - Seat_Depth_1
CP_Offset_1 = Gasket_Sep_1
If ( Symbology .EQ. MODEL ) Then
Thickness_1 = 0.0
Depth_1 = 0.0
Pipe_OD_1 = 0.0
Body_OD_1 = Facing_OD_1
Else
table_name = MAL_300_5
Depth_1 = Thickness_1
Pipe_OD_1 = Output_2
Body_OD_1 = Pipe_OD_1
EndIf
Else
If ( Gen_Type_1 .EQ. MALE ) Then
table_name = MAL // Term_Type_1 // Gen_Flag_Green
Thickness_1 = 0.0
Depth_1 = 0.0
Seat_Depth_1 = 0.0
CP_Offset_1 = 0.0
Pipe_OD_1 = Facing_OD_1
Else
table_name = FEM // Term_Type_1 // Pr_Rating_1 // Gen_Flag_Green
Depth_1 = Output_2
Seat_Depth_1 = 0.0
Thickness_1 = 0.0
260
________________ Physical Data Definitions
If ( symbology .EQ. MODEL ) Then

Depth_1 = 0.0
CP_Offset_1 = 0.0
Pipe_OD_1 = 0.0
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
Else
CP_Offset_1 = -Depth_1
EndIf
EndIf
EndIf
If ( Term_Type_2 .EQ. Term_Type_1 .AND. Nom_Pipe_D_1 .EQ. Nom_Pipe_D_2 )
Then
Facing_OD_2 = Facing_OD_1
Pipe_OD_2 = Pipe_OD_1
Body_OD_2 = Body_OD_1
Thickness_2 = Thickness_1
Depth_2 = Depth_1
Seat_depth_2 = Seat_Depth_1
CP_Offset_2 = CP_Offset_1
Else
If ( Gen_Type_2 .EQ. BOLTED ) Then
table_name = BLT // Term_Type_2 // Pr_Rating_2 // Gen_Flag_Red
Thickness_2 = Output_2
Seat_Depth_2 = Output_3
Thickness_2 = Thickness_2 - Seat_Depth_2
CP_Offset_2 = Gasket_Sep_2
Thickness_2 = 0.0
Depth_2 = 0.0
Pipe_OD_2 = 0.0
Else
Depth_2 = Thickness_2
EndIf
Else
table_name = MAL // Term_Type_2 // Gen_Flag_Red
Thickness_2 = 0.0
Depth_2 = 0.0
Seat_Depth_2 = 0.0
CP_Offset_2 = 0.0
Pipe_OD_2 = Facing_OD_2
Else
table_name = FEM // Term_Type_2 // Pr_Rating_2 // Gen_Flag_Red
Depth_2 = Output_2
Seat_Depth_2 = 0.0
Thickness_2 = 0.0
Depth_2 = 0.0
CP_Offset_2 = 0.0
Pipe_OD_2 = 0.0
Else
CP_Offset_2 = -Depth_2
EndIf
261
________________
EndIf
EndIf
EndIf
Table_Name_A = Item_Name // Geo_Ind_Std // Term_Type_1
Table_Name_W = Commodity_Code
If ( Term_Type_1 .EQ. Term_Type_2 .AND. Nom_Pipe_D_1 .EQ. Nom_Pipe_D_2 )
Then
Table_Name_A = Table_Name_A // Pr_Rating_1 // A
Else
If ( Gen_Type_1 .EQ. Gen_Type_2 ) Then
! Male X Male or Bolted X Bolted
! or Female X Female
Table_Name_A = Table_Name_A // Pr_Rating_1 // Term_Type_2 //
Pr_Rating_2 // A
Else

! Male X Bolted and Male X Female
Table_Name_A = Table_Name_A // Term_Type_2 // Pr_Rating_2 // A
Else
! Bolted X Male and Female X Male
Else
! Bolted X Female and Female X
Bolted
Pr_Rating_2 // A
EndIf
EndIf
EndIf
EndIf
Return
End
262
________________ Parametric Shape Definitions
7.1.4 Parametric Shape Definitions
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
The parametric shape definition describes the graphics symbol (such as bend, flange, or valve
body) which is placed for the component in the model.
Parametric shape definitions are used to place symbol graphics in the model or define
interference envelopes. This involves the following major functions
defining connect point geometry
placing connect points
moving the active location a specified distance
drawing a specific graphic shape
placing a center of gravity location.
Parametric shape definitions are divided into three basic types: model parametric shapes,
detailed parametric shapes, and interference envelopes. The first line of the Eden module
indicates the module type and the module name.
Model Parametric Shape Definitions

Model parametric shapes are used to define the symbol graphics to be placed in the model.
For example, the parametric shaped module for a valve consist of a cylinder, two cones, and a
cylinder (flange, valve body, flange).
The first line for these modules is of the form
Model_Parametric_Shape_Definition module name
This statement tells the system to use the category code MG for the prefix. This prefix is only
used by the system; it should not be keyed- in as part of the module name.
The module name for a parametric shape module consists of a symbol type (such as V1, V2,...
for valves).
The parametric shape module MGV1 determines the model graphics for a valve. This is the
module called by the symbol processor SPGAT. The parametric shape module MGOP3
determines the model graphics for a hand wheel operator. This is the module called by the
sub-symbol processor SSOP_3.
263
________________
Model_Parametric_Shape_Definition V1
Call Define_Connect_Point_Geometry ( LINEAR )
Call Place_Connect_Point ( CP1 )
Call Move_By_Distance ( CP_Offset_1 )
Call Draw_Cylinder_With_Capped_Ends ( Depth_1, Facing_OD_1 )
length = F_to_C_Dim_1 - Thickness_1
diameter = 0.0
Call Draw_Cone ( length, Body_OD_1, diameter )
Call Place_COG_Location ( DRY_COG )
Call Place_COG_Location ( WET_COG )
length = F_to_C_Dim_2 - Thickness_2
Call Draw_Cone ( length, diameter, Body_OD_2 )
Call Draw_Cylinder_With_Capped_Ends ( Depth_2, Facing_OD_2 )
Call Move_By_Distance ( CP_offset_2 )
Return
End
Model_Parametric_Shape_Definition OP3
Call Define_Connect_Point_Geometry ( OPERATOR )
Call Convert_NPD_to_Subunits ( Nom_Pipe_D_1, dia )
dist = dia + Min_Cyl_Dia * 0.5
angle = 90.0
radius = ( Dimension_2 - Min_Cyl_Dia ) * 0.5
Call Draw_Cylinder_With_Capped_Ends ( Dimension_1, Min_Cyl_Dia )
Call Move_by_Distance ( -dist )
Call Rotate_Orientation ( angle, Secondary )
Call Rotate_Orientation ( angle, Normal )
Call Move_Along_Axis ( -radius, Secondary )
Call Draw_Torus ( radius, angle, Min_Cyl_Dia )
Return
End
Detailed Parametric Shape Definition

Detailed parametric shapes are used to define more complex symbol graphics to be placed in
the model when the model symbology lock is set to detailed.
The first line for these modules is of the form
Detailed_Parametric_Shape_Definition module name
This statement tells the system to use the category code DG for the prefix.
Interference Parametric Shape Definition

Interference parametric shapes are not used during component placement. They are
referenced during interference detection to determine the volume (interference envelope) to be
compared for clashes with other elements. If a clash is detected during the interference
detection process, the interference parametric shape is used to place an interference marker.
Refer to the PDS Interference Checker / Manager Reference Guide for more information on
interference envelopes.
264
________________ Parametric Shape Definitions
Interference_Parametric_Shape_Definition module name
This statement tells the system to use the category code IG for the prefix.
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
If no interference module is found for a component, the system uses the model
graphics module to determine the interference parametric shape.
265
________________
7.2 Physical Data Tables

The physical data tables contain the physical data (dimensions, weights, and surface area)
required for symbol creation, interference detection, stress analysis, and MTO reporting.
These tables are segregated for commodity item data, engineered item data, and instrument
data. Refer to Section 4 for a detailed description of the physical data tables and the table
naming conventions used in PDS.
The physical data tables for US Practice are delivered in the following files:
\win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pcdim.l - object library

\win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pcdim.l.t - text library
These libraries contain physical data for American standards. The physical data can be stored
in one of ten physical data libraries. The system uses the geometric industry standard for a
particular commodity item (or specialty item) to determine which library to reference for the
physical data tables.
Geometric industry standard is expressed as a code list value from Standard Note Type 575.
Code list numbers 2-6999 are reserved for standards that apply to American piping practices.
Code list numbers 7000-27999 are reserved for standards that apply to European piping
practices. Numbers 28000-31999 are reserved for specific company practices.
By segregating data into separate physical data libraries you can access a subset of the total
physical data available for a project. You can also build a specific set of physical data for a
particular project. The following table types are required for piping and instrument
components.
Generic dimensional data
Generic tables contain data which is not specific to a particular symbol (such as flange
outside diameter or flange thickness). These tables are identified by the prefix BLT,
FEM, or MAL (for the termination type) and end with the extension .TBL (the table
name is independent of the name of the physical data module).
Specific commodity data
Specific tables contain commodity data which is specific to a particular component

(such as dimensions, water weight, and surface area). These specific tables use the
model code or commodity code as part of the table name to classify data by symbol
type.
The system uses the water weight data to compute the wet weight using the specific
gravity of the operating fluid.
fluid weight = water weight * specific gravity for fluid
operating weight = dry weight + fluid weight
266
________________ Physical Data Tables
The surface area data enables the system to perform paint requirement calculations
and insulation weight calculations.
Specific commodity dry weight data
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
Piping Specialty physical data
The dimensions, dry weight, water weight, and surface area for specialty items can be
stored in a set of tables or defined at placement.
Instrument physical data
The dimensional data, dry weight, water weight, and surface area for instruments can be
stored in a set of tables or defined at placement.
You can form the name of a physical data table from attributes for the component (such as
geometry standard and end preparation). However, the table name cannot exceed 46
characters.
7.2.1 Data Retrieval from the Physical Data Library

The data retrieval from tables in the Physical Data Library is restricted to two independent
variables and eight dependent variables. If only one independent variable is required, then
nine dependent variables are allowed. If more independent variables are required, the
additional independent variable(s) must be a part of the table name. If nominal diameter is
one of the independent variables, it must be listed first in the table.
267
________________
7.2.2 Example of Physical Data Look-Up

In order to place the valve described earlier in this section, the system references the following
tables.
Generic Tables
The spec access for a six-inch gate valve defines the end preparation at both connect points as
Raised Face Flanged End (code list value 21) which is a bolted connection. As shown in the
listing for VALVE_2_AMS, the table name for a bolted connection on a two-connect point
valve is
table_name= BLT // Term_Type_1 // Pr_Rating_1 // Gen_Flag_Green
Using the values from the Piping Job Specification (PMC=1C0031, Item Name=6Q1C01), the
actual table name will be
BLT_20_150_5
This table returns the outside diameter, flange thickness, and the seating depth for each end of
the valve. Note that the termination type (20) is used rather than the actual end preparation
value (21).
Specific Tables
The specific tables are used to define the main body of the valve. Refer to Table
Requirements, page 315, for an outline of the types of tables which are required to place a
valve. Since the termination type is the same at both ends of the valve (bolted), no red
connect point data is required. The required tables are found by referring to the Bolted(G)
termination type.
MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_A (P15A)
MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_B (P15B) - This table is only required if more than eight

outputs are necessary to define a commodity item.
Commodity Code (P59)
Using this information, the dimension tables for a 6" gate valve are:
GAT_40_20_150_A
This table returns the face-to-center dimension for the valve. Table P15B is not
required for a gate valve.
268
________________ Example of Physical Data Look-Up
VAABAHCCAA
This table returns the empty weight of the valve, including the weight of the operator.
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
If the end preparations were different at each end of the valve (such as female threaded by
socket welded) then a different set of tables would be required.
An additional table look-up is required to access the dimensional data for the valve operator.
The following table is required to define the valve operator.
MC_Type(G)_Rat(G)_Op_A (P31A)
Using this table name format, the dimension table for a hand wheel operator on a 6" gate
valve is:
GAT_BLT_150_3_A
This table returns the stem length and the wheel diameter for the handwheel operator.
269
________________
7.3 Notes for Graphic Commodity Data

7.3.1 Connect Point Data
As described in the Piping Job Specification description, connect point information for
commodity items, piping specialties, and instruments is classified in terms of green and red
connect points. The following conventions are used to coordinate the two sets of data:
For full-size components, data is only defined for the green connect point and applies to
all ends of the component.
For size change components, data for commodity items, engineered items, or
instruments should be created with the green connect point representing the larger
diameter (first size) of the component and the red connect point diameter representing
the smaller diameter (second size).
If the end preparation is different at each end of the component, the end preparation
should be defined to match the green and red connect points.
If a component has ends with the same nominal diameter but other end properties which
differ, the following rules apply:
If the ends have different end preparations (regardless of the values for
schedule/thickness) the end(s) whose end preparations have the lowest code list
number are designated as the green connect point.
If the end preparations are the same but the values for rating, schedule, or thickness
differ, the "stronger" ends(s) are designated as the green connect point.
Schedule or thickness values should be defined for all applicable components. Refer to
PJS Tables and Functions, page 190, for a detailed description of the methods for
defining the schedule or thickness value.
A flow direction component (such as a check valve) must be defined so that the flow is
directed from connect point 1 to connect point 2.
A tee type branch must be defined with connect point three on the branch leg of the tee.
The origin of a component must lie between connect point 1 and connect point 2.
Flanges should be defined with the green connect point representing the flanged
connect point and the red connect point representing the non-flanged connect point.
270
________________ Notes for Graphic Commodity Data
A valve operator is always placed at the component origin of the corresponding valve
body.
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
To insure consistency in pipe cut length calculations, the connect points of a component
should be located using face-to-face or face- to-center dimension rather than end-to-end
or end-to-center dimension.
A change of direction component placed by component center must be defined such that
connect point 1 is on the primary axis.
7.3.2 Bends and Branches

For bend components (specific and generic), the item name and the new item name
must be unique with respect to the angle of the bend. In other words, you specify the
angle of the bend by selecting the item name for the corresponding angle of the bend.
The number of joints in a mitre is required to compute the stress intensification factor
(SIF). The graphics symbol description in the Graphic Commodity Library sets an
attribute in the piping design database that defines the number of joints.
For miter bend components, the system requires that the item name and the new item
name be unique with respect to the number of miter joints of the bend. In other words,
the item name specifies the number of miter joints of the bend.
For branches (tees and laterals), the system uses the first and second size to access the
branch table and determine the item name of the component to be placed at the branch
point (intersection). Depending on the active values, the branch table may define a
single component, or a set of two or three components.
271
________________
7.3.3 Bolts, Gaskets, and Flanges

The data for the number of bolts and the bolt diameter is available with the flange data
in the Physical Commodity Library as a function of nominal piping diameter, pressure
rating, termination type, and geometric industry standard. However, the bolt data and
the flange data are stored in separate tables. Refer to the Report Manager Reference
Guide for a description of the table access.
A lap joint flange is defined with the end preparation at one end as flanged and the other
end as lap.
The system determines the gasket separation at each connect point of a piping
component and an instrument component by the following rules.
If the end preparation for the connect point is flanged, the gasket separation for the
connect point is set to one-half the Active Gasket Separation. However, some
flanged connections (lug, ring type joint, or wafer) have integral gaskets and do not
have a gasket separation. In this situation, the gasket separation at each connect
point is set to zero.
If the end preparation for the connect point is not flanged, the gasket separation for
the connect point will be set to zero.
Flange data exists in two tables
The first table (BLT_Term_Rat_TS) contains the flange data required for modeling
activities (such as flange outside diameter and flange thickness).
The second table (STUD_Rat_TS) contains flange data required for reporting or
analysis activities (such as bolt diameter, number of bolt holes, and nut extension).
272
________________ Pipe, Tubing, and Hose
7.3.4 Pipe, Tubing, and Hose
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
All tubing (such as fiberglass and copper) is specified in terms of piping outside
diameter rather than nominal piping diameter. All commodity item data in the
Alphanumeric Commodity Library exists in terms of nominal piping diameter.
Mechanical joint and cast iron pipe can have various fixed lengths. Polypropylene-
lined tube is purchased with flanged ends in various fixed lengths.
Piping wall thickness is defined it terms of NPD units rather than model units.
A piping converter component (which converts nominal piping diameter from one
system of units to another system of units) must be defined in the PJS database for each
specific pair of nominal piping diameters. You cannot specify a convertor component
for a range of nominal piping diameters.
Flexible hose has flanged, screwed, or quick disconnect end preparations.
273
________________
274
________________ Graphic Commodity Library Manager
7.4 Graphic Commodity Library Manager
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
This command enables you to create a new graphic commodity library or create and modify
data (Eden modules) in an existing library. Refer to Graphic Commodity Library, page 254,
for more information on this library.
You can compile Eden source code, review and delete object code files, and insert, extract,
and delete Eden source files from the library.
Select the Graphic Commodity Library Manager command from the Reference Data
Manager form.
Options
Create Library Used to create a new Graphic Commodity Library.
Compress Used to compress the Graphic Commodity library.
Unapproved ==> Approved Used to copy the unapproved Graphic Commodity

library to the approved library.
Create/Interactive Used to compile Eden source files and insert them in the
Graphic Commodity Library. You can create a file or specify a list of files to be
created.
Create/Batch Used to compile Eden source files and add the files to the library via
batch processing. used to compile Eden source files via batch processing.
Revise Used to select an Eden module from the library, edit the file, and put the
recompiled file back into the library.
275
________________
Delete Used to remove an Eden module from the library.
Report Used to create a report listing the library contents.
List Used to display the Eden modules in the library.
Extract Used to extract an Eden module from the library for editing or printing.
You can set the toggle at the bottom of the form to determine the Eden modules to be listed.
Full List - Lists all the Eden modules in the Graphic Commodity Library.
Sub-string - Limits the list to those Eden modules which contain a specified substring.
276
________________ Create Library
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
This option is used to create a new Graphic Commodity Library. It automatically creates the
object library (.l) and the text library (.l.t) for the library that is being created.
The system displays the approved and unapproved Graphic Commodity Library names as
7.4.2 Compress
This option is used to compress the Graphic Commodity library. Any tables which have been
deleted from the library will be removed.

This option copies the unapproved Graphic Commodity library to the approved library.
277
________________
7.4.4 Create/Interactive Graphic Commodity Data

This option enables you to compile Eden source code and add the resulting code to the
graphic commodity library. You can process a single file or specify a list of files to be
created. Refer to the description of the Graphic Commodity Library, page 254, for
information on naming conventions for Eden modules.
Before using this command

Set Piping Eden Path and Piping Eden Node in the Default Project Control Data to
the location of the Eden source files.
To add more than one Eden file to the library, create a list file which identifies the
names of the Eden source files to be added. The list file should contain one entry
(source file name) per line. The list file and all of the source files should reside in the
source file directory.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Create option.
2. Set the toggle to Single to process a single source file or to List to process a list file.
Key in the name of the Eden file or list file to be compiled and added to the active
library.
The system verifies the existence of the specified file.
4. The system displays the default node name and path for the eden modules, as specified
in the Default Project Control Data, at the bottom of the form.
You can use the default setting or modify these fields to override the default location for
this operation.
278
________________ Create/Batch Graphic Commodity Data
7.4.5 Create/Batch Graphic Commodity Data
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
This option enables you to compile Eden source code and insert the specified files into the
graphic commodity library via batch processing. You can process a single file or specify a list
of files to be created. Refer to the description of the Graphic Commodity Library, page 254,
for information on naming conventions for Eden modules.

Set Piping Eden Path and Piping Eden Node in the Default Project Control Data to
the location of the Eden source files.
To add more than one Eden file to the library, create a list file which identifies the
names of the Eden source files to be added. The list file should contain one entry
(source file name) per line. The list file and all of the source files should reside in the
source file directory.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Batch Load option.
Key in the name of the Eden file or list file to be compiled and added to the active
library.
The system confirms the existence of the specified file.
4. The system displays the default node name and path for the eden modules, as specified
in the Default Project Control Data, at the bottom of the form.
this operation.
279
________________
the time to process the source files.
280
________________ Revise Graphic Commodity Data
7.4.6 Revise Graphic Commodity Data
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
This option enables you to select Eden modules from the library, edit the file, and then
compile the file and put it back in the library.

Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the Eden modules to be listed.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Revise option.
The system displays the Eden modules in the Graphic Commodity Library.
2. Select Module for Revision
Select the Eden modules to be revised and select Accept.
281
________________
3. The system extracts the specified file from the library and activates the text editor
into the library. (If you quit the text editor, the file will not be recompiled.)
If the file compiles successfully, the system returns to Step 2. You can select another
Eden module to be revised or select Exit.
If an error occurs in revising a Piping Eden module or table, the system invokes the
editor automatically to give you an opportunity to correct the problem.
282
________________ Delete Graphic Commodity Data
7.4.7 Delete Graphic Commodity Data
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
This option enables you to delete Eden modules from the graphic commodity library.

Operating Sequence
2. Select Module for Deletion
Select the Eden modules to be deleted from the list of modules. You can use the scroll
bar to scroll through the available files.
3. Accept or Select Other Module
Accept the selected modules.
The system deletes the modules from the Graphic Commodity Library.
283
________________
7.4.8 Report Graphic Commodity Data

This option enables you to create a list file of all the Eden modules in the Graphic Commodity
library and their creation dates.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Report option from the Data Management form.
2. Key in the file information for the location of the report file to be created or use the
displayed defaults.
3. Select Print or Print/Save.
Then select the print queue from the list of displayed queues. Refer to the section on
Plot and Print Queues in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on
setting up multiple print queues.
If you select the Print/Save option, the system will create a file named piping_eden in
the defined default source file location.
Select Accept to create the report file.
284
________________ List Graphic Commodity Data
7.4.9 List Graphic Commodity Data
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
This option displays a list of Eden modules in the Graphic Commodity Library. The display
includes
a description of the type of Piping Eden module, such as Physical Data Definition or
Model Parametric Shape, at the end of each line.
the revision date of each Piping Eden module.
The module names are sorted alphanumerically within the list for each type of Piping Eden
module.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the List option.
2. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files.
3. Select Cancel to exit the form.
285
________________
7.4.10 Extract Graphic Commodity Data

This option enables you to extract an Eden module or set of Eden modules from the Graphic
Commodity library for editing or printing.

Set Piping Eden Path and Piping Eden Node in the Default Project Control Data to the
location of the Eden source files.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Extract from the Data Management form.
2. Select EDEN Module for Extraction
Select the modules from the list of files and select Accept. You can use the scroll bar to
scroll through the available files. You can extract multiple files at one time.
OR
Select Extract ALL to bulk extract all the Piping Eden modules in one operation.
The system pulls the files out of the library and places them in the default eden
directory. The system also writes the names of the extracted files to a file named
PD_gc_list.
286
________________ Physical Data Library Manager
7.5 Physical Data Library Manager
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
This command enables you to access the library management options for the Physical Data
Library. You can create a new library file or create, modify, and delete data in an existing
library. You can also create reports of the data in the library and post the contents of the
unappoved library to the approved library. Refer to Physical Data Tables, page 266, for more
information on this library.
The system tracks revision dates for table entries when a table is being revised. This revision
management data recorded in a Table Revision Management Library, named
<table_library>.l.r. If the library has been removed or deleted, the software will regenerate
the library file.
This feature can be used to create revision management reports of components that require
reconstructing as a result of changes to any dimension tables since a specified date.
With the 4.2 release, the limitation on the size of tables in the Physical Data Library was
increased from approximately 16,000 bytes per table to 20,000 bytes per table.
With the 7.1 release, the limitation on the size of tables in the Physical Data Library was
increased from approximately 20,000 bytes to 60,000 bytes or 750 lines.

Define the location of the approved and unapproved (if applicable) Physical Data
Library and Spec Table Library files in the Default Project Control Data.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Physical Data Library Manager command from the Reference Data Manager
form.
287
________________
2. Select Table Library
Select the active practice (such as U.S. Practice or European - Din) from the display
list and select Accept.
The system loads the table list for the selected practice into memory.
3. You can set the toggle at the bottom of the form to determine the physical data tables to
be listed.
Full List lists all the tables in the Physical Data Library.
Sub-string limits the list to those tables which contain a specified substring.
4. Select Table Data Management Option
Select the option to perform.
Options
Create Library Used to create a new Physical Dimension Library.
Compress Used to compress the Physical Dimension library.
Unapproved ==> Approved Used to copy the unapproved Physical Dimension

Create/Interactive Used to process table files and add the resulting code to the
active Physical Dimension library. You can create a single table or specify a list of
tables to be created.
288
________________ Physical Data Library Manager
Create/Batch Used to compile and add table files to the active library via batch
processing.
Revise Used to select a table file from the library for editing and put the revised file
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
back into the library.
Delete Used to remove a table file from the library.
Report Used to create a report of the library contents.
List Used to display the table files in the active library.
Extract Used to extract a table file from the library for editing or printing.
289
________________

This option is used to create a new Physical Dimension Library. It automatically creates the
object library (.l), the text library (.l.t), and table revision management library (.l.t.r) for the
library that is being created.
The system displays the approved and unapproved Physical Dimension Library names as
7.5.2 Compress
This option is used to compress the Physical Dimension library. Any tables which have been

This option copies the unapproved Physical Dimension library to the approved library.
290
________________ Create/Interactive Physical Commodity Data
7.5.4 Create/Interactive Physical Commodity Data
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
This option enables you to process physical dimension table source files and insert the
specified files into the active library. You can process a single table file or specify a list of
files to be created. Refer to the description of the applicable table file for information on
naming conventions and file formats.

Set the default table path and node in the Default Project Control Data.
To add more than one table file to the library, create a list file which identifies the
names of the table source files to be added. The list file should contain one entry
(source file name) per line. The list file and all the source files should reside in the
defined default table directory.
Operating Sequence
Key in the name of the table file or list file to be processed and added to the active
library.
4. The system displays the default node name and path for the table files, as specified in
the Default Project Control Data, at the bottom of the form.
this operation.
The system processes the source file and, if successful, it stores the resulting object file
in the active library and stores the source file in the associated text library.
291
________________
7.5.5 Create/Batch Physical Commodity Data

This option enables you to process physical dimension table source files and insert the
specified files into the active library via batch processing. You can process a single table file
or specify a list of files to be created. Refer to the description of the applicable table file for
information on naming conventions and file formats.

To add more than one table file to the library, create a list file which identifies the
names of the table source files to be added. The list file should contain one entry
(source file name) per line. The list file and all the source files should reside in the
define default table directory.
Operating Sequence
Key in the name of the table file or list file to be processed and added to the active
library.
4. The system displays the default node name and path for the table files, as specified in
the Default Project Control Data, at the bottom of the form.
this operation.
the time to process the source files.
292
________________ Create/Batch Physical Commodity Data
The system processes the source file and, if successful, it stores the resulting object file
in the active library and stores the source file in the associated text library.
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
293
________________
7.5.6 Revise Physical Commodity Data

This option enables you to select a table file from the library, edit the file, and then put it back
in the library.

Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the tables to be listed.
Operating Sequence
The system displays the table files in the active library.
Select the table files to be revised and select Accept.
294
________________ Revise Physical Commodity Data
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
into the library. (If you quit the editor, the table is not recompiled.)
The system returns to Step 2. You can select another table to be revised or select Exit.
295
________________
7.5.7 Delete Physical Commodity Data

This option enables you to delete a table file or set of table files from the active library. It also
deletes the revision dates from the corresponding Table Revision Management Library.

Operating Sequence
2. Select Table for Deletion
Select the tables to be deleted from the list of tables. You can use the scroll bar to scroll
through the available files.
Accept the files and begin processing.
The system deletes the table files from the active library.
296
________________ Report Physical Commodity Data
7.5.8 Report Physical Commodity Data
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
This option enables you to create a report file of all the table files in the active library or those
defined by the substring search criteria.
Operating Sequence
The system displays the reporting options on the form.
2. Revise Report Parameters
Set the toggle to Default Report to create a report that list the tables in the physical
data library.
OR
Set the toggle to Revision Dates Report and key in a date in the Revision Date field to
process all tables modified since the specified revision date. The report lists the full
contents of the modified tables with individual revision dates per line.
4. Key in the file information for the location of the report file to be created.
5. Select Save, Print or Print/Save.
297
________________
If you select the Save or Print/Save option, the system will create a file named
<standard>_tables in the default source file location (where <standard> is a prefix
depending on the active practice).
U.S. Practice us International - JIS jis

European - DIN din International - Australian aus
European - British Standard bs International - Practice A ina
European - Practice A eua International - Practice B inb
European - Practice B eub Company Practice cmp
6. Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit. For Delayed Submit, set
the time to process the request.
298
________________ List Physical Commodity Data
7.5.9 List Physical Commodity Data
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
This option displays all the table files for the active library with the revision date of each
table.

Operating Sequence
299
________________
7.5.10 Extract Physical Commodity Data

This option enables you to extract a table file out of the active library for editing or printing.

Operating Sequence
2. Select Table for Extraction
Select the tables from the list of files and select Accept. You can use the scroll bar to
scroll through the available files.
The system pulls the files out of the library and places them in the default table
directory. The system also writes the names of the extracted files to a file named
PD_tbl_list. For example,
The current date and time is: Wed Apr 29 15:59:41 1992
File: PD_tbl2 is TDINBODY_SPECIFIC_7P1E01_I15AS_A

File: PD_tbl3 is TDINBODY_SPECIFIC_7P1E01_I15AS_B
File: PD_tbl4 is TDINBODY_SPECIFIC_7P1E01_I15AS_C
File: PD_tbl5 is TDINOPER_SPECIFIC_7P1E01_I15AS_A
File: PD_tbl6 is TDINOPER_SPECIFIC_7P1E01_I15AS_B
File: PD_tbl7 is TDINOPER_SPECIFIC_7P1E01_I15AS_C
300
________________ Extract Physical Commodity Data
Commodity Data
7. Graphic
301
________________
302
________________ Table Formats and Naming Conventions
8. Table Formats and Naming

Conventions
Tables are used to store data required for interactive processing of piping and instrument
components. This section describes the tables which are included in the physical data
libraries. Refer to Physical Data Tables, page 266 for more information on these libraries.
Also refer to Piping Job Specification Tables, page 189 for more information on tables.
8. Table Formats
303
________________
8.1 Table Conventions

8.1.1 Table Names
Unless otherwise indicated, values for specific and generic parameters are stored in tables
whose names are derived from parameters in the PJS. When naming ASCII files in the text
libraries, if a dot (.) or a hyphen (-) is included in the Sc/Th column of the piping job
specification, the dot or hyphen will be converted to a dollar sign ($) when the table name or
ASCII file name is created. The actual character, and not the $, is displayed in all fields
representing the actual attribute involved. The following examples illustrate how thicknesses
are represented on the basis of the above rule:
Actual Characters ASCII equivalent

.25 $25
1 1
1.375 1$375
With version 5.0, the Physical Data Library Manager will respect the use of a dash (-) in a
table name. This allows you to include a dash in the commodity code for a piping commodity
valve, where the commodity code is used to form the name of the dimension table.
Commodity codes are read verbatim when they are used to create table names.
No conversion of dots (.) or hyphens (-), as described above, takes place. Also
note that a dot (.) is not a valid character to include in a table name. For this
reason, they should not be included as part of commodity codes for valves.
8.1.2 Comments
You can include any number of comments in a table, using the conventions described below:
For single-line comments:
! XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX , or
< XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX >
For multi-line comments:
< XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX >
where XXXX... represents the comment text.
304
________________ Table Conventions
8.1.3 Revision Markers

Table entries preceded by a karat (>) have been revised since their original release. For
example, the section of the table shown below has been revised three times since it was first
delivered.
8. Table Formats
8.1.4 Component Tables
The following conventions apply to the definition of columns in all the tables except tables for
specialty items.
The following line is required to define the number of input and output columns:
No_Inputs x No_Outputs x
The number of input columns must not exceed 2. The number of output columns must
not exceed 9; it can be 0.
The following statements are used in some tables to indicate that values will be
interpolated.
305
________________
A definition must be made using the following format regarding the units of measure
used in each column of a table:
Units= NPD_IN, SF, LB, INT, DEC, IN, RAT, IN, IN, IN
8.1.5 Units
Units are defined for each column of a table as follows:
Angle, degrees DEG

Angle between runs, degrees DEC
Area, FT2
IN2
YD2
MI2
SCM
SKM
Code-listed attributes INT
Density, LBF3
LB_UKGAL
LB_USGAL
KIPFT3
USTONFT3
KG_L
KG_DM3
KGM3
Length, inches IN
Length, millimeter MM
Length, inches decimal IN_DEC
Length, mm decimal MM_DEC
Mass, GRAIN
USTON
UKTON
MG
G
Nominal diameter, inches NPD_IN

Nominal diameter, mm NPD_MM
Pressure, psig PSIG

Pressure, pascal gage PAG
Pressure, bar BAR
Pressure, bar (gage) BAR_G
Pressure, atmospheres ATM
Pressure, inches water absolute INH20
306
Pressure, inches water at 32 deg INH20_32F

Pressure, inches mercury absolute INHG
Pressure, inches mercury at 32 deg INHG_32F
Pressure, kg per cm squared (gage) KG_CM2
Pressure, kg per cm squared (absolute) KG_CM2_A
Pressure, mm water at 4 deg MMH20
Pressure, mm mercury at 32 deg MMHG
Pressure, megaPascal (gage) MPa_g
Rating RAT
CLxxx and xxx# are expressed as xxx
Schedule/thickness, inches SC_TH_IN
8. Table Formats
Schedule/thickness, millimeters SC_TH_MM
Stress, psi PSI

Stress, pascal PA
Stress, kpa KPA
Stress, mpa MPA
Surface area, square feet SF

Surface area, square meter SM
Surface area, square millimeter SMM
Surface area/unit,
square feet per foot SFF
square meter per meter SM_M
square millimeter per meter SMM_M
Temperature, degrees Celsius DC

Temperature, degrees Fahrenheit DF
Temperature, degrees Kelvin DK
Temperature, degrees Rankine DR
Unitless alphanumeric AN*xx

where xx defines the number of characters
Unitless integer INT

Unitless real number DEC
Weight, pounds LB
Weight, kilogram KG
Weight/unit, pounds per foot LBF

Weight/unit, kilograms per meter KGM
307
________________
8.1.6 Fields (Input/Output Columns)

Attributes can consist of the following field types. The system determines the field type
on the basis of data provided in each table.
- NPD (for nominal diameter)

- INTEGER2
- REAL4 (floating point)
- AN*x (alphanumeric, where x defines the number of characters up to a maximum
of 8)
All entries in the tables are left justified.
Field locations and field lengths defined with XXXXs, WWWWs and ZZZZZs in this
document are observed.
Fractions are not used to define any table value.
Adjacent columns in a table are separated by one or more spaces.
If a value in a table is not known, a hyphen (-) must be used in the corresponding field.
The system interprets this entry as a blank value and displays a blank in reports,
drawings, and other data outputs.
Real numbers without decimals can be expressed with or without a decimal point. For
example, a nominal diameter of twenty inches can be expressed as 20, 20. , or 20.0. For
consistency, all delivered tables use the value 20
All alphanumeric values in a table must be enclosed in single quotes ( ). For example,
ZZZZZ
For tables with only one input column, the generic value ET_AL can be used in the
input column. The system translates this entry to indicate that values in the
immediately preceding line apply to any input value equal to or greater than the value in
the current line.
308
8.1.7 NPD Values

The following table is used to correlate English nominal pipe diameters with their
corresponding metric values.
Nominal Pipe Diameter Nominal Pipe Diameter

inches mm inches mm
0.125 6 14.00 350
0.250 8 16.00 400
0.375 10 18.00 450
0.500 15 20.00 500
0.750 20 22.00 550
8. Table Formats
1.000 25 24.00 600
1.250 32 26.00 650
1.500 40 28.00 700
2.000 50 30.00 750
2.500 65 32.00 800
3.000 80 34.00 850
3.500 90 36.00 900
4.000 100 38.00 950
5.000 125 40.00 1000
6.000 150 42.00 1050
8.000 200 44.00 1100
10.00 250 46.00 1150
12.00 300 48.00 1200
8.1.8 Rating
The following conventions apply to the rating attribute with respect to the naming of data
tables:
Ratings can be expressed in the PJS in any of the following formats: CLxxxx, xxxx#,
or OTxxxx. However, table entries and file names representing the rating exclude the
CL, #, or OT characters. This enables the same table to be used regardless of how the
rating is defined. In the delivered PJS, these rating formats are used in accordance with
the following criteria:
CLxxxx refers to an ANSI or API pressure rating
xxxx# refers to a pressure rating defined by an organization other than ANSI or API.
OTxxxx refers to a rating that meets the applicable ANSI or API rating geometrically
but not from a pressure carrying standpoint. An example is a valve supplied with
flanged ends meeting the bolting pattern of ANSI CL150 pressure rating but with
pressure carrying characteristics different from those of that ANSI rating.
Female ends for plastic pipe are usually defined in terms of schedule/thickness and not
in terms of rating. To make female ends for plastic pipe follow the rules for other
female ends, the applicable schedule/thickness is used as the value for rating. If such
rating values contain alphanumeric characters, the system strips all the alpha characters
from the rating value and uses only the numeric values in accessing the applicable
tables.
309
________________
If the rating in the PJS is expressed in alphabetic characters only, the system uses the
characters to access a data table. The names of the data tables include all the alphabetic
characters included in the PJS.
GRAVHD can be used to identify the rating for components rated to sustain a nominal
fluid head. This value can be used in the PJS and in the data tables.
OTHER can be used to identify a nonstandard rating value.
NONE can be used to identify the rating for components whose ends would normally
require the rating value as part of the table name, but for which a rating does not apply.
This value can be used in the PJS and in the data tables.
8.1.9 Schedule/Thickness
Schedule or thickness values are shown for all applicable components. In order of preference,
schedule and thickness are expressed in terms of:
Generic schedules, such as S-STD, S-XS and S-XXS. If the schedule name exceeds the
provided field length (for example, S-SDR13.5) it is defined in terms of its wall
thickness.
Specific schedules, such as S-40, S-60 and S-80.
NREQD: This value is used in cases where all of the following conditions apply:
The thickness value is not required to purchase the component.
Empty weights are not significantly affected by actual thickness values.
Either stress analysis is not applicable, or the component is considered to be

infinitely rigid in stress analysis calculations.
Specific wall thicknesses: To insure compatibility between the data tables, the PJS, and
wall thickness calculations, thickness is expressed as defined below. Trailing zeroes are
not included. Decimal points are not included for numbers without decimals.
.xxxx if the thickness is less than 1 inch

x if the thickness is an even inch
x.xxx if the thickness is 1 inch or larger
*Cyyy: The need to perform a thickness calculation is triggered by an entry with the
format *Cyyy in the Schedule/Thickness attribute of the Commodity Item entity. The
letters that make up this code have the following meaning:
The character C ensures that the schedule/thickness for the applicable end of the
component is determined by calculations using the thickness equation defined for
the piping materials class in the Default Wall Thickness Equation attribute of the
Piping Materials Class entity.
310
The characters yyy define the casting, joint or structural grade quality factor (E)
times 100. This factor is one of the parameters used in the thickness calculation. If
you are defining a calculation for a seamless fitting (E=1) but want to match the
thickness for the mating welded pipe (E=0.85), the quality factor for the pipe should
be used.
MATCH: The need to match the thickness of a component to that of the pipe of the
same diameter and of option 1 is triggered by an entry with the format MATCH in the
Schedule/Thickness attribute of the Commodity Item entity.
To minimize duplication when the same thickness can be expressed for metallic materials in
terms of either a generic or a specific schedule, the following convention is used. For a given
nominal diameter, only the schedules shown in the line for that diameter are used in the PJS
8. Table Formats
and in the data tables.
311
NomD S-5S S-10S S-10 S-20 S-30 S-STD S-40 S-40S S-60 S-XS S-80 S-80S S-100 S-120 S-140 S-160 S-XXS
0.125 S-10S S-STD S-STD S-40S S-XS S-XS S-80S
312
0.500 S-5S S-10S S-STD S-STD S-40S S-XS S-XS S-80S S-160 S-XXS
3.500 S-5S S-10S S-STD S-STD S-40S S-XS S-XS S-80S
4.000 S-5S S-10S S-STD S-STD S-40S S-XS S-XS S-80S S-120 S-160 S-XXS
8.000 S-5S S-10S S-20 S-30 S-STD S-STD S-40S S-60 S-XS S-XS S-80S S-100 S-120 S-140 S-160 S-XXS
10.00 S-5S S-10S S-20 S-30 S-STD S-STD S-40S S-XS S-XS S-80 S-80S S-100 S-120 S-XXS S-160 S-XXS
12.00 S-5S S-10S S-20 S-30 S-STD S-40 S-40S S-60 S-XS S-80 S-80S S-100 S-XXS S-140 S-160 S-XXS
14.00 S-5S S-10S S-10 S-20 S-STD S-STD S-40 S-60 S-XS S-80 S-100 S-120 S-140 S-160
16.00 S-5S S-10S S-10 S-20 S-STD S-STD S-XS S-60 S-XS S-80 S-100 S-120 S-140 S-160
18.00 S-5S S-10S S-10 S-20 S-30 S-STD S-40 S-60 S-XS S-80 S-100 S-120 S-140 S-160
20.00 S-5S S-10S S-10 S-STD S-XS S-STD S-40 S-60 S-XS S-80 S-100 S-120 S-140 S-160
22.00 S-5S S-10S S-10 S-STD S-XS S-STD S-60 S-XS S-80 S-100 S-120 S-140 S-160
24.00 S-5S S-10S S-10 S-STD S-30 S-STD S-40 S-60 S-XS S-80 S-100 S-120 S-140 S-160
26.00 S-10 S-XS S-STD S-XS
28.00 S-10 S-XS S-30 S-STD S-XS
30.00 S-5S S-10S S-10 S-XS S-30 S-STD S-XS
32.00 S-10 S-XS S-30 S-STD S-40 S-XS
34.00 S-10 S-XS S-30 S-STD S-40 S-XS

36.00 S-10 S-XS S-30 S-STD S-40 S-XS
38.00 S-STD S-XS
40.00 S-STD S-XS
42.00 S-STD S-XS
44.00 S-STD S-XS
________________
46.00 S-STD S-XS

48.00 S-STD S-XS
8.1.10 Weight Tables

Weight tables are required for the following thicknesses:
For components made from pipe material:
If the thickness involved is covered by a schedule, tables are required for all
commercially available schedules to the full range of their nominal diameter.
If the thickness involved is not covered by a schedule, tables are required in 1/16
inch increments from 0.25 to 1.25 inches (inclusive), and from 22 inches to the full
range of their nominal diameter.
8. Table Formats
For components made from plate material, tables are required in 1/16 inch increments
from 0.25 to 1.25 inches and in 1 inch increments from 12 to 144 inches.
313
________________
8.1.11 Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used to describe the table name formats in this document.
(G) Green
(R) Red
BrchTbl Branch Table
Cmdty Code Commodity Code
GCP Green Connect Point
GS Geometric Industry Standard (from CL575)
MC Model Code
Op Operator/actuator type (from CL550)
Rat Pressure Rating
RCP Red Connect Point
Sc/Th Schedule/Thickness
Term End Preparation (from CL330)
TNF Table Name Format
TS Table Suffix (from CL576 and CL577)
Type Termination type (BLT, FEM, or MAL)
WC Weight Code (from CL578)
Refer to Variables for Generic Tables and Variables for Specific Tables for a description of
the variables used in table definitions. Generally, values appearing in all uppercase characters
(such as BLT or STUD) indicate a hard-coded value.
314
________________ Table Requirements
8.2 Table Requirements

This section indicates which tables are required to place a particular type of component (such
as a valve or fitting). The table groups listed in this section are used to store data required for
interactive processing of piping and instrument components. The applicability of the various
table groups is defined as a function of the termination types of the components as defined in
the Piping Job Specification (PJS).
Refer to the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for a detailed description of the
requirements for specific commodity items, instruments, and miscellaneous piping and
instrument items.
8. Table Formats
Typically, the tables in the table combinations are used to store:
The surface area and weight of water for the component.
The dimensional parameters for the component.
The empty weight of the component and/or data about valve operators.
8.2.1 Tables Required for Piping Components
Valves (6Q1C)
Termination Types Applicable Tables

Bolted(G) P15A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_A
Male(G) P15B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_B
Female(G) P59 Cmdty Code (if operator code <=24)
P60A Cmdty Code_WOPD_A (if operator code >24 & <=40)
Bolted(G)-Male(R) P25A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_A
Female(G)-Male(R) P25B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_B
P59 Cmdty Code (if operator code <=24)
Bolted(G)-Bolted(R) P26A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A
Bolted(G)-Female(R) P26B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B
Female(G)-Female(R) P59 Cmdty Code (if operator code <=24)
Female(G)-Bolted(R) P60A Cmdty Code_WOPD_A (if operator code >24 & <=40)
Male(G)-Male(R) P26A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A
P26B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B
Male(G)-Female(R) P27A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A
Male(G)-Bolted(R) P27B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B
Operators P31A MC_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Op_A (if operator code <=24)
P31B MC_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Op_B (if operator code <=24)
P60B Cmdty Code_WOPD_B (if operator code >24 & <=40)
315
________________
8.2.1.1 Fittings (6P2C, 6P3C, 6Q2C and 6Q3C)

Male(G) P11A MC_GS_Term(G)_A
P11B MC_GS_Term(G)_B
P51 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WC
Female(G) P15B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_B
P52 MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WC
P61 MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WC
Female(G)-Female(R) P62 MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WC
Female(G)-Bolted(R)
Male(G)-Male(R) P21A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_A
P21B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_B
P63 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WC
Excludes olet and stubbing type fittings
Male(G)-Bolted(R) P27A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A
Male(G)-Female(R) P27B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B
P64 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_WC
Excludes olet and stubbing type fittings
Olet fittings P28A MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_A
P28B MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_B
P65 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WC
Stubbing fittings P29A MC_GS_BrchTbl_Angle_A
Overflow and weight tables do not apply.
Fire and Safety Piping Components (6P4C and 6Q4C)

Male(G) P11A MC_GS_Term(G)_A
Female(G) P15B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_B
Female(G)-Female(R) P62 MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WC
Female(G)-Bolted(R)
Male(G)-Male(R) P21A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_A
Male(G)-Bolted(R) P27A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A
Male(G)-Female(R) P27B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B
316
________________ Specialty Piping Components (6P6C and 6Q6C)
8.2.1.2 Specialty Piping Components (6P6C and 6Q6C)

P80 Specialty Body Data
P81 Operator/Actuator Data
8. Table Formats
317
________________
8.2.2 Tables Required for Instrument Components

The following table sets are used for instrument component classes 7P1E (Control Valves and
Regulators), 7P2C (Relief Devices), 7P3C (Other in-line Instruments), and 7Q4D (Off-Line
Instruments).
I80 Inbody_Specific_AABBCC_MC_n
Inbody_Typical_AABBCC_MC_n
I81 Inoper_Specific_AABBCC_MC_n
Inoper_Typical_AABBCC_MC_n
318
________________ Generic Tables
8.3 Generic Tables

This section describes the neutral file formats used to define generic piping and instrument
data. The following tables are required to store generic data which applies to both piping and
instrument components:
TNF Attributes Used to Form Table Name
G10 BLT_Term_Rat_TS
G12 STUD_Rat_TS
8. Table Formats
G12T
STUD_Term_Rat_TS
G20 MAL_Term_TS
G30 FEM_Term_Rat/Sc/Th_TS
G50 MALWT_Term_Rat/Sc/Th_TS_WC
These tables are stored in the physical data library.
Table format G14, COMPAT_Rat(low)_TS_Rat(high)_TS, which was used

with the VAX Piping Design product is not used by the Workstation product.
This table format may be included in the physical data library but it will not be
accessed by the product.
319
________________
8.3.1 Variables for Generic Tables

The letters P through Z are used in the generic tables to represent the following generic
variables.
Variable End Type Explanation

P Bolted This is the outside diameter of a bolted end of the indicated
termination type, rating, and nominal diameter, as defined in
the table named "BLT_Term_Rat_TS".
Male This is the outside diameter of a male end of the indicated

termination type and nominal diameter, as defined in the
table named "MAL_Term_TS".
Female The is the outside diameter of the female end of the

component of the indicated termination type, rating, and
nominal diameter, as defined in the table named
"FEM_Term_Rat_TS". For model graphics, it is desirable
for the value of this parameter to be larger than the value of
the matching male termination end. However, components
such as 90 degree elbows and tees will not place if the value
is too large. Therefore, the following values have been
defined for this parameter:
For PVC and CPVC female ends, use the same as the value
of P for the corresponding male termination type.
For all other female ends, use 30% of the fitting OD at the
female end plus 70% of the matching pipe OD.
Q Bolted Not applicable
Male The value of this variable is "0" for all male ends.
Female This is the depth of socket, as defined in the table named

"FEM_Term_Rat_TS".
For socketwelded ends, this value is the nominal depth of the

socket less 1/16". The actual depth of socket less 1/16" is
used to determine a components dimensional parameters.
For female threaded ends, this is the thread engagement as

defined:
in Table 8-1 for components complying with ANSI-B16.12
in Table 8-2 for all other components.
320
________________ Variables for Generic Tables
R Bolted This is the flange thickness, as defined in the table named

"BLT_Term_Rat_TS". This dimension represents the
distance from the outermost face of the flange to the back
surface of the flange on which the nut rests. It includes any
projections of the flange, such as the raised face.
For lap-flanged ends, it includes the thickness of the pipe or

stub end plus the thickness of the loose flange used. If the
Source of Bolt Spec Data is set as a function of termination
type, rating, and table suffix in the RDB, the entries for the
lap type terminations in the BLT_Term* and STUD_Term*
generic tables provide for the addition of wall thickness from
the TDB.
8. Table Formats
This parameter is primarily used to calculate stud length.
When dealing with specialty components (such as relief
valves), you might have to develop many generic tables for
precise values. A practical alternative would be to create a
table in which values for this parameter are large enough to
insure that short studs do not result.
Male Not applicable.
Female Not applicable.
S Bolted This is the seating depth, as defined in the table named

"BLT_Term_Rat_TS". This dimension represents the
distance from the outermost surface of the bolted end to the
seating surface of the gasket. It will only have a value for
small groove, large groove, small female and large female
flanged ends, and for mechanical joints. The value of this
parameter will be zero for all other bolted ends.
T Bolted This is half of the gasket gap thickness, as defined in the PJS
for the applicable piping materials class.
V Bolted This is the diameter of bolts required at a bolted connection,

as defined in the table named "STUD_Rat_TS" as a function
of the nominal pipe diameter, rating, and table suffix of the
applicable bolted end.
321
________________
X Bolted Not applicable.
Male This is the wall thickness of the applicable end of a

component of the indicated nominal diameter, as defined in
the table named "MALWT_Term_Sc/Th_TS_WC".
Z Any No specific meaning is attached to this variable.
322
________________ Variables for Generic Tables
Table 8-1. Thread Engagement for Components per ANSI-B16.12
Thread Engagement, inches

NPD in ANSI-B16.12 PDS
1.25 0.42 0.42
1.5 0.42 0.42
2 0.44 0.44
2.5 0.68 0.68
3 0.77 0.77
4 0.84 0.84
5 0.94 0.94
6 0.96 0.96
8 1.06 1.06
Table 8-2. Thread Engagement for All Other Components
8. Table Formats
Thread Engagement, inches, as Reported By
NPD in NAVCO ANSI-B1.20.1 Stockham Crane Average PDS
0.125 0.3125 0.2726 0.25 0.25 0.2713 0.25
0.25 0.4375 0.3945 0.375 0.375 0.3955 0.375
0.375 0.4375 0.4067 0.375 0.375 0.3986 0.375
0.5 0.5625 0.5343 0.5 0.5 0.5242 0.5
0.75 0.5625 0.5533 0.5625 0.5625 0.5602 0.5625
1 0.6875 0.6609 0.6875 0.6875 0.6809 0.6875
1.25 0.6875 0.6809 0.6875 0.6875 0.6859 0.6875
1.5 0.6875 0.6809 0.6875 0.6875 0.6859 0.6875
2 0.75 0.6969 0.75 0.75 0.7367 0.75
2.5 1.0625 0.932 0.9375 0.9375 0.9674 0.9375
3 1.125 1.016 1 1 1.0353 1
3.5 1.1875 1.071 1.0625 1.107 1.0625
4 1.1875 1.094 1.125 1.1355 1.125
5 1.3125 1.187 1.25 1.2483 1.25
6 1.375 1.208 1.3125 1.2985 1.3125
8 1.4375 1.313 1.4375 1.396 1.4375
10 1.625 1.46 1.625 1.57 1.5625
12 1.75 1.61 1.75 1.7033 1.75
323
________________
8.3.2 Generic Table for Bolted Ends (G10)

This table enables you to define the outside diameter, flange thickness, seating depth, and bolt
circle diameter for components with bolted ends.
The table name format for this table is:
For TNF=G10 BLT_Term_Rat_TS
Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition BLT_WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
! TNF=G10 By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ
Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, IN
! Diam P R S BCD
WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ
END
Example
Table_Data_Definition BLT_20_150_5
! Description= CL150 raised face flange dimensions
! Source= MSS-SP-42 1/4 & 3/8", ANSI-B16.5-1981 1/2" - 24" & API 605 above 24"
! TNF=G10 By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=1 Date=15-Oct-1987
Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, IN
! Diam P R S BCD
0.25 2.5 0.3438 0 1.6875
0.375 2.5 0.3438 0 1.6875
0.5 3.5 0.4375 0 2.375
0.75 3.875 0.5 0 2.75
1 4.25 0.5625 0 3.125
1.25 4.625 0.625 0 3.5
1.5 5 0.6875 0 3.875
2 6 0.75 0 4.75
2.5 7 0.875 0 5.5
3 7.5 0.9375 0 6
3.5 8.5 0.9375 0 7
4 9 0.9375 0 7.5
5 10 0.9375 0 8.5
6 11 1 0 9.5
8 13.5 1.125 0 11.75
10 16 1.1875 0 14.25
12 19 1.25 0 17
14 21 1.375 0 18.75
16 23.5 1.4375 0 21.25
18 25 1.5625 0 22.75
20 27.5 1.6875 0 25
324
________________ Generic Table for Bolted Ends (G10)
24 32 1.875 0 29.5
26 30.9375 1.625 0 29.3125
28 32.9375 1.75 0 31.3125
30 34.9375 1.75 0 33.3125
32 37.0625 1.8125 0 35.4375
34 39.5625 1.9375 0 37.6875
36 41.625 2.0625 0 39.75
38 44.25 2.125 0 42.125
40 46.25 2.1875 0 44.125
42 48.25 2.3125 0 46.125
44 50.25 2.375 0 48.125
46 52.8125 2.4375 0 50.5625
48 54.8125 2.5625 0 52.5625
50 56.8125 2.6875 0 54.5625
52 58.8125 2.75 0 56.5625
54 61 2.8125 0 58.75
56 63 2.875 0 60.75
8. Table Formats
58 65.9375 2.9375 0 63.4375
60 67.9375 3 0 65.4375
END
325
________________
8.3.3 Generic Table for Studs used in Bolted

Connections (G12)
This table defines the number of bolts, the bolt diameter, and the bolt extension for a given
NPD, for studs in bolted connections. If the Length Calculation toggle on the Material
Takeoff Option form is set to Almost Precise in Project Administrator, the bolt spec
data is set as a function of rating and table suffix.
The W_n columns are used to classify the bolt extension. The n applies to the value defined
in the Piping Commodity Data for the bolt diameter being considered. For example, if the
modifier value for the PCD is 0, the value in the W_0 column is used for nut allowance. This
capability enables the system to handle special nut allowances, such as when stud tensioning
devices are utilized.
For TNF=G12 STUD_Rat_TS
This table is accessed using values for rating and table suffix derived from the applicable
flanged end.
Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition STUD_WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
Units= NPD_IN, INT, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN
! Diam U V W_0 W_1 W_2 W_3 W_4 W_5
WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ
END
Example
Table_Data_Definition STUD_150_5
! Description= CL150 bolting
! Source= PIPING RDB DATA MANUAL
! TNF=G12 By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=1 Date=03-Nov-1987
! Diam U V W_0 W_1 W_2 W_3 W_4 W_5
0.25 4 0.375 0.5938 - - - - -
0.375 4 0.375 0.5938 - - - - -
0.5 4 0.5 0.6563 1 - - - -
0.75 4 0.5 0.6563 0.875 - - - -
1 4 0.5 0.6563 1 - - - -
326
________________
Generic Table for Studs used in Bolted Connections (G12)
1.25 4 0.5 0.6563 0.875 - - - -

1.5 4 0.5 0.6563 1 - - - -
2 4 0.625 0.7813 0.8751 - - - -
2.5 4 0.625 0.7813 1.125 - - - -
3 4 0.625 0.7813 1 - - - -
3.5 8 0.625 0.7813 1 - - - -
4 8 0.625 0.7813 1 - - - -
5 8 0.75 0.9063 1.25 - - - -
6 8 0.75 0.9063 1.125 - - - -
8 8 0.75 0.9063 1.125 - - - -
10 12 0.875 1.0313 1.5 - - - -
12 12 0.875 1.0313 1.375 - - - -
14 12 1 1.1563 1.625 - - - -
16 16 1 1.1563 1.5 - - - -
18 16 1.125 1.2813 1.75 - - - -
20 20 1.125 1.3438 2 - - - -
24 20 1.25 1.4688 2 - - - -
8. Table Formats
26 36 0.75 0.9688 1.375 - - - -
28 40 0.75 0.9688 1.375 - - - -
30 44 0.75 0.9688 1.375 - - - -
32 48 0.75 0.9688 1.5 - - - -
34 40 0.875 1.0938 1.75 - - - -
36 44 0.875 1.0938 1.75 - - - -
38 40 1 1.2188 1.75 - - - -
40 44 1 1.2188 2 - - - -
42 48 1 1.2188 1.75 - - - -
44 52 1 1.2188 1.875 - - - -
46 40 1.125 1.3751 2 - - - -
48 44 1.125 1.3438 2 - - - -
50 48 1.125 1.3438 2 - - - -
52 52 1.125 1.3438 2.125 - - - -
54 56 1.125 1.3438 2 - - - -
56 60 1.125 1.3438 2.125 - - - -
58 48 1.25 1.4688 2.25 - - - -
60 52 1.25 1.4688 2.125 - - - -
END
327
________________
8.3.4 Generic Table for Studs in Bolted

Connections w/ Term Type (G12T)
This table defines the number of bolts, the bolt diameter, and the bolt extension for a given
NPD, for studs in bolted connections. If the Length Calculation toggle on the Material
Takeoff Option form is set to Precise in Project Administrator, the bolt spec data is set
as a function of termination type, rating, and table suffix.
The W_n columns are used to classify the bolt extension. The n applies to the value defined
in the Piping Materials Class for the bolt diameter being considered. For example, if the
modifier value for the PMC is 0, the value in the W_0 column is used for nut allowance. This
capability enables the system to handle special nut allowances, such as when stud tensioning
devices are utilized.
STUD_Term_Rat_TS
This table is accessed using values for termination type, rating and table suffix derived from
the applicable flanged end.
Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition STUD_WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
! Parameter W_2 equals 50% of applicable stud diameter plus W_0.
! TNF=G12T By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ
! Diam U V W_0 W_1 W_2 W_3 W_4 W_5
END
Example
Table_Data_Definition STUD_20_150_5
! Description= CL150 bolting
! Parameter W_2 equals 50% of applicable stud diameter plus W_0.
! TNF=G12T By=GJH Ckd By=NP Rev=0 Date=04-Oct-1989
! Diam U V W_0 W_1 W_2 W_3 W_4 W_5
0.5 4 0.5 0.625 1 - - - -
0.75 4 0.5 0.6875 0.875 - - - -
1 4 0.5 0.625 1 - - - -
328
________________
Generic Table for Studs in Bolted Connections w/ Term Type (G12T)
1.25 4 0.5 0.6875 0.875 - - - -

1.5 4 0.5 0.625 1 - - - -
2 4 0.625 0.8125 1.125 - - - -
2.5 4 0.625 0.8125 1.125 - - - -
3 4 0.625 0.75 1 - - - -
3.5 8 0.625 0.75 1 - - - -
4 8 0.625 0.75 1 - - - -
5 8 0.75 0.875 1.25 1.25 - - -
6 8 0.75 0.9375 1.125 1.3125 - - -
8 8 0.75 0.9375 1.125 1.3125 - - -
10 12 0.875 1 1.5 1.4375 - - -
12 12 0.875 1.0625 1.375 1.5 - - -
14 12 1 1.1875 1.625 1.6875 - - -
16 16 1 1.125 1.5 1.625 - - -
18 16 1.125 1.25 1.75 1.8125 - - -
20 20 1.125 1.375 2 1.9375 - - -
24 20 1.25 1.4375 2.125 2.0625 - - -
8. Table Formats
26 36 0.75 1.0625 1.375 1.4375 - - -
28 40 0.75 1.0625 1.375 1.4375 - - -
30 44 0.75 1.0625 1.375 1.4375 - - -
32 48 0.75 1 1.5 1.375 - - -
34 40 0.875 1.125 1.75 1.5625 - - -
36 44 0.875 1.125 1.75 1.5625 - - -
38 40 1 1.3125 1.875 1.8125 - - -
40 44 1 1.25 2 1.75 - - -
42 48 1 1.25 1.75 1.75 - - -
44 52 1 1.3125 1.875 1.8125 - - -
46 40 1.125 1.5 2 2.0625 - - -
48 44 1.125 1.375 2 1.9375 - - -
50 48 1.125 1.375 2 1.9375 - - -
52 52 1.125 1.4375 2.125 2 - - -
54 56 1.125 1.375 2 1.9375 - - -
56 60 1.125 1.4375 2.125 2 - - -
58 48 1.25 1.5 2.25 2.125 - - -
60 52 1.25 1.5625 2.125 2.1875 - - -
END
329
________________
8.3.5 Generic Table for Male Ends (G20)

This table enables you to define the surface area, water weight, outside diameter, and 1/2 pipe
OD for components with male ends.
For TNF=G20 MAL_Term_TS
Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition MAL_WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
Units= NPD_IN, SFF, IN, IN
! Unt Sur
! Diam Area P P/2
WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ
END
Example
Table_Data_Definition MAL_300_5
! Description= Pipe outside diameters
! Source= ANSI-B-36.10M, 36.19M, API-5L, 5LE, 5LP, 5LS & 5LU
! TNF=G20 By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=0 Date=10-Sep-1987
Units= NPD_IN, SFF, IN, IN
! Unt Sur
! Diam Area P P/2
0.125 0.106 0.405 0.2025
0.25 0.141 0.54 0.27
0.375 0.177 0.675 0.3375
0.5 0.22 0.84 0.42
0.75 0.275 1.05 0.525
1 0.344 1.315 0.6575
1.25 0.434 1.66 0.83
1.5 0.497 1.9 0.95
2 0.622 2.375 1.1875
2.5 0.753 2.875 1.4375
3 0.916 3.5 1.75
3.5 1.047 4 2
4 1.178 4.5 2.25
5 1.456 5.5625 2.7813
6 1.73 6.625 3.3125
8 2.26 8.625 4.3125
10 2.81 10.75 5.375
12 3.34 12.75 6.375
14 3.67 14 7
16 4.19 16 8
330
________________
Generic Table for Male Ends (G20)
18 4.71 18 9
20 5.24 20 10
22 5.76 22 11
24 6.28 24 12
26 6.81 26 13
28 7.33 28 14
30 7.85 30 15
32 8.38 32 16
34 8.9 34 17
36 9.42 36 18
38 9.95 38 19
40 10.47 40 20
42 10.99 42 21
44 11.52 44 22
46 12.04 46 23
48 12.57 48 24
52 13.61 52 26
8. Table Formats
56 14.66 56 28
60 15.71 60 30
64 16.76 64 32
68 17.80 68 34
72 18.85 72 36
76 19.90 76 38
80 20.94 80 40
END
331
________________
8.3.6 Generic Table for Female Ends (G30)

This table enables you to define the outside diameter and depth of socket for female ends.
For TNF=G30 FEM_Term_Rat/Sc/Th_TS
Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition FEM_WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
! Diam P Q
END
Example
Table_Data_Definition FEM_420_150_5
! Description= CL150 socketwelded flange hub O.D. and socketwelded valve O.D.
! Source= ANSI-B16.11 CL3000 for .125 to .375 dias, ANSI-B16.5 above .375 dia.
! TNF=G30 By=GJH Ckd By=JPF Rev=0 Date=29-May-1986
! Diam P Q
0.125 0.486 0.3125
0.25 0.6353 0.3125
0.375 0.7755 0.3125
0.5 0.9443 0.3125
0.75 1.185 0.375
1 1.5018 0.4375
1.25 1.8558 0.5
1.5 2.0988 0.5625
2 2.5813 0.625
2.5 3.0813 0.6875
3 3.725 0.75
END
332
________________
Generic Table for Weight and Thickness Data, Male Ends (G50)
8.3.7 Generic Table for Weight and Thickness

Data, Male Ends (G50)
This table enables you to define empty weight and wall thickness data for male ends.
For TNF=G50 MALWT_Term_Rat/Sc/Th_TS_WC
Neutral File Format
8. Table Formats
Table_Data_Definition MALWT_WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
Units= NPD_IN, LBF, LBF, IN
! GCP Unit Wt Unit Wt
! Diam Empty Water X
END
Example
Table_Data_Definition MALWT_300_S$40_5_52
! Description= Schedule 40 wall thickness
! Source= ANSI-B36.10M-1985
! TNF=G50 By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=0 Date=10-Sep-1987
Units= NPD_IN, LBF, LBF, IN
! GCP Unit Wt Unit Wt
! Diam Empty Water X
12 53.52 48.5 0.406
14 63.44 58.63 0.438
18 104.67 96.92 0.562
20 123.11 120.45 0.594
24 171.29 174.22 0.688
32 230.08 319.2 0.688
34 244.77 362.25 0.688
36 282.35 405.09 0.75
END
333
________________
8.4 Piping Component Tables

This section describes the table formats used to define component data. The following tables
are required to store component-specific data required for interactive processing of piping
components:
These tables are stored in the physical data library.
Use tables P11*-P20* for piping component data based only on green connect point data.

P11A MC_GS_Term(G)_A
P15A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_A
P15B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_B
Use tables P21*-P30* for piping component data based on green and red connect point data.
For more information, refer to Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Data
(P21A,P25A,P26A,P27A,P28A,P29A), page 342 and Piping Component Table Green and
Red CP Overflow Data (P21B,P25B,P26B,P27B,P28B), page 344 .

P21A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_A
P25A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_A
P25B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_B
P26A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A
P26B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B
P27A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A
P27B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B
P28A MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_A
P28B MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_B
P29A MC_GS_BrchTbl_Angle_A
Use tables P31*-P40* for dimensional data based on green connect point data of piping valve
operators whose operator code list values (as defined in CL550 - Operator/Actuator Type) are
equal to or less than 24.

P31A MC_Type(G)_Rat(G)_Op_A
P31B MC_Type(G)_Rat(G)_Op_B
Use tables P51-P58 for non-valve piping component empty weights based on green connect
point data.

334
________________ Piping Component Tables
Use table P59 for empty weights of piping valves, including weight of operators, whose
operator code list values (as defined in CL550 - Operator/Actuator Type) are less than or
equal to 24, regardless of whether only green connect point or both green and red connect
point data applies to the valve.
P59 Cmdty Code
Use tables P60* for empty weights of piping valves, weights and centers of gravity of valve
operators, model codes of valve operators and for dimensional data of piping valve operators
whose operator code list values (as defined in CL550 - Operator/Actuator Type) exceed 24
and are less than or equal to 40, regardless of whether only green connect point or both green
and red connect point data applies to the valve.
8. Table Formats
P60A Cmdty Code_WOPD_A
P60B Cmdty Code_WOPD_B
Use tables P61-P70 for non-valve piping component empty weights based on green and red
connect point data. Refer to Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP and
RCP Data (P61,P62,P63,P64,P65), page 352

P62 MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WC
P65 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WC
Use tables P80 and P81 for data about piping specialty components defined in the Material
Reference Database.
Piping Component Tables for Specialty Components, page 354 for more information.
P80 Specialty Body Data

P81 Operator/Actuator Data
335
________________
8.4.1 Variables for Specific Tables

Letters A through O represent variables which are specific to a component.
Variable End Type Explanation

A Any For components with identical end terminations and
branches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of the
component, this is the distance from the origin of the
component to the outermost face of any of its ends.
For components with different end terminations or branches

that are not normal to the main axis of the component, this is
the distance from the origin of the component to the
outermost face of the end in the vicinity of PCP1.
Bolted This value is included in the appropriate dimension table.
Female This value can be deduced from the expression E + Q using

the values of E and Q from the appropriate tables.
B Any For components with identical end terminations and

component, this parameter does not apply.

Female This value can be deduced from the expression F + Q using

the values of F and Q from the appropriate tables.
C Any For components with identical end terminations and


336
________________ Variables for Specific Tables
Female This value can be deduced from the expression G + Q using

values of G and Q from the appropriate tables.
D Any For components with identical end terminations and


8. Table Formats

Female This value can be deduced from the expression H + Q using
values of H and Q from the appropriate tables.
E Any For components with identical end terminations and

component, this is the distance from the origin of the
component to any of its PCPs.

the distance from the origin of the component to PCP1.
Bolted This parameter can be deduced from the expression A + T

using the values of A and T from the appropriate tables.
Male This value is included in the appropriate dimension table.
Female This value is included in the appropriate dimension table.
F Any For components with identical end terminations and


Bolted This parameter can be deduced from the expression B + T

using the values of B and T from the appropriate tables.
337
________________
G Any For components with identical end terminations and


Bolted This parameter can be deduced from the expression C + T

using values of C and T from the appropriate tables.
H Any For components with identical end terminations and


Bolted This parameter can be deduced from the expression D + T

using the values of D and T from the appropriate tables.
I,J,K,L,M,N Any These values are used in dimension tables for specific
components as required by the component being defined.
O Any This is the overall length of the component considering the

outermost surface at each end of the component.
338
________________ Piping Component Table for GCP Data (P11A, P15A)
8.4.2 Piping Component Table for GCP Data (P11A,

P15A)
This table enables you to define general parameters for components which require only green
connect point data.
The table name formats for this table are:
For TNF=P11A MC_GS_Term(G)_A

For TNF=P15A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_A
8. Table Formats
Neutral File Format
Table_Data_Definition WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
! TNF=YYYY By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ
! SN=ZZZZZZ Par 1=ZZ Par 2=ZZ Par 3=ZZ Par 4=ZZ
! Par 5=ZZ Par 6=ZZ
Units= NPD_IN, SF, LB, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN
! GCP Surf Water Dimensional Parameters
! Diam Area Weight Par 1 Par 2 Par 3 Par 4 Par 5 Par 6
END
Example
Table_Data_Definition GAT_40_20_150_A
! Description= CL150 gate valve raised face flanged ends
! Source= ANSI-B16.10-1986
! TNF=P15A By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=1 Date=29-Oct-1987
! SN=V1 Par 1=A
Units= NPD_IN, SF, LB, IN
! GCP Surf Water Dimensional Parameters
! Diam Area Weight Par 1
0.25 - - 2
0.375 - - 2
0.5 - - 2.125
0.75 - - 2.3125
1 - - 2.5
1.25 - - 2.75
1.5 - - 3.25
2 - - 3.5
2.5 - - 3.75
3 - - 4
4 - - 4.5
5 - - 5
6 - - 5.25
8 - - 5.75
10 - - 6.5
12 - - 7
14 - - 7.5
339
________________
16 - - 8
18 - - 8.5
20 - - 9
24 - - 10
26 - - 11
28 - - 12
30 - - 12
36 - - 14
END
340
________________
Piping Component Table GCP Overflow Data (P11B, P15B)
8.4.3 Piping Component Table GCP Overflow Data

(P11B, P15B)
This table enables you to define overflow parameters for components to which table name
formats P11A and P15A apply.
For TNF=P11B MC_GS_Term(G)_B

For TNF=P15B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_B
8. Table Formats
Neutral File Format
! Par 5=ZZ Par 6=ZZ Par 7=ZZ Par 8=ZZ
Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN
! GCP Dimensional Parameters
! Diam Par 1 Par 2 Par 3 Par 4 Par 5 Par 6 Par 7 Par 8
END
341
________________
8.4.4 Piping Component Table Green and Red CP

Data (P21A,P25A,P26A,P27A,P28A,P29A)
This table enables you to define parameters for components which require both green and red
connect point data.
TNF=P21A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_A
TNF=P25A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_A
TNF=P26A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A
TNF=P27A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A
TNF=P28A MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_A
TNF=P29A MC_GS_BrchTbl_Angle_A
Neutral File Format

! Par 5=ZZ
Units= NPD_IN, NPD_IN, SF, LB, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN
! Nom Diam Surf Weight Dimensional Parameters
! GCP RCP Area Water Par 1 Par 2 Par 3 Par 4 Par 5
WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ
END
Example
Table_Data_Definition E90R_39_300_300_A
! Description= 90 deg long radius reducing elbow beveled ends
! Source= ANSI-B16.9-1978
! TNF=P21A By=GJH Ckd By=JPF Rev=0 Date=15-May-1986
! SN=F84 Par 1=E Par 2=K Par 3=F Par 4=L
Units= NPD_IN, NPD_IN, SF, LB, IN, IN, IN, IN
! Nom Diam Surf Weight Dimensional Parameters
! GCP RCP Area Water Par 1 Par 2 Par 3 Par 4
2 1 - - 3 0.53 3 0.53
2 1.25 - - 3 0.3575 3 0.3575
2 1.5 - - 3 0.2375 3 0.2375
2.5 1.25 - - 3.75 0.6075 3.75 0.6075
2.5 1.5 - - 3.75 0.4875 3.75 0.4875
2.5 2 - - 3.75 0.25 3.75 0.25
3 1.5 - - 4.5 0.8 4.5 0.8
3 2 - - 4.5 0.5625 4.5 0.5625
3 2.5 - - 4.5 0.3125 4.5 0.3125
3.5 2 - - 5.25 0.8125 5.25 0.8125
3.5 2.5 - - 5.25 0.5625 5.25 0.5625
342
________________
Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Data (P21A,P25A,P26A,P27A,P28A,P29A)
3.5 3 - - 5.25 0.25 5.25 0.25

4 2 - - 6 1.0625 6 1.0625
4 2.5 - - 6 0.8125 6 0.8125
4 3 - - 6 0.5 6 0.5
4 3.5 - - 6 0.25 6 0.25
5 2.5 - - 7.5 1.3438 7.5 1.3438
5 3 - - 7.5 1.0313 7.5 1.0313
5 3.5 - - 7.5 0.7813 7.5 0.7813
5 4 - - 7.5 0.5313 7.5 0.5313
6 3 - - 9 1.5625 9 1.5625
6 3.5 - - 9 1.3125 9 1.3125
6 4 - - 9 1.0625 9 1.0625
6 5 - - 9 0.5312 9 0.5312
8 4 - - 12 2.0625 12 2.0625
8 5 - - 12 1.5312 12 1.5312
8 6 - - 12 1 12 1
10 5 - - 15 2.5937 15 2.5937
8. Table Formats
10 6 - - 15 2.0625 15 2.0625
10 8 - - 15 1.0625 15 1.0625
12 6 - - 18 3.0625 18 3.0625
12 8 - - 18 2.0625 18 2.0625
12 10 - - 18 1 18 1
14 8 - - 21 2.6875 21 2.6875
14 10 - - 21 1.625 21 1.625
14 12 - - 21 0.625 21 0.625
16 10 - - 24 2.625 24 2.625
16 12 - - 24 1.625 24 1.625
16 14 - - 24 1 24 1
18 10 - - 27 3.625 27 3.625
18 12 - - 27 2.625 27 2.625
18 14 - - 27 2 27 2
18 16 - - 27 1 27 1
20 10 - - 30 4.625 30 4.625
20 12 - - 30 3.625 30 3.625
20 14 - - 30 3 30 3
20 16 - - 30 2 30 2
20 18 - - 30 1 30 1
24 12 - - 36 5.625 36 5.625
24 14 - - 36 5 36 5
24 16 - - 36 4 36 4
24 18 - - 36 3 36 3
24 20 - - 36 2 36 2
24 22 - - 36 1 36 1
END
343
________________
8.4.5 Piping Component Table Green and Red CP

Overflow Data (P21B,P25B,P26B,P27B,P28B)
This table enables you to define overflow parameters for components to which table name
formats P21A, P25A, P26A, P27A and P28A apply.
For TNF=P21B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_B

For TNF=P25B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_B
For TNF=P26B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B
For TNF=P27B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B
For TNF=P28B MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_B
Neutral File Format

! Par 5=ZZ Par 6=ZZ Par 7=ZZ
Units= NPD_IN, NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN
! Nom Diam Dimensional Parameters
! GCP RCP Par 1 Par 2 Par 3 Par 4 Par 5 Par 6 Par 7
END
344
________________
Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators (P31A)
8.4.6 Piping Component Table for Operators and

Actuators (P31A)
This table enables you to define parameters for valve operators of piping valves whose
operator code list values (as defined in CL550 - Operator/Actuator Type) are equal to or less
than 24.
For TNF=P31A MC_Type(G)_Rat(G)_Op_A
8. Table Formats
where Type can have the following possible values:
Preparation Type
2-199 BLT
300-399 MAL
400-599 FEM
Neutral File Format

! TNF=P31Y By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ
END
Example
Table_Data_Definition GAT_BLT_150_3_A
! Description=Stem and handwheel operator
! Source=PDS Document 2630-33-OP
! TNF=P31A By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=0 Date=26-Feb-1987
! SN=OP3 Par 1=Y1 Par 2=Y2
! Diam Par 1 Par 2
0.25 8.375 3.75
0.375 8.375 3.75
0.5 8.375 3.75
0.75 9.25 4.125
1 11.875 6
1.25 12.5 6
1.5 17.75 10
345
________________
2 17.813 10
2.5 20.125 10
3 22.375 12
4 28.188 13.75
5 31.75 13.75
6 35.375 15.5
8 45 19.5
10 52.5 19.5
12 61.125 20
14 70.5 24
16 79.75 28
18 89 30
20 97.25 30
22 105 30
24 112.75 36
26 116 36
28 123.25 36
30 140 36
32 145 36
34 150 36
36 155.5 36
END
346
________________
Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators, Overflow Data (P31B)
8.4.7 Piping Component Table for Operators and

Actuators, Overflow Data (P31B)
This table enables you to define overflow parameters for operators to which table name format
P31A applies.
For TNF=P31B MC_Type(G)_Rat(G)_Op_B
where Type can have the following possible values:
8. Table Formats
Preparation Type
2-199 BLT
300-399 MAL
400-599 FEM
Neutral File Format

! TNF=P31B By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ
END
347
________________
8.4.8 Piping Component Table for Empty Weight

based on GCP Data (P51,P52,P59)
This table enables you to define empty weights for components to which table name formats
P51, P52 and P59 apply.
For TNF=P51 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WC

For TNF=P52 MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WC
For TNF=P59 Cmdty Code
With version 5.0, the Physical Data Library Manager will respect the use of a dash (-) in a
table name. This allows you to include a dash in the commodity code for a piping commodity
valve, where the commodity code is used to form the name of the dimension table.
Neutral File Format

Units= NPD_IN, LB
! GCP Weight
! Diam Empty
WWWWW ZZZZZZZ
WWWWW ZZZZZZZ
WWWWW ZZZZZZZ
WWWWW ZZZZZZZ
WWWWW ZZZZZZZ
WWWWW ZZZZZZZ
WWWWW ZZZZZZZ
END
Examples
Table_Data_Definition VAABAHCCAA
! Description= CL150 gate valve raised face flanged ends weight
! Source= CRANE catalog for figure 47XU
! TNF=P59 By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=0 Date=29-May-1987
Units= NPD_IN, LB
! GCP Weight
! Diam Empty
2 46
2.5 70
3 76
4 110
5 155
6 175
8 310
10 455
12 650
14 860
16 1120
348
________________
Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP Data (P51,P52,P59)
18 1400
20 2125
24 3120
30 4250
END
Table_Data_Definition E90LR_39_300_S$STD_52
! Description= 90 deg long radius elbow beveled ends
! Source= Taylor Forge Cat. 722
! TNF=P51 By=GJH Ckd By=JPF Rev=0 Date=24-Apr-1986
Units= NPD_IN, LB
! GCP Weight
! Diam Empty
0.5 0.17
0.75 0.17
1 0.34
8. Table Formats
1.25 0.58
1.5 0.84
2 1.5
2.5 3
3 4.7
3.5 6.6
4 8.9
5 15
6 24
8 47
10 83
12 123
14 158
16 207
18 263
20 323
22 392
24 468
26 550
28 625
30 733
32 825
34 -
36 1061
38 -
40 -
42 1442
44 -
46 -
48 -
END
349
________________
8.4.9 Piping Component Table For Empty Weight

of Valves (P60A)
This table enables you to define empty weights of piping valves, weights and centers of
gravity of valve operators, model codes of valves operators and dimensional data of piping
valve operators whose operator code list values (as defined in CL550, Operator/Actuator
Type) exceed 24 and are less than or equal to 40.
For TNF=P60A Cmdty Code_WOPD_A
Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW_WOPD_A
! TNF=P60A By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ
! SN=ZZZZZZ
Units= NPD_IN, LB, LB, IN, IN, IN, DEG, IN, IN
! GCP Weight Weight Oper Dimensional Parameters
! Diam Vlv Emp Oper Code Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5
WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ
END
Example
Table_Data_Definition VAABAHCCGR_WOPD_A
! Description=Crane 47 gate valve with gear operator 3X-N for 14",
! 4X-N for 16, 18 & 20", & 6X-N for 24" valve.
! Par "Y4" includes a 8" mounting adaptor.
! Source=CRANE catalog for Converto-Gear valve operators
! TNF=P60A By=GJH Ckd By=DCG Rev=1 Date=01-Dec-1987
! SN=VARIES
Units= NPD_IN, LB, LB, INT, IN, IN, DEG, IN, IN
! GCP Weight Weight Oper Dimensional Parameters
! Diam Vlv Emp Oper Code Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5
14 860 75 331 57.625 2.375 0 61.1875 8.75
16 1120 109 331 62 3.625 0 65.9688 10.625
18 1400 126 331 69.8125 4.25 0 73.7188 10.625
20 2125 150 331 80.375 5.5 0 84.2188 10.625
24 3120 248 331 92.75 4.625 0 99.375 15.25
END
350
________________
Piping Component Table For Empty Weight of Valves, Overflow Data (P60B)
8.4.10 Piping Component Table For Empty Weight

of Valves, Overflow Data (P60B)
This table enables you to define overflow parameters for operators/actuators to which table
name format P60A applies.
For TNF=P60B Cmdty Code_WOPD_B
Neutral File Format
8. Table Formats
Table_Data_Definition WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW_WOPD_B
! TNF=P60B By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ
! SN=ZZZZZZ
! Diam Y6 Y7 Y8 Y9 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13
END
Example
Table_Data_Definition VAABAHCCGR_WOPD_B
! Description=Crane 47 gate valve with gear operator 3X-N for 14",
! 4X-N for 16, 18 & 20", & 6X-N for 24" valve.
! Source=CRANE catalog for Converto-Gear valve operators
! TNF=P60B By=GJH Ckd By=DCG Rev=0 Date=22-May-1987
! SN=VARIES
Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN
! Diam Y6 Y7 Y8 Y9 Y10 Y11 Y12
14 3.375 6.6875 12.375 20 0 - -
16 3.625 7.2188 15.25 20 0 - -
18 3.625 7.2188 15.25 24 0 - -
20 3.625 7.2188 15.25 30 0 - -
24 5.375 11.375 18.5 30 0 - -
END
351
________________
8.4.11 Piping Component Table for Empty Weight

based on GCP and RCP Data
(P61,P62,P63,P64,P65)
This table enables you to define empty weights for components to which table name formats
P61, P62, P63, P64, and P65 apply:
For TNF=P61 MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WC

For TNF=P62 MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WC
For TNF=P63 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WC
For TNF=P64 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_WC
For TNF=P65 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WC
Neutral File Format

Units= NPD_IN, NPD_IN, LB
! Nom Diam Weight
! GCP RCP Empty
WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ
WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ
WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ
WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ
WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ
WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ
WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ
END
Example
Table_Data_Definition REDC_39_300_S$60_300_S$40_52
! Description= Concentric reducer beveled ends weight.
! Source= TAYLOR FORGE Cat. 722, weights for schedule 60 fitting
! TNF=P63 By=GJH Ckd By=JPF Rev=0 Date=15-Aug-1986
Units= NPD_IN, NPD_IN, LB
! Nom Diam Weight
! GCP RCP Empty
14 12 92
16 14 125
16 12 125
18 14 173
18 12 173
20 18 278
20 14 278
20 12 278
22 20 -
22 18 -
22 14 -
352
________________
Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP and RCP Data (P61,P62,P63,P64,P65)
24 20 397
24 18 397
END
8. Table Formats
353
________________
8.4.12 Piping Component Tables for Specialty

Components
Six dimension tables are used for each combination of piping specialty generic name
(AABBCC code) and piping specialty model code. The AABBCC code is defined in the PDS
Sort Code attribute of the Piping Specialty Specification Data of the Material Reference
Database.
The tables used to to define the physical data for piping specialty components have the same
format as those used to define instrument components. The table names are of the format:
EQBODY_SPECIFIC_<PSC>_<MC>_A, _B, _C - Specialty Body Data
EQOPER_SPECIFIC_<PSC>_<MC>_A, _B, _C - Specialty Operator/Actuator Data
Refer to Instrument Component Tables, page 355 for more information on these tables.
354
________________ Instrument Component Tables
8.5 Instrument Component Tables

Six dimension tables are used for each combination of instrument name (pds_sort_code) and
instrument model code. Multiple tables are required since tables with one input are limited to
nine outputs. The instrument pds_sort_code is defined in the Instrument Component
Specification Data of the Material Reference Database (Table 204 attribute 18). (For the
delivered examples, the pds_sort_code is the Instrument AABBCC code as defined in the
PDS Component Data Reference Guide.)
Input to these tables is defined in the physical_data_id attribute of the Instrument Component
Specification Data (Table 204 attribute 17). The entries in the tables must agree with the
entries in the Instrument Component Specification Data of the Material Reference Database.
8. Table Formats
Each table is limited to approximately 60,000 bytes or 750 lines.
When the tables are created in the Physical Data Library, you should define the values for the
physical units for length, surface area, and weight to match the seed data defined for the
project.
8.5.1 Instrument Body (I80 and P80)

Three tables define the instrument body physical and geometric data for each combination of
instrument pds_sort_code and the model code in the Instrument Component Specification
Data of the Material Reference Database.
The default prefix for these table names is Inbody. You can specify a user-defined prefix up
to 6 characters for the table names. If you use a user-defined prefix, you must revise the
appropriate Piping Eden modules for the instruments.
The prefix is followed by either Specific or Typical, the instrument pds_sort_code, the model
code, and a letter indicating the table (A-C).
355
________________
Inbody_Specific_PSC_MC_A
The input field is the physical_data_id for the instrument.
The first four output fields are the surface area, the dry weight, the water weight, and the
number of connect points for the instrument.
The remaining output fields are the dimensional parameters P2 through P6, as prescribed in
the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide.
Inbody_Specific_PSC_MC_B
The output fields are the dimensional parameters P7 through P15, as prescribed in the PDS
Piping Component Data Reference Guide.
356
________________ Instrument Component Tables
Inbody_Specific_PSC_MC_C
8. Table Formats
The output fields are the dimensional parameters P16 through P24, as prescribed in the PDS
357
________________
8.5.2 Instrument Operator (I81 and P81)

Three tables are required for the instrument operator/actuator geometric data for each
combination of instrument pds_sort_code and model code in the Instrument Component
Specification Data of the Material Reference Database.
The default prefix for these table names is Inoper. You can specify a user-defined prefix, up
to 6 characters, for the table names. If you specify a user-defined prefix, you must revise the
appropriate Piping Eden modules for these instrument operators.
The prefix is followed by either Specific or Typical, the instrument pds_sort_code, the model
code, and a letter indicating the table (A - C).
Inoper_Specific_PSC_MC_A
The first two output fields for this table are the operator weight and the operator type. The
operator type must be loaded in the modifier attribute of the Instrument Component
Specification Data of the Material Reference Database. The operator type is the number (such
as 411) representing the operator and not the symbol name (such as OP_411).
The remaining output fields are dimensional parameters Y2 through Y8, as prescribed in the
PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide. For some operators, the first three
dimensional parameters, Y2 through Y4, define the center of gravity for the operator in terms
of offsets from the instrument center.
358
________________ Instrument Operator (I81 and P81)
Inoper_Specific_PSC_MC_B
8. Table Formats
The output fields are the dimensional parameters Y9 through Y17, as prescribed in the PDS
Inoper_Specific_PSC_MC_C
The output fields are the dimensional parameters Y18 through Y24, as prescribed in the PDS
359
________________
360
________________ Material Description Data
9. Material Description Data

The PDS 3D modules use the Material Description Library and the material data in the
Material Reference Database to provide material descriptions for commodity items and
specialty items. This data is accessed for
Material Take-off (MTO) reporting from the Design Database.
Other miscellaneous reporting.
Interfaces to a material control system.
Stress analysis.
Isometric drawing extraction.
The alphanumeric commodity data is made up of four major parts:
Material Tables in the Material Reference Database - These database tables (211 and
212) contain commodity definitions which enable you to further classify the commodity
Description Data
9. Material
items defined in the Piping Job Specification. This database information tends to be
customer-specific.
Short Material Description Library - This library contains the short bill-of-material
(BOM) descriptions for all piping commodity items and the BOM description addenda
for taps.
Long Material Description Library - This library contains the long bill-of-material
descriptions for all piping commodity items. The long BOM description is only used
for requisitions.
Specialty Material Description Library - This library contains the bill-of-material

descriptions for engineered items, in-line instruments, and pipe supports.
The material description data in these files is used for reporting and material control and is not
required for the interactive placement of symbols in the model. This data is only accessed
during a batch (non-interactive) process.
Commodity Code
The system uses the commodity code as an index to access the descriptions in the material
description libraries. You can use the commodity code defined in the Piping Commodity
Specification Data table (Table 202 attribute 18) or a user-defined commodity code defined in
the Size-Dependent Material Data table (Table 211 attribute 7).
361
________________
The source of the commodity code and other processing options for reporting are defined for a
model with the Material Takeoff Options form of the Project Data Manager.
The commodity code represents that set of parameters that completely describe a commodity
item, exclusive of nominal piping diameter and thickness. The character length for the
commodity code is determined from the character length of the commodity code in the Size
Dependent Data table of the database, or from the character length of the commodity code in
the Piping Commodity Data table of the database, depending on which is being used to access
the material descriptions.
The delivered commodity codes use a 10 character code to fully identify the item. The first
letter of the commodity code identifies the basic type of component, such as a valve or flange.
The remaining characters provide a detailed description of the component. The first character
designations are:
362
B Flanged and Misc. Fittings Q Socket End Fittings

D Fire and Safety Components R Tubing Fittings
E Steam Specialties S Socketwelded Fittings
F Flanges T Threaded Fittings
G Flanged Specialties U Underground Fittings
H Strainers V Valves
M Misc. Wetted Components W Welded Fittings
N Misc. Non-Wetted Components X Gaskets
O Tubing and Hose Y Bolting
P Pipe
Examples
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
_____________________________
P A D A A B C A A E
P - Pipe
AD - Pipe, Plain Ends
AA - Seamless
BC - X-Strong (s-xs)
Description Data
9. Material
AAE - ASTM A106 Gr. B
V A A B A H C C A A
V - Valve
A - Gate Valve
A - CL150
B - Raised Face Flanged Ends
A - Carbon Steel
H - Trim 8
CC - Crane 47
AA - Blank
Refer to Appendix E of the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for a complete
listing of the delivered commodity codes.
You can use the delivered commodity codes or create your own naming scheme. Regardless
of the scheme used, all the codes must be unique and there must be an exact match between
the commodity code specified for an item in the Material Reference Database and commodity
codes used to define the material descriptions in the Material Descriptions Library.
363
________________
Tap Commodity Codes

The delivered tap codes use a 10 character code to full identify the taps material description
addendum. The basic format of the tap commodity code is
A BBB CCC DDD
where
A E if English.
BBB the nominal diameter value of the tap such as $50, $75, or 001. The use of
leading and trailing zeroes is specific to this table naming convention. ($
represents a decimal point.)
CCC End preparation value as defined in code list set 330.
DDD user-defined value.
Example
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
_____________________________
E $ 5 0 4 2 1 0 6 4
E - English
$50 - NPD = 0.5 inches
421 - SWE - socketwelded end
064 - unique number
Tri-Clover Commodity Code Logic

The Tri-Clover commodity codes are based on Tri-Clover part numbers, but have been
modified so that they are less than 18 characters.
Example
Tri-Clover part number:
BS14AM-4"-316L-PL
BS14AM = Part Description

4" = Size
316L = Material Grade
PL = Surface Finish Description
364
Tri-Clover commodity code:
BS14AM316LPL
In the Tri-Clover commodity code, the dashes ("-") and size are removed so that the
commodity code is less than 18 characters. The commodity code description lists the full part
number.
Description Data
9. Material
365
________________
9.1 Material Data in the Material

Reference Database
The Material Reference Database contains two database tables which contain Material Data.
Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211)
The Size-Dependent Data table contains the data for a specific commodity item that is
dependent on the commodity code, nominal piping diameter, and schedule/thickness. It
is used for miscellaneous batch reporting, such as construction cost reports and
requisition orders, and interfaces to material control, stress analysis, and isometric
drawing extraction.
Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212)
The Implied Material Data table contains the implied material data for a specific
commodity item that is dependent on both the Piping Commodity Library code and
nominal piping diameter range. This data is used strictly for generating implied
material for MTO reporting and material control. It is not used for welds, bolts, nuts, or
gaskets, but is reserved for other types of implied material, such as caps or stubs, for a
specific commodity item. It is also used for reporting the implied components of a
commodity item (such as cap screws).
Refer to Material Reference Database Structure, page 56, for information on the structure of
these database tables. Also refer to the description of the Piping Job Specification Manager,
page 145, for information on loading material data into these database tables via neutral files.
366
________________ Short Material Description Library
9.2 Short Material Description Library

This library contains the short bill of materials description for all piping commodity items and
the description addenda for taps. The short BOM description is used for MTO reporting and
for reporting from the Piping Job Specification. This parameter is required during the creation
of the Piping Job Specification. Nominal piping diameter is not included in this description.
The short material descriptions are delivered in the files
\win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_shbom.l - object library
The short material descriptions can be up to 240 characters in length.
Neutral Files
You can use neutral files to insert data into the Short Material Description Library or replace
existing data. The neutral files for the delivered material descriptions are contained in the text
library. You can use the in the following files:
The Short Material Description Library is created from two neutral files. (These can be
Description Data
9. Material
created with a text editor such as EMACS or vi.)
A neutral file containing the short material descriptions for commodity items. The
neutral file contains unique Commodity Codes followed by at least one space and a
description enclosed in single quotes. It also contains the chain wheel descriptions and
implied material descriptions associated with a commodity item.
The commodity code identifies the Piping Commodity Library code or customers
commodity code. The character length for this code is determined from the character
length of the commodity code in the Size Dependent Data table of the database, or from
the character length of the commodity library code in the Piping Commodity Data table
of the database, depending on which is being used to access the material descriptions.
For chain wheels the commodity code has the format CHAIN_xx, where xx represents
the chain wheel number (for example, CHAIN_12). The chain wheel number is defined
in the component and instrument analysis entities of the TDB.
A neutral file containing the material description addenda for taps. This file contains
the tap code and the text for the tap description. The tap code identifies the unique
identification of a tap.
367
________________
The following conventions are used to identify different types of information in the material
descriptions:
All information to the left of the carat () is used in MTO reporting and
isometric extraction, but is excluded from Spec reporting.
|| Information appearing in |Pipes| indicates information for Spec

descriptions only. This information is excluded from the descriptions
for MTO reporting and isometric extraction.
[] Information appearing in [brackets] indicates a label type from the

Label Description Library. The system uses the label format to
determine the information to be included in the material description for
MTO reporting and isometric extraction. The label information is
never used in Spec reporting.
The following label types are provided in the product delivery:
Label No Data in Label Source of Data

400 Comp cmdty code Component
401 Piping sch/thk 1 Pipe
402 Tag no Component
403 Component sch/thk 1 Component
406 Component sch/thk 1 b Component
407 Component sch/thk 2 Component
409 Component sch/thk 2 b Component
412 Component sch/thk 1 x 2 Component
414 Component sch/thk 1 x 2 b Component
416 Component sch/thk 1 x 3 Component
417 Component sch/thk 1 x 3 b Component
421 Bonnet length Component
422 Piping chain length Component
423 Reinforcing weld size Component
424 Instr chain length Component
425 RPAD width x thick Component
426 Comp NPD 1 Component
427 Monitor elev length Component
428 Hydrant cover Component
429 Blank/spacer thk Component
Data Retrieval
The system uses the commodity code to retrieve the short material descriptions from the
Material Description Library.
368
________________ Short Material Description Library
Commodity Material Descriptions

! DEFINE SHORT DESCRIPTIONS
! Date/Time: Thu Apr 23 14:16:58 1992
! Processed Library c:\newpipe\refdata\us_shbom.l
!Cmdty Code ====================================Description========================================

CHAIN_1003 Chainwheel operator each with [422] of total chain length for [426] NPD valve with commodity code [400]
CHAIN_1005 Chainwheel operator each with [422] of total chain length for [426] NPD valve with commodity code [400]
CHAIN_1251 Chainwheel operator each with [424] of total chain length for valve with tag no [402]
DAABAXAABE Monitor, CL150 FFFE, station type, 4" CL150 in-let by 2.5" NHT stainless steel outlet
w/stainless steel stem lock knobs with 0.75" coupling in base, w/shapertip nozzle, Stang BB0309-21
DAABAXAABF Monitor, CL150 FFFE, station type 4" CL150 in-let by 2.5" NHT stainless steel
outlet w/stainless steel stem lock knobs with 0.75" coupling in base, w/fog nozzle,
Stang BB0309-21
DACBAXABBC Monitor, CL150 FFFE, elevated type, free standing, 4" CL150 in-let by 2.5" NHT
stainless steel outlet, [427], w/drain coupling, w/shapertip nozzle and two reaction supports,
Stang BB2999-
DACBAXABBD Monitor, CL300 FFFE, elevated type, supported, 6" CL300 in-let by 2.5" NHT stainless
steel outlet, [427], w/drain coupling, w/shapertip nozzle, Stang BB3561
DBAAAXBAAB Fire hydrant, CL125 FFFE, 5" size, counterclockwise open, 4.5" steamer nozzle,
two 2.5" hose nozzles equipped w/caps and chains, [428], American Darling B-50-B
DCBGDXEADA Hose rack, 300#, FTE, w/valve, wall mount, rt hand w/100 ft hose & fog nozzle Powhatan 30-333
DDAXCJDAAA Spray sprinkler, MTE, filled cone w/rupture disc, 304, Grinnell, Mulsifyre Projector S-1
FAAAAAWAAA Flange, CL150, FFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAAAAAWWAA Flange, CL150, FFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, cement lined, [409]|bore to match|
FAAABADIIA Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F304, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore
FAAABADIIF Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F316, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore
FAAABADNPF Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-B166-600, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore
FAAABAOAAA Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore
Description Data
9. Material
FAAABAOABB Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A350-LF2, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore
FAAABAOFFH Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F5, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore
FAAABAWAAA Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAAABAWABB Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A350-LF2, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAAABAWFFH Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F5, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAAABAWFFL Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F9, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAAABAWGFD Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASME-SA182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAAABAWIIA Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F304, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAAABAWIIF Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F316, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAAABAWNPF Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-B166-600, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAAABBDAAA Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-XXS bore
FAAADAOAAA Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-160 bore
FAAADAOFFC Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-160 bore
FAAADAWAAA Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, [409]|bore to match|
FAAADAWFFC Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, [409]|bore to match|
FAAADBDFFC Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-XXS bore
FAABBADIIA Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F304, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore
FAABBADIIB Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F304L, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore
FAABBADIIF Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F316, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore
FAABBAOAAA Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore
FAABBAOABB Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A350-LF2, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore
FAABBAOFFC Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore
FAABBAOFFH Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F5, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore
FAABBAWAAA Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAABBAWABB Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A350-LF2, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAABBAWFFC Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAABBAWFFH Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F5, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAABBAWFFL Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F9, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAABBAWIIA Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F304, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAABBAWIIB Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F304L, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAABBAWIIF Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F316, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAABBAWNPF Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-B166-600, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAABBBDAAA Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-XXS bore
FAABDADIIJ Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F321, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-80S bore
FAABDAOAAA Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-160 bore
FAABDAOFFC Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-160 bore
FAABDAWAAA Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, [409]|bore to match|
FAABDAWFFC Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, [409]|bore to match|
FAABDAWFFH Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F5, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, [409]|bore to match|
FAABDAWIIJ Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F321, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, [409]|bore to match|
FAADBADIIA Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F304, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore
FAADBADIIF Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F316, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore
FAADBAOAAA Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore
369
________________
FAADBAOABE Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ASME-SA105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore

FAADBAWAAA Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAADBAWABE Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ASME-SA105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAADBAWFFC Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAADBAWFFH Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F5, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAADBAWFFL Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F9, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
FAADBAWIIA Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F304, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|
Tap Material Descriptions

! DEFINE SHORT DESCRIPTIONS
! Date/Time: Thu Apr 23 12:09:23 1992
! Processed Library c:\newpipe\refdata\us_shbom.l
!Cmdty Code ====================================Description================================

E$12591XXX 0.125" diam hole
E$50021018 0.5" NPD, CL150 RFFE tap
E$50021028 0.5" NPD, CL300 RFFE tap
E$50021036 0.5" NPD, CL600 RFFE tap
E$50401093 0.5" NPD, Sch 80 SE tap
E$50421064 0.5" NPD, CL3000 SWE tap
E$50421072 0.5" NPD, CL6000 SWE tap
E$50421076 0.5" NPD, CL9000 SWE tap
E$50441056 0.5" NPD, CL2000 FTE tap
E$50441064 0.5" NPD, CL3000 FTE tap
E$50441072 0.5" NPD, CL6000 FTE tap
E$75021018 0.75" NPD, CL150 RFFE tap
E$75021028 0.75" NPD, CL300 RFFE tap
E$75021036 0.75" NPD, CL600 RFFE tap
E$75401093 0.75" NPD, Sch 80 SE tap
E$75421064 0.75" NPD, CL3000 SWE tap
E$75421072 0.75" NPD, CL6000 SWE tap
E$75421076 0.75" NPD, CL9000 SWE tap
E$75441056 0.75" NPD, CL2000 FTE tap
E$75441064 0.75" NPD, CL3000 FTE tap
E$75441072 0.75" NPD, CL6000 FTE tap
E001021018 1" NPD, CL150 RFFE tap
E001021028 1" NPD, CL300 RFFE tap
E001021036 1" NPD, CL600 RFFE tap
E001401093 1" NPD, Sch 80 SE tap
E001421064 1" NPD, CL3000 SWE tap
E001421072 1" NPD, CL6000 SWE tap
E001421076 1" NPD, CL9000 SWE tap
E001441056 1" NPD, CL2000 FTE tap
E001441064 1" NPD, CL3000 FTE tap
E001441072 1" NPD, CL6000 FTE tap
E001591XXX 1" diam hole
E002021018 2" NPD, CL150 RFFE tap
E002021028 2" NPD, CL300 RFFE tap
E002021036 2" NPD, CL600 RFFE tap
E002401093 2" NPD, Sch 80 SE tap
E002421064 2" NPD, CL3000 SWE tap
E002421072 2" NPD, CL6000 SWE tap
E002421076 2" NPD, CL9000 SWE tap
E002441056 2" NPD, CL2000 FTE tap
E002441064 2" NPD, CL3000 FTE tap
E002441072 2" NPD, CL6000 FTE tap
E003021018 3" NPD, CL150 RFFE tap
E003021028 3" NPD, CL300 RFFE tap
E003021036 3" NPD, CL600 RFFE tap
E003401093 3" NPD, Sch 80 SE tap
E003421064 3" NPD, CL3000 SWE tap
370
________________
E003441056 3" NPD, CL2000 FTE tap

E003441064 3" NPD, CL3000 FTE tap
E003441072 3" NPD, CL6000 FTE tap
E004021018 4" NPD, CL150 RFFE tap
E004021028 4" NPD, CL300 RFFE tap
E004021036 4" NPD, CL600 RFFE tap
E004401093 4" NPD, Sch 80 SE tap
E004421064 4" NPD, CL3000 SWE tap
E004441056 4" NPD, CL2000 FTE tap
E004441064 4" NPD, CL3000 FTE tap
E004441072 4" NPD, CL6000 FTE tap
Description Data
9. Material
371
________________
9.3 Long Material Description Library

This library contains the long bill of materials description for all piping commodity items.
The long bill of materials description is only used for requisitions. It is usually a very long
description such as a paragraph. Nominal piping diameter is not included in the description.
This data is used strictly for MTO reporting and material control.
The long material descriptions are delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_lgbom.l.
The long material descriptions can be up to 500 characters in length.
Neutral Files
The Long Material Description Library is created through a neutral file which contains the
long material descriptions for commodity items. The neutral file contains unique commodity
codes followed by at least one space and a description enclosed in single quotes.
You can use neutral files to insert data into the Long Material Description Library or replace
existing data.
The commodity code identifies the Piping Commodity Library code or customers commodity
code. The character length for this code is determined from the character length of the
commodity code in the Size Dependent Data database table, or from the character length of
the commodity library code in the Piping Commodity Data table of the PJS database,
depending on which is being used to access the material descriptions.
The long description can be up to 500 characters. Because this description may include label
numbers which are translated to text strings, the reported (compiled) length of the description
can be up to 600 characters.
Prior to the 5.0 release there was a restriction that no more than 255 characters could be
specified per line in the neutral file. This required that long descriptions be continued on
multiple lines. With the 5.0 release, a neutral file for long material descriptions may contain
up to 600 characters per line.
Data Retrieval
The system uses the Piping Commodity Library code or commodity code to access the text for
the long description in the Long Material Description Library.
372
________________ Long Material Description Library
Listing for Long Material Descriptions

! DEFINE LONG DESCRIPTIONS
! Date/Time: Fri Apr 24 10:48:13 1992
! Processed Library c:\newpipe\refdata\us_lgbom.l
!Cmdty Code ====================================Description========================================

DAABAXAABE Monitor, 750 GPM at 100 psig, CL150 flat face flange end, station type, 4" CL150 in-let by 2.5" NHT stainless
steel outlet w/stainless steel stem lock knobs with 0.75" coupling in base, w/shapertip nozzle, Stang BB0309-21
or approved equal
DAABAXAABF Monitor, 750 GPM at 100 psig, CL150 flat face flange end, station type 4" CL150 in-let by 2.5" NHT stainless
steel outlet w/stainless steel stem lock knobs with 0.75" coupling in base, w/fog nozzle, Stang BB0309-21
or approved equal
DACBAXABBC Monitor, 750 GPM at 100 psig, CL150 flat face flange end, elevated type, free standing, 4" CL150 in-let by
2.5" NHT stainless steel outlet, w/drain coupling, w/shapertip nozzle and two reaction supports,
Stang BB2999-[427] high or approved equal
DACBAXABBD Monitor, 750 GPM at 100 psig, CL300 flat face flange end, elevated type, supported, 6" CL300 in-let by 2.5"
NHT stainless steel outlet, w/drain coupling, w/shapertip nozzle, Stang BB3561-[427] high or approved equal
DBAAAXBAAB Fire hydrant, CL125 flat face flange end, 5" size, regular rating, ductile iron barrel, bronze trim,
bituminous paint below grade, red epoxy paint above grade, counterclockwise open, 4.5" steamer nozzle, two 2.5"
hose nozzles equipped w/caps and chains, [428], American Darling B-50-B or approved equal
DCBGDXEADA Hose rack w/bronze angle valve, 300#, female threaded end, wall mount, right hand w/100 ft synthetic single
jacketed hose, rack nipple & fog nozzle, Powhatan 30-333 or approved equal
DDAXCJDAAA Spray sprinkler, male threaded end, filled cone w/rupture disc, .313" orifice, Type 304 stainless steel,
Grinnell Fire Protection, Mulsifyre Projector S-1 50-12 or approved equal
FAAAAAWAAA Flange, weld neck, flat face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A105, [409]
FAAAAAWWAA Flange, weld neck, flat face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A105, cement lined, [409]
FAAABADIIA Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F304, Sch 80S bore
FAAABADIIF Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F316, Sch 80S bore
FAAABADNPF Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-B166 Gr.600 UNS N06600, hot finish, Sch 80S bore
Description Data
9. Material
FAAABAOAAA Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A105, Sch 160 bore
FAAABAOABB Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A350 Gr.LF2, Sch 160 bore
FAAABAOFFH Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F5, Sch 160 bore
FAAABAWAAA Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A105, [409]
FAAABAWABB Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A350 Gr.LF2, [409]
FAAABAWFFH Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F5, [409]
FAAABAWFFL Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F9, [409]
FAAABAWGFD Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASME-SA182 Gr.F11, [409]
FAAABAWIIA Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F304, [409]
FAAABAWIIF Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F316, [409]
FAAABAWNPF Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-B166 Gr.600 UNS N06600, hot finish, [409]
FAAABBDAAA Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A105, XX-strong bore
FAAADAOAAA Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, 125 Ra finish, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A105, Sch 160 bore
FAAADAOFFC Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, 125 Ra finish, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F11, Sch 160 bore
FAAADAWAAA Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, 125 Ra finish, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A105, [409]
FAAADAWFFC Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, 125 Ra finish, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F11, [409]
FAAADBDFFC Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, 125 Ra finish, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F11, XX-strong bore
FAABBADIIA Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL300, ASTM-A182 Gr.F304, Sch 80S bore
FAABBADIIB Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL300, ASTM-A182 Gr.F304L, Sch 80S bore
373
________________
9.4 Specialty Material Description Library

This Library contains the material descriptions for any engineered items or in-line instruments
which are reported by MTO or material control. These material descriptions are job specific
and are accessed by the specialty items tag number.
This data is used strictly for MTO reporting and material control. The specialty material
descriptions can be up to 240 characters in length.
Neutral Files
Three neutral files are used to insert data into or replace data for the specialty material
descriptions.
Material descriptions for engineered items
(engineered item number = tag).
Material descriptions for instruments.
(instrument tag number = tag).
Material descriptions for pipe supports.
(commodity code = tag).
These files contain the specialty tag number and the text for the material description. The
specialty tag number is appended by a specialty type which is used to distinguish between
engineered items, in-line instruments, and pipe supports.
The descriptions in Specialty Material Description Library tend to be customer-specific. The

following is a listing of sample neutral files for the specialty data.
! DEFINE SPECIALTY DESCRIPTIONS
! Date/Time: Thu Apr 30 09:02:24 1992
! Processed Library c:\newpipe\refdata\us_spbom.l
!Cmdty Code ====================================Description==============================

38-VI-9 RELIEF CONTROL VALVE.
INSTR Instrument
PSPECIALTY Piping specialty component
PSUPPORT [970]
! Date/Time: Thu Apr 30 09:02:39 1992

SPECIAL_ENGR SPECIAL ANGLE OUTLET.
SPECIAL_ENGR 8 SPECIAL ANGLE OUTLET.
SPECIAL_ENGR @O SPECIAL ANGLE OUTLET.
374
________________ Specialty Material Description Library
! Date/Time: Thu Apr 30 09:02:56 1992

SUPP1 PIPE SUPPORT NUMBER 1.
SUPP1 8 PIPE SUPPORT NUMBER 1.
SUPP1 @O PIPE SUPPORT NUMBER 1.
Data Retrieval
The system uses the specialty tag number and specialty type to access the text for the material
descriptions in the Specialty Material Description Library.
Description Data
9. Material
375
________________
9.5 Material Description Library Manager

The Material Description Library Manager enables you to create and modify alphanumeric
commodity data. You can initialize libraries, create material description data, append new
data to existing material description data, revise (delete and replace) existing data, and delete
existing data.
You can use the copy and paste commands to copy existing library data from another project
and make the necessary revisions using the Material Description Library Manager.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Material Description Library Manager from the Reference Data Manager
form.
The system displays the Material Description Library Manager form.
2. Select the option for the library to be modified.
Specialty Material Description Library
376
________________ Material Description Library Manager
3. The data manipulation options for each of the libraries is similar. You can perform the
following activities for each of the libraries.
Create Library Creates a new (empty) Short Material Description Library, Long
Description Data
9. Material
Material Description Library, or Specialty Material Description Library.
Unapprove ==> Approve Copies data from the unapproved library to the
approved library.
Load/Revise Interactive Adds the contents of the neutral files to the information
currently in an existing Material Description Library or revises an existing table in the
library.
Load/Revise Batch Adds the contents of the neutral files to the information
currently in an existing Material Description Library or revises an existing table in the
library.
Replace Interactive Deletes all entries in the respective Material Description

Library file and then loads new entries from a neutral file.
Replace Batch Deletes all entries in the respective Material Description Library
file and then loads new entries from a neutral file.
Report Used to create a report file or a neutral file of the contents of the material
description library.
377
________________

This option is used to create a new Material Description Library. This option is disabled if the
library already exists.
1. Select Create Library from the Material Description Library Manager form.
The system displays the approved and unapproved Library names as defined in the
RDB Management Data.
2. The system prompts Accept to Create or Exit to Avoid Creating New Library
Select Accept to create the specified library files.

This option is used to copy the data in the unapproved material description library to the
approved library.
Select Accept to copy the library file to the approved library.
If the approved and unapproved library names are the same, the system displays an error
message.
378
________________ Load/Revise Interactive
9.5.3 Load/Revise Interactive

This option enables you to load entries from a neutral ASCII file into the Material Description
Library. Refer to the library descriptions earlier in this section for a listing of the neutral file
formats used in defining the delivered material data.
This option adds the contents of the neutral files to the information currently in the library or
revises an existing table in the library.
The neutral files for the delivered RDB data are contained in the delivered material
description libraries. Refer to the Report option for information on extracting the neutral
files.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Load/Revise option.
2. Select File Type
Select the type of material data to be loaded into the specified library from the display
Description Data
9. Material
Key in the file specification for the neutral file that contains the data to be processed.
Select Accept to begin processing the neutral file.
The system begins processing the load/revise request.
379
________________
9.5.4 Load/Revise Batch

Library via batch processing. Refer to the library descriptions earlier in this section for a
listing of the neutral file formats used in defining the delivered material data.
This option adds the contents of the neutral files to the information currently in the library or
revises an existing table in the library.
files.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Load/Revise option.
2. Select File Type
Key in the file specification for the neutral file that contains the data to be processed
and select Accept.
Set the toggle to Submit Batch Immediately or Delayed Batch Submit Time.
For delayed submission, set the time to process the neutral file.
5. Select Accept to begin processing.
380
________________ Replace Interactive
9.5.5 Replace Interactive

Library. Refer to the library descriptions earlier in this section for a listing of the neutral file
formats used in defining the delivered material data.
This option deletes all entries in the respective library file and then loads new entries from the
neutral file.
files.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Replace Interactive option from the Material Description Library form.
2. Select File Type
Description Data
9. Material
Key in the file specification for the neutral file that contains the data to be processed.
Select Accept to begin processing the neutral file.
381
________________
9.5.6 Replace Batch

This option enables you to load entries from a neutral file into the Material Description
Library via batch processing. Refer to the library descriptions earlier in this section for a
listing of the neutral file formats used in defining the delivered material data.
This option deletes all entries in the respective library file and then loads new entries from the
neutral file.
files.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Replace Batch option from the Material Description Library form.
2. Select File Type
Key in the file specification for the neutral file that contains the data to be processed
and select Accept.
Set the toggle to Submit Batch Immediately or Delayed Batch Submit Time.
For delayed submission, set the time to process the neutral file.
5. Select Accept to begin processing.
382
________________ Report Option
9.5.7 Report Option

The Report option enables you to create neutral files or report files using the information in
the Material Description Library. Refer to the description of the Short Material Description
Library, Long Material Description Library, and Specialty Material Description Library for
more information on the types of neutral files.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Report option from one of the library forms.
2. Select File Type
Select the type of material data to be extracted from the specified library from the
display list and select Accept.
Description Data
9. Material
Key in the name of the neutral file to be created. You can change the Node Name and
File Path information.
4. Accept or Toggle to Create Report
Select Accept to create the specified neutral file.
5. Set the toggle to Unapproved Library or Approved Library to define the source of
information to be reported. This toggle is only displayed when both the approved and
the unapproved library are being used.
6. Set the toggle to Create Neutral File to create a neutral file which can be revised and
reloaded into the library.
OR
Set the toggle to Create Report to create a report file of the information in the library.
The report output is the same as the neutral file except that the system aligns subsequent
lines of the material description left-justified to the beginning of the material
description rather than the commodity code.
383
________________
For the report selection, the system displays the following options.
7. Select the reporting option.
Print / Delete submit the generated report output file to the specified print
queue and delete the output file.
Print / Save submit the generated report output file to the specified print
queue and save the output file.
Save save the output file and suppress printing.
For either of the Print options, the system displays a list of queues based on information
in the project Queue Description Library. Refer to the Project Administrator Reference
Guide, for more information on the Queue Description Library and setting up print
queues.
Select the queue for the required output device.
8. Select Accept to begin processing the request.
384
________________ Table Checker
10. Table Checker

The Table Checker enables you to verify that all the commodity spec tables, entries, and Eden
modules for a piping materials class exist in the graphic data libraries for the project.
This process accesses the Eden code for each commodity item in the piping material class and
checks that the table names created in the physical dimension modules exist in the project
Physical Data Library. This routine checks for the existence of the tables and checks the
contents of the tables.
For Table Checker to function, there MUST be at least one piping model file
created in the project, and it must have a piping materials class (spec) defined
in the Active Segment Parameters.
The Type 63 settings of the model with the highest alphanumeric name are
used as defaults for the Table Checker reports. If weight tables are set to yes
for this model, then Table Checker will search for and report on found and
missing weight tables. If MTO Bolt Calculation is set to almost precise,
Table Checker will search for the almost precise tables (table naming format
= G12). If set to precise, Table Checker will search for precise tables (table
naming format = G12T).
When the spec contains PIPING/TUBE and PIPE/TUBING, Table Checker will report as
per Type 63 data settings.
If Component Placement is set to PIPING for Pipe Commodity Name and TUBE for
Tube Commodity Name, Table Checker uses these commodity names and searches for
PDPIPING and PDTUBE in the Graphic Commodity Library. If there are any other PIPE
and TUBING values found in the spec that do not match with Type 63, Table Checker
Checker
10. Table
assumes that this is a regular commodity item. It uses the model_code and searches for
SPmodel_Code in the Graphic Commodity Library.
If Component Placement is set to PIPE for Pipe Commodity Name and TUBING for
Tube Commodity Name, Table Checker uses these commodity names and searches for
PDPIPE and PDTUBING in the Graphic Commodity Library. If there are any other
PIPING and TUBE values found in the spec that do not match with Type 63, Table Checker
assumes that this is a regular commodity item. It uses the model_code and searches for
SPmodel_code in the Graphic Commodity Library.
In such cases, if the model_code of the item is the same as the commodity_name that
matches with Type 63 data, the Table Checker may report the same value under both Eden
Found and Eden Not Found. In other words, Table Checker reports the
commodity_name under Eden Found and the model_code under Eden Not
Found.
385
________________
Features
The Table Checker provides the following features.
Reports on one piping material class selected from the available entries in the
Specification/Material Database.
Reports on all valid sizes in the size range for each piping commodity using the
Nominal Piping Diameter table for that piping materials class.
Reports dimensional tables used during the placement of each piping commodity in the
piping materials class. This includes the table names, the types of tables, the existence
of those tables (found or not found), and the output values from those tables.
Reports Piping Eden modules used during the placement of each piping commodity in
the piping materials class. This includes the Piping Eden module names and the
existence of those modules (found or not found).
Reports dimensional tables used for all piping commodities in the entire report (the
piping materials class). This includes the table names, the revision dates for those
tables, and the source Dimension Table Library.
Reports bolt tables for each piping commodity with bolted ends.
Reports Piping Eden modules used for all piping commodities in the entire report (the
piping materials class). This includes the Piping Eden module names and the existence
of those modules (found or not found).
Verifies that a material description exists in the Material Description Library for any
piping commodities defined in the Material Reference Database. The commodity code
as defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data Table (PDtable_202) or the
Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data Table (PDtable_211) is used to
verify the material description.
Verifies that a material description exists in the Material Description Library for any
implied component defined in the Piping Commodity Implied Material Data Table
(PDtable_212) of the Material Reference Database.
Verifies that a material description exists in the Specialty Material Description Library
for any piping specialty or instrument defined in the Material Reference Database.
Provides a detailed error report of any tables or table entries that were found missing
during the processing of the piping materials class.
For tables containing schedule thickness calculations as part of the name, the
calculations are replaced with preferred thickness unless no preferred thickness
is found for that size or PMC thickness table.
If any errors are encountered during execution, the system appends the errors to the end of the
report output. In the case of severe errors, it creates a file named RPT_ERR.LOG.
386
________________ Table Checker
Commodity items with option codes greater than 5000 (spec implied
components) are not checked.
Format Files
The Table Checker uses report format files to define the report output. It uses the same
reporting indices as any other report from the Piping Job Specification data (the C indices).
Refer to Format Files in the Report Manager Reference Guide for more information on these
indices.
The following example report formats for the Table Checker are included in the PD_DATA
sample directory (\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\format/). Refer to the Report Manager
Reference Guide for more information on report type.
tbl_chk_1.fmt
This report format reports on virtually all data generated by the Table Checker. It is a
combination of the following sample report formats: tbl_chk_2.fmt, tbl_chk_3.fmt, and
tbl_chk_4.fmt.
It reports the piping commodities in the selected piping materials class with the
dimension tables and Piping Eden modules used, including a list of all entries read in
the dimension tables. It also lists all dimension tables and Piping Eden modules
required for those piping commodities, but not available in the Reference Database.
tbl_chk_2.fmt
This report format reports the dimension tables and Piping Eden modules used by each
piping commodity in the applicable piping materials class.
Checker
10. Table
tbl_chk_3.fmt
This report lists all entries read in dimension tables for the applicable piping materials
class.
tbl_chk_4.fmt
This report format reports a total list of dimension tables and Piping Eden modules used
for the applicable piping materials class. It also lists all dimension tables and Piping
Eden modules required for those piping commodities, but not available in the Reference
Database.
tbl_chk_5.fmt
This report verifies the reference data for any piping specialties defined in the
Reference Database (pdtable_203).
tbl_chk_6.fmt
387
________________
This report verifies the reference data for any instruments defined in the Reference
Database (pdtable_204).
Table format 5 or 6 must be used when the discrimination file is created with
the No Piping Material Class button selected.
388
________________ Table Checker Form
10.1 Table Checker Form

The Report Manager form enables you to generate reports from the project, design, and
reference database files with the report definition data. The report record and the location
records for each discrimination data file and format file are stored in the project control
database. These numbered records are used to locate ASCII files on their specified nodes.
Options
Checker
10. Table
Report Format Displays the Report Format form, which you can use to create,
revise, copy, or delete the record of a format file (not the format file). For more
information, see Report Format Form, page 392.
Report Discrimination Data Displays the Discrimination Data form, which you
can use to create, revise, copy, or delete the record of a discrimination data file as well
as the file itself. For more information, see Discrimination Data Form, page 398.
Report Displays the Report form, which you can use to create, revise, delete, and
approve report records and report files. For more information, see Report Form, page
406.
Report Management Data Displays the Report Management Defaults form,

which you can use to create a record in the project control database of the default
nodename and path for the report definition files. This option is primarily used for
setup. For more information, see Report Management Defaults Form, page 420.
389
________________
10.1.1 Using the Report Commands
Understanding Report Files and Records

The Table Checker uses the discrimination data files, format files, and database records that
represent these files to generate reports. The following definitions explain all of the files and
records in the reporting process.
Format File and Record

The format file is a user-defined, ASCII file which must be created with a text editor outside
of the Table Checker. It contains special indices identifying what data appears in the report
and how the data is sorted. It also defines how the data is formatted in the report. Without the
format file(s), Table Checker reports cannot be processed. A set of basic format files is
delivered for each type of reporting.
Using the Report Format option, you can create a numbered record for each format file so
that it can be accessed for report processing. The format record is a record in the Project
Control Database used to name and locate a specific format file. Unlike the format file, the
format record is created interactively. It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that
is used for report processing but is not an actual file.
Discrimination Data File and Record

The discrimination data file limits the report to only the specified database occurrences. It is
an ASCII file that is created interactively using the Table Checker.
The discrimination data record is a record in the Project Control Database used to name and
locate a specific discrimination data file. There is a uniquely-numbered record for each
discrimination data file so that it can be accessed for report processing. This is the same way
that the format record is used to access a format file.
Report Output and Record

The Table Checker creates a report using the specified format, discrimination, and search
criteria data files, and places it in the specified directory on the specified node.
The report record names or defines locations for all of the files that are necessary to generate a
report, including the report output. (It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that is
used for report processing but is not an actual file.)
390
________________ Using the Report Commands
Group Workflow
There is a definite workflow for at least the first time you create a report. First, use the
Report Management Data option to specify defaults for the nodename and path of the report
definition files. By defining the defaults first, you can prevent keying in a nodename and path
on each form. If you want to use a different nodename or path than the defined default,
simply place a data point in that field and key in the modification.
The following steps can be done in any order: create your format record, discrimination data
record, and discrimination data file using the Report Format and Report Discrimination
Data options. Reports cannot be generated until the format file, the discrimination data file,
and their corresponding records have been established.
Finally, use the Report option to create the actual report.
Checker
10. Table
391
________________
10.1.2 Report Format Form

When you choose the Report Format option from the Report Manager form, the Report
Format form is displayed.
This form enables you to create, copy, revise, or delete a record of the location of the format
file in the project control database. An option is also provided that enables you to copy a
record and its corresponding ASCII format files.
The format file defines the data that will be reported and the way in which that data will be
displayed. Reports cannot be generated unless a format file exists and a record of the files
location has been entered into the project control database.
Options
Create Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which enables you to add a
new record of a format file in the project control database. For more information, see
Format Creation/Revision Form, page 394.
Copy Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which copies the record of an
existing format file from the project control database along with the corresponding
ASCII format file. For more information, see Format Creation/Revision Form, page
394.
Revise Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which modifies a record of an

existing format file in the project control database. For more information, see Format
Creation/Revision Form, page 394.
392
________________ Report Format Form
Delete Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing record of a format file
from the project control database. If the record of the format file is deleted, reporting
cannot be performed. For more information, see Format Deletion Form, page 396.
Checker
10. Table
393
________________
10.1.2.1 Format Creation/Revision Form

When you choose Create, Copy, or Revise from the Report Format form, the Format
Creation/Revision form is displayed.
This form creates or revises a record in the project control database; this record defines the
location of a format file. The format file itself defines the contents and format of the report.
Both the location specification and the format file must exist to report on PDS data.
Field Descriptions
Number A unique number of up to 24 characters. Specifies the short name in the
project control database used to identify the record of the format file.
Description A description of up to 40 characters for the format file.
File Specification The file name of the format file to reference.
Path The disk location of the format file. This field retains the active setting.
Node The nodename of the system on which the format file is located. This field
394
________________ Format Creation/Revision Form
Before Using this Form

You must have created an ASCII format file. A set of basic format files is delivered with the
PD_Data product in the \pddata\sample\format directory. The file for MTO reporting is
named piping_#.fmt.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Create, Copy, or Revise.
A list of available records displays for copy or revision. To create a database record,
go to Step 3.
From the displayed list, select the record to be copied or revised. Then click Accept.
Key-in fields are displayed for you to specify the required database information.
3. Specify Report Format Data
Type information in each of the displayed fields, taking care to press return in each
field. Then click Accept.
The project control database is updated.
Checker
10. Table
395
________________
10.1.2.2 Format Deletion Form

records.
Fields and Options

Operating Sequence
396
________________ Format Deletion Form
Checker
10. Table
397
________________
10.1.3 Discrimination Data Form

When you select Report Discrimination Data from the Report Manager form, the
Discrimination Data form is displayed.
This form creates, copies, revises, and deletes a discrimination data file from the specified
directory. The associated record in the project control database is also copied, revised, or
deleted as needed.
A discrimination data file is an ASCII file that designates which models will be included in a
report. That is, discrimination data specifies the scope of the report. The project control
database record specifies the name and location of the discrimination data file that is to be
associated with a specific report.
Options
Create Displays the Discrimination Data Creation form, which creates a new
discrimination data file. The associated project control database record is also created.
For more information, see Discrimination Data Creation Form, page 400.
Copy Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which copies an existing
data file. The associated project control database record is also copied. For more
information, see Discrimination Data Revision Form, page 402.
Revise Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which modifies

discrimination data. You can use this option to revise the contents of the discrimination
data file, the location of the discrmination file, and the associated record in the project
398
________________ Discrimination Data Form
control database. For more information, see Discrimination Data Revision Form, page
402.
Delete Displays the Deletion form, which deletes a discrimination data file as well
as its associated record in the project control database. For more information, see
Discrimination Data Deletion Form, page 404.
Checker
10. Table
399
________________
10.1.3.1 Discrimination Data Creation Form

When you select Create from the Discrimination Data form, the Discrimination Data
Creation form is displayed.
This form creates a discrimination data file in a specified directory. It also creates a
corresponding record in the project control database. In addition, you can use this form to
specify segment and component search criteria.
If you use this form to specify search criteria data and you specify search
criteria data using the Report Search Criteria option, the data specified using
the Report Search Criteria option takes precedence.
Fields and Options

Number The unique number, up to 24 characters, that is the short name of the
discrimination data record in the project control database.
Description The description, up to 40 characters, of the discrimination data record in

the project control database.
File Specification The file name of the discrimination data record to be created.
File Path The disk location of the discrimination data file. This field retains the
active settings.
400
________________ Discrimination Data Creation Form
File Node The nodename of the system on which the discrimination data file is
Piping Materials Class Key in up to 16 alphanumeric characters for the piping

materials class.

unapproved.
Select Piping Materials Class Sets the piping materials class(es) in the
Specification/Material Reference Database which defines the tables to be checked.
No Piping Materials Class When selected, indicates to the system that either the
piping specialties or instruments will be verified by Table Checker.
Either format 5 or 6 must be used when the discrimination data is

created with the No Piping Materials Class button selected.
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report Discrimination Data form, select Create
The Discrimination Data Creation form displays.
2. Specify Discrimination Data
In the fields provided, key in the number, description, and file specification, path, and
node.
3. Select additional options as needed to define the report discrimination data. Then select
Accept.
Checker
10. Table
After including any models or search criteria for the discrimination data file,
be sure to select the final Accept. Because you must accept many forms
while specifying the discrimination data, it is easy to forget this step. Even
though you may have accepted many of the specifications, however, the
discrimination data file is not actually created until you select Accept on the
Report Discrimination Data form.
401
________________
10.1.3.2 Discrimination Data Revision Form

When you select Copy or Revise from the Discrimination Data form, the Discrimination
Data Revision form is displayed.
This form revises an existing discrimination data file. It also copies an existing discrimination
data file; you can then use the revision options to modify the copy as needed. The
corresponding records in the project control database are copied and/or modified as needed.
In addition, options are provided for you to modify segment and component search criteria
data.
If you use this form to specify search criteria data and you specify search
criteria data using the Report Search Criteria option, the data specified using
the Report Search Criteria option takes precedence.
Fields and Options

Number The unique number, up to 24 characters, that is the short name of the
discrimination data record in the project control database.
Description The description, up to 40 characters, of the discrimination data record in

the project control database.
File Specification The file name of the discrimination data record to be created.
File Path The disk location of the discrimination data file. This field retains the
active settings.
File Node The nodename of the system on which the discrimination data file is
Piping Materials Class Select one or more piping materials classes from this list of
loaded classes.
402
________________ Discrimination Data Revision Form

unapproved.
Select Piping Materials Class Sets the piping materials class(es) in the
Specification/Material Reference Database which defines the tables to be checked.
No Piping Materials Class When selected, indicates to the system that either the
piping specialties or instruments will be verified by Table Checker.
Either format 5 or 6 must be used when the discrimination data is

created with the No Piping Materials Class button selected.
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report Discrimination Data form, select Copy or Revise.
The Discrimination Data Revision form is displayed.
2. Specify Discrimination Data
In the fields provided, key in the number, description, and file specification, path, and
node.
3. Select additional options as needed to define the report discrimination data. Then select
Accept.
After updating any models or search criteria for the discrimination data file,
be sure to select the final Accept. Because you must accept many forms
while specifying the discrimination data, it is easy to forget this step. Even
though you may have accepted many of the specifications, however, the
discrimination data file is not actually updated until you select Accept on the
Checker
10. Table
Report Discrimination Data form.
403
________________
10.1.3.3 Discrimination Data Deletion Form

records.
Fields and Options

Operating Sequence
404
________________ Discrimination Data Deletion Form
Checker
10. Table
405
________________
10.1.4 Report Form

When you select Report from the Report Manager form, the Report form is displayed.
This form creates, revises, and deletes report records and report files. A report record holds
specifications for a report; these specifications include the report name, the report description,
and which format file, discrimination data file, and search criteria data file to use to generate a
report.
The report name is not the title that is printed on the report; the title is included
in the format file.
At the end of each report, a parameters page is included that contains the following
information:
Report Output The report number, report title, report creation/revision date, and
report node, path, and file name.
Format The report format number, description, and node, path, and file name.
Discrimination Data The report discrimination data number, description, and file
location (network address, path, and file name). The following discrimination data is
also included: list of model numbers (with discipline), volume (if applicable), search
criteria (if applicable), and sorting sequence.
Search Criteria The report search criteria number, description, and file location
(node, path, and file name. The following search criteria data is also included: list of
model numbers (with discipline), volume (if applicable), search criteria (if applicable),
and sorting sequence.
406
________________ Report Form
Options
Create Displays the Report Creation form, which creates a report record and
generates a report. For more information, see Report Creation Form, page 408.
Revise Displays the Revise Report form, which regenerates a report from an
existing or revised report record. For more information, see Revise Report Form, page
411.
Delete Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing report record and the
corresponding report. For more information, see Report Deletion Form, page 414.
Approve Displays the Report Approval form, which approves an existing report.
For more information, see Report Approval Form, page 416.
Multi-Create Displays the Report Multiple Submit form, which submits multiple
reports to the printer. For more information, see Report Multiple Submit Form, page
418.
Checker
10. Table
407
________________
10.1.4.1 Report Creation Form

When you select Create from the Report form, the Report Creation form is displayed.
Use this form to create a report record and to generate a report. Because report records are
stored in the project control database, you can use them over and over again as needed.
Fields and Options

file short name.
The Table Checker Report Number must not contain spaces. If there
are spaces in the number, the report will not be submitted to the batch
queue.
active settings, and it is automatically populated if you have specified this data on the
Report Management Dataform. For more information, see Report Management
Defaults Form, page 420.
408
located. This field retains the active settings, and it is automatically populated if you
have specified this data on the Report Management Data form. For more information,
see Report Management Defaults Form, page 420.
data.
Checker
10. Table
optional.

Submit Immediately/Submission is Delayed Specifies when the report will be

processed. When this toggle is set to Submission is Delayed, additional fields display
for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated.
409
________________
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report form, select Create.
The Report Creation form is displayed.
2. Specify Report Data
Key in the report record information. Then select the appropriate report format file,
discrimination data file, and search criteria data file.
printed.

410
10.1.4.2 Revise Report Form

When you select Revise from the Report form, the Revise Report form is displayed.
This form revises an existing report record and generates a report from the project control
database. An option is also provided to update (in some cases) the report record without
generating a report output file. Similarly, you can choose to generate an updated report output
file without updating the report record.
Checker
10. Table
Fields and Options
file short name.
active settings.
411
________________
data.
optional.


Revise Data Only/Revise Report and Data Specifies revision of the report data
only (Revise Data Only) or revision of the report data and the report output file (Revise
Report and Data). To revise the report specification without updating the report
output file, make the necessary changes, set this toggle to Revise Data Only, and click
Accept. To revise the report output file only, set this toggle to Revise Report and
Data without modifying any of the fields, and click Accept. To modify both the report
412
file and the report output file, make the necessary changes, set this toggle to Revise
Data Only, and click Accept.
If you update any field other than Report Number and Report Title,
this toggle is automatically set to Revise Report and Data, and the
report output file is generated.
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report form, select Revise.
The Report Creation form is displayed with a list of available report files.
2. Select Report
From the displayed list, select the report to be revised. Then click Accept.
The fields update to display the selected report file specifications.
3. Revise Report Information
Update the report record information as needed.
printed.

Checker
10. Table
413
________________
10.1.4.3 Report Deletion Form

records.
Fields and Options

Operating Sequence
414
________________ Report Deletion Form
Checker
10. Table
415
________________
10.1.4.4 Report Approval Form

When you select Approve from the Report form, the Report Approval form is displayed.
Use this form to select a report to approve. Approving a report means that a database attribute
is set from not approved (the default) to approved. This approval status provides a way for
you to flag reports that you have run and verified that the output data is valid. When a report
is revised, the approval status is automatically reset to not approved.
Options
Number The 24-character unique name (as called short name) of the report record.
Description The 40-character description of the report record.
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report form, select Approve.
The Report Approval form is displayed.
416
________________ Report Approval Form
2. From the displayed list, select a report to approve. Then click Accept.
The Approval form is displayed.
For more information, see the Approve Report section of the PD_Report Users
Guide.
Checker
10. Table
417
________________
10.1.4.5 Report Multiple Submit Form

When you select Multi-Create from the Report form, the Report Multiple Submit form is
displayed.
Use this form to submit multiple reports at the same time.
Fields and Options

Number The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the report
file in the project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the report file short
name.
Description The 40-character descriptive name of the report file.

418
________________ Report Multiple Submit Form
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report form, select Multi-Create.
The Report Multiple Submit form is displayed.
2. Select Reports for Submission
From the displayed list, select the reports to submit. Highlighed reports are selected;
select a highlighted report to remove the highlight and to not submit the report.
printed.
4. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit to Batch Immediately) or

later (Delayed Submit to Batch). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date
and time that the report is to be submitted.
5. Click Accept to submit the reports.
Checker
10. Table
419
________________
10.1.5 Report Management Defaults Form

When you select Report Management Data from the Report Manager form, the Report
Management Defaults form is displayed.
This form creates a record in the project control database of the node name and path of the
report definition files. This option is used primarily for setup.
Fields
Report Path Specifies the default path of the report output files.
It is recommended that you not send output reports to your systems

temporary (that is, tmp or temp) directory.
Report Node Specifies the default node name of the system on which report output
files are located.
Report Format Path Specifies the default path of the format files.
Report Format Node Specifies the default node name of the system on which
format files are located.
Report Discrimination Data Path Specifies the default path of the discrimination
data files.
420
________________ Report Management Defaults Form
Report Discrimination Data Node Specifies the default node name of the system
on which discrimination data files are located.
Report Search Criteria Data Path Specifies the default path of the report search
criteria data files.
Report Search Criteria Data Node Specifies the default node name of the system
on which report search criteria data files are located.
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report Manager form, select Report Management Data.
The Report Management Defaults form is displayed.
2. Accept or Exit
In the fields provided, key in the default paths and node names for the report output
files, format files, discrimination data files, and search criteria data files. Then click
Accept.
Checker
10. Table
421
________________
10.2 Sample Table Checker Output

The following is a listing of selected pages from the table checker output for Piping Materials Class 1C0031.
21-Apr-92 Page: 1
SIZE-INDEPENDENT SPEC DATA
__________________________
Description: Gate valve, CL800, SWE, BB, OS&Y,

ASTM-A105, trim 8, Smith 800
Piping Class: 1C0031
Size Range: 1st 3/4IN 1-1/2IN

2nd - -
Option:
End Preparation(s): SWE (421)
Rating(s): CL800
End geometry standard(s): Default (5)
Body geometry standard: Smith 1 (4625)
Maximum allowable temperature: -9999
Material Grade: A105 (150)
Modifier: 3
Fabrication category: CSFF (7)
Note 1: -
Note 2: -
PDS Reference data
AABBCC: 6Q1C01
Commodity Code: VAUSAHGAAA
Weight Code: 490 pcf (52)
EDEN Modules Tables
______
GATR FEM_420_800_5
V1_AMS GATR_4625_420_800_A
VALVE_2_AMS VAUSAHGAAA
V1 GATR_FEM_800_3_A
OP_3
OPERATOR_3
OP3
422
________________ Sample Table Checker Output
21-Apr-92 Page: 2
__________________________
Description: Gate valve, CL800, SWE, BB, OS&Y, full

port, ASTM-A105, trim 8, Smith 888

2nd - -
Option: Full port (24)
End Preparation(s): SWE (421)
Rating(s): CL800
Body geometry standard: Smith 1 (4625)
Modifier: 3
Note 1: -
Note 2: -
PDS Reference data
AABBCC: 6Q1C01
Commodity Code: VAUSAHGCAA
Checker
10. Table
EDEN Modules Tables
______
GATF FEM_420_800_5
V1_AMS GATF_4625_420_800_A
VALVE_2_AMS VAUSAHGCAA
V1 GATF_FEM_800_3_A
OP_3
OPERATOR_3
OP3
423
________________
21-Apr-92 Page: 3
__________________________
Description: Gate valve, CL150, RFFE, BB, OS&Y,

ASTM-A105, trim 8, Smith 815

2nd - -
Option: RFFE (221)
End Preparation(s): RFFE (21)
Rating(s): CL150
Body geometry standard: ANSI-B16.10 (40)
Modifier: 3
Note 1: Use at flanged equipment connections.
Note 2: -
PDS Reference data
AABBCC: 6Q1C01
Commodity Code: VAABAHGGAA
EDEN Modules Tables
______
GAT BLT_20_150_5
V1_AMS GAT_40_20_150_A
VALVE_2_AMS VAABAHGGAA
V1 GAT_BLT_150_3_A
OP_3 STUD_20_150_5
OPERATOR_3
OP3
424
21-Apr-92 Page: 133

SIZE-DEPENDENT SPEC DATA
________________________
AABBCC: 6Q1C01
1st Size 2nd Size Physical Data

Weight Generic Specific Sub-Component
________ ________ _______ ________ _____________
3/4IN 3/4IN
4.5Lb 1.1715In, 0.4375In Undefined, Undefined, 1.125In 11In, 4In
1IN 1IN
6.25Lb 1.4538In, 0.4375In Undefined, Undefined, 1.375In 13In, 5.5In
1-1/2IN 1-1/2IN
12Lb 2.0575In, 0.4375In Undefined, Undefined, 1.5625In 16.125In, 5.75In
21-Apr-92 Page: 134

SIZE-DEPENDENT SPEC DATA
________________________
AABBCC: 6Q1C01
1st Size 2nd Size Physical Data

Weight Generic Specific Sub-Component
________ ________ _______ ________ _____________
3/4IN 3/4IN
6.25Lb 1.1715In, 0.4375In Undefined, Undefined, 1.125In 11In, 4In
1IN 1IN
9.75Lb 1.4538In, 0.4375In Undefined, Undefined, 1.375In 13In, 5.5In
1-1/2IN 1-1/2IN
21.75Lb 2.0575In, 0.4375In Undefined, Undefined, 1.5625In 16.125In, 5.75In
Checker
10. Table
425
________________
21-Apr-92 Page: 376

TABLES NOT FOUND
________________
Tables Not Found Table Library
________________ _____________
REDC_39_300_S$10_300_S$XS_52 Physical Data Library
REDE_39_300_S$10_300_S$XS_52 Physical Data Library
STUD_120_150_5
STUD_120_150_80
STUD_120_300_5
STUD_160_150_5
STUD_160_150_80
426
21-Apr-92 Page: 377

TABLES FOUND
____________
Tables Found Table Library Table Revision Date
____________ _____________ ___________________
BALR_3028_420_600_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:46:45 1991
BALR_FEM_600_9_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:16:28 1991
BALSP_40_20_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:01:23 1991
BALSP_BLT_150_9_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:16:28 1991
BFYHP_4200_160_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:08:15 1991
BFYHP_BLT_150_17_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:16:33 1991
BLPAD_1026_120_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:00 1991
BLPAD_1026_120_150_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:01 1991
BLPAD_146_120_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:48 1991
BLPAD_146_120_150_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:51 1991
BLSPA_1026_120_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:01 1991
BLSPA_1026_120_150_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:02 1991
BLSPA_146_120_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:49 1991
BLSPA_146_120_150_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:52 1991
BLSPC_146_120_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:50 1991
BLSPC_146_120_150_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:53 1991
BLSPC_146_120_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:56 1991
Checker
10. Table
BLSPC_146_120_300_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:59 1991
BLSPO_146_120_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:51 1991
BLSPO_146_120_150_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:54 1991
BLSPO_146_120_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:57 1991
BLSPO_146_120_300_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:29:00 1991
BLT_120_150_5 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:17:06 1991
427
________________
CAPBV_5150_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:10:17 1991
CAPBV_5150_300_S$10_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:10:51 1991
CAPBV_5150_300_S$STD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:11:03 1991
CAPBV_5150_300_S$XS_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:11:07 1991
CAPOT_5375_420_3000_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:11:19 1991
CAPOT_5375_420_3000_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:11:22 1991
CKLR_4625_420_800_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:09:40 1991
CKS_40_20_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:01:26 1991
CKWF_40_120_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:01:12 1991
CPL_41_420_3000_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:06:46 1991
CPL_41_420_3000_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:06:49 1991
E45LR_39_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:52:46 1991
E45LR_39_300_S$10_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:54:04 1991
E45LR_39_300_S$STD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:59:04 1991
E45LR_39_300_S$XS_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:00:12 1991
E45_41_420_3000_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:06:46 1991
E45_41_420_3000_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:06:50 1991
E90LR_39_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:52:47 1991
E90LR_39_300_S$10_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:54:04 1991
E90LR_39_300_S$STD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:59:30 1991
E90LR_39_300_S$XS_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:00:12 1991
E90SR_58_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:11:49 1991
E90SR_58_300_S$STD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:11:58 1991
E90_41_420_3000_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:06:47 1991
E90_41_420_3000_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:06:51 1991
428
EOLLR_1575_300_S$STD_300_S$160_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:39:37 1991
EOLLR_1575_300_S$STD_300_S$160_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:39:42 1991
Checker
10. Table
429
________________
21-Apr-92 Page: 378

TABLES FOUND
____________
Tables Found Table Library Table Revision Date
____________ _____________ ___________________
FBLD_254_20_150_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:44:58 1991
FBLD_35_20_150_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:48:28 1991
FEM_420_150_5 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:20:07 1991
FOLHC_1575_300_NREQD_420_3000_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:31:30 1991
FOLHC_1575_300_NREQD_420_3000_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:31:44 1991
FOWNAW_66_20_300_300_300_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:12:47 1991
FOWNAW_66_20_300_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:12:51 1991
FRSW_6_20_150_420_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:14:14 1991
FRSW_6_20_150_420_150_S$160_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:14:15 1991
FRSW_6_20_300_420_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:14:18 1991
FRSW_6_20_300_420_300_S$160_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:14:19 1991
FSW_35_20_150_420_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:48:17 1991
FSW_35_20_150_420_150_S$160_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:48:17 1991
FSW_35_20_150_420_150_S$XS_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:48:20 1991
FSW_35_20_300_420_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:48:41 1991
FSW_35_20_300_420_300_S$XS_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:49:04 1991
FWN_165_20_150_300_150_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:43:17 1991
FWN_165_20_150_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:43:18 1991
430
GATF_4625_420_800_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:09:40 1991
GATF_FEM_800_3_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:21:14 1991
GATR_4625_420_800_440_800_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:09:39 1991
GATR_4625_420_800_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:09:41 1991
GATR_FEM_800_3_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:21:18 1991
GAT_40_20_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:01:27 1991
GAT_40_20_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:01:46 1991
GAT_BLT_150_3_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:21:30 1991
GAT_BLT_300_3_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:21:32 1991
GLOR_4625_420_800_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:09:41 1991
GLOR_FEM_800_3_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:21:42 1991
GLO_40_20_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:01:28 1991
GLO_BLT_150_3_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:21:52 1991
LOL_1575_300_S$STD_300_S$160_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:39:39 1991
LOL_1575_300_S$STD_300_S$160_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:39:44 1991
MALWT_300_S$10_5_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:22:48 1991
MALWT_300_S$STD_5_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:23:07 1991
Checker
10. Table
MALWT_300_S$XS_5_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:23:10 1991
MAL_300_5 Physical Data Library Thu Mar 21 15:55:49 1991
NEE_5375_420_800_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:11:31 1991
NEE_FEM_800_3_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:23:25 1991
NIP_100_300_S$160_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:27:27 1991
PLUG_41_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:06:29 1991
PLUG_41_300_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:06:37 1991
REDC_39_300_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:52:38 1991
REDC_39_300_S$10_300_S$10_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:53:51 1991
REDC_39_300_S$10_300_S$STD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:54:02 1991
431
________________
REDC_39_300_S$STD_300_S$10_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:58:40 1991
REDC_39_300_S$STD_300_S$STD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:58:52 1991
432
21-Apr-92 Page: 381

EDEN ACCESSED
_____________
EDEN Not Found EDEN Found
______________ __________
BALR
BALSP
BFYHP
BLPAD
BLSPA
BLSPC
BLSPO
CAPBV
CAPOT
CKLR
CKS
CKWF
CPL
E45
E45LR
E45TLR
E90
E90LR
E90SR
E90TLR
EOLLR
F10_1
F10_2
F122_1
F122_1_AMS
F13
F13_AMS
F173
F173_AMS
F177
F177_AMS
F178
F178_AMS
F179
Checker
10. Table
F17D
F17D_AMS
F180
F180_AMS
F182
F182_AMS
F188
F188_AMS
F19
F19_AMS
F1A
F1A_AMS
F25
F25_AMS
F27
F27_AMS
F28
F39
F39_AMS
F47
F47T_AMS
F47_AMS
F6
433
________________
F6_AMS
F8
F8_AMS
434
21-Apr-92 Page: 382

EDEN ACCESSED
_____________
EDEN Not Found EDEN Found
______________ __________
FBLD
FITTING_1_AMS
FITTING_2_AMS
FITTING_3_AMS
FLANGE_AMS
FOLHC
FOWNAW
FRSW
FSW
FWN
GAT
GATF
GATR
GLO
GLOR
LOL
NEE
NIP
OLET_1_AMS
OP3
OP9
OPERATOR_3
OPERATOR_33
OPERATOR_9
OP_17
OP_3
OP_33
OP_331
OP_332
OP_9
PIPING
PLUG
REDC
REDE
Checker
10. Table
RPAD
RWELD
SOL
SWGC
SWGE
T
TRB
UN
V1
V11
V1_AMS
V26
V38
V6
VALVE_2_AMS
WOL
435
________________
.*****. REPORT ERROR LOG CREATION TIME: Tuesday 04/21/92 15:35
1 - ERROR - EDEN error (-3) for pmc 1C0031 item 6Q1C26 with 1st size 32IN and 2nd size 32IN
Error in module MGOP_32768
2 - ERROR - EDEN error (-3) for pmc 1C0031 item 6Q1C26 with 1st size 34IN and 2nd size 34IN
Error in module MGOP_32768
Error Codes
The following error codes are used in the reported error messages.
-3 Eden Module Not Found
-4 Entry Not Found in Table
-7 Table Not Found
436
________________ Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Manager
11. Pipe Support Tutorial

Definition Manager
The Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Manager provides access to the Tutorial Definition Files
(TDFs) used in placing pipe supports in the model. The TDFs define the pipe supports
modeling requirements.
For more information on TDFs, refer to the Pipe Supports Modeler Reference Guide.
11. TDF Library
437
________________
11.1 Support Tutorial Definition Manager

The Support Tutorial Definition Manager is used to create a new Tutorial Definition
Library or to create, modify, or delete data in the library. You can also create reports of the
data in the library. Select the Support Tutorial Definition Manager from the Reference
Data Manager form.

Define the location of the approved and unapproved (if applicable) Pipe Support
Tutorial Definition Library files in the Reference Database Management Data.
Options
Create Library Used to create a new Tutorial Definition Library.
Compress Library Used to compress the Tutorial Definition Library.
Unapproved ==> Approved Used to copy the unapproved Tutorial Definition

Library to the approved library.
Create Data Used to compile source files and add the resulting code to the Tutorial
Definition Library. You can create a single tutorial definition file or specify a list of
tutorial definition files to be created.
438
________________ Support Tutorial Definition Manager
Revise Data Used to select a tutorial definition file from the library for editing and
compile the revised tutorial definition file.
Delete Data Used to delete a specified tutorial definition file from the library.
Report Data Used to create a report file of the library contents.
List Data Used to list the files contained in the library.
Extract Data Used to extract a tutorial definition file from the library for editing or
printing.
Full List/Sub-string Use this toggle to determine the data to be listed. Full List
returns all the definition in the Tutorial Definition Library. Sub-string limits the list to
those files that contain the substring you enter in the corresponding box.
Node Name Key in the node name of the location of the table definition files for
pipe supports.
File Path Key in the path to the location where you store table definition files for
pipe supports.
11. TDF Library
439
________________

This option is used to create a new Tutorial Definition Library.
The system displays the approved and unapproved Tutorial Definition Library names as
11.1.2 Compress
This option is used to compress the Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Library. Any tables
which have been deleted from the library will be removed.

This option copies the unapproved Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Library to the approved
library.
440
________________ Create Data
11.1.4 Create Data

This option enables you to create a new tutorial definition file. You can process a single file
or specify a list of files to be created.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Create Data option.
Key in the name of the source file or list file to be compiled and added to the active
library.
4. The system displays the default node name and path for the tutorial definition files as
specified in the Default Project Control Data at the bottom of the form.
this operation.
Accept the file to begin processing.
If a fatal error occurs while loading files, the Tutorial Definition File Library is left
unchanged.
11. TDF Library
441
________________
11.1.5 Revise Data

This option enables you to replace an existing tutorial definition file. This option enables you
to select a tutorial definition file from the library, edit the file, and then compile the file and
put it back in the library.
Operating Sequence
The system displays the tutorial definition files in the Tutorial Definition Library.
Select the tutorial definition files to be revised and select Accept.
The system extracts the specified file from the library and activates the text editor to
enable you to modify the file.
442
________________ Revise Data
3. Make any changes to the displayed file.
into the library. (If you quit the text editor, the file is not recompiled.)
11. TDF Library
443
________________
11.1.6 Report Data

This option enables you to create a report on the contents of the Tutorial Definition Library.
This report lists all the tutorial definition files in the Tutorial Definition Library.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Report Data option from the Library/Data Management form.
3. Select the report option: Save, Print/Delete or Print/Save.
For the Print/Delete or Print/Save options, select the print queue from the list of
displayed queues.
4. Select Accept to create the report.
For the Save or Print/Save options, the system generates a report named ppsm_tdf in
the default directory based on the contents of the Pipe Support Tutorial Definition
Library.
444
________________ List Data
11.1.7 List Data

This option displays all the tutorial definition files for the Tutorial Definition Library.
Operating Sequence
11. TDF Library
445
________________
11.1.8 Delete Data

This option enables you to delete a tutorial definition file from the Tutorial Definition Library.
Operating Sequence
2. Select Table for Deletion
Select the tutorial definition file to be deleted from the list of files. You can use the
scroll bar to scroll through the available files.
3. Accept or Select Other Table(s)
Accept the selected tutorial definition file.
The system deletes the tutorial definition file from the Tutorial Definition Library.
446
________________ Extract Data
11.1.9 Extract Data

This option enables you to extract a tutorial definition file from the Tutorial Definition
Library for editing or printing.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Extract Data from the Library/Data Management form.
2. Select Table for Extraction
Select the tutorial definition file from the list of files and select Accept. You can use
the scroll bar to scroll through the available files.
OR
Select the Extract All button to extract all the available files.
The system pulls the file out of the library and places it in the default directory defined
in the Default Project Control Data. See Default Project Control Data, page 53. 11. TDF Library
447
________________
448
________________ Standard Note Library
12. Standard Note Library

The Standard Note Library contains the code list text for code-listed attributes, including
standard notes. It enables you to define standard text required to support the piping design
effort.
The standard code list text is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\std_note.l. The
accompanying source listing for this file is contained in the file std_note.l.t. You can add,
delete, or revise code list sets in the library to reflect your own practices, terminology, and
language. Entries in these files are in the form Standard Note Type xxxx where xxxx is the
number of the code list set.
Refer to Appendix B for a listing of the delivered Standard Note Library.
Neutral File Description

A neutral file is an ASCII text file which contains standard notes or code lists to be placed in
the Standard Note Library. An entry is a single input/output record. One entry (or word) is
retrieved each time a neutral file is read. The entries in a neutral file must be separated by at
least one space. If an embedded blank is contained within an entry, the entire entry must be
enclosed in single quotes ().
2 = Hydrogen Gas
Entries enclosed in single quotes can take up more than one line. When an entry continues
onto a new line, a blank character is automatically appended to the end of the previous line.
Neutral File Format

N499
; Piping Notes
1 =
;
; Notes Applicable to the Piping Materials Class, 2-199
WWW = ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ
ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ
;
; Notes Applicable to a Piping Component, 200-499
;
Note Library
12. Standard
449
________________
; Notes Applicable to a Piping Specialty, 500-699

;
; Notes Applicable to an Instrument Specialty, 700-899
General Rules
EACH standard note type or code list type should be contained in a separate neutral file.
Neutral files should have the following basic format:
C100
; This is a comment line !!!!!!
; This file contains a code list for type 100.
1 = Inert Gas
2 = Natural Gas
5 = Oxygen Gas
6 = Standard note or code list descriptions can extend
beyond one line of text up to a maximum of 80 characters
12 = Purge Gas
14 = Waste Gas
The first entry in each neutral file should be the note/code TYPE (C100 in the above
example). The first letter must be either: C for a codelist set or N for a standard note
This character is followed by a number which identifies the specific codelist set or
standard note. This number must be a valid short integer.
Additionally, this entry should also include the text used for extracting information
from the Standard Note Library. This text may contain up to 80 characters.
The following numbering conventions are used for standard note type 499:
- Piping Job Specification: note numbers 1 through 199.

- Piping Commodity Item: note numbers 200 through 599.
- Specialty Item: note numbers 600 through 799.
- Instrument Item: note numbers 800 through 999.
The first entry can contain additional characters following the TYPE, but they are all
ignored.
You can include the keyword PID_RDB in the neutral file on the line following the
standard note type to load the standard note into both the Piping Reference Database
and the P&ID Reference Database simultaneously. (Optional)
Each note/code entry is comprised of three parts (triplet) which must appear in the
following sequence.
<Note/Code number> <equal sign> <Note/code description>

2 = Sulfuric Acid
450
________________ Standard Note Library
- The description text must be enclosed in single quotes.

- The description text can extend for more than one line.
- Code list description text can contain up to 80 characters.
- Standard note description text can contain up to 400 characters.
- The Note/code description text can be on a line by itself.
- The equal sign must have a blank character on either side of it.
- The equal sign can be on a separate line by itself.
- The note/code number must be a valid I*2 integer.
- The note/code number must begin a new line; it cannot be on the same line
with any part of another triplet.
- The note/code number can be on a line by itself.
The only valid edit you can make to code list 1056 (temperature units) and code list
1064 (pressure units) is to modify the displayed text string. Modifications to this field
affect only the display of the text; the actual units (i.e. degrees) cannot be modified.
You cannot add any entries to code lists 1056 and 1064.
Comments are indicated with a semicolon (;) or exclamation point (!). Any information
on a line to the right of either of these characters is considered a comment and is
ignored. These comment lines can only occur following a description; they cannot
break up a triplet.
Valid Comments
1 = Caustic
; Comment line.
2 = Sulfur ! Another Comment line.
! Another Comment line.
3 = Hydrogen Sulfide ; Another Comment line.
Invalid Comments
1 =
; Invalid Comment line.
Caustic
2 = ! Invalid Comment line. Sulfur
Any text enclosed in < angle brackets > is considered a comment and is ignored. These
comments can appear anywhere in the neutral file except within a description.
Blank lines can occur anywhere in a neutral files for readability. These lines are
ignored.
Each entry can begin at any point along an input line but must be separated from
adjacent entries by one or more spaces.
Note/code numbers need not be in sequential order.

Note Library
12. Standard
451
________________
Defining Text for Standard Note Types

You can specify the text for the various standard note types by loading the standard note titles
as standard note type 999. The specified title will display in a list of standard note types or a
list of the selections for a specific standard note type.
452
________________ Standard Note Library Manager
12.1 Standard Note Library Manager

The Standard Note Library Manager is used to create a new
Standard Note Library or to create, modify, or delete data in the library. You can also create
reports of the data in the library. Select the Standard Note Library Manager from the
Reference Data Manager form.

Define the location of the approved and unapproved (if applicable) Standard Note
Library files in the Reference Database Management Data.
Options
Create Library Used to create a new Standard Note Library.
Compress Library Used to compress the Standard Note Library.
Unapproved ==> Approved Used to copy the unapproved Standard Note Library
to the approved library.
Create Used to compile source files and add the resulting code to the Standard
Note Library. You can create a single standard note set or specify a list of standard
notes to be created.
Note Library
12. Standard
453
________________
Revise Used to select a standard note set from the library for editing and compile
the revised standard note definition.
Report Used to create a report file of the library contents.
List Used to list the files contained in the library.
Delete Used to delete a specified standard note set from the library.
Extract Used to extract a standard note set from the library for editing or printing.
Load Database Used to load the contents of the Standard Note Library into the
applicable schemas of the projects relational database to support DBAccess reporting
of PDS data.
454

This option is used to create a new Standard Note Library. It automatically creates the object
library (.l) and the text library (.l.t) for the library that is being created.
The system displays the approved and unapproved Standard Note Library names as defined in
the RDB Management Data.
12.1.2 Compress
This option is used to compress the Standard Note Library. Any tables which have been

This option copies the unapproved Standard Note Library to the approved library.
Note Library
12. Standard
455
________________
12.1.4 Create Standard Note Type

This option enables you to create a new standard note set by inserting the data in a neutral file
into the Standard Note Library. The neutral file enables you to define piping notes required to
support the piping design effort. You can define code list sets, or standard notes applicable to:
a piping materials class, a piping commodity, a specialty item, or an instrument. You can
process a single file or specify a list of files to be created.

To add more than one standard note type to the library, create a list file which identifies the
names of the standard note source files to be added. The list file should contain one entry
(source file name) per line.
You can define the default path for standard note neutral files using the Default Project
Control Data option. See Default Project Control Data, page 53.
Operating Sequence
Key in the name of the source file or list file to be compiled and added to the active
library.
4. The system displays the default node name and path for the standard note neutral files
as specified in the Default Project Control Data at the bottom of the form.
this operation.
If a fatal error occurs while loading neutral files, the Standard Note Library is left unchanged.
456
________________ Revise Standard Note Type
12.1.5 Revise Standard Note Type

This option enables you to replace an existing standard note type. This option enables you to
select a standard note type from the library, edit the file, and then compile the file and put it
back in the library.
Operating Sequence
The system displays the standard note types in the Standard Note Library.
2. Select Module Name
Select the standard note types to be revised and select Accept.
Note Library
12. Standard
457
________________
458
________________ Report Standard Note Library Contents
12.1.6 Report Standard Note Library Contents

This option enables you to create a report on the contents of the Standard Note Library. This
report list all the standard note types in the Standard Note Library. Refer to Appendix B for a
listing of the report file for the delivered Standard Note Library.
Operating Sequence
3. Select the report option: Save, Print/Delete or Print/Save.
For the Print/Delete or Print/Save options, select the print queue from the list of
displayed queues.
4. Select Accept to create the report.
For the Save or Print/Save options, the system generates a report named stnotelib.rpt
in the default directory based on the contents of the Standard Note Library.
Note Library
12. Standard
459
________________
12.1.7 List Standard Note Data

This option displays all the standard note types for the Standard Note Library.
Operating Sequence
The system displays the Standard note types in the Standard Note Library.
460
________________ Delete Standard Note Data
12.1.8 Delete Standard Note Data

This option enables you to delete a Standard note type from the Standard Note Library.
Operating Sequence
The system displays the Standard note types in the Standard Note Library.
2. Select Note Type
Select the Standard note type to be deleted from the list of note types. You can use the
3. Accept or Select Other Note Type
Accept the selected standard note type.
The system deletes the standard note type from the Standard Note Library.
Note Library
12. Standard
461
________________
12.1.9 Extract Standard Note Type

This option enables you to extract a neutral file from the Standard Note Library for editing or
printing.
Operating Sequence
2. Select Note Type
Select the standard note type from the list of files and select Accept. You can use the
The system pulls the file out of the library and places it in the default directory defined
in the Default Project Control Data. See Default Project Control Data, page 53.
462
________________ Load Database
12.1.10 Load Database

This option loads the contents of the Standard Note Library into the applicable schemas of the
projects relational database to support DBAccess reporting of PDS data.

You must create the necessary database structure for DBAcess reporting through the Project
Administrator. Refer to the description of the Project Setup Manager in the Project
Administrator (PD_Project) Users Guide for more information.
You must specify the maximum length of the text for each standard note type in the Standard
Note Library in an ASCII file namedstnote_max_len. This maximum length is used to load
the standard note data in the relational database. This is the same file used in the Project
Administrator to modify the database structure to support DBAccess. It must reside in the
project directory.
Entries in this file consist of one line for each standard note type with the following format.
!note type max length short?

35 15 *
36 10
The note type and the maximum length are separated by one or more spaces or tabs. An
asterisk (*) following the maximum length indicates that the short version of the standard note
data be loaded into the relational database. The default is that the long version be loaded.
Comments can be placed anywhere in the file and must be preceded by an exclamation point
(!).
You can determine which standard note data is loaded or not loaded into the relational
database. If the maximum length for a standard note type is defined as zero (0) or the
standard note type is not included in stnote_max_len, the data for that standard note type will
not be loaded.
A default note length file is delivered with the PD_Shell product in the file
\win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\stnote_max_len. These maximum lengths were determined on the
basis of the long option of standard note data reporting. To minimize relational database size,
you should exercise discretion in specifying the maximum length. The maximum length for
any standard note type is restricted to 240 characters by RIS.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Load Database from the Data Management form.
2. Select Submit to Batch Immediately to begin processing as soon as you exit the form.
OR
Note Library
12. Standard
Select Delayed Submit to Batch to specify a day and time to process the request.
463
________________
3. Accept the specified time.
464
________________ Label Description Library
13. Label Description Library
Description Lib.
13. Label
The Label Description Library contains the definitions for the following basic types of labels.
(The numbers in parentheses indicate the range of label numbers for each group of label
types.) Refer to Label Types, page 466 for more information.
Drawing View Specific Labels (1-129, 2500-2599)
- System Reserved Labels (1-29)

- User Defined Piping/Equipment Labels (30-49)
- User Defined Structural Labels (70-89)
- User Defined Miscellaneous Labels (90-109)
- User Defined Electrical Raceway Labels (110-129)
- User Defined PLANTGEN Labels (2500-2599)
Drawing View Identification Labels (50-69)
User Input Labels (200-219)
Displayable Attribute Labels (300-399)
Commodity Code Labels (400-899)
- U.S. practice (400-449)

- European - DIN (450-499)
- European - British Standard (500-549)
- European A - Finnish, French, etc. (550-599)
- European B - (750-799)
- International - JIS (600-649)
- International - Australian (650-699)
- International A (800-849)
- International B (850-899)
- Company practice (700-749)
Isometric Drawing Labels (900-999)
Report Labels (1150-2149)
Clash Management Labels (2200- 2399)
These labels are intelligent graphics which represent information from the non-graphical data
(databases, user data, etc.). You can update existing drawing view specific labels (1-49, 70-
130) to reflect the latest data in the database.
The default label description library is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\labels.l.

All changes to the library are performed interactively using the Label Description Library
Manager.
465
________________
13.1 Label Types

13.1.1 Displayable Attribute Labels
Each type of displayable attribute label has a description in the Label Description Library.
This description identifies the label characteristics such as level, color code, style, and font,
and the attribute data associated with the label.
A displayable attribute label consists of the text and optionally, a leader line, a line terminator,
and some label enclosure graphics. There are four sub-types of Displayable Attribute Labels:
Drawing View Specific Label
displayable attribute labels for named model items which are placed in a drawing.
Drawing View Identification Label
labels with attribute linkages to the Drawing View Data (table 122) that report
information about the drawing view such as drawing view name and view scale
Drawing View Specific Labels are further divided into subcategories for Piping, Structural,
HVAC, and Raceway. Drawing View Specific Labels for Piping and View Independent
Labels are divided into sub-ranges for system-defined labels and user labels.
PDS delivers Design Review Labels (317-330). These labels are the only ones
processed by PDS Design Review. You can create new Design Review labels,
but the system will not access them.
13.1.2 Alphanumeric Labels

Alphanumeric labels are non-intelligent user-defined labels. Each type of alphanumeric label
has a description in the Label Description Library. This description identifies the label
characteristics such as level, color code, style, and font. An alphanumeric label consists of the
text and optionally, a leader line, a line terminator, and some label enclosure graphics.
13.1.3 Displayable Attribute Message

Each type of displayable attribute message has a description in the Label Description Library.
Unlike the other label types, the description of a displayable attribute message only contains
the attribute data. Therefore, you cannot define label description data such as color, weight,
style, and text size for a displayable attribute message.
A displayable attribute message has all or part of its text derived from the alphanumeric data
that is linked to a specified named item in the model.
466
________________ Label Types
A displayable attribute message is displayed temporarily at the terminal either as an

identification message or as a reporting message. Some of these messages are displayed in
the terminals refresh message fields. Other messages are displayed temporarily in the model.
The system does not place any graphics in the model for this type of label. The text size of
Description Lib.
13. Label
these labels is always the same regardless of the screen view scale.
A displayable attribute message can also be used to create a value for another attribute, for
example, the Line Number Label attribute.
Displayable attribute messages also define the hard-coded values for Design Review labels.
13.1.4 Commodity Code Attribute Message

Commodity code attribute messages are the same as displayable attribute messages, except
they are used for bill of materials reporting. All or part of the messages text is derived from
the alphanumeric data in the database. A material description attribute message only contains
attribute data; you cannot define label description data such as color, weight, style, and text
size.
There are 10 categories of Material Description Attribute Messages
U.S. practice
DIN practice
British Standard
European practice A
European practice B
International practice - JIS
International practice - Australian
International practice A
International practice B
Company practice
13.1.5 Isometric Drawing Labels

The isometric drawing labels are similar to the commodity code attribute messages and are
used by the isometric extraction software.
467
________________
13.1.6 Report Labels

A range of report labels (1150-2149) is reserved in the Label Description Library for use in
formatting fields in a report. This is accomplished by using the special report indices for the
Label Description Library. (Refer to the Report Manager Reference Guide for information on
the report indices.)
When report labels are used, you cannot sort on an individual attribute used to
form the report label. However, you can sort on the complete report label.
13.1.7 Clash Management Labels

A range of labels (2200-2299) is reserved in the Label Description Library for use by the
Envelope Builder in creating the primary description and the secondary description for clash
management.
The label to be used is determined on the basis of the models discipline and the type of
component. The following label numbers are reserved in the Label Description Library for
use in clash management.
Envelope builders for disciplines other than piping and equipment do not
implement the labels reserved below.
2200 Piping - primary description for piping specialty - 2 cps

2201 Piping - primary description for piping specialty - 3 cps
2202 Piping - primary description for piping commodity - 2 cps
2203 Piping - primary description for piping commodity - 3 cps
2204 Piping - primary description for piping/tubing
2205 Piping - primary description for instrument component - 2 cps
2206 Piping - primary description for instrument component - 3 cps
2207 Piping - primary description for pipe support
2208 Piping - secondary description for piping segment
2220 Equipment - primary description for equipment
2221 Equipment - primary description for nozzle
2222 Equipment - secondary description for equipment
2223 Equipment - secondary description for nozzle
2240 PLANTGEN - pipe
2241 PLANTGEN - piping component
2242 PLANTGEN - equipment/miscellaneous
2243 PLANTGEN - nozzle
2244 PLANTGEN - structural/civil
2245 PLANTGEN - HVAC
2246 PLANTGEN - raceway
2247 PLANTGEN - pipe support
2260 Raceway - Straight Primary Label
2262 Raceway - Straight Secondary Label
2261 Raceway - Fitting Primary Label
2263 Raceway - Fitting Secondary Label
468
________________ Label Types
2264 Raceway - Panel Primary Label

2265 Raceway - Panel Secondary Label
2266 Raceway - Ductbank Primary Label
2267 Raceway - Ductbank Secondary Label
Description Lib.
13. Label
2280 HVAC - Primary Label for Connector
2281 HVAC - Secondary Label for Connector
2282 HVAC - Primary Label for Fitting
2283 HVAC - Secondary Label for Fitting
2284 HVAC - Primary Label for Duct
2285 HVAC - Secondary Label for Duct
2286 HVAC - Primary Label for Diffuser
2287 HVAC - Secondary Label for Diffuser
2288 HVAC - Primary Label for Grille
2289 HVAC - Secondary Label for Grille
2290 HVAC - Primary Label for Register
2291 HVAC - Secondary Label for Register
2292 HVAC - Primary Label for Humidifier
2293 HVAC - Secondary Label for Humidifier
2294 HVAC - Primary Label for Filter
2295 HVAC - Secondary Label for Filter
2296 HVAC - Primary Label for Damper
2297 HVAC - Secondary Label for Damper
2298 HVAC - Primary Label for Coil
2299 HVAC - Secondary Label for Coil
2300 HVAC - Primary Label for Terminal Device
2301 HVAC - Secondary Label for Terminal Device
2302 HVAC - Primary Label for Equipment
2303 HVAC - Secondary Label for Equipment
2304 HVAC - Primary Label for Hood
2305 HVAC - Secondary Label for Hood
The 2 CP clash management labels are used when the number of connect points, excluding
taps, is less than or equal to two. The 3 CP clash management labels are used when the
number of connect points, excluding taps, is greater than or equal to three.
The primary description is limited to 20 characters and the secondary description is limited to
40 characters.
469
________________
470
________________ Label Description Library Manager
13.2 Label Description Library Manager
Description Lib.
13. Label
The Label Description Library Manager enables you to define the graphic parameters for a
label (such as level, line weight, and color code) and to define the format of the label (what
information comprises the label). You can create a new (empty) label description library or
create, revise, or delete label descriptions in an existing library.
Options
Create Library Used to create a new Label Description Library.
Compress Library Used to compress the Label Description library.
Unapproved ==> Approved Used to copy the unapproved Label Description

Create Label Data Used to create a new label description and insert it in the Label
Description Library.
Revise Label Data Used to select a label from the library, edit the file, and put the
revised file back into the library.
Delete Label Data Used to remove a label description from the library.
Report Label Data Used to create a report of the library contents.
471
________________

This option is used to create a new Label Description Library. This option will be deactivated
if the specified library already exists.
The system displays the approved and unapproved Label Description Library names as
Select Accept to create the specified library file. If you specify an existing library file, the
13.2.2 Compress Library

This option is used to compress the Label Description library. Any labels which have been

This option copies the unapproved Label Description library to the approved library.
472
________________ Create Label Data
13.2.4 Create Label Data
Description Lib.
13. Label
This option enables you to add a label description of a specified type to the Label description
Library.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Create Label Data from the data management form.
The system displays a form listing the types of labels which can be created.
2. Select Option
Select the type of label to be created. See Label Types for a description of all the label
types and subtypes.
The system adds a label number in the range for the selected label type, and activates
one of the following screens to enable you to define the description data and/or
attribute data for the label to be created.
For Drawing View Specific Labels and Drawing View Identification Labels
you can define both graphic data and attribute data.
For User Input Labels you can define graphic data only. Refer to Create Label
Graphic Data, page 475 for more information.
For Isometric Drawing Labels, Displayable Attribute Labels, Commodity

Code Labels, Report Labels or Clash Management you can define attribute
data only. Refer to Create Label Attribute Data, page 478 for more information.
473
________________
Label Subtypes
Depending on the Option selected, the system may activate one of the following screens to
further classify the type of label to be created.
Drawing View Specific Labels
Commodity Code Labels
474
________________ Create Label Graphic Data
13.2.4.1 Create Label Graphic Data

This form enables you to define the graphic parameters for the selected label type.
Description Lib.
13. Label
Options
Create Label Attribute Data Enables you to specify the attributes which make up
the label and the format of the label.
Refer to Create Label Attribute Data, page 478 for more information.
Mass Annotation Options Enables you so set up the Mass Annotation options for
use with PD_Draw.
Refer to Mass Annotation Options, page 484 for more information.
Field Descriptions
Label Type Number of the label being created. (This field is filled in automatically
by the system.)
Label Description Short description for the label (up to 20 characters).
Graphics Color Activates the Select Color form used to set the color for the label
enclosure, leader line, and line terminator.
Graphics Weight Line weight (0-31) for the label enclosure, leader line, and line
terminator.
475
________________
Graphics Style Line Style (0-7) for the label enclosure, leader line, and line
terminator.
Alternate Style Alternate (centerline) line style (0-7) for name label leader lines.
The default is the same as the Graphics Style.
Text Color Activates the Select Color form used to set the color for the label text.
Text Weight Line weight (0-31) for the label text.
Character Size Activates the Define Active Character Size form used to set the
character plot size (text height and text width). You can select one of the default
settings (A - J) or key in a size. The default settings are defined in the drawings type
63 data. Refer to the Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator Reference
Guide for information on setting the default sizes.
Maximum Length Maximum line length (1-80) for the text. This setting is also
used to determine the label enclosure size.
Line Spacing Line spacing between label text represented as a fraction of text height
(0. - 10.). Also used to determine label enclosure size.
Maximum Lines Maximum number of lines in the label text (1-30). Also used to
determine label enclosure size.
Text Font Font (0-255) for the label text.
Enclosure Option Displays a set of options at the bottom of the form for setting the
type of label enclosure. The default is No Label Enclosure.
The User Defined Enclosure Option places as a cell, with no Leader

Line. When this option is chosen, the Leader Line Option toggle is no
longer available.
Diameter (Used with Label Enclosure Options 2 and 3) Diameter of the circle
enclosure graphic.
Cell Name (Used with Label Enclosure Option 8) Name of the Label Enclosure
cell.
Leader Line Option Toggle to define whether to use a Leader Line for the label.
Terminator Char. Character that represents the line terminator symbol in the
attached Font Library.
Terminator Font Font (0-255) for the line terminator.
476
________________ Create Label Graphic Data
Underline Spacing Underline spacing below text represented as a fraction of text

height (0. - 10.). If this value is 0, no underlining is performed.
Label Category The form displays the name label category and the user-defined
Description Lib.
13. Label
drawing annotation categories. You can select one of the 20 user-defined drawing
annotation categories or use the default category. The default category is that of the
name label category. The text for the drawing annotation categories is extracted from
the drawing category descriptions (drwcats.txt) in the project directory.
All of these parameters do not apply to each label type; the system skips over any nonrequired
parameters.
Once you have defined all the applicable parameters, select Attribute Label Data to specify
the attributes which make up the label and the format of the label (or select Accept for
graphics only labels). If your project will be using the Mass Annotation command in
PD_Draw to simplify label placement, select the Mass Annotation Options command on to
set up the Mass Annotation options. Refer to Mass Annotation Options, page 484 for more
details.
477
________________
13.2.4.2 Create Label Attribute Data

This form enables you to specify the attributes which make up the label and the format of the
label. The Line and Item fields are used to define the attributes that make up the label and the
order of the attributes within the label.
Set the option at the upper left of the form
Insert Data used to add a line or item to the label description.
Delete Data used to delete a selected line or item from the label description.
Edit Data used to revise a selected line or item in the label description.
Insert Data
1. Set the option to Insert Data.
2. Set the toggle to Insert after or Insert before.
3. Select Line or Item to Insert Data
Select a line field to create a new line (before or after) the selected line.
OR
Select an item field to create a new item in the current line (before or after) the selected
item.
478
________________ Create Label Attribute Data
The system activates a form that displays the Attribute Data Types. The following
forms illustrates the displays for a drawing view specific label. (The second form
appears when Other Data is selected.)
Description Lib.
13. Label
4. Select Option
Select the attribute data type for the label.
You can select Other Data to select the attribute data type for Raceway data.
479
________________
The system displays the attributes for the selected data type.
5. Enter Data
Select the attribute to be reported from the form. The system sets the Format Data
automatically. You can modify the total length and the number of decimal places (if
applicable).
For labels that include an angle value (such as the bend angle of a piping component),
select the Angle format to display the value in angle units (such as degrees and
minutes). The angle units are determined by the angular format defined through the
Project Data Manager.
For labels that include a distance attribute (such as the face-to-face dimension of a
piping component), you can select Fraction to format decimal attributes as a coordinate
readout. This option is restricted to those decimal attributes that represent dimensions.
OR
For drawing view specific labels, you can select User Keyin Attribute to specify text
to be entered by the user at label creation.
OR
Select Text Only and key in the text for a literal expression to be inserted in the label.
OR
Select Spacing Only and key in the number of spaces to define spacing between
attributes.
480
6. Repeat the previous step to add additional attribute text information. This allows you to
combine attribute values and pre-formatted text.
You can only define one user-defined keyin in a specific label.
Description Lib.
13. Label
7. Select one of the Optional Data options to specify a modifier to the active format.
Master Units = MicroStation master units, Sub Units = MicroStation sub units.
8. Accept the specified attribute data.
Delete Data
1. Set the option to Delete Data.
2. Select the line or item to be deleted.
3. Select Accept to delete the highlighted line or item. When you select a line, the system
deletes all the associated items.
Edit Data
1. Set the option to Edit Data.
2. Select Item to Edit
Select the item to be revised.
The system displays the attributes definition form for the selected item. The active
setting is highlighted or shown in the display fields.
3. Select an attribute from the form to change the type of data.
OR
Select the Format Data option. You can modify the total length and the number of
decimal places (if applicable).
OR
For drawing view specific labels, you can select User Keyin Attribute to specify text
to be entered by the user at label creation.
OR
Select Text Only and key in the text for a literal expression to be inserted in the label.
OR
Select Spacing Only and key in the number of spaces to define spacing between
attributes.
481
________________
4. Repeat the previous steps to edit additional items.
THEN
Accept the edits.
Examples
**************** Label Type = 310 ****************
Label Name = Line Number Label
[1][2][3]-[5]-[7]-[9]
Piping Segment Data
[1] fluid_code - Character (3)

[2] unit_code - Character (2)
[3] line_sequence_no - Character (16)
4 - -
[5] nominal_piping_dia - Character (7)
6 - -
[7] piping_mater_class - Character (6)
8 - -
[9] insulation_purpose - Character (3)
**************** Label Type = 317 ****************
Label Name = Dgn review segment
Line no: [2]

Construction status: [4]
Nor oper press: [6][7]
Nor oper temp: [9][10]
Steam out temp: [12][13]
Heat tracing: [15]
Insulation: [17]
Cleaning: [19]
Piping Segment Data
1 - Line no:
[2] line_number_label - Character (30)
3 - Construction status:
[4] construction_stat - Character (15)
5 - Nor oper press:
[6] nor_oper_pres - Real (8.2)
[7] nor_op_pres_units - Character (10)
8 - Nor oper temp:
[9] nor_oper_temp - Real (5.0)
[10] nor_op_temp_units - Character (5)
11 - Steam out temp:
[12] steam_outlet_temp - Real (5.0)
[13] nor_op_temp_units - Character (5)
14 - Heat tracing:
[15] heat_tracing_media - Character (5)
16 - Insulation:
[17] insulation_thick - Real (5.2) with sub units (ex. ",IN,MM,etc.)
482
18 - Cleaning:
[19] cleaning_reqmts - Character (10)
Description Lib.
13. Label
483
________________
13.2.4.3 Mass Annotation Options

Selecting the Mass Annotation Options command activates the Mass Annotation Options
form.
This form allows you to specify the following options for use with the Mass Annotation
command in PD_Draw:
Are Previously Labeled Objects to be Labeled?
Are Objects Clipped by Drawing View Bounds to be Labeled?
Are Objects Hidden by Other Objects to be Labeled?
Steps
1. Place a data point on the desired selection under each question.
2. Accept the selections and return to the Create Label Graphic Data form.
484
________________ Revise Label Data
13.2.5 Revise Label Data
Description Lib.
13. Label
This option enables you to revise the graphic data or attribute data for an existing label
description.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Revise from the Data Management form.
The system activates the following form which enables you to select the type of label to
be modified.
2. Select Option
Select the type of label to be revised. See Label Types for a description of all the label
types and subtypes.
The system displays the existing label for the selected label type.
3. Select Label Type
Select the specific label description to be revised.
Depending on the label type selected, the system displays the graphic data form or the
attribute data form.
For example, if you select label type 011, the system displays the following form.
485
________________
4. Select the parameter to be modified and key in the new value for that parameter.
5. You can select Attribute Label Data to activate the attribute data form.
6. Set the option to Insert Data, Delete Data, or Edit Data. The default is Edit Data.
Refer to Create Label Attribute Data for information on these options.
7. When finished, select Accept to save the changes and return to the Revise Label
Description form.
OR
Select Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
486
________________ Delete Label Data
13.2.6 Delete Label Data
Description Lib.
13. Label
This option enables you to delete an existing label description.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Delete Label Data from the Data Management form.
The system activates the following form which enables you to select the type of label to
be deleted.
2. Select Option
Select the type of label to be deleted. See Label Types for a description of all the label
types and subtypes.
The system displays the existing labels for the selected label type.
3. Select Label Type
Select the specific label description to be deleted.
4. Accept to Delete Label Type xxx
Select Accept to delete the selected label type.
The system deletes the description and refreshes the selection screen to enable you to
delete another label type.
487
________________
5. Select Cancel to return to the Data Management form.
488
________________ Report Label Data
13.2.7 Report Label Data
Description Lib.
13. Label
This option creates a listing of the label types defined in the Label Description Library.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Report Label Data from the Data Management menu.
2. Set the toggle to Unapproved or Approved to define the source of information to be

reported. This toggle is only displayed when both the approved and the unapproved
library are being used.
3. Select the reporting option.
Print/Delete submits the generated report output file to the specified print
queue and deletes the output file.
Print/Save submits the generated report output file to the specified print
queue and saves the output file.
Save saves the output file without printing.
For either of the Print options, the system displays a list of queues based on information
in the Project Queue Description Library.
4. Select Accept to submit the report for processing.
Report Completed
489
________________
For either of the Save options, the system creates a file named LABEL.RPT in the
default directory. Portions of the listing for the delivered labels are provided below.
A RIS error may be displayed if an Electrical Raceway Database has not

been created as part of the PDS database. The error will only be
reported the first time the report is run each PDS session.
**************** Label Type = 1 ****************
Label Name = Line Number Label

Graphics Color = 4
Graphics Weight = 1
Graphics Style = 0
Text Color = 4
Text Weight = 1
Label Category = 0
Char Size = 0
Max Length = 40
Text Space = 0.400000
Number Line = 1
Text Font = 0
Enclosure Option = 9
Cell Enclosure Name =
Leader Line = 1
Line Terminator Char = >
Text Font = 125
Under Line = 0.000000
[1]
Piping Segment Data
[1] line_number_label - Character (40)
***************************************
**************** Label Type = 2 ****************
Label Name = Piping Component No

Graphics Color = 4
Graphics Weight = 1
Graphics Style = 0
Text Color = 4
Text Weight = 1
Label Category = 0
Char Size = 0
Max Length = 20
Number Line = 1
Text Font = 0
Enclosure Option = 9
Cell Enclosure Name =
Leader Line = 1
Line Terminator Char = >
Text Font = 125
[1]
Piping Component Data
490
[1] piping_comp_no - Character (20)
***************************************
Description Lib.
13. Label
**************** Label Type = 200 ****************
Label Name = No Label Enclosure

Text Color = 4
Text Weight = 1
Label Category = 0
Char Size = 0
Max Length = 10
Number Line = 2
Text Font = 0
**************** Label Type = 201 ****************
Label Name = Rectangle Enclosure

Text Color = 4
Text Weight = 1
Label Category = 0
Char Size = 0
Max Length = 10
Number Line = 2
Text Font = 0
Attribute Data
***************************************
**************** Label Type = 300 ****************
Label Name = Piping Component ID
[1] / [3] Connect Point
[1] commodity_name - Character (6)

2 - /
[3] model_code - Character (6)
4 - 5 space(s)
5 - Connect Point
***************************************
**************** Label Type = 301 ****************
Label Name = Piping Comp Center
[1] / [3] Component Center
[1] commodity_name - Character (6)

2 - /
[3] model_code - Character (6)
4 - 5 space(s)
491
________________
5 - Component Center
***************************************
**************** Label Type = 353 ****************
Label Name = Dgn Rvw Weld Label

Weld Number: [2] - [4]
Weld Type: [6]
Piping NPD/OD: [8] - [10]
PMC: [12]
Weld Attributes
1 - Weld Number:
[2] weld_id - Character (16)
3 - -
[4] weld_no_A - Character (8)
5 - Weld Type:
[6] weld_type_A - Character (20)
7 - Piping NPD/OD:
[8] nom_pipe_diam_A - Character (20)
9 - -
[10] outside_diam_A - Real (15.4)
11 - PMC:
[12] piping_mater_class - Character (16)
***************************************
**************** Label Type = 400 ****************
Label Name = Comp cmdty code
[1]
[1] commodity_code - Character (16)
***************************************
**************** Label Type = 401 ****************
Label Name = Pipe sch/thk 1
[1]
Piping/Tubing Data
[1] schedule_thickness - Character (8)
***************************************
**************** Label Type = 404 ****************
Label Name = 1/2CP COMP GCP
[1]
[1] CP_1_NOM_PIPE_DIAM
492
***************************************
**************** Label Type = 405 ****************
Description Lib.
13. Label
Label Name = 2CP RED COMP GCP X RCP
[1] X [3]
2 X
***************************************
**************** Label Type = 408 ****************
Label Name = 3CP RED COMP GCP x RCP

2 X
***************************************
**************** Label Type = 410 ****************
Label Name = 3CP COMP RCP

***************************************
**************** Label Type = 950 ****************
Label Name = MAL nozzle descr
[1] [3]
Nozzle Data
[1] nominal_piping_dia - Character (9)

2 - 1 space(s)
[3] preparation - Character (8)
***************************************
**************** Label Type = 951 ****************
Label Name = Iso continuation
[1][2]-[4][5]
Piping Segment Data

3 - -
[5] design_area_number - Character (12)
***************************************
493
________________
**************** Label Type = 1150 ****************
Label Name = Line ID
[1][2]-[4]
Piping Segment Data

3 - -
***************************************
**************** Label Type = 1151 ****************
Label Name = Iso no
[1][2]-[4][5]
Piping Segment Data

3 - -
[5] design_area_number - Character (12)
***************************************
**************** Label Type = 2200 ****************
Label Name = Specialty 2cp (1st)
[1]
***************************************
**************** Label Type = 2201 ****************
Label Name = Specialty 3cp (1st)
[1]
***************************************
494
________________ Label Library Merger
13.3 Label Library Merger
Description Lib.
13. Label
The Label Library Merger utility allows PDS users to copy labels from one or two
label description libraries into another library and to modify the destination library as
necessary. You can only add and remove labels with this command. To edit an
existing label or create a new label definition, use the Label Description Library
Manager command.
Features
Copy labels from one library to another.
Delete an existing label from the destination library.
Rename an existing label in the destination library.
Compress the destination library.
Validate the destination library.
13.3.1 Label Library Merger Interface

This section contains descriptions of the Label Library Merger interface, including
information on all dialog boxes and commands. The Label Library Merger
commands are available from the toolbar and from menus.
495
________________
The Label Library Merger dialog box contains three label description library
views. The two views on the left display the contents of the source libraries, and the
view on the right displays the contents of the destination library. Each library view
is divided into two columns, Number and Description, which display the
appropriate data for each label. You can click a heading in any library view to sort
the labels by that heading.
The bottom pane of the Label Library Merger dialog box is the message window,
which displays errors and other informational messages during the library merge
workflow.
496
________________ File Menu
13.3.1.1 File Menu

The commands on the File menu allow you to open libraries, display information in
Description Lib.
13. Label
the Message Window, and exit the Label Library Merger.
13.3.1.1.1 Open Source Label Library 1

This command opens a label description library from which to copy labels. You can
key in or browse to the location of a source library. The system displays the label
number and description in the Library 1 View.
13.3.1.1.2 Open Source Label Library 2

This command opens a second label description library from which to copy labels.
Using a second source library is optional, and not required for the use of this
command. The system displays the label number and description in the Library 2
View.
13.3.1.1.3 Open Destination Library

This command opens a new or existing destination library, where labels from the
source libraries are copied. The system displays the copied label numbers and
descriptions in the Destination Library View.
To create a new destination library, browse to the appropriate folder in the Open
Destination Library dialog box, type a new library name in the File name text box,
and click Open. The system will then create the new label description library in the
specified location.
13.3.1.1.4 Information
This command displays information in the Message Window regarding the source
and destination libraries.
Example
MESSAGE: D:\WIN32APP\INGR\PDSHELL\lib\labels.l Opened as Source Label Library 1
MESSAGE: D:\WIN32APP\INGR\PDSHELL\lib\company_labels.l Opened as Source Label Li
MESSAGE: D:\WIN32APP\INGR\PDSHELL\lib\all_labels.l Opened as Destination Label L
497
________________
13.3.1.1.5 Exit
This command closes the Label Library Merger utility.
498
________________ Edit Menu
13.3.1.2 Edit Menu

The commands on the Edit menu allow you to modify your selections in the various
Description Lib.
13. Label
views on the Label Library Merger dialog box, modify and delete the label
information in the destination library, and check the destination library for errors.
13.3.1.2.1 Select All

This command selects all the labels in the active view.
13.3.1.2.2 Unselect All

This command resets selections so that no labels in the active view are selected.
13.3.1.2.3 Invert Selection

This command switches the selection status of the labels in the active view, so that
labels that are currently selected become unselected, and labels that are currently not
selected become selected.
13.3.1.2.4 Edit Label Number

This command allows users to modify the label number of the selected label in the
Destination Library View.
13.3.1.2.5 Edit Label Description

This command allows users to modify the label description of the selected label in
the Destination Library View.
13.3.1.2.6 Delete
This command removes the selected labels from the destination library.
13.3.1.2.7 Validate
This command checks the labels in the destination library for valid label numbers,
and reports any invalid label numbers in the Message Window.
499
________________
13.3.1.2.8 Compress Destination Library

This command removes the deleted labels from the destination library.
13.3.1.2.9 Copy to Destination

This command copies the selected labels from the source libraries to the destination
library. The system uses the following criteria to determine label numbers:
If there is no label in the destination library with the same label number as the
label being copied, the label is copied with its original label number.
If there is a label in the destination library with the same label number as the
label being copied, the label is copied with a new label number, which is
assigned using the following criteria:
If there is an unassigned label number in the copied labels category in the

destination library, the system assigns the next available label number in
that category.
If there is no unassigned label number in the copied labels category in the

destination library, the system adds 5000 to the label number and copies
the label. For example, label number 23 in the source library is copied to
label 5023 in the destination library.
Label numbers above 5000 generate errors in PDS. The

Validate command reports any such label numbers in the
Message Window.
Refer to Label Description Library, page 465 for more information on

label categories.
13.3.1.2.10 Clear Error Messages

This command refreshes the Message Window.
500
________________ Help Menu
13.3.1.3 Help Menu

The commands in the Help menu display online Help and other information about
Description Lib.
13. Label
the Label Library Merger utility.
13.3.1.3.1 Contents
This command displays the Label Library Merger online Help file.
13.3.1.3.2 About Library Merger

This command displays the About dialog box with information about the Label
Library Merger utility, including the version number and copyright date.
501
________________
13.3.2 Workflow
This section describes the general workflow for the Label Library Merger utility.
1. Click Start > Programs > PD_Shell > PDS Label Library Merger to start
the Label Library Merger utility.
The Label Library Merger interface displays.
2. Click File > Open Source Label Library 1.
3. Browse to the location of the first label description library, select the library,
and click Open.
The system displays the contents of the library in the Library 1 View.
4. Repeat the previous two steps for the second label description library.
The system displays the contents of the library in the Library 2 View.
5. Click File > Open Destination Library. You can either open an existing
library for update or create a new library.
The system displays the contents of the destination library in the Destination
Library View.
502
________________ Workflow
6. Select labels in the existing label description libraries to copy to the destination
library. Use CTRL+click to select multiple labels, or SHIFT+click to select a
range of labels. Use the selection commands on the Edit menu to select all
labels, unselect all labels, or invert your selections.
Description Lib.
13. Label
7. Click Edit > Copy to Destination to copy the selected labels to the destination
library.
The system displays the copied labels in the Destination Library View.
8. Click Edit > Edit Label Number or Edit > Edit Label Description to
modify labels in the destination library as necessary.
9. Click Edit > Validate to check the destination library for errors.
The system displays any warnings in the Message View.
10. Click Edit > Compress Destination Library to compress the destination
library.
The system displays any warnings in the Message View.
11. When you are finished modifying the destination library, click File > Exit to
exit the Label Library Merger utility.
503
________________
504
________________ Piping Assembly Library
14. Piping Assembly Library

The Piping Assembly Language (PAL) enables you to define the parameters necessary to
place a piping assembly (group of components) automatically in the model. This function is
most useful for a commonly placed group of components.
The PAL definition is compiled and stored in Piping Assembly Language object library and
its text stored in the text library.
A Piping Assembly Library which contain the definitions for basic assemblies (macros) is
included in the product delivery.
Assembly Lib.
14. Piping
\win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\assembly.l
The PAL definition must be processed and stored in the Piping Assembly Library.
505
________________
14.1 Piping Assembly Language

The Piping Assembly Language provides a set of functions to define the placement operation.
You can create a PAL definition outside the PDS environment using a text editor.
14.1.1 PAL Keywords

The following list outlines all the keywords that can be used to create a PAL definition.
Keywords followed by a number in (parentheses) such as
NPD_A (3221), NPD_B (3222), NPD_C (3223)
are used to create form gadgets for defining and placing piping assemblies. The number
represents the application command number for the keyword. The key entry field number is
this number minus 3000. (Therefore, the key entry field number for NPD_A is 221.)
Formbuilder Guidelines
You can customize forms for the purpose of inputting data in the creation of a piping
assembly, such as a control station. You can use the gadget numbers for the corresponding
input fields.
You must adhere to the following conventions when customizing form input fields for the
applicable piping assembly. If not documented, any other gadgets on the form should remain
consistent with those delivered by Intergraph.
All input fields should be sequenced and must have the following characteristics. The Edit
Field Options setting in the Form Builder should be Change Mode.
The characteristics form in the Form Builder should have the following settings.
Notify Upon Completion - off (NOT the default)

Notify at Initial Selection - off
The forms delivered by Intergraph can be used as examples for customization. The following
list the form builder data for the standard form gadgets.
506
________________ Piping Assembly Language
Help
key: 456
gadget number: 995
button: automatic
Form Size
key: 403
gadget number: 997
button: automatic
Assembly Lib.
14. Piping
Exit
key: 4001
gadget number: 998
button: manual
Accept
key: 4002
gadget number: 999
button: manual
Message Area A - for messages
gadget number: 251

characters: 40
lines deep: 3
edit mode: review only
font size: 12
Message Area B - for active segment data display
gadget number: 254

characters: 40
lines deep: 3
font size: 12
Material description display
gadget number: 150

characters: 80
lines deep: 3
font size: 12
507
________________
Description
#
This keyword is used to specify a description for the piping assembly from within the
assembly language file. Place a # in the first column of any line followed by a description of
as many as 100 characters.
Examples:
# Control Station
Commands
COMMAND
This keyword is used with other keywords to initiate a defined action.
Examples:
COMMAND = GET_TUTORIAL_DATA
COMMAND = UPDATE_APP
COMMAND = POINT_IN_SPACE
CONNECT
This keyword defines the active point for the next component placed in the PAL definition.
The specified reference point must be defined before using this option.
Example: CONNECT TO REF_PNT_A
PLACE
This keyword defines the type of item to be placed. Refer to the PLACE Command
Component keywords for a list of component/instrument types.
Example: PLACE FITTING , 6Q2C01 ,
BY
This keyword is used with the PLACE keyword to set the placement mode to be used in
placing the specified component. Refer to the Connect Point keywords for a list of viable
placement modes.
Example: PLACE FITTING , 6Q2C01 , BY CP1
STEM
This keyword is used with an orientation keyword to define the direction of the secondary
axis. It can be used at the end of a PLACE statement.
508
Example: PLACE FITTING , 6Q2C01 , BY CP1 , STEM = UP
PLACE Command Components

FITTING, VALVE, FLANGE, BRANCH, PIPE, SPECIALTY, INSTRUMENT,
OPTIONAL, TAP
These keywords are used with the PLACE keyword to define the type of item to be placed.
Example:
PLACE FITTING , 6Q2C01 , BY CP1
Assembly Lib.
14. Piping
PLACE BRANCH , 90_DEG , BY CP1
PLACE PIPE TO REF_PNT_A
PLACE OPTIONAL , 6Q2C01, BY CP2
RDB_INSTRUMENT, RDB_SPECIALTY
These keywords are used to place instruments and specialty items that have been defined in
the PJS using the tag number.
Example: PLACE RDB_INSTRUMENT, INSVLV1, BY CP1
Connect Point
CENTER, CP1, CP2, CP3, CP4, CP5
ACTIVE_PP
FACE_OF_FLANGE_CP1, FACE_OF_FLANGE_CP2,
FACE_OF_FLANGE_CP3
These keywords identify the connect point for an operation. They can be used with the BY
keyword to indicate the means of placement.
Example: PLACE VALVE, 6Q1C38, BY CP1
INLET_ELEVATION
This keyword set the starting elevation or point of connection.
Example:
REF_PNT_A = ACTIVE_PP
COORDINATE_1 = INLET_ELEVATION
509
________________
Orientation
ACTIVE
EAST, NORTH, UP
WEST, SOUTH, DOWN
These keywords identify the orientation direction.
Example: PLACE FITTING, 6Q2C01, BY CP1, STEM = UP
No Material TakeOff
NO_MTO=1
This keyword can be used immediately before a PLACE statement to specify that the
component is not reportable. The system automatically resets MTO processing after
placement.
Assembly End Keywords

ASSEMBLY_END_A, ASSEMBLY_END_B
These keywords define an assembly end point as a specified coordinate value. An assembly
end definition is used to define the endpoints of an assembly. This is required when the
assembly is being placed into a pipe so that the pipe is broken properly and the assembly
inserted (as in the case of a valve assembly: flange - valve - flange).
Example: ASSEMBLY_END_A = REF_PNT_A
Reference Point Keywords

REF_PNT_A, REF_PNT_B, ... REF_PNT_T
ACTIVE_PP, NOZZLE
These keywords set reference points at specified coordinate values. You can define up to 20
points on the assembly for future reference in the PAL definition.
Example: REF_PNT_A = CP_1
Once a reference point is defined, it can be used by a following statement in the PAL
definition to indicate a coordinate location (for example, CONNECT TO REF_PNT_A).
510
Generic End Types

NULL_GEN_TYPE, BOLTED, FEMALE, MALE
These keywords specify the generic termination type for use in conditional testing.
Number of Connect Points

NUMBER_CPS
This keyword contains the number of connect points of the component just placed. It can be
Assembly Lib.
14. Piping
used in branch placement to determine whether to use CP2 or CP3 as a reference point.
Example:
IF (NUMBER_CPS .EQ. 2.0) THEN

REF_PNT_A = CP2
ELSE
REF_PNT_A = CP3
ENDIF
Commodity Item Name

ITEM_NAME
This keyword defines an item name to be used for placement.
Example: ITEM_NAME = xxxxxxx
COMPONENT_TAG (3246)
This keyword defines the tag for the component to be placed. You can prompt for the tag or
use the tutorial interface using the designated field and command numbers.
Example: COMPONENT_TAG = USER_INPUT
UORs per Model Subunit

UORS_PER_SUBUNIT
This keyword defines the number of UORs per Subunit defined in the model. It can be used
to calculate tap location.
511
________________
Local Coordinates and Orientation

APP_X, APP_Y, APP_Z
These keywords define the active placement point which can be used in the connect to
segment and point in space routines. These keywords are initially set to the active placement
point of the assembly at the start of the assembly placement.
COORDINATE_1 (3191) ... COORDINATE_12 (3203)

DIMENSION_1 - DIMENSION_20
These keywords are used to receive user input from the tutorial to define the active placement
point. The Coordinate keywords identify actual points and the Dimension keywords identify
distances and offsets. The Coordinate keywords are only used for elevation values, not
Easting or Northing values.
Example: APP_Z = COORDINATE_1

COORDINATE_2 = INLET_ELEVATION
LOCAL_X, LOCAL_Y, LOCAL_Z
These keywords are defined as the active primary, secondary and normal axis at the time the
assembly is placed. They are automatically set internally at the start of placement and cannot
be modified.
Dimension Definition
DIMENSION_1 (3141), DIMENSION_2 (3142), ... DIMENSION_20 (3160)
The Dimension keywords identify distances and offsets.
Move Specified Distance

MOVE_DISTANCE
This keyword moves a specified distance in the direction of the active primary. It is useful in
placing a variable length pipe by moving out a specified distanced and calling place pipe.
Example:
MOVE_DISTANCE = DIMENSION_1
PLACE PIPE TO REF_PNT_A
512
Load Spec Data

LOAD_SPEC_DATA
This keyword reads the spec record for the commodity item and assigns values for the
following keywords:
TERM_TYPE_1, TERM_TYPE_2, ... TERM_TYPE_5

PR_RATING_1, PR_RATING_2, ... PR_RATING_5
GEN_TYPE_1, GEN_TYPE_2, ... GEN_TYPE_5
Example:
Assembly Lib.
14. Piping
LOAD_SPEC_DATA = 6Q1C80
IF ( GEN_TYPE_1 .EQ. BOLTED ) THEN
OPTION_RATING = PR_RATING_1
OPTION_END_PREP = TERM_TYPE_1
PLACE OPTIONAL , 6Q2C01 , BY CP2
ENDIF
Setting First and Second Size

FIRST_SIZE, SECOND_SIZE, NPD_STEP_UP, NPD_STEP_DOWN
These keywords set the active first size or second size placement parameter a step down/up in
the NPD piping material class table. (The system uses the next entry in the NPD table from
the active size as the first/second size for a step up or next higher size and uses the previous
entry in the NPD table from the active size as the first/second size for a step down or lower
size). This particular statement in PAL is used as the active size (first or second) in the
placement of all the following components, until the active size is redefined. If you do not
include a line size in the PAL definition, the active size at the time of placement of the piping
assembly will be used.
Example: FIRST_SIZE = NPD_STEP_DOWN
Coordinates of Component Just Placed

COMPONENT_CENTER, CP_1_LOCATION, CP_2_LOCATION
COMPONENT_CENTER_X, _Y, _Z
CP_1_LOCATION_X, _Y, _Z
CP_2_LOCATION_X, _Y, _Z
These keywords define coordinate values for the component just placed.
Example: TAP_LOCATION_Y = COMPONENT_CENTER_Y + DELTA_DISTANCE *

UORS_PER_SUBUNIT
513
________________
Outside Diameter
PIPE_OD_CP1, PIPE_OD_CP2
These keywords contain the pipe outside diameter at each connect point for the component
just placed. These values can be used to calculate a tap location.
Example: DELTA_DISTANCE = ( PIPE_OD_CP1 - PIPE_OD_CP2 ) / 4.0
FLANGE_OD_CP1, FLANGE_OD_CP2
These keywords contain the flange outside diameter at each connect point for the component
just placed. These values can be used to calculate a tap location.
Tutorial Display and Acquisition

DISPLAY_TUTORIAL, DISPLAY, DISPLAY_NUMERIC
DISPLAY_TUTORIAL = PALCST
PROMPT_MESSAGE = Keyin coordinates and valve data
DISPLAY = prompt_message
used to display any ascii keyword.
DISPLAY_NUMERIC = npd_a
used to display any numeric keyword.
used to get data from the user at placement via a tutorial.
GET_ASCII, GET_DECIMAL, GET_INTEGER

These keywords get data of a specified type from a user keyin.
Prompt for ASCII Input

USER_INPUT
Updating Active Place Point

Example: COMMAND = UPDATE_APP
The variables APP_X, APP_Y, and APP_Z are assigned the X, Y, and Z values of the
current active placement point. This command is useful for variable distance changes in
assemblies, and you need to know the new coordinates.
514
Point in Space
Example: COMMAND = POINT_IN_SPACE
The values of the keywords APP_X, APP_Y, APP_Z are used to define the active
placement point that is not connected to piping or a piping segment. These keywords need to
be set before POINT_IN_SPACE is called.
Connect to Piping Segment

Example: CONNECT TO APP
Assembly Lib.
14. Piping
The command syntax is the same as for connecting to a reference point except that the
keywords APP_X, APP_Y, APP_Z are used as the coordinates. These points are assumed
to lie on a piping segment whereas a reference point identifies a connect point. The keywords
should be set before this command is called.
Orientation of Primary and Secondary

ORIENTATION, PROMPT, ORIENT_SECONDARY, ORIENT_PRIMARY, INVERT
ORIENT_PRIMARY = LOCAL_X
This statement orients the primary axis to be the same as the primary at the beginning of the
assembly placement.
ORIENT_SECONDARY = LOCAL_Y
This statement orients the secondary to be the same as the secondary at placement.
ORIENT_SECONDARY = INVERT
This statement allows the secondary to be inverted from its current position. You can also use
INVERT for the primary axis.
Placement of BRANCH using Table Lookup

90_DEG, 45_DEG, VARIABLE
Example: PLACE BRANCH, 90_DEG , BY CENTER
This statement performs a table lookup on the 90 degree branch table to determine the branch
component type given the current first and second size. If the branch is on a piping segment
or in free space, then Placement BY CENTER should be used. If you are placing fitting to
fitting, you should specify connect point placement (BY CP1).
515
________________
Placement of OPTION flange

OPTION_RATING, OPTION_END_PREP
Example:
IF ( END_PREP_A .GE. 2.0 .and. END_PREP_A .LE. 199) THEN
OPTION_RATING = RATING_A
OPTION_END_PREP = END_PREP_A
PLACE OPTIONAL, 6Q2C01 , BY CP2
ENDIF
The keywords OPTION_RATING and OPTION_END_PREP values are used to determine

which option to use for the specified flange.
OPTION_TBL_SUFFIX
TBL_SUFFIX_GREEN, TBL_SUFFIX_RED
END_PREP_1, END_PREP_2, ... END_PREP_5
TBL_SUFFIX_A (301), TBL_SUFFIX_B (302), ... TBL_SUFFIX_E (305)
These keywords provide the ability to select the correct optional flange, when the flange is
being placed by its welded end.
Placement of Optional Components

OPTION_CODE
Examples:
OPTION_CODE = PROMPT
OPTION_CODE = 790
This keyword sets the option code for the next component placed. If the PROMPT keyword
is used, the system activates the Option Code Selection tutorial at placement to enable the user
to select the option code. Otherwise the option code is hard-coded.
Placement of Variable length pipe

Example: PLACE PIPE TO REF_PNT_E
Logical Marks
CHECK_MARK
CHECK_MARK_1 (3161), CHECK_MARK_2 (3163), ... CHECK_MARK_20

(3180)
516
The check marks are logical keywords that can be accessed through the tutorial. They can be
used for testing for placement of components, etc. Initially they are all set to true.
Changing Piping Materials Class within an

Assembly
ACTIVE_MATERIALS_CLASS (3205)
MATERIALS_CLASS_A (3206), MATERIALS_CLASS_B (3207),

MATERIALS_CLASS_C (3208)
Assembly Lib.
14. Piping
MATERIALS_CLASS_D (3264), MATERIALS_CLASS_E (3265), ...
MATERIALS_CLASS_J (3270)
Example:
MATERIALS_CLASS_B = USER_INPUT
ACTIVE_MATERIALS_CLASS = MATERIALS_CLASS_B
The values for materials class can be:
- obtained from the tutorial using the predefined fields

- defined by prompt (USER_INPUT)
- hard-coded in the PAL definition.
The values for MATERIALS_CLASS_A, through _J are stored locally until a statement
with ACTIVE_MATERIALS_CLASS is executed. At that time, the Materials Class in the
active data is updated to the assigned value. This enables you to obtain up to three different
classes from the tutorial at the start which can be used as needed in the definition.
Component Attributes
NPD_A (3221), NPD_B (3222), NPD_C (3223)
NPD_D (3284), NPD_E (3285), ... NPD_J (3290)
These keywords store nominal piping diameter values.
END_PREP_A (3231), END_PREP_B (3232)
These keywords store end preparation values.
RATING_A (3236), RATING_B (3237)
These keywords store pressure rating values.
SCHEDULE_A (3241), SCHEDULE_B (3242)
These keywords store schedule/thickness values.
517
________________
Setting Bend Angle

ACTIVE_BEND_ANGLE (3211)
BEND_ANGLE_A (3212), BEND_ANGLE_B (3213), ... BEND_ANGLE_E

(3216)
Example:
BEND_ANGLE_A = PROMPT
ACTIVE_BEND_ANGLE = BEND_ANGLE_B
The values for bend angle can be
- obtained from the tutorial using the predefined fields

- defined by prompt
- hard-coded in the PAL definition
The active bend angle in the model is not set until a statement with ACTIVE_BEND_ANGLE
is executed. At that time, the active bend angle is assigned the appropriate value and the next
component placed uses that value. The active bend angle is set to 0 after placement.
Component Group
COMPONENT_GROUP, ON, OFF
Example: COMPONENT_GROUP = ON
This statement causes the system to search for the next available component group number.
This number is assigned to the component group number attribute of each subsequent
component placed until the statement COMPONENT_GROUP = OFF is executed or the
assembly is completed.
Local Variables
You can use local variables to store values for use in defining a piping assembly. You can use
any alphanumeric string as long as it is not reserved as a keyword.
Test Attribute Values

T12C# - Piping Segment Data
T34C# - Piping Component Data
T50C# - Pipe Data
T67C# - Instrument Component Data
You can use these keywords to test specific values of the active segment data or active
component data, where # refers to the column (attribute) number for the applicable database
table. The active component data is represented by the last component placed or the
component to which the user is connected.
518
Pre-Define Attribute Values

T34C# - Piping Component Data
T50C# - Pipe Data
T67C# - Instrument Component Data
You can use these keywords to pre-define specific values for the component to be placed,
where # refers to the column (attribute) number for the applicable database table. This
functionality is similar to the Pre-Define Component Data option of the Place Component
command.
If you pre-define a value for fabrication category, the component will be
Assembly Lib.
14. Piping
designated as having the fabrication category defined by user versus by system
such that reconstructing the component will not override the user value with
the value in the Reference Database.
Having the ability to pre-define the fabrication category within a control station piping
assembly will enable you to automatically override the RDB specification of the fabrication
category of a single field component, such as a small diameter control valve, in what would
otherwise be a shop spool.
519
________________
14.1.2 Placing Taps in Assemblies

The syntax for placing taps in assemblies is outlined below:
PLACE TAP , 2.0 , 1

where 2.0 is the tap NPD and 1 is the option code.
PLACE TAP BY CPn

CPn designates the connect point from which to obtain the tap data.
The following PAL definitions should be used to specify the tap location before making the
PLACE TAP request.
TAP_LOCATION = COMPONENT_CENTER
CP_1_LOCATION
CP_2_LOCATION
COMPUTE_FOR_ELBOLET_USING_CP1
COMPUTE_FOR_ELBOLET_USING_CP2
OR
TAP_LOCATION_X = COMPONENT_CENTER_X +- delta_distance

CP_1_LOCATION_X +- delta_distance
CP_2_LOCATION_X +- delta_distance
TAP_LOCATION_Y = COMPONENT_CENTER_Y +- delta_distance
CP_1_LOCATION_Y +- delta_distance
CP_2_LOCATION_Y +- delta_distance
TAP_LOCATION_Z = COMPONENT_CENTER_Z +- delta_distance
CP_1_LOCATION_Z +- delta_distance
CP_2_LOCATION_Z +- delta_distance
The keywords PIPE_OD_CP1, PIPE_OD_CP2, FLANGE_OD_CP1, and

FLANGE_OD_CP2 can be used to calculate the delta distance. These values are based on the
component just placed in the assembly.
For TAP_LOCATION_X, _Y, _Z, the X, Y, and Z represent a local

coordinate system that is analogous to the orientation at Connect point 1 of the
component flipped to point towards the inside of the component.
The tap orientation should also be set before making the PLACE TAP request using the PAL
orientation commands. The active orientation at time of placement (tap) is used.
520
________________ Sample Piping Assembly Files
14.1.3 Sample Piping Assembly Files

This section presents sample PAL files from the delivered Piping Assembly Library. It lists
the files and shows the resulting graphics created by the file. Refer to the Piping Design
Graphics Reference Guide for more information on placing piping assemblies with the Place
Component command.
DRAIN
# Drain assembly
PAL DRAIN
Assembly Lib.
14. Piping
!
! This assembly will place a drain. The user needs to place a 1"
! sockolet at the point the drain is desired.
!
PLACE FITTING, 6Q3C88 , BY CP1
!
! The data from the component spec is read into the keywords.
! TERM_TYPE_1 TO 5 gets the numeric value for end preparation (eg. 21)
! PR_RATING_1 TO 5 gets the pressure rating
! GEN_TYPE_1 TO 5 gets the textual value for end preparation (eg. MALE)
!
LOAD_SPEC_DATA = 6Q1C76
!
! This IF statement determines if an optional flange is needed before
! the gate valve is placed.
!
ENDIF
!
! Places a gate valve. Notice in the spec that this type of gate valve
! is different than a 6Q2C01.
!
PLACE VALVE, 6Q1C76 , BY CP1
ENDIF
!
! This command allows the user to pick which component to place. If the
! option command is not used the s/w will choose option 1. In this instance,
! without the OPTION_CODE command will cause an error because there are no
! option 1 attributes available for 6Q2C16. Another possiblilty would be to
! use OPTION_CODE = PROMPT. The user will be prompted for which component is
! desired.
!
OPTION_CODE = 163
PLACE FITTING, 6Q2C16 , BY CP1
END
521
________________
Graphics Placed by Drain Assembly
Pump Discharge Assembly

# Pump Discharge
PAL PDISC1
!
! Pump Discharge
!
!
DISPLAY_TUTORIAL = PAS010
NPD_A = FIRST_SIZE
DISPLAY_NUMERIC = NPD_A
NPD_B = SECOND_SIZE
DISPLAY_NUMERIC = NPD_B
PROMPT_MESSAGE = Enter Reducer First Size
DISPLAY = PROMPT_MESSAGE
PLACE FLANGE , 6Q2C01 , BY CP1
FIRST_SIZE = NPD_A
DELTA_DISTANCE = ( PIPE_OD_CP1 * 0.5 - PIPE_OD_CP2 * 0.5) / 2.0
TAP_LOCATION_Y = COMPONENT_CENTER_Y - DELTA_DISTANCE * UORS_PER_SUBUNIT

ORIENT_PRIMARY = LOCAL_Y
ORIENT_SECONDARY = LOCAL_X
PLACE TAP BY CP1
REF_PNT_A = CP1
REF_PNT_B = CP3
CONNECT TO REF_PNT_B
NPD_C = SECOND_SIZE
DISPLAY_NUMERIC = NPD_C
PROMPT_MESSAGE = Enter Branch Size
DISPLAY = PROMPT_MESSAGE
SECOND_SIZE = NPD_C
PLACE BRANCH , 90_DEG , BY CP1
OPTION_CODE = PROMPT
522
________________ Sample Piping Assembly Files
ORIENTATION = PROMPT
PLACE VALVE , 6Q1C80 , BY CP1
CONNECT TO REF_PNT_A
ORIENTATION = PROMPT

END
Assembly Lib.
14. Piping
Graphics Placed by Pump Discharge Assembly
523
________________
524
________________ Piping Assembly Library Manager
14.2 Piping Assembly Library Manager

The Piping Assembly Library Manager enables you to create a new (empty) piping
assembly library or create, revise, and delete piping assembly definitions in an existing
library. The Piping Assembly Language (PAL) enables you to define the parameters
necessary to place a piping assembly (group of components) automatically in the model. This
function is most useful for a commonly placed group of components.
Refer to Piping Assembly Library, page 505, for more information on this library and refer to
Piping Assembly Language, page 506, for more information on the PAL files.
Assembly Lib.
14. Piping
Define the location of the approved and unapproved (if applicable) Assembly Library
files in the Reference Database Management Data.
14.2.1 Options
Create Library used to create a new Piping Assembly Library. See page 527.
Compress used to compress the Piping Assembly library. See page 527.
Unapproved ==> Approved used to copy the unapproved Piping Assembly

library to the approved library. See page 527.
525
________________
Create/Interactive Data used to compile Piping Assembly Language source files

and insert them in the Piping Assembly Library. See page 528.
Create/Batch Data used to compile Piping Assembly Language Source files via
batch processing. See page 529.
Revise Data used to select an PAL module from the library, edit the file, and put
the revised file back into the library. See page 530.
Delete Data used to remove an PAL module from the library. See page 532.
Report Data used to create a report of the library contents. See page 533.
List Data used to display the Eden modules in the library. See page 534.
Extract Data used to extract an Eden module from the library for editing or
printing. See page 535.
Full List / Sub-string You can set the toggle at the bottom of the form to determine
the assembly data tables to be listed.
Full List lists all the assembly definitions in the Assembly Library.
Sub-string limits the list to those files which contain a specified substring.
526

This option is used to create a new Piping Assembly Library. It automatically creates the
object library (.l) and the text library (.l.t) for the library that is being created.
The system displays the approved and unapproved Piping Assembly Library names as defined
in the RDB Management Data.
Assembly Lib.
14. Piping
14.2.3 Compress
This option is used to compress the Piping Assembly library. Any tables which have been

This option copies the unapproved Piping Assembly library to the approved library.
527
________________
14.2.5 Create/Interactive Piping Assembly Data

This option enables you to compile PAL source code into object code and insert the specified
files into the Piping Assembly library. You can process a single file or specify a list of files to
be created. Refer to the description of the Piping Assembly Library for more information on
Piping Assembly Language modules.

To add more than one PAL file to the library, create a list file which identifies the
names of the source files to be added. The list file should contain one entry (source file
name) per line.
Set Assembly Path and Assembly Node in the RDB Management Data to the location
of the assembly source files.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Create/Interactive option.
Key in the name of the PAL file or list file to be compiled and added to the active
library.
4. The system displays the default node name and path for the location of the PAL files at
the bottom of the form.
You can use the default options or override the values for this operation.
528
________________ Create/Batch Assembly Data
14.2.6 Create/Batch Assembly Data

This option enables you to compile PAL source code into object code and insert the specified
files into the Piping Assembly library. The specified files are submitted to the batch queue
PDreference for processing.

To add more than one PAL file to the library, create a list file which identifies the
names of the source files to be added. The list file should contain one entry (source file
name) per line.
Assembly Lib.
14. Piping
Set Assembly Path and Assembly Node in the RDB Management Data to the location
of the assembly source files.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Create/Batch option.
Key in the name of the PAL file or list file to be compiled and added to the active
library and select Accept.
4. The system displays the default node name and path for the location of the PAL files at
the bottom of the form.
You can use the default values or override the values for this operation.
Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit.
For Delayed Submit set the time and day to process the files.
6. Accept the file to begin processing.
529
________________
14.2.7 Revise Piping Assembly Data

This option enables you to select a PAL module from the library, edit the file, and then
compile the file and put it back in the library.

Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the PAL files to be listed.
Operating Sequence
The system displays the PAL modules in the Piping Assembly Library.
2. Select Assembly for Revision
Select the PAL modules to be revised and select Accept.
530
________________ Revise Piping Assembly Data
Assembly Lib.
14. Piping
If an error occurs in revising a piping assembly, the system invoke the editor
automatically to give you an opportunity to correct the problem.
4. You can select other files to edit or select exit to return to the data management form.
531
________________
14.2.8 Delete Piping Assembly Data

This option enables you to delete a PAL module or set of PAL modules from the Piping
Assembly Library.

Operating Sequence
2. Select Module for Deletion
Select the modules to be deleted from the list of modules. You can use the scroll bar to
Accept the modules and begin processing.
The system deletes the modules from the Piping Assembly Library.
532
________________ Report Assembly Data
14.2.9 Report Assembly Data

This option enables you to create a list file of all the PAL modules in the Piping Assembly
Library.
Operating Sequence
Assembly Lib.
14. Piping
2. Revise Report Parameters
Key in the file information for the location of the report file to be created.
3. Select Print or Print/Save.
If you select the Print/Save option, the system will create a file named assemblies in
the default source file location.
4. Accept to Form Report
533
________________
14.2.10 List Assembly Data

This option displays all the PAL modules for the Piping Assembly Library.

Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the PAL modules to be listed.
Operating Sequence
The system displays the PAL modules in the Piping Assembly Library.
534
________________ Extract Assembly Data
14.2.11 Extract Assembly Data

This option enables you to extract an PAL module out of the Piping Assembly Library for
editing or printing.

Define the node name and path for the location of the PAL files in the Default Project
Control Data or using the fields at the bottom of the Assembly Data Management form.
Assembly Lib.
14. Piping
Operating Sequence
2. Select Assembly for Extraction
Select the modules from the list of files and select Accept. You can use the scroll bar to
The system pulls the files out of the library and places them in the default directory
specified in the Project Control Data. The system also writes the names of the
extracted files to a file named PD_pal_list.
535
________________
536
________________ Reference Database Revision Manager
15. Reference Database Revision

Manager
This command creates a set of reports used to coordinate revisions in the Reference Database
and the implied changes which are required in the model. Each of the four reports listed is
created in the directory for the applicable model.
Creation of any of these reports also generates a summary report. The summary report is
created and named according to user-specified information provided on the Reference
Database Revision Manager form. Selecting the option to print the summary report will
also force the printing of the individual report that initiated the creation of the summary
report.
Manager
15. Revision
Options
Reference Data Conflict Report
Creates a report of piping or instrument components (including piping and tubing)
in any model within the project that have any specification data that is in conflict with
the appropriate Piping Commodity Data, Piping Specialty Data, or Instrument Data of
the Material Reference Database. The RDB Conflict Report file has an extension of
.rpt and is created in the model directory as <model_number>.rpt .
Refer to the section entitled Hierarchy of Reported Discrepancies

found at the beginning of this chapeter for information on the order of
significance of reported problems.
537
________________
You should run this report when segment data or RDB data (such as in the Piping Job
Specification Database, the Piping Job Spec Tables, and the Physical Dimension
Tables) have been changed and you wish to determine which components need to be
reconstructed or updated from the RDB.
Table Change Report Creates a report of all piping or instrument components

(including pipes) in any model within the project that are affected by a change to a
specific table for a specific input or set of inputs. Both geometric changes as a result of
revisions to dimension tables and changes in weight data as a result of revisions to
weight tables are reported. The Table Change Report file has an extension of .tcr and is
created in the model directory as <model_number>.tcr .
If your project was created with PDS version 6.0, use the Reference Data
Conflict Report instead.
Reference Data Impact Report Creates a report, based on user-defined search

criteria, of the effects of modifying individual component attributes in the current
approved RDB. The RDB Impact Report file has an extension of .imp and is created in
the model directory as <model_number>.imp .
Proposed RDB Changes Report Creates a single report assessing the effect of
multiple changes in the unapproved Material Reference Database. The Proposed RDB
Changes Report file has an extension of .pcs and is created in the model directory as
<model_number>.pcs . This report does not update the model.
Print/Delete This option deletes the summary report after it is printed. Selecting
this option activates the queue pick list which allows you to select the appropriate print
queue.
Print/Save This option does not delete the summary report after it is printed.
Selecting this option activates the queue pick list which allows you to select the
appropriate print queue.
Save Saves the report in the model directory, and saves the summary report in the
user-specified directory. This option does not print the summary report.
Field Descriptions
Report Node Specifies the node on which the summary report will be created.
Report Path Specifies the directory in which the summary report will be created.
Report Name Specifies the name that will be used for the summary report file.
538
________________ Reference Database Revision Manager
Summary of Report Parameters and

Discrepancy Hierarchy
The following chart summarizes some of the parameters used in the processing and creation
of the reports available form this command:
Discrepancies are reported according to the significance of the problem they represent. In all
cases, the most severe problem will be the problem that is reported. The hierarchy of the
problems reported is as follows:
Manager
15. Revision
1. Item not found in the spec.
2. Dimension tables have changed.
3. Discrepancy between component connect point NPD and segment NPD.
4. Discrepancy between model and RDB for any of the following attributes:
end preparation - green commodity code

pressure rating - green model code
schedule/thickness - green modifier
table suffix - green geometric industry standard
end preparation - red weight code
pressure rating - red fabrication category
schedule/thickness - red materials grade
table suffix - red
5. Weight tables have changed.
539
________________
15.1 Reference Data Conflict Report

This option creates a report of piping or instrument components (including piping and tubing)
in any model within the project that have any specification data that is in conflict with the
appropriate Piping Commodity Data, Piping Specialty Data, or Instrument Data of the
Material Reference Database. The output file for this report has an extension of .rpt.
This command is used to coordinate between revisions in the Reference Database and the
implied changes which are required in the model. It also reports piping and instrument
components that require reconstruction or recalculations as a result of piping segment data
changes in the model.
The Reconstruct Component command is required for any component which has
geometric type specification data revised.
The Update from Reference Database command is required for any component which
has non-geometric specification data (such as commodity code or weight table)
revision.
The Re-Compute Thickness command is required for any component which has been
reported as requiring calculations as a result of changes in the material tables or
thickness tables.
You can use the Review Reference Database Revision Management Report command to
review any component in the model requiring reconstruction or an update of the specification
data as a result of changes to the Material Reference Database. This command allows you to
review any component in the model requiring reconstruction or replacement as a result of
RDB changes or deletions from the Material Reference Database. In support of this review
capability, an indexed file, the RDB Revision Management Component List, is created in the
same directory as the model with the name <model_number>.rdb. Refer to the Piping Design
Graphics Reference Guide for more information on this command.
Any component, previously reported as having required reconstructing or updating, which has
been deleted from the model, will not be included in any future reports or in the RDB
Revision Management Component List. Likewise, the RDB Revision Management
Component List will be automatically compressed as part of the report creation process.
The system will not report a component as requiring reconstruction or updating from the RDB
solely on the basis of the requirement to reconstruct flag being set for the piping segment
associated with that component. The Reference Data Conflict Report will clear the
requirement to reconstruct (or recalculate) flag if it determines there are no discrepancies for
the component associated with that piping segment.
The system will not report a component as requiring reconstruction or updating from the RDB
as the result of changing any attributes of an Implied Item.
540
________________ Reference Data Conflict Report

You should not access any piping model for an interactive design session while a Reference
Database Revision Management report is being created.
Processing
Piping Commodities
The system extracts the following data from the model for the purpose of reading piping
commodity specification data from the Material Reference Database. This is the same data
that is used for the placement or reconstruction of a piping commodity.
piping materials class second size

commodity name option code
first size maximum temperature
The first size and second size are determined from the piping segment data and not from the
component itself.
Manager
15. Revision
If the piping commodity in the model is a branch that was initially placed using a branch table
from the Reference Database, the system reads the appropriate branch table from the Piping
Materials Class data to determine if there has been a change in the commodity name for the
branch. If so, this component is flagged as requiring reconstruction.
The system compares the following data for consistency between the model and the Reference
Database for piping commodities. That data which may impact the geometry and/or the
symbology in the model is designated by an asterisk.
* end preparation - green * commodity code

* pressure rating - green * model code
* schedule/thickness - green * modifier
* table suffix - green * geometric industry standard
* end preparation - red weight code
* pressure rating - red fabrication category
* schedule/thickness - red materials grade
* table suffix - red
Note that user overrides of fabrication category and schedule/thickness will not be included in
the report.
541
________________
The system compares the gasket thickness for each bolted end of a piping commodity with the
gasket separation in the corresponding Piping Materials Class data. If a value is defined in the
Reference Database, the gasket thickness at the bolted end is compared with that value. If a
Gasket Separation Table name is defined, that table is used to determine a gasket separation
value for comparison with the gasket thickness at the bolted end.
When a component is placed next to an integral gasket, the gasket thickness is

set to zero in the model. As a result, the Reference Data Conflict Report may
report a gasket thickness error for such components. The report compares the
component gasket thickness in the model (0) with the component gasket
thickness defined in the reference data, which may be different from 0, without
considering the mating component data. Such errors should be ignored.
The system compares the NPD at each connect point of the component with the NPD of the
segment.
The system compares the schedule thickness data for a component in the model to the
corresponding data in the Material Reference Database. The comparison will consider the
following issues at a minimum:
the application of the schedule/override in the model.
changes to the value for the schedule thickness in the Piping Commodity Data within
the Material Reference Database.
changes to the joint efficiency value in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material
Reference Database.
changes to the value for the thickness equation in the Piping Materials Class Data
within the Material Reference Database.
changes to the Thickness Data Table or the Materials Data Table.
Refer to the section entitled Summary of Report Parameters and Discrepancy

Hierarchy found at the beginning of this chapeter for information on the order
of significance of reported problems.
The RDB Conflict Report does not identify discrepancies between taps placed
in the model and the RDB Tap Properties Data tables used to place the taps.
Piping Specialties and Instruments

The system extracts the component number from the model for the purpose of reading piping
specialty and instrument specification data from the Material Reference Database. The
component number is also used for the placement or reconstruction of a piping specialty or an
instrument. For example, instrument_comp_no is used for instruments, and piping_comp_no
is used for piping specialties.
542
Database for piping specialties and instruments. That data which may impact the geometry
and/or the symbology in the model is designated by an asterisk.
* end preparation - green * physical data id

The system compares the gasket thickness for each bolted end of a piping specialty or
instrument with the gasket separation in the corresponding Piping Materials Class data. If a
value is defined in the Reference Database, the gasket thickness at the bolted end is compared
with that value. If a Gasket Separation Table name is defined, that table is used to determine
a gasket separation value for comparison with the gasket thickness at the bolted end.
The system compares the green specification data in the Reference Database with all connect
points for that component in the model which are designated as having green connect point
properties.
Manager
15. Revision
The system compares the red specification data in the Reference Database with all connect
points, if any, which are designated as having red connect point properties.
Reference Database.
The RDB Conflict Report does not identify discrepancies between taps placed
in the model and the RDB Tap Properties Data tables used to place the taps.
543
________________
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Reference Data Conflict Report option.
The system activates the Reference Data Conflict form.
2. Select the extent of the project to be processed.
Project process all piping models for the entire project.
Piping Design Area process the selected piping design areas.
Models process the selected models within a selected design area.
3. You can key in changes to the Report Node, Report Path, and Report Name for the
summary report output or use the default location and name.
The default location for the summary report is determined by the Report Management
Data of the Report Manager.
4. Select the desired output method for the summary report: Print/Delete, Print/Save, or
Save. If you will be printing the summary report, select a queue from the pick list.
5. Accept to Submit Job, Restart or Exit
Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or select Delayed Submit and fill in the day and
time to process the request.
6. Select Accept to submit the request for processing.
544
The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreport. It updates the batch log
file periodically to include a list of piping models which have been processed. The
Reference Data Conflict report file has an extension of .rpt and is created in the model
directory as <model_number>.rpt . If the summary report is printed as a result of
creating this report, this report will also be printed.
Manager
15. Revision
545
________________
15.2 Table Change Report

This option creates a report of all piping or instrument components (including pipes) in any
model within the project that are affected by a change to a specific table for a specific input or
set of inputs. Both geometric changes as a result of revisions to dimension tables and changes
in weight data as a result of revisions to weight tables are reported. The output file for this
report has an extension of .tcr.
This report should be used only in the following situation:
The RBD was revised and you did not reconstruct the affected components. Then you
upgraded the project to PDS version 6.0, at which time all components were updated
to have the new last_placed_date attribute set to the date the upgrade occurred.
You will need to know the date the RDB was modified in order to find which
components require reconstruction as a result of the RDB change. This report may
return false discrepancies because it will include those items that were placed after the
RDB was changed.
In short, we recommend using this report only when the RDB is changed prior to
upgrading to PDS version 6.0, and affected components have not been reconstructed
to reflect the RDB change.
The Reconstruct Component command is required for any component which has a
dimension table revised and the Update from Reference Database command is required for
any component which has a weight table revised.
Processing
The system performs a virtual component placement for each component in a piping model
(in a manner similar to that used by the Table Checker) to determine if that component has
had any of its geometric or weight data derived from the specified tables. The system
searches all piping and instrument components in all piping models within the project for the
use of such tables and creates a report.
In searching the model for components that have dimensional and weight data derived from
the list of revised tables, the first size and second size are determined from the components
data - not the piping segment data. This is due to the fact that reconstruction of the
component will be required, if the nominal piping diameter of any segment associated with
the component differs from the corresponding connect point size.
The contents of this report include the following data, which is sorted by the piping model
number and the line id within each piping model.
piping model number

line id
component number (if applicable)
commodity name (if applicable)
model code
dimension or weight tables
546
________________ Table Change Report
The title page for the report will include the sub-title, Table Change Report.
Piping specialties and instruments are excluded from this report when the specification data
and the geometry data have been defined by the user (not defined in the Reference Database).
You can use the Review Reference Database Revision Management Report command to
review any component in the model requiring reconstruction or updating as a result of the
components geometric or weight data being changed by a table revision. In support of this
review capability, the system creates an indexed file, the RDB Revision Management
Component List, in the same directory as the model with the name <model_number>.rdb.
Refer to the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide for more information on the Review
Reference Data Revision Report command.
Any component, previously reported as needing reconstructing or updating, which has been
deleted from the model, will not be included in any future reports or in the RDB Revision
Management Component List. Likewise, the RDB Revision Management Component List
will be automatically compressed as part of the report creation process.
Piping and instrument components in any model which do not have a corresponding record in
the applicable table of the Piping Design Database are ignored and excluded from the report.
These components, if any, are reported through the Database Verification command of the
Project Administrator.
Manager
15. Revision
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Table Change Report option.
The system displays a list of Physical Data Libraries.
547
________________
2. Select Table Library
Select the Physical Data Library to process, such as U.S. Practice, DIN, or Company
Practice and select Accept.
3. Enter Date for Search ( dd-mmm-yy )
Key in a date (such as 10-Aug-95) in the Revision Date field to list all the tables that
have been revised since the specified date.
4. Accept, Re-enter Date or Choose Extent
Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-String. For Sub-String, key in a string to limit the
tables to be listed.
THEN
Select Accept to begin processing.
The system displays a list of all dimension and weight tables (or those which match a
specified substring).
548
________________ Table Change Report
5. Select Tables or Exit
Select the dimension tables to be considered in the creation of the revision management
report.
OR
You can select Process All to process all the listed tables (those which meet the
specified revision date and substring).
THEN
Select Accept to process the selected tables.
For each of the selected tables, the system displays the table data in the Table Data
Display form.
Manager
15. Revision
6. Select Table Entry
For each table, you can specify which entries (up to a total of 200 entries) in the table
have been revised.
Although the performance of the Reference Data Manager in creating the report will not
be impacted by the number of dimension table entries that are to be considered for
revision management, the list of components in the model will be impacted. For
example, if you inadvertently identify entries which had not actually changed, you may
create significant, unnecessary work.
549
________________
Project process all piping models in the entire project.
8. The summary report path and report node are determined by the settings defined with
the Report Manager.
You can change the location or name for the summary report output or use the defaults.
Save.
11. Select Accept to begin processing the request.
table change report file has an extension of .tcr and is created in the model directory as
<model_number>.tcr . If the summary report is printed as a result of creating this
report, this report will also be printed.
550
________________ Reference Data Impact Report
15.3 Reference Data Impact Report

Selecting the Reference Data Impact Report command activates the Search Criteria form.
Manager
15. Revision
This report is based on user-defined search criteria of attributes such as piping materials class,
commodity code, commodity name, option code, maximum temperature, nominal diameter,
end preparation, schedule thickness, table suffix, etc. The purpose of this report is to find
which components (constrained by your search criteria) will be impacted by a change in the
attributes as they exist in the current approved RDB. The RDB Impact Report search criteria
are valid for Piping Material Class Data (pdtable_201) and Piping Component Specification
Data (pdtable_202).
The RDB Impact Report file has an extension of .imp and is created in the model directory as
<model_number>.imp . This report does not include a graphical review capability.
15.3.1 Examples
Example 1
As an example, assume that you want to know the impact of changing the vendor for a
specific type of valve. You could define the search criteria to find all instances of valves with
that specific geometric industry standard that would need to be reconstructed if the vendor
were changed.
551
________________
Example 2
As a second example, assume that you are working with a project that uses spec A and spec B.
Both of these specs contain the value X, for the vendor of gate valves. A model has been
created that uses both spec A and B, and valves have been placed from both of these specs.
Also, assume that spec B has been modified since the valves have been placed so that the
vendor in spec B now has a value of Y (instead of X), and the model has not been updated to
reflect this spec change.
If the Reference Data Impact Report was run now to determine the impact of changing the
vendor X, the system would scan the RDB for all occurrences of vendor X (which, at this
time, would be only those placed from spec A), check the portions of the design you specified
for occurrences of vendor X, then report the matching occurrences back to you.
The resulting report would not list those valves from vendor X that were placed from spec B,
because the occurrences of those valves in the model did not match the occurrences in the
RDB (due to the model not being updated after the spec change).
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Reference Data Impact Report command from the Reference Data
Revision Manager form.
The system activates the Search Criteria form, which prompts you to select the
attribute to be restricted.
2. Select Attribute
Select the attribute to be restricted.
After selecting attribute from the attribute display list, the system displays the selected
attribute in a separate field and displays a list of operators.
3. Select Operator
Select an operator to define the search criteria.
The system displays the selected operator and prompts you to key in an attribute value.
4. Enter Attribute Value
Key in the attribute value. For a sub-string search, key in a string to appear anywhere
within the attribute value (do not use wild cards).
552
________________ Reference Data Impact Report
If the attribute is code-listed, the system displays a list of values from the Standard Note
Library.
5. Select the value and select Accept.
The system validates the input and displays the defined search criteria in the Search
Criteria display field.
6. Accept or Select And/Or Operator
Select AND to specify an additional condition or select OR to specify an alternative

condition.
OR
Accept the defined search criteria and activate the Reference Database Revision
Manager form.
Manager
15. Revision
7. Revise the search criteria, if necessary, using the Revise Search Criteria option.
OR
Select the extent of the project to be processed.
Project Process all piping models for the entire project.
553
________________
Piping Design Area Process the selected piping design areas.
Models Process the selected models within a selected design area.
reference data impact report file has an extension of .imp and is created in the model
directory as <model_number>.imp . If the summary report is printed as a result of
554
________________ Proposed RDB Changes Report
15.4 Proposed RDB Changes Report

This command creates a report assessing the impact of multiple changes in the unapproved
RDB. Selecting this command from the Reference Data Revision Manager form activates
the Proposed RDB Changes Report form.
You must make changes to the unapproved Material Reference Database in order to
assess the effect of these changes. You are responsible for restoring the unapproved
Material Reference Database to its original state if you decide not to pursue these
changes.

Manager
15. Revision
Processing
Piping Commodities
The system extracts the following data from the model for the purpose of reading piping
commodity specification data from the Material Reference Database. This is the same data
that is used for the placement or reconstruction of a piping commodity.
piping materials class second size

commodity name option code
first size maximum temperature
555
________________
The first size and second size are determined from the piping segment data and not from the
component itself.
If the piping commodity in the model is a branch that was initially placed using a branch table
from the Reference Database, the system reads the appropriate branch table from the Piping
Materials Class data to determine if there has been a change in the commodity name for the
branch. If so, this component is flagged as requiring reconstruction.
Database for piping commodities. That data which may impact the geometry and/or the
symbology in the model is designated by an asterisk.
* end preparation - green * commodity code

Note that user overrides of fabrication category and schedule/thickness will not be included in
the report.
The system compares the gasket thickness for each bolted end of a piping commodity with the
gasket separation in the corresponding Piping Materials Class data. If a value is defined in the
Reference Database, the gasket thickness at the bolted end is compared with that value. If a
Gasket Separation Table name is defined, that table is used to determine a gasket separation
value for comparison with the gasket thickness at the bolted end.
The system compares the specification data for any connect point of a piping commodity
which has been designated as a tap with the appropriate data (either the specification data
from the Tap Properties Data in the Reference Database or from another connect point.
The system compares the NPD at each connect point of the component with the NPD of the
segment.
Reference Database.
556

Piping Specialties and Instruments

The system extracts the component number from the model for the purpose of reading piping
specialty and instrument specification data from the Material Reference Database. The
component number is also used for the placement or reconstruction of a piping specialty or an
instrument. For example, instrument_comp_no is used for instruments, and piping_comp_no
is used for piping specialties.
Database for piping specialties and instruments. That data which may impact the geometry
and/or the symbology in the model is designated by an asterisk.
* end preparation - green * physical data id

Manager
15. Revision
The system compares the gasket thickness for each bolted end of a piping specialty or
instrument with the gasket separation in the corresponding Piping Materials Class data. If a
value is defined in the Reference Database, the gasket thickness at the bolted end is compared
with that value. If a Gasket Separation Table name is defined, that table is used to determine
a gasket separation value for comparison with the gasket thickness at the bolted end.
The system compares the specification data for any connect point of a piping specialty or
instrument which has been designated as a tap with the appropriate data, i.e. either the
specification data from the Tap Properties Data in the Reference Database or from another
connect point. Piping specialties and instruments are excluded from this report when the
specification data and the geometry data is defined by the user (not defined in the Reference
Database).
The system compares the green specification data in the Reference Database with all connect
points for that component in the model which are designated as having green connect point
properties.
The system compares the red specification data in the Reference Database with all connect
points, if any, which are designated as having red connect point properties.
557
________________
Reference Database.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Proposed RDB Changes Report option.
The system activates the Proposed RDB Changes form.
Project process all piping models for the entire project.
558
proposed RDB changes report file has an extension of .pcs and is created in the model
directory as <model_number>.pcs . If the summary report is printed as a result of
Manager
15. Revision
559
________________
560
________________ Verify RDB Library
16. Verify RDB Library

For releases prior to the 4.2 PDS release, a problem existed in the Reference Data Manager,
such that the binary tree structure in a reference data library (such as the Graphic Commodity
Library) could be corrupted without the user immediately detecting any problems with that
library. Although the software problem was corrected in the 4.2 PDS release, the data
problem that resulted may have persisted beyond that release, particularly if the library has not
been compressed.
As a final step within the project upgrade process, the system verifies the integrity of the
binary tree structure within each of the reference data libraries. If an error is detected, a
specific warning message will be reported, both interactively and in the upgrade log. In this
event, you should contact Intergraph immediately for assistance in repairing the library.
The Verify RDB Library utility has been provided to allow the capability to verify the
integrity of the binary tree structure on demand.
The Verify RDB Library icon is located in the PD_Shell program group on systems upon
which the PD_Data software has been loaded locally; double-click on this icon to activate the
command.
Steps
1. Execute the command by double-clicking on the Verify RDB Library icon in the
PD_Shell program group.
Library
16. Verify RDB
The system activates the Reference Database Library Verification Utility form, and
prompts you to select the appropriate project number from the list.
561
________________
2. Select the desired project number, then select the Verify Reference Database Library
command.
The system begins the verification process and displays the Verifying RDB Library
Files message. When processing is complete, the system returns a message similar to
the one shown below:
562
________________ Verify RDB Library
A typical output file has been excerpted below. No errors were found in this example.
Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pjstb.l
header number keys = 234
tree number keys = 234
Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pjstb.l.t
Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pjstb.l.r
Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618shbom.l
Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618lgbom.l
Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618spbom.l
Empty file, no keys.
Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618note.l
Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618note.l.t
Counting implied keys for code31
Library
16. Verify RDB
.
.
.
Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618label.l
Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618assem.l
Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618assem.l.t
Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618gcom.l
563
________________
Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618gcom.l.t
Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pcdim.l
Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pcdim.l.t
Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pcdim.l.r
Total files with errors : 0
564
________________
Appendix A: Reference Data Manager Error Messages
Appendix A Reference Data

Manager Error
Messages
A. Error
Messages
The PDS 3D products share common message files contained in the
win32app\ingr\pdshell\msg directory.
pdsmc.msg command field messages
pdsme.msg error and warning messages
pdsmp.msg prompts and messages
pdsms.msg status messages.
565
________________
566
________________ Appendix B: Codelists
Appendix B Codelists
This section details the codelists used in PDS.
The data contained within this appendix is for informational purposes

only and may not exactly match the codelists delivered with the
product.
Subject Description Page

CL31 Object Types for Orthographic Drawings 572
CL35 Approval Status 573
B. Codelists
CL36 Structural Approval Status 573
CL37 HVAC Approval Status 573
CL50 Hold Status 574
CL69 Equipment Divisions/Form Code 574
CL125 Fluid Code/Connector Type 574

CL130 Construction Status 578
CL145 Materials Grade 578
CL148 Piping Materials Class Description 603
CL160 Responsibility 611
CL180 Fabrication Category 611
CL190 Coating Requirements 611
CL200 Heat Tracing Requirements 612

CL210 Heat Tracing Media 612
CL220 Insulation Purpose 613
CL230 Cleaning Requirements 613
CL330 CP Type/Termination/Preparation 613

CL332 Schedule/Thickness Override 616
CL340 Safety Classification 618
CL360 Stress Analysis Requirements 618
CL365 Reporting Requirements 618
CL366 Requirement to Reconstruct 618
CL380 Piping Component Type 618
CL390 Action 625
CL400 Option 625

CL420 Piping Component Type/Source 631
CL425 Piping/Tubing Type 632
CL430 Instrument Component Type/Source 632
CL499 Piping Notes 632
CL530 Accessory/Item Type 634

CL550 Operator/Actuator Type 634
CL570 Design Standard 635
CL572 Wall Thickness Equation 636
CL575 Geometry Standard 636
567
________________
CL576 Table Suffix/End Standard - Green 647

CL577 Table Suffix/End Standard - Red 650
CL578 Weight Code 654
CL990 Types of Piping Commodity Data Forms 656

CL999 Standard Note Title 656
CL1010 Area Units 657

CL1028 Mass Units 658
CL1056 Temperature Units 658
CL1064 Pressure Units 658
CL1074 Density Units 659
CL1100 Weld Type 659

CL1162 Force Units 659
CL1201 Drawing Scale 659

CL1202 Drawing Size 660
CL1203 Interference Manager Approval Status 660
CL1204 Interference Clash Type 660
CL1205 Interference Manager Action 660
CL1207 Interference Manager Approval Method 661
CL1208 Clash Checking Option 661
CL1209 Clash Checking Volume Filter Option 661
CL1310 Report Source 661

CL1312 Report Type 661
CL1410 Design Review Type 662
CL1605 Model Status 662
CL1610 Force Units for FrameWorks Plus 662
CL1620 Drawing View Direction 662
CL1630 Drawing View Composition Status 662
CL1710 Document Source 662
CL1720 Document Type 663
CL1900 Isometric Drawing Type 665
CL2000 PD_Draw Document Type 666
568
________________ Appendix B: General Comments
B.1 General Comments

Codelist sets in this document define the values for all codelisted attributes used in
the PDS Piping Task which are specific to US plant design practices.
You can add, delete or revise codelist sets to reflect your own practices, terminology
and language. A task user, however, cannot revise a codelist set from a work
session. Revisions to a codelist set, can only be made in the General RDB or
Standard Note Library.
In listings that follow, the maximum number of entries that may be expected for a
specific codelist set is shown in parenthesis following the name of the codelist set.
B. Codelists
For PDS users that wish to modify codelist files delivered with the PDS software to
reflect their own practices, two approaches are possible:
Make the modifications within the range of codelist numbers defined in the
codelist library delivered with the PDS software. This has the advantage of
resulting in the best organized set of codelisted definitions. The disadvantage
is that numbers added by the User may conflict with numbers added in future
versions of software.
Increase the maximum number of entries allowed for the codelist set and make
additions to it in the range of extended numbers. This will minimize possible
conflicts assigned numbers but will require compiling of the codelists and of
the associated databases.
Values enclosed in brackets [ ] in pages that follow represent descriptive information.

The values stored in the codelist sets will exclude this bracketed information from
the codelist descriptions.
The net length of a codelist entry cannot exceed 50 characters. Other considerations
may, however, require that a shorter description be made. For example:
For the P&ID Task, the total compressed length of a label part can not exceed
36 characters.
The formats of specification type reports for the Instrument Task require that
applicable codelist descriptions do not exceed 25 characters.
B.2 Comments Specific to Units of

Measure Codelist Sets
The PDS system of units is derived from the 1980 Edition of API-2564, Manual of
Petroleum Measurement Standards, Chapter 15 "Guidelines for the Use of the
International System of Units (SI) in the Petroleum and Allied Industries".
569
________________
The tables in this document include the following information.
Codelist set This is the number of the codelist set that identifies a specific quantity.
For example, codelist set 1028 includes the units of measure that apply to
the quantity "mass".
Codelist no This is the number that defines a specific unit of measure within a
codelist set. For example, codelist number 1 in codelist set 1028 refers to
the "lb" units of measure.
Unit type This code is not explicitly shown in the tables. The unit type equals the
number of the codelist set minus 1000. For example, reference to unit
type 28 refers to "mass".
Quantity name Entries in this column define the quantity whose units of measure are
being defined.
Unit name: Several unit names are provided for a given codelist set. Any of these
names can be used to define the quantity.
Conversion to Two sets of columns define the conversion of variables expressed in the
destination unit: units shown under the column "Unit Name" to the unit shown under the
column "Destination Unit". The following explanations apply:
The column captioned Destination Unit defines the unit to which the unit
included under the column Unit Name will be converted using the value shown
under the column Factor.
The column captioned Factor provides the actual conversion factor to be used
for the conversion. For example, in codelist set 1028, to convert a mass
measurement in "lb" to "kg", multiply the value in the former units by the
conversion factor, 4.535 924 E-01. In some cases, such as temperature,
summation may also be required to effect the desired conversion. All
conversion factors are taken or derived from API Publication 2564. Groups of
three digits are separated by spaces with no commas. For example,
3.048 000 E-01 = 3.048 000 x 10-1 = 0.3048000.
Similarly,
9.290 304 E+02 = 9.290 304 x 102 = 929.0304.
An asterisk (*) indicates that all following digits are zeros. If a conversion factor
happens to end in several zeros but does not have an asterisk, any subsequent digits
would not necessarily be zeros. Most of the conversion factors are shown to six or
seven significant figures. Those shown to fewer than six significant figures are
limited by the precision of the known or determinable value of a physical property,
such as the density of distilled water at a reference temperature.
570
Conversion to Two sets of columns define the conversion of the units shown under the
first unit in CL: column Unit Name to the first unit shown in that column. The
conversion is done per the equation:
y= A + Bx
where,
x applies to the value of the variable expressed in the units shown in the column
captioned Unit Name.
y applies to the value of the variable expressed in the units shown in the first line of
the column captioned Unit Name.
B. Codelists
A is the factor in the column captioned Factor A.
B is the factor in the column captioned Factor B.
The distinction between upper case and lower case symbols is very important. For
example:
K= kelvin
k= kilo= 103
M= mega= 106
m= milli= 10-3 (when m is used as a prefix)
m= metre (when m is used alone)
N= newton
n= nano= 10-9
In editing any of the codelist sets for units, do not change the meaning of existing
codelist values.
In all codelist sets for units, a blank space is provided as the first character in the unit
name. The blank space is used to silence the units in the formation of labels.
Nomenclature:
Symbol Name Quantity

bar bar pressure
degC degree Celsius temperature
g gram mass
kg kilogram mass
m metre length
min minute time
Pa pascal pressure
t metric ton mass
571
________________
CL31, Object Types for Orthographic Drawings (40)

C31 DF=WRK_DD_CODLST:CODE0031.ENT MAX=999
0031, Object Types for Orthographic Drawings (40)
Equipment Category Object Types (100-149)

The Range of 100-149 for the equipment category is
divided into two parts:
101-110 These entries are reserved by INTERGRAPH
and may not be changed by the user.
111-149 Codelist entries in this range may be created,
revised, and/or deleted by the user.
If modified the user must also revise the
contents of the file eqp_object.dwg and
labels.xxx (where xxx is the drawing type
number defined in CL2000 ) in the project
directory.
101 = Equipment Group

110 = Equipment Nozzle
120 = Equipment Platform
124 = Equipment Handrail
128 = Equipment Penetration
130 = Equipment Stair
135 = Equipment Ladder
140 = Equipment Davit
Piping Category Object Types (200-249)
205 = Piping Segment

207 = Pipe
210 = Piping Component
215 = Piping Specialty
220 = Piping Support
Instrument Category Object Types (250-279)
250 = Control Valves and Regulators

252 = Relief Devices
255 = Other In-Line Instruments
260 = Off-Line Instruments
HVAC Category Object Types (359-399)
359 = HVAC Coil Data

360 = HVAC Connector Data
361 = HVAC Damper Data
362 = HVAC Diffuser Data
363 = HVAC Duct Data
364 = HVAC DEquipment Data
365 = HVAC Filter Data
366 = HVAC Fitting Data
367 = HVAC Grille Data
368 = HVAC Hood Data
369 = HVAC Humidifier Data
370 = HVAC Register Data
371 = HVAC Terminal Devices
572
EERWAY Category Object Types (300-306)
300 = EERWAY Connect Point

301 = EERWAY OneLine
302 = EERWAY Straight
303 = EERWAY Fitting
304 = EERWAY Space Envelope
305 = EERWAY To_Equipment
306 = EERWAY To_Support
307 = EERWAY Eqp Panel
308 = EERWAY Duct Bank
CL35, Approval Status (10)
B. Codelists
NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning
of existing codelist values. Some data displays require that only
values to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports require
that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed.
The following are the requirements in use of the "approval status."
2 reserved for approved
3 reserved for not approved
11-20 reserved for approved
21-30 reserved for not approved
1 = [Blank]
2 = A =Approved
3 = NA=Not approved
CL36, Structural Approval Status (15)

0= New
1 = Existing
2 = Future
3 = User 1
4 = User 2
CL37, HVAC Approval Status (10)

1 = New
2 = Existing
3 = Dismantle
4 = Future
573
________________
CL50, Hold Status (10)

that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. Labels
always require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed.
1 = NH=Not held
2 = H =Hold
CL69, Equipment Divisions/Form Code (99)

of codelist value "All". Some data displays require that only
values to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other data displays
require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed.
1 = A= All
2 = B= Vessels
3 = C= Heat transfer
4 = D= Mechanical
5 = E= Civil/Structural
6 = F= Piping
7 = H= Electrical
8 = I= Other
CL125, Fluid Code/Connector Type (999)

of existing codelist values 950-999.
1 = [Blank]
11 = A [Air]
14 = AC [Combustion air]
17 = AE [Aeration air]
20 = AI [Instrument air]
23 = AO [Operational air]
26 = AP [Plant air]
29 = APU [Purge air]
32 = AR [Regeneration air]
35 = AS [Starting air]
40 = AZ [Other air]
71 = C [Refrigerant]
75 = CA [Ammonia refrigerant]
79 = CE [Ethylene refrigerant]
83 = CF [Freon refrigerant]
87 = CLP [LP refrigerant]
91 = CPR [Propylene refrigerant]
100 = CZ [Other refrigerant]
101 = D [Sewer]
103 = DC [Caustic sewer]
105 = DCH [Chemical sewer]
107 = DGR [Drain to grade]
574
109 = DOW [Oily water sewer]

111 = DP [Process sewer]
113 = DPH [Heated process sewer]
115 = DS [Sanitary sewer]
117 = DSP [Press sanitary sewer]
119 = DST [Storm sewer]
121 = DW [Clean water sewer]
123 = DWS [Sour water sewer]
125 = DX [Acid sewer]
127 = [Blank] [Storm, oily water or sanitary sewer]
128 = [Blank] [Storm or oily water sewer]
130 = DZ [Other sewer]
161 = F [Foam]
191 = G [Gas]
B. Codelists
194 = GCD [Carbon dioxide gas]
197 = GCL [Chlorine gas]
198 = GCN [Chlorination gas]
200 = GF [Fuel gas]
203 = GG [Flue gas]
206 = GH [Hydrogen gas]
209 = GHS [Hydrogen sulphide gas]
212 = GI [Inert gas]
215 = GLP [LP gas]
218 = GM [Make-up gas]
221 = GN [Natural gas]
224 = GNI [Nitrogen gas]
227 = GOX [Oxygen gas]
230 = GP [Purge gas]
233 = GR [Reformed gas]
236 = GS [Synthesis gas]
239 = GSO [Sour gas]
242 = GSW [Sweet gas]
245 = GW [Waste gas
250 = GZ [Other gas]
341 = K [Solvent]
346 = KG [Glycol]
351 = KF [Furfural]
356 = KD [Dewaxing]
370 = KZ [Other solvent]
401 = M [Chemical]
402 = [Blank] [Chemical injection]
405 = MAA [Anhydrous ammonia]
409 = MAC [Aluminum chloride]
413 = MAW [Aqueous ammonia]
417 = MC5 [0-50% caustic solution]
421 = MCL [Dry chlorine]
425 = MEO [Ethylene oxide]
429 = MHC [Hydrogen chloride]
433 = MIA [Inhibitor A]
434 = MIB [Inhibitor B]
440 = MLA [Lube oil additives]
444 = MMA [Methyl alcohol]
448 = MS [Sulfur]
452 = MSL [Liquid sulfur]
460 = MZ [Other chemical]
575
________________
491 = O [Oil]
493 = OD [Diesel fuel oil]
495 = ODS [Dry slop oil]
497 = OF [Flushing oil]
499 = OFR [Fuel oil return]
500 = OFS [Fuel oil supply]
503 = OH [Hydraulic oil]
505 = OL [Lube]
507 = OLS [Lube and seal oil]
509 = OS [Seal oil]
511 = OSO [Sour oil]
513 = OSW [Sweet oil]
515 = OWS [Wet slop oil]
520 = OZ [Other oil]
521 = P [Process]
522 = [Blank] [Special process]
524 = PA [Process w/ rich/lean amine]
527 = PAS [Process w/ severe amine]
530 = PB [Process w/ benzene]
533 = PH [Process w/ H2]
536 = PHH [Process w/ H2 & H2S]
539 = PHW [Process w/ aqueous H2S]
542 = PL [Low temperature process]
545 = PS [Process w/ S]
550 = PZ [Other process]
581 = RA [Relief to atmosphere]

591 = RF [Relief to flare]
610 = RZ [Other relief]
611 = S [Steam]
613 = [Blank] [Boiler feed water or steam]
615 = [Blank] [Boiler feed water, steam or condensate]
617 = [Blank] [Steam or condensate]
621 = SE [Extr press CL1500 steam]
623 = SH [High press CL900 steam]
625 = SL [Low press CL150 steam]
627 = SM [Med press CL600 steam]
629 = SN [Nor press CL300 steam]
631 = SS [Superheated steam]
633 = SV [Vacuum steam]
635 = SX [Exhaust CL125 steam]
640 = SZ [Other steam]
641 = SC [Steam condensate]

643 = SCA [Atmospheric CL125 steam condensate]
645 = SCE [Extr press CL1500 steam condensate]
647 = SCH [High press CL900 steam condensate]
649 = SCL [Low press CL150 steam condensate]
651 = SCM [Med press CL600 steam condensate]
653 = SCN [Nor press CL300 steam condensate]
655 = SCV [Vacuum steam condensate]
660 = SCZ [Other steam condensate]
721 = V [Vent]
731 = VA [Vent to atmosphere]
741 = VF [Vent to flare]
750 = VZ [Other vent]
576
751 = W [Water]
753 = WB [Boiler feed water]
755 = WBA [Ballast water]
757 = WBB [Water boiler blowdown]
759 = WC [Cooling water]
761 = [Blank] [Cooling or utility water]
763 = WCH [Chlorinated water]
764 = WCL [Chlorine in water]
765 = WCF [Clarified water]
767 = WCR [Cooling water return]
768 = WCS [Cooling water supply]
771 = WPT [Potable water]
772 = [Blank] [Potable water or instrument air]
773 = WDM [Demineralized water]
775 = WFA [Aboveground fire water]
777 = WFI [Filtered water]
B. Codelists
779 = WFU [Underground fire water]
781 = WG [Glycol water]
783 = WGL [Gland water]
785 = WGR [Glycol water return]
786 = WGS [Glycol water supply]
789 = WH [Hot water]
791 = WHR [Hot water return]
792 = WHS [Hot water supply]
795 = WI [Chilled water]
797 = WIR [Chilled water return]
798 = WIS [Chilled water supply]
801 = WK [Treated water]
803 = WN [Brine water]
805 = WP [Process water]
807 = WR [Raw water]
809 = WS [Sea water]
811 = WSR [Sea water return]
812 = WSS [Sea water supply]
815 = WT [Test water]
817 = WU [Utility water]
819 = WW [Waste water]
830 = WZ [Other water]
831 = X [Acid]
835 = XH [Hydrofluoric acid]
839 = XN [Nitric acid]
843 = XSD [Dilute sulfuric acid]
847 = XS3 [30% sulfuric acid]
851 = XS8 [75-80% sulfuric acid]
853 = XS9 [93-97% sulfuric acid]
860 = XZ [Other acid]
861 = Y [Catalyst]
865 = YA [Catalyst addition]
869 = YG [General catalyst]
873 = YH [Catalyst w/ H2]
877 = YL [Catalyst lift lines]
881 = YW [Catalyst withdrawal lines]
890 = YZ [Other catalyst]
950 = ODPC [Off-dwg piping connectors]

951 = OUPC [Off-unit piping connectors]
953 = UODPC [Utility off-dwg piping connectors]
955 = ODIC [Off-dwg instr connectors]
956 = OUIC [Off-unit instr connectors]
960 = OVPC [Off-vol piping connectors]
961 = OSPC [Off-site piping connectors]
577
________________
999 = TERM [Terminator piping connector]
CL130, Construction Status (15)

of existing codelist values 2, 3 and 8. In addition, codelist
values 4-7 must imply an "existing" construction status. Codelist
values 9-15 inherit the color symbology from the construction
status of the item previously placed in the model.
1 = [Blank]
2 = New
3 = Existing
4 = Revamp
5 = Relocate
6 = Temporary
7 = Dismantle
8 = Future
CL145, Materials Grade (4500)

NOTE: Some data displays require that only values to the left of the
"=" sign be shown; other reports require that only values to the right
of the "=" sign be displayed.
1 = [Blank]
Irons, 10-99
10 = A47-32510
12 = A47-35018
15 = A48-20
16 = A48-25
17 = A48-30
18 = A48-35
19 = A48-40
20 = A48-45
21 = A48-50
22 = A48-55
23 = A48-60
25 = A74
30 = A126-A
31 = A126-B
32 = A126-C
35 = A197
40 = A278-20
41 = A278-25
42 = A278-30
43 = A278-35
44 = A278-40
45 = A278-50
46 = A278-60
47 = A278-70
48 = A278-80
55 = A338
60 = A395-Ductile
62 = A395-Ferritic Ductile
70 = A571
75 = AWWA-C110-Ductile
76 = AWWA-C151-Ductile
578
Carbon Steels, 100-499

110 = API-5L-A
114 = API-5L-A25
116 = API-5L-B
118 = API-5L-X42
120 = API-5L-X46
122 = API-5L-X52
124 = API-5L-X65
135 = A36
140 = A53-A
142 = A53-B
144 = A53-Type F
150 = A105
160 = A106-A
162 = A106-B
164 = A106-C
B. Codelists
170 = A120
180 = A134-A36
182 = A134-A283-A
183 = A134-A283-B
184 = A134-A283-C
185 = A134-A283-D
186 = A134-A285-A
187 = A134-A285-B
188 = A134-A285-C
190 = A134-A570-30
191 = A134-A570-33
192 = A134-A570-36
193 = A134-A570-40
194 = A134-A570-45
195 = A134-A570-50
200 = A135-A
202 = A135-B
210 = A139-A
212 = A139-B
214 = A139-C
216 = A139-D
218 = A139-E
220 = A179
230 = A181-CL60
234 = A181-CL70
240 = A211-A570-30
241 = A211-A570-33
242 = A211-A570-36
243 = A211-A570-40
244 = A211-A570-45
245 = A211-A570-50
250 = A216-WCA
252 = A216-WCB
254 = A216-WCC
264 = A234-WPB
266 = A234-WPC
270 = A283-A
272 = A283-B
274 = A283-C
276 = A283-D
280 = A285-A
282 = A285-B
284 = A285-C
290 = A333-1
293 = A333-6
295 = A334-1
579
________________
298 = A334-6
300 = A350-LF1
302 = A350-LF2
305 = A352-LCB
310 = A369-FPA
312 = A369-FPB
320 = A381-Y35
321 = A381-Y42
322 = A381-Y46
323 = A381-Y48
325 = A381-Y50
327 = A381-Y52
334 = A420-WPL6
340 = A515-55
342 = A515-60
344 = A515-65
346 = A515-70
350 = A516-55
352 = A516-60
354 = A516-65
356 = A516-70
360 = A520-30
361 = A520-33
362 = A520-36
363 = A520-40
364 = A520-45
365 = A520-50
370 = A524-I
372 = A524-II
375 = A537-CL1
380 = A587
390 = A671-CA55
392 = A671-CB60
394 = A671-CB65
396 = A671-CB70
398 = A671-CC60
400 = A671-CC65
402 = A671-CC70
404 = A671-CD70
406 = A671-CE55
408 = A671-CE60
410 = A671-CK75
420 = A672-A45
422 = A672-A50
424 = A672-A55
426 = A672-B55
428 = A672-B60
430 = A672-B65
432 = A672-B70
434 = A672-C55
436 = A672-C60
438 = A672-C65
440 = A672-C70
442 = A672-D70
444 = A672-E55
446 = A672-E60
448 = A672-N75
460 = A691-CMS75
464 = A691-CMSH70
580
Low and Intermediate Alloy Steels, 500-899

510 = A182-F1
512 = A182-F2
514 = A182-F5
516 = A182-F5a
518 = A182-F6a Cl.1
519 = A182-F6a Cl.2
520 = A182-F6a Cl.3
521 = A182-F6a Cl.4
523 = A182-F6b
524 = A182-F7
526 = A182-F9
528 = A182-F11
530 = A182-F12
532 = A182-F21
534 = A182-F22
B. Codelists
536 = A182-F22a
540 = A202-A
542 = A202-B
550 = A203-A
552 = A203-B
554 = A203-D
556 = A203-E
560 = A204-A
562 = A204-B
564 = A204-C
576 = A217-C5
578 = A217-C12
580 = A217-CA15
582 = A217-WC1
584 = A217-WC4
586 = A217-WC5
588 = A217-WC6
590 = A217-WC9
600 = A225-A
602 = A225-B
610 = A234-WP1
614 = A234-WP5
616 = A234-WP7
618 = A234-WP9
620 = A234-WP11
622 = A234-WP12
624 = A234-WP22
630 = A302-A
632 = A302-B
634 = A302-C
636 = A302-D
644 = A333-3
646 = A333-4
648 = A333-7
650 = A333-8
652 = A333-9
664 = A334-3
666 = A334-7
668 = A334-8
670 = A334-9
680 = A335-P1
682 = A335-P2
684 = A335-P5
686 = A335-P5b
687 = A335-P5c
690 = A335-P7
581
________________
692 = A335-P9
694 = A335-P11
696 = A335-P12
698 = A335-P15
700 = A335-P21
702 = A335-P22
710 = A350-LF3
720 = A352-LC1
722 = A352-LC2
724 = A352-LC3
730 = A353
740 = A369-FP1
742 = A369-FP2
744 = A369-FP3b
746 = A369-FP5
748 = A369-FP7
750 = A369-FP9
752 = A369-FP11
754 = A369-FP12
756 = A369-FP21
758 = A369-FP22
760 = A385-7 Cl.1
761 = A385-7 Cl.2
770 = A387-2 Cl.1
771 = A387-2 Cl.2
774 = A387-5 Cl.1
775 = A387-5 Cl.2
778 = A387-9 Cl.1
779 = A387-9 Cl.2
780 = A387-11 Cl.1
781 = A387-11 Cl.2
782 = A387-12 Cl.1
783 = A387-12 Cl.2
784 = A387-21 Cl.1
785 = A387-21 Cl.2
786 = A387-22 Cl.1
787 = A387-22 Cl.2
794 = A420-WPL3
798 = A420-WPL8
800 = A426-CP1
802 = A426-CP2
804 = A426-CP5
806 = A426-CP5b
808 = A426-CP7
810 = A426-CP9
812 = A426-CP11
814 = A426-CP12
816 = A426-CP15
817 = A426-CPCA15
820 = A426-CP21
822 = A426-CP22
830 = A553-Type I
832 = A553-Type II
835 = A645
840 = A671-CF70
842 = A671-CF71
850 = A672-L65
852 = A672-L70
854 = A672-L75
860 = A691-CM65
862 = A691-CM70
864 = A691-CM75
582
866 = A691-0.5Cr
868 = A691-1Cr
870 = A691-1.25Cr
872 = A691-2.25Cr
874 = A691-3Cr
876 = A691-5Cr
878 = A691-9Cr
Stainless Steels, 900-1324

920 = A167-301
922 = A167-302
923 = A167-302B
926 = A167-304
927 = A167-304L
930 = A167-305
932 = A167-308
B. Codelists
934 = A167-309
935 = A167-309S
938 = A167-310
939 = A167-310S
942 = A167-316
943 = A167-316L
946 = A167-317
947 = A167-317L
950 = A167-321
952 = A167-347
954 = A167-348
960 = A182-F10
964 = A182-F304
965 = A182-F304H
966 = A182-F304L
968 = A182-F310
970 = A182-F316
971 = A182-F316H
972 = A182-F316L
974 = A182-F321
975 = A182-F321H
978 = A182-F347
979 = A182-F347H
982 = A182-F348
983 = A182-F348H
990 = A240-X8M
992 = A240-302
994 = A240-304
995 = A240-304L
996 = A240-304H
998 = A240-305
1000 = A240-309S
1004 = A240-310S
1006 = A240-316
1007 = A240-316L
1010 = A240-317
1011 = A240-317L
1014 = A240-321
1016 = A240-347
1018 = A240-348
1020 = A240-405
1022 = A240-410
1023 = A240-410S
1026 = A240-429
1028 = A240-430
1040 = A268-TP329
583
________________
1044 = A268-TP405
1046 = A268-TP409
1048 = A268-TP410
1050 = A268-TP430
1051 = A268-TP430Ti
1054 = A268-TP443
1056 = A268-TP446
1060 = A269-TP304
1061 = A269-TP304L
1064 = A269-TP316
1065 = A269-TP316L
1066 = A270-TP316L
1070 = A312-TP304
1071 = A312-TP304H
1072 = A312-TP304L
1074 = A312-TP309
1076 = A312-TP310
1078 = A312-TP316
1079 = A312-TP316H
1080 = A312-TP316L
1082 = A312-TP317
1084 = A312-TP321
1085 = A312-TP321H
1088 = A312-TP347
1089 = A312-TP347H
1092 = A312-TP348
1095 = A351-CA15
1100 = A351-CF3
1102 = A351-CF3A
1104 = A351-CF3M
1106 = A351-CF8
1108 = A351-CF8A
1110 = A351-CF8C
1112 = A351-CF8M
1113 = A351-CF10
1114 = A351-CF10MC
1116 = A351-CN7M
1118 = A351-CH8
1120 = A351-CH10
1122 = A351-CH20
1124 = A351-CK20
1126 = A351-HK30
1128 = A351-HK40
1130 = A351-HT30
1140 = A358-304
1141 = A358-304L
1144 = A358-309S
1146 = A358-310S
1148 = A358-316
1149 = A358-316L
1152 = A358-321
1154 = A358-347
1156 = A358-348
1160 = A376-16-8-2H
1162 = A376-TP304
1163 = A376-TP304H
1166 = A376-TP316
1167 = A376-TP316H
1170 = A376-TP321
1171 = A376-TP321H
1174 = A376-TP347
1175 = A376-TP347H
584
1178 = A376-TP348
1179 = A376-TP348H
1190 = A403-WP304
1191 = A403-WP304H
1192 = A403-WP304L
1194 = A403-WP309
1196 = A403-WP310
1198 = A403-WP316
1199 = A403-WP316H
1200 = A403-WP316L
1202 = A403-WP317
1204 = A403-WP321
1205 = A403-WP321H
1206 = A403-WP347
1207 = A403-WP347H
1210 = A403-WP348
B. Codelists
1220 = A409-TP304
1222 = A409-TP309
1224 = A409-TP310
1226 = A409-TP316
1228 = A409-TP317
1230 = A409-TP321
1232 = A409-TP347
1234 = A409-TP348
1240 = A430-FP304
1241 = A430-FP304H
1244 = A430-FP316
1245 = A430-FP316H
1248 = A430-FP321
1249 = A430-FP321H
1252 = A430-FP347
1253 = A430-FP347H
1260 = A451-CHP10
1262 = A451-CHP20
1264 = A451-CPF8C
1266 = A451-CPF8M
1268 = A451-CPF10MC
1270 = A451-CPH8
1272 = A451-CPK20
1280 = A452-TP304H
1282 = A452-TP316H
1284 = A452-TP347H
1300 = ASME SA479-316L
Copper and Copper Alloys, 1325-1549

1325 = AISI-CDA Alloy 377
1330 = B42 Cl.C10200, drwn, NPD 0.0625-2
1331 = B42 Cl.C10200, drwn, NPD 2.5-12
1334 = B42 Cl.C12000, drwn, NPD 0.0625-2
1335 = B42 Cl.C12000, drwn, NPD 2.5-12
1338 = B42 Cl.C12200, drwn, NPD 0.0625-2
1339 = B42 Cl.C12200, drwn, NPD 2.5-12
1342 = B43 Cl.C23000, annld
1346 = B61 Cl.C92200
1350 = B62 Cl.C83600
1354 = B68 Cl.C10200, annld
1356 = B68 Cl.C12000, annld
1358 = B68 Cl.C12200, annld
1362 = B75 Cl.C10200, annld
1363 = B75 Cl.C10200, hrd drwn
1364 = B75 Cl.C10200, light drwn
1368 = B75 Cl.C12000, annld
585
________________
1369 = B75 Cl.C12000, hrd drwn

1374 = B75 Cl.C12200, annld
1375 = B75 Cl.C12200, hrd drwn
1380 = B75 Cl.C14200, annld
1381 = B75 Cl.C14200, hrd drwn
1386 = B88 Cl.C10200, annld
1387 = B88 Cl.C10200, drwn
1392 = B88 Cl.C12000, annld
1393 = B88 Cl.C12000, drwn
1398 = B88 Cl.C12200, annld
1399 = B88 Cl.C12200, drwn
1404 = B96 Cl.C65500, annld
1408 = B152 Cl.C10200, annld
1410 = B152 Cl.C10400, annld
1412 = B152 Cl.C10500, annld
1414 = B152 Cl.C10700, annld
1416 = B152 Cl.C12200, annld
1418 = B152 Cl.C12300, annld
1422 = B169 Cl.C61400, soft
1430 = B283 Cl.C11000
1432 = B283 Cl.C37700
1434 = B283 Cl.C46400
1436 = B283 Cl.C48500
1438 = B283 Cl.C63900
1440 = B283 Cl.C65500
1442 = B283 Cl.C67500
1450 = B402 Cl.C70600, annld
1452 = B402 Cl.C71500, annld
1456 = B466 Cl.C70600, annld
1458 = B466 Cl.C71500, annld
1462 = B467 Cl.C70600, annld, <=4.5in OD
1463 = B467 Cl.C70600, annld, >4.5in OD
1466 = B467 Cl.C71500, annld, <=4.5in OD
1467 = B467 Cl.C71500, annld, >4.5in OD
1472 = B584 Cl.C86200
1474 = B584 Cl.C86300
1476 = B584 Cl.C86400
1478 = B584 Cl.C86500
1480 = B584 Cl.C86700
1482 = B584 Cl.C90300
1484 = B584 Cl.C90500
1486 = B584 Cl.C92200
1488 = B584 Cl.C92300
1490 = B584 Cl.C95200
1492 = B584 Cl.C95300
1494 = B584 Cl.C95500
1496 = B584 Cl.C95600
1498 = B584 Cl.C97300
1500 = B584 Cl.C97600
1502 = B584 Cl.C97800
Nickel and Nickel Alloys 1550-1774

1560 = B127-400 (N04400) hot rolled plt annld
1561 = B127-400 (N04400) hot rolled plt AR
1564 = B160-200 (N02200) annld
1565 = B160-200 (N02200) hot fin
1568 = B160-201 annld
1572 = B161-200 (N02200) annld, <=5in OD
1573 = B161-200 (N02200) annld, >5in OD
586
1574 = B161-200 (N02200) stress rlvd

1576 = B161-201 (N02201) annld, <=5in OD
1577 = B161-201 (N02201) annld, >5in OD
1578 = B161-201 (N02201) stress rlvd
1590 = B164-400 (N04400) annld forged
1591 = B164-400 (N04400) hot fin
1594 = B165-400 (N04400) annld, <=5in OD
1595 = B165-400 (N04400) annld, >5in OD
1596 = B165-400 (N04400) stress rlvd
1600 = B166-600 (N06600) annld
1601 = B166-600 (N06600) hot fin
1604 = B167-600 (N06600) cold drwn annld, <=5in OD
1605 = B167-600 (N06600) cold drwn annld, >5in OD
B. Codelists
1606 = B167-600 (N06600) hot fin/hot fin annld, <=5in OD
1607 = B167-600 (N06600) hot fin/hot fin annld, >5in OD
1614 = B333-B (N10001) sln annld plt
1615 = B333-B (N10001) sln annld sheet
1616 = B333-B-2 (N10665) sln annld
1620 = B335-B-2 (N10665) sln annld
1624 = B366-WPHB (N10001)
1626 = B366-WPHX (N06002)
1628 = B366-WPN (N02200)
1630 = B366-WPNC (N04400)
1632 = B366-WPNC1 (N06600)
1634 = B366-WPNL (N02201)
1636 = B366-WPNLWX
1638 = B366-WPNWX
1642 = B407-800 (N08800) cold drwn annld
1643 = B407-800 (N08800) hot fin/hot fin annld
1646 = B407-800H (N08810) cold drwn sln annld/hot fin
1648 = B443-625 (N06625) annld
1650 = B444-625 (N06625) annld
1652 = B446-625 (N06625) annld
1654 = B464-20Cb (N08020) annld
1656 = A494-CW-12M-1
1658 = A494-CW-12M-2
1660 = A494-CY-40
1664 = B574-C-4 (N06455) sln annld
1666 = B574-C-276 (N10276) sln annld
1670 = B575-C-4 (N06455) sln annld
1672 = B575-C-276 (N10276) sln annld
1676 = B581-G (N06007) sln annld
1680 = B582-G (N06007) sln annld
1688 = B619-20-Mod (N08320) sln annld
1700 = B619-B (N10001) sln annld
1702 = B619-B-2 (N10665) sln annld
1704 = B619-C-4 (N06455) sln annld
1706 = B619-C-276 (N10276) sln annld
1708 = B619-G1 (N06007) sln annld
1710 = B619-X (N06002) sln annld
1714 = B620-20-Mod (N08320) sln annld
1718 = B621-20-Mod (N08320) sln annld
1722 = B622-B (N10001) sln annld
1724 = B622-B-2 (N10655) sln annld
1726 = B622-C-4 (N06455) sln annld
1728 = B622-C-276 (N10276) sln annld
587
________________
1730 = B622-G (N06007) sln annld

1732 = B622-X (N06002) sln annld
Aluminum Alloys 1775-2299

1780 = B26-356.0 temper T6
1782 = B26-356.0 temper T71
1784 = B26-443.0 temper F
1790 = B209-1060 temper 0
1792 = B209-1060 temper H12
1794 = B209-1060 temper H14
1796 = B209-1060 temper H112
1798 = B209-1100 temper 0
1800 = B209-1100 temper H12
1802 = B209-1100 temper H14
1804 = B209-1100 temper H112
1806 = B209-3003 temper 0
1808 = B209-3003 temper H12
1810 = B209-3003 temper H14
1812 = B209-3003 temper H112
1814 = B209-3004 temper 0
1816 = B209-3004 temper H32
1818 = B209-3004 temper H34
1820 = B209-3004 temper H112
1822 = B209-5050 temper 0
1824 = B209-5050 temper H32
1826 = B209-5050 temper H34
1828 = B209-5050 temper H112
1830 = B209-5052 temper 0
1832 = B209-5052 temper H32
1834 = B209-5052 temper H34
1836 = B209-5052 temper H112
1838 = B209-5652 temper 0
1840 = B209-5652 temper H32
1842 = B209-5652 temper H34
1844 = B209-5652 temper H112
1846 = B209-5083 temper 0
1848 = B209-5083 temper H321
1850 = B209-5086 temper 0
1852 = B209-5086 temper H32
1854 = B209-5086 temper H34
1856 = B209-5086 temper H112
1858 = B209-5154 temper 0
1860 = B209-5154 temper H32
1862 = B209-5154 temper H34
1864 = B209-5154 temper H112
1866 = B209-5254 temper 0
1868 = B209-5254 temper H32
1870 = B209-5254 temper H34
1872 = B209-5254 temper H112
1874 = B209-5454 temper 0
1876 = B209-5454 temper H32
1878 = B209-5454 temper H34
1880 = B209-5454 temper H112
1882 = B209-5456 temper 0
1884 = B209-5456 temper H321
1886 = B209-6061 temper T4
1888 = B209-6061 temper T4, wld
1890 = B209-6061 temper T6
1892 = B209-6061 temper T6, wld
1894 = B209-6061 temper T651
1896 = B209-Alclad 3003 temper 0
1898 = B209-Alclad 3003 temper H12
588

1912 = B209-Alclad 6061 temper T4
1914 = B209-Alclad 6061 temper T4, wld
1918 = B209-Alclad 6061 temper T6, wld
1930 = B210-1060 temper 0

1932 = B210-1060 temper H14
1934 = B210-1060 temper H112
B. Codelists
1936 = B210-3003 temper 0
1938 = B210-3003 temper H14
1940 = B210-3003 temper H18
1942 = B210-3003 temper H112
1944 = B210-5052 temper 0
1946 = B210-5052 temper H32
1948 = B210-5052 temper H34
1950 = B210-5083 temper 0
1952 = B210-5083 temper H112
1954 = B210-5086 temper 0
1956 = B210-5086 temper H32
1958 = B210-5086 temper H34
1960 = B210-5086 temper H112
1962 = B210-5154 temper 0
1964 = B210-5154 temper H34
1966 = B210-5456 temper 0
1968 = B210-5456 temper H112
1970 = B210-6061 temper T4
1972 = B210-6061 temper T4, wld
1974 = B210-6061 temper T6
1976 = B210-6061 temper T6, wld
1978 = B210-6063 temper T4
1980 = B210-6063 temper T4, wld
1982 = B210-6063 temper T5, wld
1984 = B210-6063 temper T6
1986 = B210-6063 temper T6, wld
2010 = B221-1060 temper 0
2012 = B221-1060 temper H112
2014 = B221-1100 temper 0
2016 = B221-1100 temper H112
2018 = B221-3003 temper 0
2020 = B221-3003 temper H112
2022 = B221-5052 temper 0
2024 = B221-5053 temper 0
2026 = B221-5086 temper 0
2028 = B221-5154 temper 0
2030 = B221-5454 temper 0
2032 = B221-5456 temper 0
2034 = B221-6061 temper T4
2036 = B221-6061 temper T4, wld
2038 = B221-6061 temper T6
2040 = B221-6061 temper T6, wld
589
________________
2042 = B221-6063 temper T4

2044 = B221-6063 temper T4, wld
2046 = B221-6063 temper T5
2048 = B221-6063 temper T5, wld
2050 = B221-6063 temper T6
2052 = B221-6063 temper T6, wld
2070 = B241-1060 temper 0
2072 = B241-1060 temper H112
2074 = B241-1100 temper 0
2076 = B241-1100 temper H112
2078 = B241-3003 temper 0
2080 = B241-3003 temper H18
2082 = B241-3003 temper H112
2084 = B241-5052 temper 0
2086 = B241-5083 temper 0
2088 = B241-5083 temper H112
2090 = B241-5086 temper 0
2092 = B241-5086 temper H112
2094 = B241-5454 temper 0
2096 = B241-5454 temper H112
2098 = B241-5456 temper 0
2100 = B241-5456 temper H112
2102 = B241-5462 temper 0
2104 = B241-5462 temper H112
2106 = B241-6061 temper T4
2108 = B241-6061 temper T4, wld
2110 = B241-6061 temper T6, <NPD 1
2112 = B241-6061 temper T6, =>NPD 1
2114 = B241-6061 temper T6, wld
2116 = B241-6063 temper T4
2118 = B241-6063 temper T4, wld
2120 = B241-6063 temper T5
2122 = B241-6063 temper T5, wld
2124 = B241-6063 temper T6
2126 = B241-6063 temper T6, wld
2140 = B247-3003 temper H112
2142 = B247-3003 temper H112, wld
2144 = B247-5083 temper 0
2146 = B247-5083 temper H112
2148 = B247-5083 temper H112, wld
2150 = B247-6061 temper T6
2152 = B247-6061 temper T6, wld
2160 = B345-1060 temper 0
2162 = B345-1060 temper H112
2164 = B345-3003 temper 0
2166 = B345-3003 temper H18
2168 = B345-3003 temper H112
2170 = B345-5083 temper 0
2172 = B345-5083 temper H112
2174 = B345-5086 temper 0
2176 = B345-5086 temper H112
2178 = B345-6061 temper T4
2180 = B345-6061 temper T4, wld
2182 = B345-6061 temper T6, <NPD 1
2184 = B345-6061 temper T6, =>NPD 1
2186 = B345-6061 temper T6, wld
2188 = B345-6063 temper T4
2190 = B345-6063 temper T4, wld
590
2192 = B345-6063 temper T5

2194 = B345-6063 temper T5, wld
2196 = B345-6063 temper T6
2198 = B345-6063 temper T6, wld
2220 = B361-WP1060 temper 0
2222 = B361-WP1060 temper H112
2224 = B361-WP1100 temper 0
2226 = B361-WP1100 temper H112
2228 = B361-WP3003 temper 0
2230 = B361-WP3003 temper H112
2232 = B361-WP5154 temper 0
2234 = B361-WP5154 temper H112
2236 = B361-WP6061 temper T4
2238 = B361-WP6061 temper T4, wld
B. Codelists
2240 = B361-WP6061 temper T6
2242 = B361-WP6061 temper T6, wld
2244 = B361-WP6063 temper T4
2246 = B361-WP6063 temper T4, wld
2248 = B361-WP6063 temper T6
2250 = B361-WP6063 temper T6, wld
2252 = B361-AP Alclad 3003 temper 0
2254 = B361-AP Alclad 3003 temper H112
Other Materials 2300-2999

2310 = B337-1
2311 = B337-2
2313 = B337-3
2317 = B337-7
2320 = C76-CLIII
2325 = C443
2350 = C700
2400 = D1785-PVC1120
2402 = D2467-PVC1120
2440 = F439-CPVC4120
2442 = F441-CPVC4120
Gaskets 3000-3999]
3051 = G51 [Flat, org fib, nitrile binder]
3052 = G52 [Flat, org fib, nitrile binder, full face]
3076 = G76 [Flat, graph]
3077 = G77 [Flat, graph, full face]
3078 = G78 [Flat, graph, 304 tang reinf]
3079 = G79 [Flat, graph, 304 wire mesh reinf]
3101 = G101 [Flat, asb]
3102 = G102 [Flat, asb, full face]
3103 = G103 [Flat, asb, wire mesh reinf]
3111 = G111 [Flat, blue-asb]
3112 = G112 [Flat, blue-asb, full face]
3154 = G154 [Flat, Buna-N]
3171 = G171 [Flat, Hypalon]
3175 = G175 [Flat, Kel-F]
3189 = G189 [Flat, neoprene]
3195 = G195 [Flat, polyethylene]
3204 = G204 [Flat, Teflon]
3210 = G210 [Flat, Viton]
3231 = G231 [Flat, soft-iron]
3234 = G234 [Flat, 304]
3236 = G236 [Flat, 321/347
591
________________
3241 = G241 [Corr, soft-iron]

3244 = G244 [Corr, 304]
3246 = G246 [Corr, 321/347
3251 = G251 [Flat dbl jktd, PTFE-J, asb-F]

3256 = G256 [Flat dbl jktd, Teflon-J, blue-asb-F]
3261 = G261 [Flat dbl jktd, soft-iron-J, graph-F]
3262 = G262 [Flat dbl jktd, soft-iron-J, asb-F]
3266 = G266 [Flat dbl jktd, low-C-steel-J, graph-F]
3267 = G267 [Flat dbl jktd, low-C-steel-J, asb-F]
3271 = G271 [Flat dbl jktd, 304-J, graph-F]
3272 = G272 [Flat dbl jktd, 304-J, asb-F]
3276 = G276 [Flat dbl jktd, 321/347-J, graph-F]
3277 = G277 [Flat dbl jktd, 321/347-J, asb-F]
3281 = G281 [Flat dbl jktd, I600-J, graph-F]
3282 = G282 [Flat dbl jktd, I600-J, asb-F]
3286 = G286 [Flat dbl jktd, I800-J, graph-F
3306 = G306 [Corr dbl jktd, soft-iron-J, graph-F]

3307 = G307 [Corr dbl jktd, soft-iron-J, asb-F]
3311 = G311 [Corr dbl jktd, low-C-steel-J, graph-F]
3312 = G312 [Corr dbl jktd, low-C-steel-J, asb-F]
3316 = G316 [Corr dbl jktd, 304-J, graph-F]
3317 = G317 [Corr dbl jktd, 304-J, asb-F]
3321 = G321 [Corr dbl jktd, 321/347-J, graph-F]
3322 = G322 [Corr dbl jktd, 321/347-J, asb-F]
3326 = G326 [Corr dbl jktd, I600-J, graph-F]
3327 = G327 [Corr dbl jktd, I600-J, asb-F]
3331 = G331 [Corr dbl jktd, I800-J, graph-F
3356 = G356 [Inlaid corr, soft-iron-J, asb-chords]

3361 = G361 [Inlaid corr, low-C-steel-J, asb-chords]
3366 = G366 [Inlaid corr, 304-J, asb-chords
3403 = G403 [O ring, Buna-N]

3404 = G404 [O ring, butyl]
3408 = G408 [O ring, EDPM]
3429 = G429 [O ring, nitrile]
3435 = G435 [O ring, Saran]
3436 = G436 [O ring, synthetic rubber]
3441 = G441 [O ring, Viton
3451 = G451 [BX ring, soft-iron, 90 BHN max]

3452 = G452 [BX ring, lo-C, 120 BHN max]
3463 = G463 [BX ring, 304, 140 BHN max]
3466 = G466 [BX ring, 316, 140 BHN max]
3468 = G468 [BX ring, 321, 140 BHN max]
3473 = G473 [BX ring, I-X-750
3476 = G476 [RX ring, soft-iron, 90 BHN max]

3477 = G477 [RX ring, lo-C, 120 BHN max]
3488 = G488 [RX ring, 304, 140 BHN max]
3491 = G491 [RX ring, 316, 140 BHN max]
3493 = G493 [RX ring, 321, 140 BHN max]
3498 = G498 [RX ring, I-X-750
3551 = G551 [Octag ring, soft-iron, 90 BHN max]

3552 = G552 [Octag ring, lo-C, 120 BHN max]
3556 = G556 [Octag ring, 5Cr-0.5Mo, 130 BHN max]
3563 = G563 [Octag ring, 304, 140 BHN max]
3573 = G573 [Octag ring, I-X-750
592
3601 = G601 [Oval ring, soft-iron, 90 BHN max]

3602 = G602 [Oval ring, lo-C, 120 BHN max]
3606 = G606 [Oval ring, 5Cr-0.5Mo, 130 BHN max]
3608 = G608 [Oval ring, 9Cr-1Mo, 130 BHN max]
3610 = G610 [Oval ring, 410, 170 BHN max]
3623 = G623 [Oval ring, I-X-750
3651 = G651 [Sprl-wnd, 304-W, mica/graph-F, CS-CR]

3653 = G653 [Sprl-wnd, 304-W, graph-F, CS-CR]
3655 = G655 [Sprl-wnd, 304-W, asb-F, CS-CR]
3657 = G657 [Sprl-wnd, 304-W, blue-asb-F, CS-CR]
3659 = G659 [Sprl-wnd, 304-W, Teflon-F, CS-CR]
B. Codelists
3661 = G661 [Sprl-wnd, 304-W, mica/graph-F, CS-CR, 304-IR]
3663 = G663 [Sprl-wnd, 304-W, graph-F, CS-CR, 304-IR]
3665 = G665 [Sprl-wnd, 304-W, asb-F, CS-CR, 304-IR]
3669 = G669 [Sprl-wnd, 304-W, Teflon-F, CS-CR, 304-IR

3677 = G677 [Sprl-wnd, 316-W, crodidolite asb-F, CS-CR]
3691 = G691 [Sprl-wnd, 316L-W, mica/graph-F, CS-CR]

3693 = G693 [Sprl-wnd, 316L-W, graph-F, CS-CR]
3695 = G695 [Sprl-wnd, 316L-W, asb-F, CS-CR]
3699 = G699 [Sprl-wnd, 316L-W, Teflon-F, CS-CR]
3701 = G701 [Sprl-wnd, 316L-W, mica/gra-F, CS-CR, 316L-IR]
3703 = G703 [Sprl-wnd, 316L-W, graph-F, CS-CR, 316L-IR]
3705 = G705 [Sprl-wnd, 316L-W, asb-F, CS-CR, 316L-IR]
3709 = G709 [Sprl-wnd, 316L-W, Teflon-F, CS-CR, 316L-IR


3751 = G751 [Sprl-wnd, I600-W, mica/graph-F, CS-CR]

3753 = G753 [Sprl-wnd, I600-W, graph-F, CS-CR]
3755 = G755 [Sprl-wnd, I600-W, asb-F, CS-CR]
3761 = G761 [Sprl-wnd, I600-W, mica/graph-F, I600-O&IR]
3763 = G763 [Sprl-wnd, I600-W, graph-F, I600-O&IR]
3765 = G765 [Sprl-wnd, I600-W, asb-F, I600-O&IR
593
________________
3771 = G771 [Sprl-wnd, I800-W, mica/graph-F, CS-CR]

3773 = G773 [Sprl-wnd, I800-W, graph-F, CS-CR]
3775 = G775 [Sprl-wnd, I800-W, asb-F, CS-CR]
3781 = G781 [Sprl-wnd, I800-W, mica/graph-F, I800-O&IR]
3783 = G783 [Sprl-wnd, I800-W, graph-F, I800-O&IR]
3785 = G785 [Sprl-wnd, I800-W, asb-F, I800-O&IR
Bolting 4000-4999]
4011 = B11 [A193-B5, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-3]
4012 = B12 [A193-B5, lub, w/A194-3]
4014 = B14 [A193-B5, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-4]
4015 = B15 [A193-B5, lub, w/A194-4]
4021 = B21 [A193-B6, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-6]
4022 = B22 [A193-B6, lub, w/A194-6]
4031 = B31 [A193-B7, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-2H]
4032 = B32 [A193-B7, lub, w/A194-2H]
4033 = B33 [A193-B7 zinc coated w/A194-2H zinc coated]
4035 = B35 [A193-B7 galv w/A194-2H galv]
4038 = B38 [A193-B7M, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-2H]
4039 = B39 [A193-B7M, lub, w/A194-2H]
4041 = B41 [A193-B8 Cl.1, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-8]
4042 = B42 [A193-B8 Cl.1, lub, w/A194-8]
4044 = B44 [A193-B8C Cl.1, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-8C]
4045 = B45 [A193-B8C Cl.1, lub, w/A194-8C]
4046 = B46 [A193-B8 Cl.1, lub, w/A194-8]
4047 = B47 [A193-B8M Cl.1, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-8M]
4048 = B48 [A193-B8M Cl.1, lub, w/A194-8M
4050 = B50 [A193-B8T Cl.1, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-8T]
4051 = B51 [A193-B8T Cl.1, lub, w/A194-8T]
4061 = B61 [A193-B16, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-3]
4062 = B62 [A193-B16, lub, w/A194-3]
4064 = B64 [A193-B16, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-4]
4065 = B65 [A193-B16, lub, w/A194-4]
4066 = B66 [A193-B16, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-7]
4067 = B67 [A193-B16, lub, w/A194-7]
4068 = B68 [A193-B16, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-8M]
4069 = B69 [A193-B16, lub, w/A194-8M]
4071 = B71 [A307-B w/A563-A]
4074 = B74 [A320-L7, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-4]
4075 = B75 [A320-L7, lub, w/A194-4]
4076 = B76 [A320-B8, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-8]
4077 = B77 [A320-B8, lub, w/A194-8]
4078 = B78 [A320-B8, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-B8]
4079 = B79 [A320-B8, lub, w/A194-B8]
4080 = B80 [A320-B8T Cl.1 >=1.5" lub, w/A194-B8]
4081 = B81 [A320-B8T Cl.1 lub, w/A194-B8]
4082 = B82 [A325 w/A325]
4084 = B84 [A453-660, >=1.5" lub, w/A453-660]
4085 = B85 [A453-660, lub, w/A453-660
4500 = Undefined
Materials for British Standards - Ranges used 6000-7999
carbon steel pipes and tubes BS3601

6000 = BS3601:BW320
6001 = BS3601:ERW320
6002 = BS3601:ERW360
6003 = BS3601:ERW430
6004 = BS3601:S360
6005 = BS3601:S430
6006 = BS3601:SAW430
594
steel pipes and tubes BS3602 part 1 1987

6010 = BS3602:PART 1:HFS360:Cat 1
6011 = BS3602:PART 1:HFS360:Cat 2
6012 = BS3602:PART 1:HFS430:Cat 1
6013 = BS3602:PART 1:HFS430:Cat 2
6014 = BS3602:PART 1:HFS500Nb:Cat 1
6015 = BS3602:PART 1:HFS500Nb:Cat 2
6016 = BS3602:PART 1:CFS360:Cat 1
6017 = BS3602:PART 1:CFS360:Cat 2
6018 = BS3602:PART 1:CFS430:Cat 1
6019 = BS3602:PART 1:CFS430:Cat 2
6020 = BS3602:PART 1:CFS500Nb:Cat 1
6021 = BS3602:PART 1:CFS500Nb:Cat 2
6022 = BS3602:PART 1:ERW360:Cat 1
6023 = BS3602:PART 1:ERW360:Cat 2
6024 = BS3602:PART 1:ERW430:Cat 1
B. Codelists
6025 = BS3602:PART 1:ERW430:Cat 2
6026 = BS3602:PART 1:CEW360:Cat 1
6027 = BS3602:PART 1:CEW360:Cat 2
6028 = BS3602:PART 1:CEW430:Cat 1
6029 = BS3602:PART 1:CEW430:Cat 2
steel pipes and tubes elevated temp prop BS3602 part 2

6030 = BS3602:PART 2:SAW410:cat 1
6031 = BS3602:PART 2:SAW410:cat 2
6032 = BS3602:PART 2:SAW460:cat 1
6033 = BS3602:PART 2:SAW460:cat 2
steel pipes and tubes low temp prop BS3603 1977

6040 = BS3603 HFS410 LT 50 Cat 1
6041 = BS3603 HFS410 LT 50 Cat 2
6042 = BS3603 CFS410 LT 50 Cat 1
6043 = BS3603 CFS410 LT 50 Cat 2
6044 = BS3603 ERW410 LT 50 Cat 1
6045 = BS3603 ERW410 LT 50 Cat 2
6046 = BS3603 CEW410 LT 50 Cat 1
6047 = BS3603 CEW410 LT 50 Cat 2
6048 = BS3603 HFS503 LT 100 Cat 1
6049 = BS3603 HFS503 LT 100 Cat 2
6050 = BS3603 CFS503 LT 100 Cat 1
6051 = BS3603 CFS503 LT 100 Cat 2
6052 = BS3603 HFS509 LT 196 Cat 1
6053 = BS3603 HFS509 LT 196 Cat 2
6054 = BS3603 CFS509 LT 196 Cat 1
6055 = BS3603 CFS509 LT 196 Cat 2
steel pipes and tubes elevated temp prop BS3604

6060 = BS3604:HFS620-460 Cat 1
6061 = BS3604:CFS620-460 Cat 1
6062 = BS3604:ERW620-460 Cat 1
6063 = BS3604:CEW620-460 Cat 1
6064 = BS3604:HFS620-460 Cat 2
6065 = BS3604:CFS620-460 Cat 2
6066 = BS3604:ERW620-460 Cat 2
6067 = BS3604:CEW620-460 Cat 2
6068 = BS3604:HFS620-440 Cat 1
6069 = BS3604:CFS620-440 Cat 1
6070 = BS3604:ERW620-440 Cat 1
6071 = BS3604:CEW620-440 Cat 1
6072 = BS3604:HFS620-440 Cat 2
6073 = BS3604:CFS620-440 Cat 2
6074 = BS3604:ERW620-440 Cat 2
595
________________
6075 = BS3604:CEW620-440 Cat 2

6076 = BS3604:HFS621 Cat 1
6077 = BS3604:CFS621 Cat 1
6078 = BS3604:ERW621 Cat 1
6079 = BS3604:CEW621 Cat 1
6080 = BS3604:HFS621 Cat 2
6081 = BS3604:CFS621 Cat 2
6082 = BS3604:ERW621 Cat 2
6083 = BS3604:CEW621 Cat 2
6084 = BS3604:HFS660 Cat 1
6085 = BS3604:CFS660 Cat 1
6086 = BS3604:HFS660 Cat 2
6087 = BS3604:CFS660 Cat 2
6088 = BS3604:HFS622 Cat 1
6089 = BS3604:CFS622 Cat 1
6090 = BS3604:HFS622 Cat 2
6091 = BS3604:CFS622 Cat 2
6092 = BS3604:HFS625 Cat 1
6093 = BS3604:CFS625 Cat 1
6094 = BS3604:HFS625 Cat 2
6095 = BS3604:CFS625 Cat 2
6096 = BS3604:HFS629-470 Cat 1
6097 = BS3604:CFS629-470 Cat 1
6098 = BS3604:HFS629-470 Cat 2
6099 = BS3604:CFS629-470 Cat 2
6100 = BS3604:HFS629-590 Cat 1
6101 = BS3604:CFS629-590 Cat 1
6102 = BS3604:HFS629-590 Cat 2
6103 = BS3604:CFS629-590 Cat 2
6104 = BS3604:HFS762 Cat 1
6105 = BS3604:CFS762 Cat 1
6106 = BS3604:HFS762 Cat 2
6107 = BS3604:CFS762 Cat 2
SS pipes and tubes for pressure purposes BS3605:1973

6110 = BS3605 304S14
6111 = BS3605 304S18
6112 = BS3605 304S59
6113 = BS3605 304S22
6114 = BS3605 304S25
6115 = BS3605 316S14
6116 = BS3605 316S18
6117 = BS3605 316S59
6118 = BS3605 316S22
6119 = BS3605 316S26
6120 = BS3605 321S18
6121 = BS3605 321S59(1010)
6122 = BS3605 321S59(1105)
6123 = BS3605 321S22
6124 = BS3605 347S18
6125 = BS3605 347S59
6126 = BS3605 347S17
plates BS1501 part 1 1980

6200 = BS1501-141 360A
6201 = BS1501-151 360A
6202 = BS1501-151 400A
6203 = BS1501-151 430A
6204 = BS1501-151 360B
6205 = BS1501-151 400B
6206 = BS1501-151 430B
6207 = BS1501-154 360A
596
6208 = BS1501-154 400A

6209 = BS1501-154 430A
6210 = BS1501-161 360A
6211 = BS1501-161 400A
6212 = BS1501-161 430A
6213 = BS1501-161 360B
6214 = BS1501-161 400B
6215 = BS1501-161 430B
6216 = BS1501-164 360A RT
6217 = BS1501-164 360A LT0
6218 = BS1501-164 360A LT20
6219 = BS1501-164 360B RT
6220 = BS1501-164 360B LT0
6221 = BS1501-164 360B LT20
6222 = BS1501-164 400A RT
6223 = BS1501-164 400A LT0
B. Codelists
6224 = BS1501-164 400A LT20
6225 = BS1501-164 400B RT
6226 = BS1501-164 400B LT0
6227 = BS1501-164 400B LT20
6228 = BS1501-223 460A RT
6229 = BS1501-223 460A LT0
6230 = BS1501-223 460A LT15
6231 = BS1501-223 460A LT30
6232 = BS1501-223 460B RT
6233 = BS1501-223 460B LT0
6234 = BS1501-223 460B LT15
6235 = BS1501-223 460B LT30
6236 = BS1501-223 490A RT
6237 = BS1501-223 490A LT0
6238 = BS1501-223 490A LT15
6239 = BS1501-223 490A LT30
6240 = BS1501-223 490B RT
6241 = BS1501-223 490B LT0
6242 = BS1501-223 490B LT15
6243 = BS1501-223 490B LT30
6244 = BS1501-224 400A RT
6245 = BS1501-224 400A LT0
6246 = BS1501-224 400A LT20
6247 = BS1501-224 400A LT30
6248 = BS1501-224 400A LT40
6249 = BS1501-224 400A LT50
6250 = BS1501-224 400B RT
6251 = BS1501-224 400B LT0
6252 = BS1501-224 400B LT20
6253 = BS1501-224 400B LT30
6254 = BS1501-224 400B LT40
6255 = BS1501-224 400B LT50
6256 = BS1501-224 430A RT
6257 = BS1501-224 430A LT0
6258 = BS1501-224 430A LT20
6259 = BS1501-224 430A LT30
6260 = BS1501-224 430A LT40
6261 = BS1501-224 430A LT50
6262 = BS1501-224 430B RT
6263 = BS1501-224 430B LT0
6264 = BS1501-224 430B LT20
6265 = BS1501-224 430B LT30
6266 = BS1501-224 430B LT40
6267 = BS1501-224 430B LT50
6268 = BS1501-224 460A RT
6269 = BS1501-224 460A LT0
597
________________
6270 = BS1501-224 460A LT20

6271 = BS1501-224 460A LT30
6272 = BS1501-224 460A LT40
6273 = BS1501-224 460A LT50
6274 = BS1501-224 460B RT
6275 = BS1501-224 460B LT0
6276 = BS1501-224 460B LT20
6277 = BS1501-224 460B LT30
6278 = BS1501-224 460B LT40
6279 = BS1501-224 460B LT50
6280 = BS1501-224 490A RT
6281 = BS1501-224 490A LT0
6282 = BS1501-224 490A LT20
6283 = BS1501-224 490A LT30
6284 = BS1501-224 490A LT40
6285 = BS1501-224 490A LT50
6286 = BS1501-224 490B RT
6287 = BS1501-224 490B LT0
6288 = BS1501-224 490B LT20
6289 = BS1501-224 490B LT30
6290 = BS1501-224 490B LT40
6291 = BS1501-224 490B LT50
6292 = BS1501-225 460A LT20
6293 = BS1501-225 460A LT30
6294 = BS1501-225 460A LT50
6295 = BS1501-225 460A LT60
6296 = BS1501-225 460B LT20
6297 = BS1501-225 460B LT30
6298 = BS1501-225 460B LT50
6299 = BS1501-225 460B LT60
6300 = BS1501-225 490A LT20
6301 = BS1501-225 490A LT30
6302 = BS1501-225 490A LT50
6303 = BS1501-225 490B LT20
6304 = BS1501-225 490B LT30
6305 = BS1501-225 490B LT50
steel plates BS1501 part 2 1988

6310 = BS1501-243
6311 = BS1501-271
6312 = BS1501-281
6313 = BS1501-620
6314 = BS1501-621
6315 = BS1501-622-515
6316 = BS1501-622-690
6317 = BS1501-660
6318 = BS1501-503
6319 = BS1501-510
6320 = BS1501-828
steel plates BS1501 part 3 1973

6321 = BS1501-403S17A
6322 = BS1501-405S17A
6323 = BS1501-304S12A
6324 = BS1501-304S15A
6325 = BS1501-304S49A
6326 = BS1501-321S12A
6327 = BS1501-321S49A
6328 = BS1501-347S17A
6329 = BS1501-347S49A
6330 = BS1501-316S12A
6331 = BS1501-316S16A
598
6332 = BS1501-316S37A
6333 = BS1501-316S49A
6334 = BS1501-320S17A
6335 = BS1501-310S24A
6336 = BS1501-NA15A
6337 = BS1501-NA16A
6338 = BS1501-460S52A
6339 = BS1501-304S62A
6340 = BS1501-304S65A
6341 = BS1501-304S87A
6342 = BS1501-347S67A
6343 = BS1501-316S62A
6344 = BS1501-316S66A
6345 = BS1501-316S82A
6351 = BS1501-403S17B
6352 = BS1501-405S17B
B. Codelists
6353 = BS1501-304S12B
6354 = BS1501-304S15B
6355 = BS1501-304S49B
6356 = BS1501-351S12B
6357 = BS1501-351S49B
6358 = BS1501-347S17B
6359 = BS1501-347S49B
6360 = BS1501-316S12B
6361 = BS1501-316S16B
6362 = BS1501-316S37B
6363 = BS1501-316S49B
6364 = BS1501-320S17B
6365 = BS1501-310S24B
6366 = BS1501-NA15B
6367 = BS1501-NA16B
6368 = BS1501-460S52B
6369 = BS1501-304S62B
6370 = BS1501-304S65B
6371 = BS1501-304S87B
6372 = BS1501-377S67B
6373 = BS1501-316S62B
6374 = BS1501-316S66B
6375 = BS1501-316S82B
6376 = BS1501-460S52A LT70
steel forgings to BS1503 1980

6380 = BS1503 164-490
6381 = BS1503 221-410
6382 = BS1503 221-430
6383 = BS1503 221-460
6384 = BS1503 221-490
6385 = BS1503 221-510
6386 = BS1503 221-530
6387 = BS1503 221-550
6388 = BS1503 223-410
6389 = BS1503 223-430
6390 = BS1503 223-460
6391 = BS1503 223-490
6392 = BS1503 223-510
6393 = BS1503 224-410
6394 = BS1503 224-430
6395 = BS1503 224-460
6396 = BS1503 224-490
6397 = BS1503 224-510
599
________________
6398 = BS1503 245-420

6399 = BS1503 620-440
6400 = BS1503 620-540
6401 = BS1503 621-460
6402 = BS1503 660-460
6403 = BS1503 271-560
6404 = BS1503 622-490
6405 = BS1503 622-560
6406 = BS1503 622-650
6407 = BS1503 625-520
6408 = BS1503 625-590
6409 = BS1503 503-490
6410 = BS1503 509-690
6411 = BS1503 410S21
6412 = BS1503 420S29
6413 = BS1503 403S17
6414 = BS1503 405S17
6415 = BS1503 304S11

6416 = BS1503 304S31
6417 = BS1503 304S51
6418 = BS1503 347S31
6419 = BS1503 347S51
6420 = BS1503 321S31
6421 = BS1503 321S51-490
6422 = BS1503 321S51-510
6423 = BS1503 316S11
6424 = BS1503 316S13
6425 = BS1503 316S31
6426 = BS1503 316S33
6427 = BS1503 316S51
6428 = BS1503 320S33
6429 = BS1503 310S31
6430 = BS1503 164-490E

6431 = BS1503 221-430E
6432 = BS1503 221-460E
6433 = BS1503 221-490E
6434 = BS1503 221-510E
6435 = BS1503 221-530E
6436 = BS1503 221-550E
6437 = BS1503 223-410E
6438 = BS1503 223-430E
6439 = BS1503 223-460E
6440 = BS1503 223-490E
6441 = BS1503 223-510E
6442 = BS1503 224-410E
6443 = BS1503 224-430E
6444 = BS1503 224-460E
6445 = BS1503 224-490E
6446 = BS1503 224-510E
6447 = BS1503 245-420E

6448 = BS1503 620-440E
6449 = BS1503 620-540E
6450 = BS1503 621-460E
6451 = BS1503 660-460E
6452 = BS1503 271-560E
6453 = BS1503 622-490E
6454 = BS1503 622-560E
6455 = BS1503 622-650E
6456 = BS1503 625-520E
600
6457 = BS1503 625-590E

6458 = BS1503 410S21E
6459 = BS1503 420S29E
6460 = BS1503 403S17E
6461 = BS1503 405S17E
6462 = BS1503 304S11E

6463 = BS1503 304S31E
6464 = BS1503 304S51E
6465 = BS1503 347S31E
6466 = BS1503 347S51E
6467 = BS1503 321S31E
6468 = BS1503 321S51-490E
6469 = BS1503 321S51-510E
6470 = BS1503 316S11E
6471 = BS1503 316S13E
B. Codelists
6472 = BS1503 316S31E
6473 = BS1503 316S33E
6474 = BS1503 316S51E
6475 = BS1503 223-410-LT10

6476 = BS1503 223-410-LT20
6477 = BS1503 223-410-LT50
6478 = BS1503 223-430-LT10
6479 = BS1503 223-430-LT15
6480 = BS1503 223-430-LT40
6481 = BS1503 223-460-LT0
6482 = BS1503 223-460-LT10
6483 = BS1503 223-460-LT20
6484 = BS1503 223-490-LT0
6485 = BS1503 223-490-LT10
6486 = BS1503 223-510-LT0
6487 = BS1503 224-410-LT10
6488 = BS1503 224-410-LT20
6489 = BS1503 224-410-LT50
6490 = BS1503 224-430-LT10
6491 = BS1503 224-430-LT15
6492 = BS1503 224-430-LT40
6493 = BS1503 224-460-LT0
6494 = BS1503 224-460-LT10
6495 = BS1503 224-460-LT20
6496 = BS1503 224-490-LT0
6497 = BS1503 224-490-LT10
6498 = BS1503 224-510-LT0
6499 = BS1503 503-490-LT80

6500 = BS1503 509-690-LT196
6501 = BS1503 304S11-LT196

6502 = BS1503 304S31-LT196
6503 = BS1503 347S31-LT196
6504 = BS1503 321S31-LT196
6505 = BS1503 321S51-490
6506 = BS1503 321S51-510
6507 = BS1503 316S11-LT196
6508 = BS1503 316S13-LT196
6509 = BS1503 316S31-LT196
6510 = BS1503 316S33-LT196
steel casting to BS1504 1976

6520 = BS1504-161 grade 430A
6521 = BS1504-161 grade 480A
601
________________
6522 = BS1504-161 grade 540A

6523 = BS1504-161 grade 430E
6524 = BS1504-161 grade 480E
6525 = BS1504-161 grade 430A-LT40
6526 = BS1504-245A
6527 = BS1504-245B
6528 = BS1504-245A-LT50
6529 = BS1504-503-LT60
6530 = BS1504-621A
6531 = BS1504-622A
6532 = BS1504-622E
6533 = BS1504-623A
6534 = BS1504-625A
6535 = BS1504-625E
6536 = BS1504-629A
6537 = BS1504-660A
6538 = BS1504-420C29A
6539 = BS1504-425C11A
6540 = BS1504-304C15A
6541 = BS1504-304C15A-LT196
6542 = BS1504-304C12A
6543 = BS1504-304C12A-LT196
6544 = BS1504-347C17A
6545 = BS1504-347C17A-LT196
6546 = BS1504-315C16A
6547 = BS1504-315C16A-LT196
6548 = BS1504-316C12A
6549 = BS1504-316C16A
6550 = BS1504-316C71A
6551 = BS1504-318C17A
6552 = BS1504-316C16E
6553 = BS1504-316C71E
6554 = BS1504-316C12A-LT196
6555 = BS1504-316C16A-LT196
6556 = BS1504-316C71A-LT196
6557 = BS1504-317C12A
6558 = BS1504-317C16A
6559 = BS1504-364C11A
6560 = BS1504-332C11A
6561 = BS1504-310C40A
6562 = BS1504-330C11A
steel bars and billets for bolting BS1506 1986

6570 = BS1506-162
6571 = BS1506-253
6572 = BS1506-253-LT100
6573 = BS1506-509-650
6574 = BS1506-509-650-LT196
6575 = BS1506-509-690
6576 = BS1506-509-690-LT196
6577 = BS1506-630-790
6578 = BS1506-630-790-LT100
6579 = BS1506-630-790-LT75
6580 = BS1506-630-860
6581 = BS1506-630-860-LT100
6582 = BS1506-630-690
6583 = BS1506-630-690-LT100
6584 = BS1506-631-850
6585 = BS1506-670-860
6586 = BS1506-671-850
6587 = BS1506-681-820
6588 = BS1506-410S21-690
602
6589 = BS1506-410S21-720
6590 = BS1506-410S21-760
6591 = BS1506-410S21-750
6592 = BS1506-410S21-770
6593 = BS1506-416S29
6594 = BS1506-286S31
6595 = BS1506-286S31-LT196
6596 = BS1506-304S31
6597 = BS1506-304S31-LT196
6598 = BS1506-304S51
6599 = BS1506-304S61
6600 = BS1506-304S61-LT196
6601 = BS1506-304S71
6602 = BS1506-304S71-LT196
6603 = BS1506-303S22
6604 = BS1506-316S31
B. Codelists
6605 = BS1506-316S31-LT196
6606 = BS1506-316S33
6607 = BS1506-316S33-LT196
6608 = BS1506-316S51
6609 = BS1506-316S53
6610 = BS1506-316S61
6611 = BS1506-316S61-LT196
6612 = BS1506-316S63
6613 = BS1506-316S63-LT196
6614 = BS1506-316S65
6615 = BS1506-316S65-LT196
6616 = BS1506-316S67
6617 = BS1506-316S67-LT196
6618 = BS1506-321S31
6619 = BS1506-321S31-LT196
6620 = BS1506-321S51-490
6621 = BS1506-321S51-520
6622 = BS1506-347S31
6623 = BS1506-347S31-LT196
6624 = BS1506-347S51
7999 = undefined
CL148, Piping Materials Class Description (31999)

NOTE: Codelist numbers 2-7999 are reserved for values that apply
to US practices. Codelist numbers 8000-31999 are reserved for
values that apply to practices in other countries.
1 = [Blank]
US Piping Material Class Descriptions, 2-7999

Irons, F
2 = [FAY1W8] [8F0002] Gravity Head, Gray CI
3 = [FDYLW8] [8F0003] Gravity Head, DI Cement Lined
6 = [FDYLU9] [9F0006] AWWA 150# MJ, DI Cement Lined
Carbon Steels, C
14 = [CAA5UA] [AC0014] CL125 FFFE, CS, Brnz Trim
16 = [CAA5VA] [AC0016] CL125 FFFE, Brnz Trim
19 = [CAALV1] [1C0019] CL150 FFFE, CS Cement Lined
31 = [CAC5C1] [1C0031] CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8
35 = [CAC5G1] [1C0035] CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8
603
________________
43 = [CAC5Q1] [1C0043] CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8, (ANSI-B31.1)

45 = [CAC5R1] [1C0045] CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8
48 = [CAC5U1] [1C0048] CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8
105 = [CAD7K1] [1C0105] CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 9
106 = [CAD7K2] [2C0106] CL300 RFFE, CS, Trim 9
146 = [CAF5S1] [1C0146] CL150 RFFE, CS, SS/TFE Trim
153 = [CAF7J1] [1C0153] CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 13
171 = [CAFYC1] [1C0171] CL150 RFFE, CS, 316 Trim
176 = [CAH5C1] [1C0176] CL150 RFFE-SF, CS, Trim 8
182 = [CAH5G1] [1C0182] CL150 RFFE-SF, CS, Trim 8
183 = [CAH5G2] [2C0183] CL300 RFFE-SF, CS, Trim 8
320 = [CALYC2] [2C0320] CL300 RFFE-SF, CS, 316 Trim
389 = [CAU5P4] [4C0389] CL600 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 8, (ASME-I)
390 = [CAU5P5] [5C0390] CL900 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 5, (ASME-I)
391 = [CAU5P6] [6C0391] CL1500 BE/RJFE, CS, Trim 5, (ASME-I)
394 = [CAU5Q2] [2C0394] CL300 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 8, (ANSI-B31.1)
397 = [CAU5Q6] [6C0397] CL1500 BE/RJFE, CS, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.1)
400 = [CAU5R2] [2C0400] CL300 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 8, (ANSI-B31.3)
403 = [CAU5R6] [6C0403] CL1500 BE/RJFE, CS, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.3)
405 = [CAU5RF] [FC0405] CL800 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.3)
407 = [CAU7C6] [6C0407] CL1500 BE/RJFE, CS, Trim 8
458 = [CAYYC1] [1C0458] CL150 BE, CS
459 = [CAYYC2] [2C0459] CL300 BE, CS
460 = [CDA1U1] [1C0460] CL150 FFFE, Galv CS, Brnz Trim
461 = [CDA5U1] [1C0461] CL150 FFFE, Galv CS, Brnz Trim
548 = [CJD7K1] [1C0548] CL150 RFFE, Killed CS, Trim 12
577 = [CJE7C2] [2C0577] CL300 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 9
593 = [CJE9C2] [2C0593] CL300 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 9
600 = [CJF5C1] [1C0600] CL150 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12
630 = [CJH7C4] [4C0630] CL600 RFFE-SF, Killed CS, Trim 8
722 = [CJL7C2] [2C0722] CL300 RFFE-SF, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12
604

785 = [CJU7C6] [6C0785] CL1500 BE/RJFE, Killed CS, Trim 8
794 = [CJV5C6] [6C0794] CL1500 BE/RJFE, Killed CS, Trim 8
800 = [CJV7C6] [6C0800] CL1500 BE/RJFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12
803 = [CJV7K6] [6C0803] CL1500 BE/RJFE, Killed CS, Trim 12
841 = [CPD5D1] [1C0841] CL150 RFFE, Low Temp CS, Trim 2
842 = [CPD5D2] [2C0842] CL300 RFFE, Low Temp CS, Trim 2
Low and Intermediate Alloy Steels, L

1669 = [LPFYG2] [2L1669] CL300 RFFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, 316 Trim
1670 = [LPTYG2] [2L1670] CL300 RFFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, 316 Trim
1671 = [LPH5B1] [1L1671] CL150 RFFE-SF, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8
B. Codelists
1864 = [LPU5B6] [6L1864] CL1500 BE/RJFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8
1868 = [LPU5P5] [5L1868] CL900 BE/RFFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 5, (ASME-I)
1869 = [LPU5P6] [6L1869] CL1500 BE/RJFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 5, (ASME-I)
1874 = [LPU5Q5] [5L1874] CL900 BE/RFFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.1)
1875 = [LPU5Q6] [6L1875] CL1500 BE/RJFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.1
1882 = [LPU5R6] [6L1882] CL1500 BE/RJFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.3
1885 = [LPU7B6] [6L1885] CL1500 BE/RJFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8
3013 = [LTC5B1] [1L3013] CL150 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8
3193 = [LTH7B5] [5L3193] CL900 RFFE-SF, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8
3203 = [LTH9B2] [2L3203] CL300 RFFE-SF, 5Cr-0.5Mo, NACE, Trim 8
3204 = [LTH9B4] [4L3204] CL600 RFFE-SF, 5Cr-0.5Mo, NACE, Trim 8
3390 = [LTU7B6] [6L3390] CL1500 BE/RJFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8
3725 = [LVC7B1] [1L3725] CL150 RFFE, 9Cr-1Mo, Trim 8
Stainless Steels, S
3977 = [SAC3T1] [1S3977] CL150 RFFE, 304/CS Valves, Trim 8
3984 = [SAD3C1] [1S3984] CL150 RFFE, 304/316 Valves, Trim 12
3985 = [SAD3C2] [2S3985] CL300 RFFE, 304/316 Valves, Trim 12
3988 = [SAD3E1] [1S3988] CL150 RFFE, 304, Trim 2
3989 = [SAD3E2] [2S3989] CL300 RFFE, 304, Trim 2
3991 = [SAD3F1] [1S3991] CL150 RFFE, 304, Trim 2
4104 = [SAFYG1] [1S4104] CL150 RFFE, 304, 316 Trim
4218 = [SAM3T6] [6S4218] CL1500 RJFE, 304/CS Valves, Trim 8
4396 = [SBD3C2] [2S4396] CL300 RFFE, 304L/316 Valves, Trim 12
4488 = [SBF3U1] [1S4488] CL150 RFFE, 304/316 Valves, Trim 2
5135 = [SED5C1] [1S5135] CL150 RFFE, 316, Trim 12
605
________________
5187 = [SEF3C1] [1S5187] CL150 RFFE, 316, Trim 12

5197 = [SEF3G1] [1S5197] CL150 RFFE, 316, Trim 12
6246 = [SHJ3B2] [2S6246] CL300 RFFE-SF, 321/347 Valves, 347HF Trim
6449 = [SHV3B5] [5S6449] CL900 BE/RFFE-SF, 321/347 Valves, 347HF Trim
6450 = [SHV3B6] [6S6450] CL1500 BE/RJFE, 321/347 Valves, 347HF Trim
6457 = [SHV5B6] [6S6457] CL1500 BE/RJFE, 321/347 Valves, 347HF Trim
Copper Alloys, K
Nickel Alloys, N
7540 = [NGF5G1] [1N7540] CL150 RFFE, Inconel 600, Inconel Trim
Aluminum Alloys, A
Other Materials, X
7687 = [XCY1W8] [8X7687] Gravity Head, Vitrified Clay
7689 = [XEY1W8] [8X7689] Gravity Head, Reinforced Concrete
7733 = [XTY1U9] [9X7733] SCH-80, SE, PVC
European Piping Material Class Descriptions, 8000-9999

8000 = Carbon steel
8001 = Stainless steel
8002 = Forged steel
8010 = Ferritic steel
8011 = Austenitic steel
8020 = Plastic
8021 = Fiber glass
8030 = Glass lined
8031 = Cement lined
8032 = Chloroprene (CR) lined
9999 = Undefined
The names of Piping Materials Classes are determined as follows:
o A list includes possible Piping Materials Classes. It consists of six ch

names which are established on the basis of the naming convention ABCDEF.
meaning of each of the characters in this code is defined below. Corresp
values are given in the lists included in subsequent pages.
A.......materials group
B.......materials type
C.......detail features
D.......corrosion allowance or type of lining
E.......service description
F.......pressure rating
o The name of a Piping Materials Class is then determined from the conventi
FAXXX, where:
F.......pressure rating
A.......material group
XXX.....sequence number from list in 2090-41-SN
MATERIALS GROUP AND TYPE: (1st and 2nd character)
606
Irons, F
A= Gray iron
D= Ductile iron
G= Ferritic ductile iron
J= Austenitic ductile iron
Z= Other 1
Carbon Steels, C
A= CS
D= CS, galvanized
G= CS, jacketed
J= CS, killed
M= CS, killed, jacketed
P= CS, low temp
X= Other 1
Y= Other 2
B. Codelists
Z= Other 3
Low and Intermediate Alloys, L

A= 2Ni-1Cu
C= 3.5Ni
D= 5Ni
G= 9Ni
J= C-0.5Mo
M= 0.75Cr-0.5Mo
N= 1Cr-0.5Mo
P= 1.25Cr-0.5Mo
Q= 2Cr-0.5Mo
R= 2.25Cr-1Mo
S= 3Cr-1Mo
T= 5Cr-0.5Mo
U= 7Cr-0.5Mo
V= 9Cr-1Mo
X= Other 1
Y= Other 2
Z= Other 3
Stainless Steels, S
A= 304
B= 304L
C= 304H
D= 310
E= 316
F= 316L
G= 316H
H= 321
J= 321H
K= 410S
L= CHP10
M= CHP20
N= CPF10MC
O= CPH8
P= CPK20
Q= UNS S31200
R= UNS S31250
S= UNS S31500
T= UNS S31803
U= UNS S32304
V= UNS S32550
W= Alloy 20
X= Other 1
Y= Other 2
Z= Other 3
607
________________
Copper Alloys, K
A= Brass
F= Bronze
K= Copper
P= 90Cu-10Ni
R= 70Cu-30Ni
X= Other 1
Y= Other 2
Z= Other 3
Nickel Alloys, N
A= Low C Ni
D= Monel
E= K-Monel
F= R-Monel
G= Inconel 600
H= Inconel 601
J= Inconel 625
L= Incoloy 800
M= Incoloy 800H
N= Incoloy 801
P= Incoloy 802
Q= Incoloy 825
T= Hastelloy B
U= Hastelloy C
V= Hastelloy G
X= Other 1
Y= Other 2
Z= Other 3
Aluminum Alloys, A
C= 3002 aluminum
D= 3003 aluminum
E= 3004 aluminum
F= 5050 aluminum
G= 5052 aluminum
Q= 6061 aluminum
R= 6063 aluminum
S= Alclad
X= Other 1
Y= Other 2
Z= Other 3
Other Materials, X
A= Asbestos cement
B= Borosilicate glass
C= Clay, vitrified
D= Concrete, prestressed
E= Concrete, reinforced
F= CPVC
G= Epoxy/Glass fib
J= Furan/Carbon
K= Furan/Glass fib
L= Kynar
N= Nylon
P= Polyester/Glass fib
Q= Polyethylene, high dens
R= Polyethylene, low dens
S= Polypropylene
T= PVC
U= Teflon
V= Titanium
608
W= Zirconium
X= Other 1
Y= Other 2
Z= Other 3
MATERIALS CLASS DETAILS: (3rd character)
A= Std FF, std trim

B= Std FF, other
C= Std RF, std trim
D= Std RF, SS trim
E= Std RF, Monel trim
F= Std RF, other
G= Std RF, other
H= RFSF, std trim
J= RFSF, SS trim
B. Codelists
K= RFSF, Monel trim
L= RFSF, other
M= RTJ, std trim
N= RTJ, SS trim
0= RTJ, Monel trim
P= RTJ, other
Q= MJ, std trim
R= MJ, SS trim
S= MJ, Monel trim
T= MJ, other
U= BE, std trim
V= BE, SS trim
W= BE, Monel trim
X= BE, other
Y= Other 1
Z= Other 2
CA OR LINING TYPE: (4th character)
1= None
2= 0.020"
3= 0.030"
4= 0.050"
5= 0.063"
6= 0.10"
7= 0.125"
8= 0.188"
9= 0.250"
A= 405 clad
B= 410S clad
C= 304 clad
D= 304L clad
E= 316 clad
F= 316L clad
G= 317 clad
H= 317L clad
J= 321 clad
L= Cement lined
M= Epoxy lined
N= Glass lined
O= Kynar lined
P= Polyester lined
Q= Polypropylene lined
R= PTFE lined
S= Saran lined
T= Teflon lined
609
________________
U= TK31 lined
V= R11 lined
W= R15 lined
X= R18 lined
Y= Other 1
Z= Other 2
SERVICE: (5th character)
A= Process, hottest (-20 to 1500+/- degF)

B= Process, hotter (-20 to 1000+/- degF)
C= Process, hot (-20 to 800 degF)
D= Process, cold (-20 to -50 degF)
E= Process, colder (-20 to -150 degF)
F= Process, coldest (-20 to -425 degF)
G= Process, other
H= Category M
J= Acid
K= Caustic/Amine
L= LPG
P= Steam ASME-I
Q= Steam B31.1
R= Steam B31.3
S= Fuel gas, fuel oil
T= Lube oil, seal oil
U= Category D
V= Firewater
W= Sewer
X= Instrument
Y= Other 1
Z= Other 2
RATING: (6th character)
1= CL150
2= CL300
3= CL400
4= CL600
5= CL900
6= CL1500
7= CL2500
8= GRAVHD
9= OTHER
A= CL125
F= CL800
G= CL2000
H= CL3000
J= CL4500
K= CL5000
L= CL6000
M= CL9000
N= CL10000
R= CL15000
T= CL20000
V= CL30000
610
CL160, Responsibility (25)

1 = [Blank]
2 = By Contractor
3 = By Owner
4 = By A
5 = By B
6 = By C
7 = By D
8 = By E
9 = By Equip Vendor
10 = By Vendor
15 = By Piping
16 = By Instruments
B. Codelists
25 = By Others
CL180, Fabrication Category (99)

NOTE: Some data displays require that only values to the left of
the "=" sign be shown; other reports require that only values to the
right of the "=" sign be displayed.
1 = [Blank]
5 = CSSF, Contractor supplied, shop fabricated
7 = CSFF, Contractor supplied, field fabricated
15 = SSSF, Shop supplied, shop fabricated
17 = SSFF, Shop supplied, field fabricated
25 = FSSF, Field supplied, shop fabricated
27 = FSFF, Field supplied, field fabricated
35 = ASSF, A supplied, shop fabricated
37 = ASFF, A supplied, field fabricated
45 = BSSF, B supplied, shop fabricated
47 = BSFF, B supplied, field fabricated
95 = OSSF, Owner supplied, shop fabricated
97 = OSFF, Owner supplied, field fabricated
CL190, Coating Requirements (99)

1 = [Blank]
2 = None
3 = Galv
4 = PS1.04
5 = PS1.07
6 = PS1.08
7 = PS1.09
8 = PS1.10
9 = PS1.11
10 = PS1.12
11 = PS1.13
12 = PS2.03
13 = PS2.05
14 = PS4.01
15 = PS4.02
16 = PS4.03
17 = PS4.04
18 = PS4.05
611
________________
19 = PS8.01
20 = PS9.01
21 = PS10.01
22 = PS10.02
23 = PS11.01
24 = PS12.01
25 = PS13.01
26 = PS14.01
27 = PS16.01
28 = PS18.01
40 = Varies
CL200, Heat Tracing Requirements (10)

of existing codelist values.
1 = [Blank]
2 = NT [Not heat traced]
3 = HT [Heat traced]
4 = PHT [Partially heat traced]
CL210, Heat Tracing Media (60)

NOTE: Codelist numbers 3-39 have been reserved for heat tracing
media used for non-jacketed pipe heat tracing. Codelist numbers
40-60 have been reserved for heat tracing media used for jacketed pipe
heat tracing. It is important that this allocation be respected.
1 = [Blank]
2 = N [None]
For Non Jacketed Pipe Heat Tracing, 3-39

3 = E [Electric]
10 = FA [Heat transfer fluid A]
11 = FB [Heat transfer fluid B]
12 = FC [Heat transfer fluid C]
16 = I [Impedance]
17 = MI [Magnetic induction]
18 = SKE [Skin effect]
20 = SH [Steam high pressure, CL900]
21 = SL [Steam low pressure, CL150]
22 = SM [Steam medium pressure, CL600]
23 = SN [Steam normal pressure, CL300]
24 = SS [Steam superheated]
For Jacketed Pipe Heat Tracing, 40-60

40 = FAJ [Heat transfer fluid A]
41 = FBJ [Heat transfer fluid B]
42 = FCJ [Heat transfer fluid C]
50 = SHJ [Steam high pressure, CL900]
51 = SLJ [Steam low pressure, CL150]
52 = SMJ [Steam medium pressure, CL600]
53 = SNJ [Steam normal pressure, CL300]
54 = SSJ [Steam superheated]
612
CL220, Insulation Purpose (40)

1 = [Blank]
2 = N [Not insulated]
3 = P [Personnel protection insulated]
4 = H [Hot insulated]
5 = HS [Hot insulated with sound attenuation]
11 = HF [Hot insulated with fire protection]
14 = AS [Anti-sweat insulated]
15 = C [Cold insulated]
16 = CV [Cold insulated vacuum type]
17 = CS [Cold insulated with sound attenuation]
18 = CH [Cold and hot insulated]
20 = CF [Cold insulated with fire protection]
B. Codelists
21 = S [Sound attenuation insulated]
22 = SV [Sound attenuation insulation with vapor barrier]
30 = R11 [Refractory lined, insulation]
32 = R15 [Refractory lined, insulation/erosion]
34 = R18 [Refractory lined, erosion]
40 = Varies
CL230, Cleaning Requirements (99)

1 = [Blank]
2 = None
3 = CC1
4 = CC2
5 = CC3
6 = CC4
7 = CC5
15 = Varies
CL330, CP Type/Termination/Preparation (999)

NOTE: Use 2-199 for bolted types; 300-399 for male types and
400-599 for female types. Refer to Reference Data Manager
(PD_DATA) Reference Guide for additional data.
1 = [Blank]
2 = FE [Flanged end]
Use 11-15 for ends without integral gaskets; 16-19 for ends with
integral gaskets.
10 = FFTP (11-19) [Flat-face flanged termination type]
11 = FFFE [Flat-face flanged end]
16 = FFFEWG [Flat-face flanged end with integral gasket]
integral gaskets.
20 = RFTP (21-29) [Raised-face flanged termination type]
21 = RFFE [Raised-face flanged end]
26 = RFFEWG [Raised-face flanged end with integral gasket]
integral gaskets.
30 = RJFTP (31-39) [RTJ-face flanged termination type]
31 = RJFE [RTJ-face flanged end]
613
________________
integral gaskets.
40 = TMFTP (41-49) [Tongue/male-face flanged termination type]
41 = STFE [Small-tongue-face flanged end]
42 = LTFE [Large-tongue-face flanged end]
43 = SMFE [Small-male-face flanged end]
44 = LMFE [Large-male-face flanged end]
integral gaskets.
50 = GFFTP (51-59) [Groove/female-face flanged termination type]
51 = SGFE [Small-groove-face flanged end]
52 = LGFE [Large-groove-face flanged end]
53 = SFFE [Small-female-face flanged end]
54 = LFFE [Large-female-face flanged end]
Use 61-65 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets; 66-69 for
lap-flanged ends with integral gaskets.
60 = FFLFTP (61-69) [Flat-face lap-flanged termination type]
61 = FFLFE [Flat-face lap-flanged end]
70 = RFLFTP (71-79) [Raised-face lap-flanged termination type]
71 = RFLFE [Raised-face lap-flanged end]
80 = RJFLFTP (81-89) [RTJ-face lap-flanged termination type]
81 = RJLFE [RTJ-face lap-flanged end]
90 = TMFLFTP (91-99) [Tongue/male-face lap-flanged termination type]
91 = STLFE [Small-tongue-face lap-flanged end]
92 = LTLFE [Large-tongue-face lap-flanged end]
93 = SMLFE [Small-male-face lap-flanged end]
94 = LMLFE [Large-male-face lap-flanged end]
Use 101-105 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets; 106-109

for lap-flanged ends with integral gaskets.
100 = GFFLFTP (101-109)[Groove/female-face lap-flanged termination type]
101 = SGLFE [Small-groove-face lap-flanged end]
102 = LGLFE [Large-groove-face lap-flanged end]
103 = SFLFE [Small-female-face lap-flanged end]
104 = LFLFE [Large-female-face lap-flanged end]
Use 111-115 for ends without integral gaskets; 116-119 for ends
with integral gaskets.
110 = FFTBTP (111-119)[Flat-face thru-bolted termination type]
111 = FFTBE [Flat-face thru-bolted end]
116 = FFTBEWG [Flat-face thru-bolted end with integral gasket]
120 = RFTBTP (121-129)[Raised-face thru-bolted termination type]
121 = RFTBE [Raised-face thru-bolted end]
126 = RFTBEWG [Raised-face thru-bolted end with integral gasket]
130 = RJTBTP (131-139)[RTJ-face thru-bolted termination type]
131 = RJTBE [RTJ-face thru-bolted end]
614
140 = MRJTBTP (141-149)[Male RTJ-face thru-bolted termination type]
146 = MRJTBEWG [Male RTJ-face thru-bolted end with integral gasket]
150 = FFTBCSTP (151-159)[Flat-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws termination ty
151 = FFTBCSE [Flat-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end]
156 = FFTBCSEWG [Flat-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end with integ
160 = RFTBCSTP (161-169)[Raised-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws termination
161 = RFTBCSE [Raised-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end]
166 = RFTBCSEWG [Raised-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end with int
B. Codelists
170 = RJTBCSTP (171-179)[RTJ-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws termination typ
171 = RJTBCSE [RTJ-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end]
180 = FFFTBTP (181-189)[Flat-full-face thru-bolted termination type]
181 = FFFTBE [Flat-full-face thru-bolted end]
186 = FFFTBEWG [Flat-full-face thru-bolted end with integral gasket]
190 = MJTP (190-199)[Mechanical joint termination type]

191 = MJE [Mechanical joint end]
300 = MTP (301-399)[Male termination type]
Use 301-309 for welded ends only

301 = BE [Beveled end]
302 = OLET [Olet beveled end]

311 = TBE [Tapered and beveled end]
321 = MFE [Male flared end]
331 = MTE [Male threaded end]
341 = MGE [Male grooved end]
351 = MQCE [Male quick connect end]
355 = MCE [Male clamp end]
361 = MFRE [Male ferrule end]
371 = MHE [Male hose end]
381 = SPE [Spigot end]

391 = PE (391-399)[Plain end]
393 = 3"FFPE [Plain end, 3" field fit]
400 = STP (401-409)[Socket termination type]

401 = SE [Socket end]

420 = SWTP (421-429)[Socketwelded termination type]
421 = SWE [Socketwelded end]
615
________________
440 = FTTP (441-449)[Female threaded termination type]

441 = FTE [Female threaded end]
460 = FGTP (461-469)[Female grooved termination type]

461 = FGE [Female grooved end]
470 = FCTP (471-479)[Female clamp termination type]

471 = FCE [Female clamp end]
480 = FQCTP (481-489)[Female quick connect termination type]

481 = FQCE [Female quick connect end]
500 = FFRTP (501-509)[Female ferrule termination type]

501 = FFRE [Female ferrule end]
520 = FHTP (521-529)[Female hose termination type]

521 = FHE [Female hose end]
540 = BLTP (541-549)[Bell end termination type]

541 = BLE [Push-on bell end]
542 = MJBE [Mechanical joint bell end]
590 = HTP (581-599)[Hole end termination type]

591 = HCE [Circular hole end]
600 = NTP (600-605)[Null termination type]

601 = NE [Null end]
650 = UDTP (651-659)[User defined termination type]

651 = UD [User defined end] (When a "UD"
preparation end is detected by the
system in the piping materials
class, it will prompt the User to define
the actual CP preparation to use. The
value provided by the User will be used
for initial placement of the component
as well as for subsequent recreations of
the piping system.)
CL332, Schedule / Thickness Override

NOTE: Schedule/thickness override values for metric projects must
have codelist values between 499 and 1000.
1 = [Blank]
10 = .0625
11 = .125
12 = .1875
13 = .25
14 = .3125
15 = .375
16 = .4375
17 = .5
18 = .5625
19 = .625
20 = .6875
21 = .75
22 = .8125
616
________________
Appendix B: General Comments
23 = .875
24 = .9375
25 = 1
30 = 1.0625
31 = 1.125
32 = 1.1875
33 = 1.25
34 = 1.3125
35 = 1.375
36 = 1.4375
37 = 1.5
38 = 1.5625
39 = 1.625
40 = 1.6875
41 = 1.75
42 = 1.8125
B. Codelists
43 = 1.875
44 = 1.9375
45 = 2
50 = 2.0625
51 = 2.125
52 = 2.1875
53 = 2.25
54 = 2.3125
55 = 2.375
56 = 2.4375
57 = 2.5
58 = 2.5625
59 = 2.625
60 = 2.6875
61 = 2.75
62 = 2.8125
63 = 2.875
64 = 2.9375
65 = 3
100 = S-5S
101 = S-10S
102 = S-40S
103 = S-80S
110 = S-10
111 = S-20
112 = S-30
113 = S-40
114 = S-60
115 = S-80
116 = S-100
117 = S-120
118 = S-140
119 = S-160
130 = S-STD
131 = S-XS
132 = S-XXS
617
________________
CL340, Safety Classification (99)

1 = [Blank]
2 = SC1
3 = SC2
4 = SC3
5 = SC4
6 = SC5
7 = SC6
8 = SC7
9 = SC8
10 = SC9
CL360, Stress Analysis Requirements (15)

1 = [Blank]
2 = ANR =Analysis not required
3 = ATBP=Analysis to be performed
4 = AC =Analysis completed
CL365, Reporting Requirements (25)

NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing
codelist values.
1 = Reportable by MTO
2 = Not Reportable by MTO
CL366, Requirement to Reconstruct (10)

that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. Labels
always require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be
displayed.
0 = None
1 = reconstruct
2 = re-calculate
CL380, Piping Component Type (2500)

1 = [Blank]
2 = Piping [Primary single line]

3 = Piping [Secondary single line]
4 = Piping [Primary double line]
618
5 = Piping [Double line]

6 = Hose
8 = Tubing
18 = Gate valve
19 = Extended body gate valve
20 = Conduit gate valve
21 = Blank gate valve
22 = 3-way valve
23 = Ball valve [2-way]
24 = 2-way valve
25 = 3-way ball valve
28 = Globe valve [2-way]
29 = Angle globe valve [2-way]
30 = 3-way globe valve
31 = Y globe valve
B. Codelists
33 = Plug valve [2-way]
34 = 4-way valve
35 = 3-way plug valve
36 = 4-way plug valve
39 = Needle valve
43 = Butterfly valve
47 = Diaphragm valve
49 = Knife gate valve
50 = Slide valve [2-way]
51 = 3-way slide valve
54 = Angle valve
55 = Check valve
56 = Wafer check valve
57 = Angle check valve
58 = Stop check valve
59 = Angle stop check valve
60 = Y stop check valve
67 = Backflow preventer
68 = Automatic recirculation valve
70 = Angle blowdown valve
71 = Y blowdown valve
73 = Pinch valve
74 = Float valve
75 = Foot valve
79 = Tank drain valve
86 = Deluge valve
89 = Hose valve
90 = Angle hose valve
93 = Vent/drain valve
97 = Instrument root valve
98 = 3-way instrument root valve
99 = 4-way instrument root valve
117 = Flange
119 = Reducing flange
120 = Expander flange
122 = Orifice flange
124 = Blind flange
126 = Open spectacle blank
127 = Closed spectacle blank
128 = Blank disc
129 = Blind spacer
130 = Tapered spacer
131 = Open spacer
132 = End
133 = Head
619
________________
135 = Plug
137 = Cap
138 = Diameter change
139 = Concentric diameter change
140 = Eccentric diameter change
141 = Coupling/connector
142 = Half coupling
143 = Concentric reducer
144 = Eccentric reducer
148 = Reducing coupling
151 = Concentric swage
152 = Eccentric swage
155 = Union
156 = Orifice union
157 = Dielectric union
159 = Hose connection
160 = Bushing
162 = Reducing insert
163 = Pipe bend
165 = 5.625 deg elbow
167 = 11.25 deg elbow
169 = 22.5 deg elbow
171 = <45 deg direction change
172 = 45 deg direction change
173 = 45 deg elbow
175 = 45 deg LR elbow
176 = 45 deg long tangent elbow
177 = 45 deg 3D elbow
179 = 45 deg union elbow
181 = 45 deg street elbow
182 = 45 deg short elbow
184 = 45 deg long elbow
189 = 60 deg elbow
191 = 45-90 deg direction change
192 = 90 deg direction change
193 = 90 deg elbow
195 = 90 deg SR elbow
196 = 90 deg LR elbow
198 = 90 deg LR long tangent elbow
200 = 90 deg reducing elbow
202 = 90 deg 3D elbow
204 = 90 deg union elbow
206 = 90 deg street elbow
207 = 90 deg reducing street elbow
209 = 90 deg short elbow
210 = 90 deg long elbow
216 = 180 deg return
218 = 180 deg SR return
220 = 180 deg LR return
222 = 180 deg close return
223 = 180 deg medium return
224 = 180 deg open return
229 = Miter
231 = 45 deg miter
233 = 90 deg miter
237 = Tee
239 = Reducing branch tee
240 = Reducing run and branch tee
242 = On-run union tee
243 = On-branch union tee
246 = Street tee
249 = Reducing instrument tee
620
251 = Drip ring tee

253 = Basin tee
260 = True Y
262 = Lateral
264 = Reducing branch lateral
265 = Reducing run and branch lateral
267 = 90 deg short Y-branch
268 = 90 deg reducing short Y-branch
269 = 90 deg long Y-branch
270 = 90 deg reducing long Y-branch
275 = Cross
277 = Reducing branches cross
278 = Reducing run and branches cross
279 = Basin cross
285 = Saddle
287 = Sweepolet
B. Codelists
288 = Weldolet
289 = Sockolet
290 = Thredolet
291 = Nippolet
292 = Elbolet
293 = Latrolet
294 = Endolet
295 = Reinforcing pad
297 = Reinforcing weld
299 = Buttweld
303 = Branch nipple
304 = In-line nipple
310 = Gasket
312 = Stud
313 = Nut
315 = Fire monitor

316 = Elevated fire monitor
317 = Remotely operated fire monitor
318 = Foam monitor
319 = Elevated foam monitor
320 = Remotely operated foam monitor
324 = Fire hydrant [2-way]
325 = Fire hydrant w/monitor nozzle [2-way]
327 = 3-way fire hydrant
338 = Hose reel
339 = Hose rack station
340 = Foam chamber
344 = Wet sprinkler
345 = Pre-action sprinkler
346 = Spray sprinkler
352 = Eye wash
353 = Safety shower
354 = Safety shower and eye wash
374 = Siamese [2-way]
380 = 90 deg siamese [2-way]
513 = Flame arrestor

515 = Hammer arrestor
516 = Vent silencer
517 = In-line silencer
518 = Vent
519 = Exhaust head
521 = Breather vent
523 = Free vent w/o screen
524 = Free vent w/screen
621
________________
525 = Motor operated valve

527 = Mixing T
529 = Spray nozzle
533 = Removable spool
535 = Swing elbow
540 = Expansion joint
542 = Hinged expansion joint
544 = Swivel joint
546 = Mechanical coupling
548 = Flexible hose
552 = Sample cooler
556 = Strainer/filter
557 = Single basket strainer
559 = Duplex basket strainer
561 = T strainer
563 = Y strainer
564 = Temporary strainer
565 = Basket strainer
567 = Cone strainer
569 = Flat plate strainer
571 = Sump strainer
576 = Filter
582 = Steam trap
583 = Float steam trap
584 = Inverted bucket steam trap
586 = Thermostatic steam trap
588 = Thermodynamic steam trap
590 = Impulse steam trap
611 = Generic component
613 = Pip seg heat tracing brk/comp 2
747 = Air utility station

748 = Nitrogen utility station
749 = Water utility station
750 = Steam utility station
823 = Vent/drain detail 1
833 = Vent/drain detail H
873 = Connection detail 1
909 = Anchor
911 = 1-way support
913 = 2-way support
923 = Spring support
927 = Damping support
1008 = Tie-in marker
1018 = Utility connector

1019 = Drain connector
1020 = Utility station connector
1038 = TRM off-dwg piping connector
1039 = TLM off-dwg piping connector
622
1040 = TTM off-dwg piping connector

1041 = TBM off-dwg piping connector
1042 = FRM off-dwg piping connector
1043 = FLM off-dwg piping connector
1044 = FTM off-dwg piping connector
1045 = FBM off-dwg piping connector
1047 = Utility off-dwg pip connector
1049 = To off-vol piping connector
1053 = From off-vol piping connector
1068 = TRM off-unit piping connector
1069 = TLM off-unit piping connector
1070 = TTM off-unit piping connector
1071 = TBM off-unit piping connector
1072 = FRM off-unit piping connector
1073 = FLM off-unit piping connector
1074 = FTM off-unit piping connector
B. Codelists
1075 = FBM off-unit piping connector
1079 = To off-site piping connector
1083 = From off-site piping connector
1108 = Piping node marker
1117 = Terminator piping connector
Entries above 1500 are reserved for DIN components.
1500 = Valve generic

1501 = Angle plug valve
1502 = Non-return valve
1503 = Check valve
1504 = Valve with continous action
1505 = 4-way globe valve
1506 = 4-way valve,generic
1507 = Steam throttling angle valve
1508 = Steam throttling 3-way globe valve
1509 = Butterfly valve with continous action
1510 = [Blank]
1511 = [Blank]
1512 = Globe valve with continous action
1513 = Gate valve with continous action
1514 = Plug valve with continous action
1515 = Angle globe valve with continous action
1516 = Free wheel check valve
1517 = Safety check valve
1518 = Fire safety butterfly valve

1519 = Aeration and deaeration armature
1520 = Angle ball valve
1521 = 4-way ball valve
1522 = Taper plug valve
1523 = Taper angle plug valve
1524 = 3-way taper plug valve
1525 = 4-way taper plug valve
1526 = Flat seal bottom
1527 = Blank disk
1528 = Flange connection
1529 = Screwed connection
1530 = Angle diaphragm valve
1533 = Safety valve

1534 = Safety valve regulated with spring
1535 = Safety valve regulated with weight
623
________________
1536 = Angle safety valve

1537 = Angle safety valve regulated with spring
1538 = Rupture disk
1539 = Aeration with screw cap
1540 = Inspection glass
1542 = Aeration with plug
1543 = Flanged aeration
1544 = 90 deg earation
1545 = 180 deg earation
1546 = Tapered filter
1548 = Discharge valve with blind flange
1549 = Discharge valve
1550 = Discharge with blind flanged gate valve
1551 = Discharge with gate valve
1552 = Bellow expansion joint
1553 = Lyra expansion joint
1554 = 90 degree elbow for JP
1555 = T connection for JP
1556 = Flange between JP
1557 = Valve for connecting JP media
1558 = Blindflange JP
1559 = Skewed connection JP
1560 = Y connection JP
1561 = flanged connection segment/comp type 1
1565 = Flange from JP to normal pipe
1566 = Valve for JP media supply
1567 = Flange connection for JP
1568 = Bypass for JP media
1569 = Flange for bypassing JP
1570 = Syphon
1571 = Ball linkage
1572 = Mixing component
1573 = Flow straightener
1574 = [Blank]
1575 = Spring clip
1576 = Fire extinguishing equipment powder
1577 = Fire extinguishing equipment halogen
1578 = Fire extinguishing equipment carbonic acid
1579 = Fire extinguishing equipment foam
1580 = Fire extinguishing equipment floor connection
1581 = Fire extinguishing equipment overhead conn.
1582 = Fire extinguishing connector
1583 = Fire extinguishing water supply
1584 = Fire brigade accessory
1585 = Hydrant ground floor
1587 = Hydrant overhead
1588 = Wall hydrant
1590 = Sprinkler equipment
1591 = Flooding spray equipment
1592 = Spraying equipment
1593 = Refrigerating unit
1594 = Globe valve with open function
1595 = Angle valve with open function
1596 = Clamp joint
1597 = Taper pipe thread
1598 = [Blank]
1599 = Socket joint
1600 = Taper pipe joint
1601 = Cool box
624
1602 = Ball float valve

1603 = Ball check valve
1604 = Flanged joint
CL390, Action (40)

1 = [Blank]
2 = NO [Normally open]
3 = NC [Normally closed]
5 = CSO [Car seal open]
6 = CSC [Car seal closed]
10 = LO [Locked open]
B. Codelists
11 = LC [Locked closed]
15 = FO [Fail open]
16 = FC [Fail closed]
18 = FL [Fail locked]
19 = FLO [Fail locked open]
20 = FLC [Fail locked closed]
24 = FI [Fail indeterminate]
30 = EO [Energize to open]
31 = EC [Energize to close]
34 = DEO [De-energize to open]
35 = DEC [De-energize to close]
CL400, Option (999)

NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of
the indicated codelist ranges. The number of codelist numbers used
in this codelist set must not exceed 5000.
1 = [Blank]
2 = Bypass PMC Use to bypass PMC access
Types Options, 11-19

11 = Type 1
12 = Type 2
13 = Type 3
14 = Type 4
15 = Type 5
16 = Type 6
17 = Type 7
18 = Type 8
19 = Type 9
Valve Type Options, 21-60

21 = Red port [Reduced port valve]
24 = Full port [Full port valve]
27 = Tight SO [Tight shutoff valve]
30 = Dbl disc [Double disc valve]
32 = Y pattern [Y pattern valve]
33 = Wafer [Wafer valve]
34 = Lug [Lug pattern]
36 = Single flange [Single flange valve]
38 = 1/8" hole [1/8" diam hole in flapper]
39 = Non lube [Non-lubricated valve]
625
________________

42 = Lube [Lubricated valve]
43 = Quick close [Quick closing valve]
44 = Quick open [Quick opening valve]
45 = Al chk [Alarm check valve]
46 = Excess flow [Excess flow check valve]
48 = Limit stop [Limit stop valve]
49 = Hor chk [Horizontal check valve]
50 = Vert chk [Vertical check valve]
56 = Tap lcn G [Tap at location G]
57 = Tap lcns G & H [Tap at locations G & H]
58 = Tap lcns G & I [Tap at locations G & I]
59 = Tap lcns G & J [Tap at locations G & J]
60 = Tap lcns G & K [Tap at locations G & K]
Valve Operator Options, 61-100

61 = HW op [Handwheel]
64 = WR op [Wrench operator]
67 = LV op [Lever operator]
70 = T op [T-handle operator]
73 = GTM op [Gear operator, top mounted handwheel]
76 = GSM op [Gear operator, side mounted handwheel]
79 = EM op [Electric motor operator]
82 = ESHW op [Extended stem and handwheel]
88 = ESGTM op [Extended stem and gear operator, top mounted handw
91 = EXGSM op [Extended stem and gear operator, side mounted hand
100 = Post ind [Post indicator]
Bend Radius Options, 121-140

121 = 1D bend [1D pipe bend]
124 = 1.5D bend [1.5D pipe bend]
Head Type Options, 141-150

141 = Hemi hd [Hemispherical head]
143 = Ellip hd [Ellipsoidal head]
145 = 2:1 hd [2:1 elliptical head]
Miter Options, 151-160

151 = 1 cut [1-cut miter]
152 = 2 cuts [2-cuts miter]
Miscellaneous Options, 161-170

161 = Housing [Housing]
163 = After vlv [After isolating valve]
165 = Match branch nipple [Match branch nipple]
167 = Straight ends [Straight ends]
168 = Hor [Horizontal]
169 = Vert [Vertical]
Flange Type Options, 171-200

171 = WN [Weld neck flange]
173 = LWN [Long weld neck flange]
175 = SO [Slip-on flange]
177 = LJ [Lap joint flange]
179 = PL [Plate flange]
626
181 = SS-SO [Short-stub-end, slip-on flange]

183 = SS-LJ [Short-stub-end, lap joint flange]
185 = SS-PL [Short-stub-end, plate flange]
187 = LS-SO [Long-stub-end, slip-on flange]
189 = LS-LP [Long-stub-end, lap joint flange]
191 = Filler [Filler flange]
193 = Socket [Socket flange]
195 = SW [Socketwelded flange]
196 = SW Red [Socketwelded reducing flange]
197 = Thd [Threaded flange]
Bolted End Options, 201-400

202 = FE [Flanged end]
211 = FFFE [Flat-face flanged end]
216 = FFFEWG [Flat-face flanged end w/ integral gasket]
221 = RFFE [Raised-face flanged end]
B. Codelists
226 = RFFEWG [Raised-face flanged end w/ integral gasket]
231 = RJFE [RTJ-face flanged end]
241 = STFE [Small-tongue-face flanged end]
242 = LTFE [Large-tongue-face flanged end]
243 = SMFE [Small-male-face flanged end]
244 = LMFE [Large-male-face flanged end]
251 = SGFE [Small-groove-face flanged end]
252 = LGFE [Large-groove-face flanged end]
253 = SFFE [Small-female-face flanged end]
254 = LFFE [Large-female-face flanged end]
261 = FFLFE [Flat-face lap-flanged end]
271 = RFLFE [Raised-face lap-flanged end]
281 = RJLFE [RTJ-face lap-flanged end]
291 = STLFE [Small-tongue-face lap-flanged end]
292 = LTLFE [Large-tongue-face lap-flanged end]
293 = SMLFE [Small-male-face lap-flanged end]
294 = LMLFE [Large-male-face lap-flanged end]
301 = SGLFE [Small-groove-face lap-flanged end]
302 = LGLFE [Large-groove-face lap-flanged end]
303 = SFLFE [Small-female-face lap-flanged end]
304 = LFLFE [Large-female-face lap-flanged end]
311 = FFTBE [Flat-face thru-bolted end]
316 = FFTBEWG [Flat-face thru-bolted end w/ integral gasket]
321 = RFTBE [Raised-face thru-bolted end]
326 = RFTBEWG [Raised-face thru-bolted end w/ integral gasket]
331 = RJTBE [RTJ-face thru-bolted end]
346 = MRJTBEWG [Male RTJ-face thru-bolted end w/ integral gasket]
351 = FFTBCSE [Flat-face thru-bolted-w/-cap-screws end]
356 = FFTBCSEWG [Flat-face thru-bolted-w/-cap-screws end w/ integra
361 = RFTBCSE [Raised-face thru-bolted-w/-cap-screws end]
366 = RFTBCSEWG [Raised-face thru-bolted-w/-cap-screws end w/ integ
371 = RJTBCSE [RTJ-face thru-bolted-w/-cap-screws end]
381 = FFFTBE [Flat-full-face thru-bolted end]
386 = FFFTBEWG [Flat-full-face thru-bolted end w/ integral gasket]
391 = MJE [Mechanical joint end]
Male End Options, 401-500

401 = BE [Beveled end]
402 = OLET [Olet beveled end]
411 = TBE [Tapered and beveled end]
421 = MFE [Male flared end]
431 = MTE [Male threaded end]
441 = MGE [Male grooved end]
451 = MQCE [Male quick connect end]
455 = MCE [Male clamp end]
461 = MFRE [Male ferrule end]
627
________________
471 = MHE [Male hose end]

481 = SPE [Spigot end]
491 = PE [Plain end] [391-399]
Female End Options, 501-696

501 = SE [Socket end]
521 = SWE [Socketwelded end]
541 = FTE [Female threaded end]
561 = FGE [Female grooved end]
581 = FQCE [Female quick connect end]
601 = FFRE [Female ferrule end]
621 = FHE [Female hose end]
641 = BLE [Push-on bell end]
642 = MJBE [Mechanical joint bell end]
691 = HCE [Circular hole end]
User Defined Null End Options, (697-697)

697 = NE [Null end]
User Defined End Options, 699-699

699 = UD [User defined]
Mixed End Options, 701-717

701 = FE x MJE [Flanged end by mechanical joint end]
702 = FE x BE [Flanged end by beveled end]
703 = FE x PE [Flanged end by plain end]
705 = BE x MTE [Beveled end by male threaded end]
706 = BE x PE [Beveled end by plain end]
707 = BE x SWE [Beveled end by socketwelded end]
708 = BE x FTE [Beveled end by female threaded end]
709 = OLET x FTE [Olet beveled end by female threaded end]
710 = MTE x PE [Male threaded end by plain end]
711 = PE x MTE [Plain end by male threaded end]
712 = PE x SWE [Plain end by socketwelded end]
713 = PE x FTE [Plain end by female threaded end]
714 = SWE x FTE [Socketwelded end by female threaded end]
715 = OLET x SWE [Olet beveled end by socketwelded end]
716 = MTE x FTE [Male threaded end by female threaded end]
717 = FE x FTE [Flanged end by female threaded end]
The following options have been modified to include mm in lengths

and add British metric pressure ratings (PN).
Nipple Options, 718-755

720 = 3.0"(75mm) BE [3.0" long, BE]
721 = 3.0"(75mm) MTE [3.0" long, MTE]
722 = 3.0"(75mm) PE [3.0" long, PE]
723 = 3.0"(75mm) BE x MTE [3.0" long, BE x MTE]
724 = 3.0"(75mm) BE x PE [3.0" long, BE x PE]
725 = 3.0"(75mm) MTE x PE [3.0" long, MTE x PE]
726 = 4.0"(100mm) BE [4.0" long, BE]
727 = 4.0"(100mm) MTE [4.0" long, MTE]
728 = 4.0"(100mm) PE [4.0" long, PE]
732 = 5.0"(125mm) BE [5.0" long, BE]
733 = 5.0"(125mm) MTE [5.0" long, MTE]
734 = 5.0"(125mm) PE [5.0" long, PE]
628

738 = 6.0"(150mm) BE [6.0" long, BE]
739 = 6.0"(150mm) MTE [6.0" long, MTE]
740 = 6.0"(150mm) PE [6.0" long, PE]
744 = 7.0"(175mm) BE [7.0" long, BE]
745 = 7.0"(175mm) MTE [7.0" long, MTE]
746 = 7.0"(175mm) PE [7.0" long, PE]
750 = 8.0"(200mm) PE [8.0" long, PE]
751 = 9.0"(225mm) PE [9.0" long, PE]
B. Codelists
752 = 1O.0"(250mm) PE [10.0" long, PE]
753 = 11.0"(275mm) PE [11.0" long, PE]
754 = 12.0"(300mm) PE [12.0" long, PE]
755 = HEX [Hexagon]
Rating Options, 756-849

756 = CL25
757 = PN2.5
758 = CL50
759 = CL75
760 = 86#
761 = CL100
762 = CL125
763 = CL150
764 = 175#
765 = PN6
766 = PN10
767 = CL200
768 = PN16
769 = CL250
770 = 275#
773 = CL300
774 = 350#
775 = PN25
776 = PN40
777 = CL400
778 = PN64
781 = CL600
782 = PN100
785 = CL800
789 = CL900
790 = PN160
792 = 1000#
794 = PN250
795 = PN320
796 = PN400
797 = CL1500
801 = CL2000
805 = CL2500
809 = CL3000
813 = CL4500
815 = CL5000
817 = CL6000
821 = CL9000
823 = CL10000
827 = CL15000
629
________________
831 = CL20000
835 = CL30000
836 = SCH 40
838 = SCH 80
840 = GRAVHD
Thickness Options, 851-869

851 = 0.0625"(2mm) thck
852 = 0.125"(3mm) thck
853 = 0.1875"(4mm) thck
854 = 0.25"(6mm) thck
855 = 0.3125"(8mm) thck
856 = 0.375"(9mm) thck
857 = 0.4375"(10mm) thck
858 = 0.5"(12mm) thck
859 = 0.5625"(14mm) thck
860 = 0.625"(16mm) thck
861 = 0.6875"(18mm) thck
862 = 0.75"(20mm) thck
863 = 0.8125"(21mm) thck
864 = 0.875"(22mm) thck
865 = 0.9375"(24mm) thck
866 = 1.0"(25mm) thck
End Finish Options, 870-879

870 = 63 Ra [63 Ra finish]
871 = 60-100 Ra [60-100 Ra finish]
873 = 80-150 Ra [80-150 Ra finish]
875 = 200 Ra [200 Ra finish]
877 = Stock [Stock-finish]
Gasket Options, 880-899

880 = F gskt [Flat gasket]
881 = FFF gskt [Flat full face gasket]
882 = C gskt [Corrugated gasket]
883 = FDJ gskt [Flat double jacketed gasket]
884 = CDJ gskt [Corrugated double jacketed gasket]
885 = R gskt [Ring gasket]
886 = SW gskt [Spiral-wound gasket]
887 = MSS gskt [MSS-SP-44 gasket]
894 = SP gskt [Special gasket]
Stud & Nut Options, 900-909

900 = Spec bolt [Special bolting]
ID Basis Options, 910-910

910 = ID basis [Dimensions based on inside diameter]
Code Options, 911-989

912 = ANSI-B16.12 [Cast iron drainage fittings]
915 = ANSI-B16.15 [Cast bronze fittings]
922 = ANSI-B16.22 [Copper solder joint pressure fittings]
923 = ANSI-B16.23 [Copper solder joint drainage fittings]
924 = ANSI-B16.24 [Bronze flanges]
929 = ANSI-B16.36 [Orifice flanges]
930 = ANSI-B16.42 [Ductile iron flanges and fittings]
933 = ANSI-B1.20.3 [Dryseal pipe threads]
937 = ANSI-B1.20.7 [Hose coupling screw threads]
945 = ASTM-A74 [Cast iron soil pipe and fittings]
949 = AWWA-C110 [Iron fittings]
950 = AWWA-C115 [Iron pipe and fittings]
955 = AWWA-C151 [Ductile iron pipe]
630
960 = AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, ring [Steel slip-on flanges CL86, CL150, CL175]
961 = AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, hub [Steel slip-on flanges CL86, CL150, CL175]
962 = AWWA-C207 Cl.E, hub [Steel slip-on flanges CL275]
970 = API-5LE [Polyethylene fittings]
975 = API-6A [Wellhead flanges and fittings]
979 = API-605 [API-605 flanges]
980 = MSS-SP-44-NB [MSS non-blind flanges]
981 = MSS-SP-44-B [MSS blind flanges]
Vendor Options, 990-999

990 = Tube-Turn
991 = Dow
992 = Aloyco
993 = Yarway
994 = Teledyne Farris 1
995 = R & G Sloane
B. Codelists
996 = American DI Pipe
997 = Gladding McBean [Vitrified clay S-XS pipe and fittings]
998 = Taylor Forge
999 = ITT VALVES
European DIN Standards

1001 = Spacer length 10 mm
CL420, Piping Component Type/Source (25)

NOTE: This codelist defines the type of piping component involved
and the source of the data used in its definition. In editing this
codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values.
0 = Piping cmdty component from PMC
1 = Piping cmdty component from User
2 = Piping flanged cmdty component from PJS
3 = Piping cmdty component from branch table
4 = Piping specialty component from PJS
5 = Piping specialty component from User - spec data input
6 = Piping specialty component from User - no spec data input
7 = Branch reinforcement from user
8 = Branch reinforcement from branch table
631
________________
CL425, Piping/Tubing Type (25)

existing codelist values.
1 = Piping
2 = Tubing
3 = Hose
CL430, Instrument Component Type/Source (25)

NOTE: This codelist defines the type of instrument component
involved and the source of the data used in its definition. In
editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing
codelist values.
0 = Instr specialty component from PJS
1 = Instr specialty component from User - spec data input
2 = Instr specialty component from User - no spec data input
CL499, Piping Notes (999)

1 = [Blank]
Notes Applicable to the Piping Materials Class, 2-199

3 = Valve and flange protectors required.
22 = Valves shall be in accordance with NACE MR-01-75.
50 = The Manufacturer shall be consulted for special bolting
requirements where both the design temperature is above 800 degF
and the valve bonnet is insulated.
54 = Unions shall not be used.
56 = Gasket seating surfaces shall have 125 Ra surface finish.
57 = Unions shall not be used. Gasket seating surfaces shall
have 125 Ra surface finish.
58 = Unions shall not be used. Gasket seating surfaces shall
have 125 Ra surface finish. Valves shall be in accordance with
NACE MR-01-75.
60 = All welds shall use compatible rod and shall be PWHT
regardless of thickness and/or joint configuration.
61 = All welds shall use compatible rod and shall be PWHT
regardless of thickness and/or joint configuration unless
specifically approved by Contractor and permitted by
ANSI-B31.3 Code.
62 = Refer to AWWA-C151 for suitable installation types.
63 = Underground pipe and fittings shall be coated and wrapped.
64 = Pipe and fittings shall be cement lined.
79 = Extra thickness has been included.
80 = All components shall be bored to suit thickness of pipe.
Taper bore flanges to a depth of 1.5 inches as required to match
inside diameter of all connecting pipingand valves. Welds
shall be ground smooth to match inside diameter of pipe.
82 = Use long radius bends with radius as specified on the P&IDs
for all changes in direction.
83 = Do not allow galvanized or any other zinc bearing material
to come in contact with stainless steel or high nickel
alloys components. This includes supports, nipples, weld
splatter, wire, bolts, paint, or any other type of contact.
632
Notes Applicable to a Piping Component, 200-499

201 = To be used only where specifically required.
202 = Use between blind flange and gasket.
203 = Use for thermowell connections.
204 = Use for hydrostatic vents and drains. Seal (bridge) weld
after testing in accordance with piping job specifications.
205 = Use bends for direction changes.
206 = Use at flanged equipment connections.
207 = Use for hydrostatic vents and drains.
208 = Use threaded plug for vent/drain valve; do not seal weld plug.
209 = To be used only where specifically required and/or between
blind flange and gasket.
210 = Use threaded plug for vent/drain valve; do not seal weld
plug. Vent/drain and instrument root valves with 1 inch nominal
diameter in carbon steel and 9Cr-1Mo materials provide more
than 3/16 inch but less than 1/4 inch CA.
B. Codelists
211 = Use of this component under certain pressure/temperature
conditions may provide less than 3/16 inch CA.
214 = Use where full port is required.
220 = Install in the horizontal position only.
221 = Valve shall be in accordance with NACE MR-01-75.
222 = Use 0.75 inch diameter only at orifice flange taps.
223 = Use 0.5 inch diameter only at orifice flange taps.
224 = To be used only where specifically required. Valve sizes
16" and larger require electric motor operators.
253 = Use of unions and threaded fittings shall be limited to a
maximum temperature of 500 degF.
257 = When mating stainless steel flanges to ferritic steel
flanges, use studs corresponding to the ferritic flange.
259 = Double hub fittings are available in 90 degrees and 45
degrees elbows.
260 = Cement lined per AWWA-C205-80. Minimum lining thickness
shall be 0.3125 inch thick. Lining shall be Type II cement per
ASTM-C150 with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of
3000 psi. Lining shall be flush with ends.
276 = Remove internals of valves containing Teflon seats and/or
seals prior to welding or backwelding.
304 = For use in deluge systems.
325 = Do not use over 100 degF.
Notes Applicable to a Piping Specialty, 500-699
Notes Applicable to an Instrument Specialty, 700-899
633
________________
CL530, Accessory/Item Type (125)

existing codelist values. Some data displays require that only
1 = [Blank]
Accessory Type, 2-99

5 = AC =Actuator
10 = A =Alarm
20 = C =Controller
30 = I =Indicator
45 = PO =Positioner
50 = R =Recorder
55 = S =Switch
65 = T =Transmitter
75 = X =Unclassified
80 = Y =Converter
Item Type, 100-125

101 = Equipment nozzle
103 = Piping segment
105 = CV or regulator
107 = Relief device
109 = Other-in-line instrument
111 = Off-line instrument
113 = System function
115 = Instr connector
117 = Function label
121 = Other
CL550, Operator Actuator Type (200)

NOTE: Codelist numbers 2-24 apply to operators for piping
commodity valves whose dimensions are determined from tables whose
names are formed from attributes in the Piping Job Specification.
Codelist numbers 25-40 apply to operators for piping commodity
valves whose dimensions are determined from tables whose names
depend on the commodity codes for the valves. Codelist numbers
41-99 apply to operators and actuators for piping and instrument
specialty valves. Codelist numbers 101-150 should be used for user
defined operators with only primary orientaions, such as handwheels
and post indicators. Codelist numbers 151-200 should be used for
user defined operators with both primary orientations and secondary
orientations, such as levers and T-handles.
1 = [Blank]
Operators with Data Derived from Spec Parameters, 2-24

3 = Handwheel
4 = Handwheel if GCP > RCP
5 = Handwheel, inclined
9 = Wrench, short
11 = Wrench, long
17 = Lever
19 = T-handle, short
21 = T-handle, long
634
Operators with Data Derived from Valve Codes, 25-40

25 = Handwheel, special
27 = Wrench, special
29 = Gear, top mounted handwheel
31 = Gear, top mounted inclined handwheel
33 = Gear, side mounted handwheel
35 = Gear, side mounted inclined handwheel
39 = Lever, quick-action
40 = Post indicator
Actuators, 41-99
41 = Diaphragm
42 = Electro-Pneumatic
43 = Press-balanced diaphragm
45 = Regulator
49 = Single acting cylinder
B. Codelists
51 = Double acting cylinder
53 = Pilot operated cylinder
57 = Motor
61 = Digital
65 = Electro-hydraulic
69 = Single solenoid
71 = Single solenoid w/reset
73 = Double solenoid
77 = Pilot
81 = Weight
85 = Manual
89 = Spring
91 = Capacitance sensor
93 = Ball float
95 = Displacement float
97 = Paddle wheel
CL570, Design Standard (200)

1 = [Blank]
10 = ASME-I [Power Boilers]
11 = ASME-III [Nuclear]
12 = ASME-VIII-1 [Unfired Vessels]
13 = ASME-VIII-2 [Unfired Vessels]
20 = ASME Fld Mets & AGA Rpt 3 [Instruments]
21 = ANSI-B31.1 [Power]
22 = ANSI-B31.2 [Fuel Gas]
23 = ANSI-B31.3 [Petroleum]
24 = ANSI-B31.4 [Oil Transport]
25 = ANSI-B31.5 [Refrigeration]
28 = ANSI-B31.8 [Gas Transmission]
29 = ANSI-B31.9 [Building Services]
38 = API-2000 [Tank Venting]
50 = AWWA [Water Services]
51 = DIN
60 = BS806
61 = BS3351
635
________________
CL572, Wall Thickness Equation

1 = [Blank]
21 = ANSI B31.1a-1986
23 = ANSI B31.3-1987
CL575, Geometry Standard (31999)

NOTE: The symbol "||" at the end of a description in this document
signifies that the standard has been used in preparing RDB data.
Codelist numbers have been reserved as follows:
o US practices 2-6999
o European practices 1 (DIN) 7000-11999
o European practices 2 (British) 12000-16999
o European practices 3 (Finnish, French, etc. 17000-19999
o International practices 1 (JIS) 20000-24999
o International practices 2 (Australian, etc.) 25000-27999
o Company practices 28000-31999
1 = [Blank]
US Practice Geometry Standards, 2-6999

6 = PDS-P1 [REDE, RWELD, RPAD, BLSPC_>24"_API+/- thk varies,
BLSPO_>24"_API+/- thk varies]
7 = PDS-P2 [BLSPC_>24"__API+/-_0.375"thk, BLSPO_>24"_API+/-_0.375"th
8 = PDS-P3 [BLSPC_>24"_MSS+/- thk varies, BLSPO_>24"_MSS+/- thk vari
11 = PDS-I1 [BLSPC_>24"_API+/-_1.5"thk, BLSPO_>24"_API+/-_1.5"thk]
12 = PDS-I2 [BLPAD_>24"_MSS+/-_0.75"thk, BLSPA_>24"_MSS+/-_0.75"thk]
13 = PDS-I3
16 = PDS-Op1
17 = PDS-Op2
18 = PDS-Op3
31 = ANSI-B16.1 [Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings ||]

33 = ANSI-B16.3 [Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ||]
34 = ANSI-B16.4 [Cast Iron Threaded Fittings ||]
35 = ANSI-B16.5 [Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings ||]
39 = ANSI-B16.9 [Steel Beveled End Fittings ||]
40 = ANSI-B16.10 [Dimensions of Ferrous Valves ||]
41 = ANSI-B16.11 [Forged Steel Socketwelded and Threaded Fittings ||]
42 = ANSI-B16.12 [Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings ||]
44 = ANSI-B16.14 [Ferrous Pipe Plugs and Bushings]
45 = ANSI-B16.15 [Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings ||]
50 = ANSI-B16.20 [RTJ Gaskets and Grooves ||]
51 = ANSI-B16.21 [Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges ||]
52 = ANSI-B16.22 [Wrought Copper Solder Joint Pressure Fittings ||]
53 = ANSI-B16.23 [Cast Copper Solder Joint Drainage Fittings ||]
54 = ANSI-B16.24 [Bronze Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings ||]
55 = ANSI-B16.25 [Beveled End Preparation]
56 = ANSI-B16.26 [Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubing]
58 = ANSI-B16.28 [Steel Beveled End Short Radius Elbows and Returns ||]
59 = ANSI-B16.29 [Wrought Copper Solder Joint Drainage Fittings]
64 = ANSI-B16.34 [Valves Flanged and Beveled Ends ||]
66 = ANSI-B16.36 [Steel Orifice Flanges ||]
69 = ANSI-B16.39 [Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions ||]
72 = ANSI-B16.42 [Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fitting ||]
73 = ANSI-B16.43 [Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Fittings for Solvent
Drainage Systems]
636
81 = ANSI-B18.2.1 [Square and Hex Bolts and Screws ||]

82 = ANSI-B18.2.2 [Square and Hex Nuts]
100 = ANSI-B36.10M [Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe ||]
109 = ANSI-B36.19M [Stainless Steel Pipe ||]
114 = API-5A [Casing, Tubing and Drill Pipe]

115 = API-5B [Casing, Tubing and Line Pipe Threads]
119 = API-5L [Line Pipe ||]
120 = API-5LE [Polyethylene Line Pipe ||]
122 = API-5LP [Thermoplastic Line Pipe ||]
124 = API-5LS [Spiralweld Line Pipe ||]
126 = API-5LU [Ultra High Test Heat Treated Line Pipe ||]
127 = API-5LX [High Test Line Pipe]
131 = API-6A [Wellhead Equipment]
132 = API-6AB [30,000 PSI Flanged Wellhead Equipment]
135 = API-6D [Pipeline Valves, End Closures, Connectors and Swivels]
B. Codelists
141 = API-526 [Flanged Steel Safety Relief Valves]
145 = API-590 [Steel Line Blanks ||]
146 = API-590Z1 [Steel Line Blanks - with 0.125" CA ||]
147 = API-590Z2 [Steel Line Blanks - with 0.25" CA ||]
153 = API-593 [Ductile Iron Plug Valves]
154 = API-594 [Wafer Check Valves]
155 = API-595 [Cast Iron Gate Valves]
157 = API-597 [Steel Venturi Gate Valves]
159 = API-599 [Steel Plug Valves]
160 = API-600 [Steel Gate Valves ||]
161 = API-601 [Metallic Gaskets for Raised Face Pipe Flanges and
Flanged Connections ||]
162 = API-602 [Compact Steel Gate Valves]
163 = API-603 [Class 150 Cast Flanged End Gate Valves]
164 = API-604 [Ductile Iron Gate Valves]
165 = API-605 [Large Diameter Carbon Steel Flanges ||]
166 = API-606 [Compact Carbon Steel Gate Valves]
169 = API-609 [Butterfly Valves Lug and Wafer Type]
171 = ASTM-A74 [Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings]

172 = ASTM-C76 [Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe]
173 = ASTM-C700 [Extra Strength and Standard Strength Clay Pipe and
Perforated Clay Pipe]
174 = ASTM-D2464 [Threaded PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings Schedule 80]
176 = ASTM-D2466 [Socket-Type PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings Schedule 40 ||]
177 = ASTM-D2467 [Socket-Type PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings Schedule 80 ||]
179 = AWWA-C106 [Cast Iron Pipe]

181 = AWWA-C110 [Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings 3"-48" ||]
184 = AWWA-C115 [Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pipe]
186 = AWWA-C151 [Ductile Iron Pipe ||]
190= AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, ring

[Steel slip-on flanges CL86, CL150, CL175 ||]
191= AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, hub
[Steel slip-on flanges CL86, CL150, CL175 ||]
192= AWWA-C207 Cl.E, hub
[Steel slip-on flanges CL275 ||]
193 = AWWA-C208 [Steel Water Pipe Fittings]
200 = AWWA-C500 [Gate Valves 3"-48" for Water and Sewage Systems]
204 = AWWA-C504 [Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves]
206 = AWWA-C506 [Backflow Prevention Devices-Check Valves]
207 = AWWA-C507 [Ball Valves]
208 = AWWA-C508 [Swing Check Valves for Water Works Service 2"-24"]
220 = AWWA-C900 [PVC Pipe 4"-12" for Water]
221 = AWWA-C901 [Polyethylene Pipe, Tubing and Fittings 1/2"-3" for Water
222 = AWWA-C902 [Polybutylene Pipe, Tubing and Fittings 1/2"-3" for Water
230 = AWWA-C950 [Glass-Fiber Reinforced Pressure Pipe]
637
________________
235 = PFI-ES-24 [Pipe Bending Tolerances ||]
243 = ISA-S75.03 [Face to Face Dimensions Globe Control Valves]

244 = ISA-S75.04 [Face to Face Dimensions Flangeless Control Valves]
252 = MSS-SP-42 [CL150 Valves ||]

253 = MSS-SP-43 [Stainless Steel Buttwelding Fittings]
254 = MSS-SP-44 [Steel Pipe Line Flanges ||]
255 = MSS-SP-51 [CL150LW Cast Flanges and Flanged Fittings]
268 = MSS-SP-58 [Pipe Hangers and Supports]
277 = MSS-SP-67 [Butterfly Valves]
278 = MSS-SP-68 [High Pressure-Offset Seat Butterfly Valves]
282 = MSS-SP-72 [Ball Valves with Flanged or Beveled Ends]
285 = MSS-SP-75 [Wrought Beveled End Fittings]
288 = MSS-SP-78 [Cast Iron Plug Valves]
289 = MSS-SP-79 [Socketwelding Reducing Inserts]
290 = MSS-SP-80 [Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle & Check Valves]
291 = MSS-SP-81 [Flanged, Wafer Knife Gate Valves]
293 = MSS-SP-83 [Carbon Steel Socketwelded and Threaded Pipe Unions ||]
295 = MSS-SP-88 [Diaphragm Valves]
297 = MSS-SP-95 [Swage Nipples and Bull Plugs ||]
298 = NFPA-1963 [Screw Threads and Gaskets for Fire Hose connections]
300 = ASME BPE-97
[Geometry standards that follow apply to specific manufacturers.
If one of these standards is used to define a component, the
following information will be shown in brackets to the right of the
geometry standard:
o For valves: the applicable model codes and vendors designations
o For fittings: the applicable model codes will be shown unless
the vendors designation is required to differentiate between
components requiring a different geometry standard to assign them
to the proper data table.
1000 = Adamson 1
1001 = Adams 1
1025 = Aitken 1 [BLPAD; BLSPA; TDRA; TDRB; TDRBW ||]
1026 = Aitken Z1 [BLPAD; BLSPA - with 0.125" CA ||]
1027 = Aitken Z2 [BLPAD; BLSPA - with 0.25" CA ||]
1050 = Allied Pipe Products 1
1075 = Aldo Colombo 1
1100 = Aloyco 1 [GATR-Fig_114; GATR-Fig_114DB; GATR-Fig_114EB; GATR-Fig_124;
GATR-Fig_2214A; GLOR-Fig_2310A; GLOR-Fig_2314A; GLOR-Fig_314; GLOR-Fig_31
GLOR-Fig_314EB; GLOR-Fig_504; CKLR-Fig_554; CKLR-Fig_2554A; CKSR-Fig_2374
CKSR-Fig_374; TKDR-Fig_751 ||]
1101 = Aloyco 2 [GATR-Fig_2110; GATR-Fig_2114 ||]
1125 = American Darling 1 [H3W1-Fig_B-50-B ||]
1130 = American DI Pipe [PIPE; L; LRB ||]
1150 = American Valve 1
1175 = Amri 1
1200 = Anaconda 1
1225 = Anderson Greenwood 1
1250 = Anvil 1
1275 = A.O.Smith 1
1300 = Apollo 1
1325 = Argus 1
1350 = Armstrong 1 [S51AC-Fig_K1SC; S70AC-Fig_2011; S70BC-Fig_2011 ||]
1375 = Asahi/American 1
1400 = Babbitt 1
1425 = Babcock and Wilcox 1
1450 = Badger Meters 1
1475 = Bailey Co 1
638
1500 = Balon 1
1525 = Basic Engineering 1
1550 = Bestobel 1
1560 = Bete 1 [SSP1-Series_N ||]
1575 = Bonney Forge 1 [GAT-Fig_9HLF-10; GATR-Fig_9H-10; GATR-Fig_9W-10;
GATEXB-Fig_VLL-10; GATEXB-Fig_VOLL-10; GLOR-Fig_HL-30; GLOR-Fig_9HL-30;
GLOR-Fig_9WL-30; CKLR-Fig_9HL-40; CKLR-Fig_9HL-50; CKLR-Fig_9HL-60;
CKLR-Fig_9WL-40; CKLR-Fig_9WL-50; CKLR-Fig_9WL-60; CKLR-Fig_HL-40;
CKLR-Fig_9HLF-40; CKLRY-Fig_9Y-40; CKLRY-Fig_25Y-40; CAPOT; UN; L; LRB;
SWOL; WOL; SOL; TOL; NOL; EOLLR; EOLSR; LOL ||]
1576 = Bonney Forge 2 [GATR-Fig_9H-10; GATR-Fig_25W-10; GLOR-Fig_9HL-30;
GLOR-Fig_9WL-30; GLOR-Fig_25W-30; GLOY-Fig_25Y-30; CKLR-Fig_9HL-40;
CKLR-Fig_9HL-50; CKLR-Fig_9HL-60; CKLR-Fig_9WL-40; CKLR-Fig_9WL-50;
CKLR-Fig_9WL-60 ||]
1577 = Bonney Forge 3 [GATF-Fig_H-10; GATF-Fig_W-10; GATR-Fig_HL-10;
GATR-Fig_WL-10; CKLR-Fig_HL-40; CKLR-Fig_WL-40 ||]
B. Codelists
1585 = Boots & Coots 1 [MN1-Spectrum_Allpha_6235 ||]
1590 = Bray 1
1600 = Brooks Meters 1
1625 = Cameron 1
1650 = Carbone 1
1675 = Ciba-Geigy 1
1700 = Clark Reliance 1
1725 = Clayton Automatic Valves 1 [CKBP-Model_D; FLO-Series_427-01 ||]
1750 = Clayton Mark 1
1775 = Clow 1
1800 = Cochrane 1
1825 = Condren 1
1850 = Continental Emsco 1
1875 = Cooper Valve 1
1900 = Crane 1 [GATF-Fig_3904U; GATR-Fig_424; GATR-Fig_431UB; BALR-Fig_9302;
GLOF-Fig_3944U; GLOR-Fig_14 1/2P; GLOR-Fig_70; GLOY-Fig_7189; NEE-Fig_88;
CKS-Fig_373;CKLF-Fig_3973U; CKSR-Fig_36; CKSR-Fig_137; FOOT-Fig_394;
FOOT-Fig_395; FLWN; FSO; L; LRB ||]
1925 = Crosby 1
1950 = Daniel 1
1975 = Demco 1
2000 = Dezurik 1
2025 = Dixon 1
2050 = Dresser 1
2075 = Dover 1
2100 = DOW 1 [TRI-Lining_SL; TRI-Lining_PPL, TRI-Lining_KL ||]
2150 = Duo Seal 1
2155 = Dur-O-Lock 1 [CPL ||]
2175 = Durco 1
2200 = Elkhart 1
2225 = Enpro 1
2250 = Epsco 1
2275 = Everest 1
2300 = Fabri-Valve 1 [KNF-Fig_36 ||]

2325 = Fairbanks 1
2350 = Fasani 1
2375 = Fetterolf 1
2400 = Fibercast 1
2425 = Fike 1
2450 = Fisher 1
2475 = Flexitallic 1
2500 = Flowline 1
2525 = FMC 1
2550 = Foxboro 1
639
________________
2575 = Garlok 1
2600 = General 1
2625 = Geosource 1
2650 = Gestra 1
2660 = Gladding McBean 1 [REDC; E45; E90; M451; M452; L ||]
2675 = Graylock 1
2700 = Grinnell 1 [BALR-Fig_3022; CAPOT; UNO; E45U; E90RST; TOUB; TOUR ||]
2715 = Grinnell Fire Prot 1 [DEL-Model_A-4; SSP-Mulsifyre-Projector ||]
2725 = Grove 1
2750 = Gulf 1
2775 = Hammond 1
2800 = Hancock 1 [BDA-Fig_5505W ||]
2825 = Haws 1 [SSEW1-Fig_8309; SSEW1-Fig 8309CRP ||]
2850 = Heaton 1
2860 = Hex 1
2875 = Hindle-Hamer 1
2900 = Hitachi 1
2915 = Hoke 1
2925 = Hydril 1
2950 = Imperial Eastman 1

2975 = Ishida 1
2980 = ITT 1
3000 = Jacoby Tarbox 1

3025 = Jamesbury 1 [BALR-Style_B; BALSP-Type_530S; BAL3W-Style_AM150FD;
BAL3W-Style_DM150FD ||]
3026 = Jamesbury 2 [BALR-Style_A ||]
3027 = Jamesbury 3 [BALR-Type_2000_Brass ||]
3028 = Jamesbury 4 [BALF-Type_4000; BALR-Type_4000 ||]
3050 = Jenkins 1
3075 = Jerguson 1
3100 = Judd Valve 1
3125 = Kamyr-Neles 1
3150 = Kemp 1
3175 = Kennedy 1
3200 = Keystone 1
3225 = Kinka Kikai 1
3250 = Kitz 1
3275 = KTM 1
3300 = Kubota 1
3325 = L & M Valve 1

3350 = Ladish 1 [CAPOT; L; LRB ||]
3375 = Lamons 1
3400 = Lukens 1
3425 = Lunkenheimer 1
3445 = Mac-Iron 1
3450 = Magnetrol 1
3475 = Malbranque 1
3500 = Maloney 1
3525 = Mark Controls/Centerline 1 [BFYLP-Series_A; BFYLP-Series_LT;
BYFLP-Series_504 ||]
3550 = Mark Controls/Flowseal 1 [BFYHP-Style_1LB ||]
3575 = Mark Controls/Marpac 1
3600 = Mark Controls/Pacific 1 [GATSP-Fig_21555; GATSP-Fig_55509; GATSP-Fig_5
GLOSP-Fig_56009; GLOSP-Fig_56015; CKSSP-Fig_58809-5-WE; CKSSP-Fig_58815-7-WE;
CKST-Fig_160S ||]
3625 = Marlin 1
640
3650 = Marwin 1
3675 = Masoneilan 1
3700 = Media 1 [BFYLP]
3725 = Milwaukee 1
3750 = Mueller/Muessco Brass 1
3775 = Mueller/Muessco Steam Specialty 1 [S51AC-Fig_761WE; S51AC-Fig_862BC;
S51AC-Fig_762 ||]
3800 = Navco 1
3825 = Nells 1
3850 = Newco 1
3860 = Nibco 1
3875 = Nicholson 1 [S78AC-Fig_N302L ||]
3900 = Nippon-Benkan 1 [BW fittings above 48" ||]
3925 = Nupro 1
B. Codelists
3950 = OPW 1
3975 = Orbit 1
4000 = Oseco 1
4025 = Pan Korea 1

4030 = Parker CPI 1
4050 = Parks Cramer 1
4075 = Peabody Dore 1
4100 = Penberthy 1
4125 = Penn-AirCheck 1
4150 = Persta 1
4175 = Petrolvalves 1
4200 = Posi-Seal 1 [BFYHP-Model A31; BFYHP-Model A21; BFYHP-Model A11 ||]
4225 = Powhatan 1 [HOS-No_18-217; HOSA-No_18-157; HRST1-No_30-333 ||]
4250 = Powell 1
4275 = Pratt 1 [BFYLP-Model_PIVA & IBV-FM4; Groundhog ||]
4300 = Premafu 1
4325 = Protectoseal 1
4335 = R & G Sloane [BALF-Fig_1081; CAPOT; FS; INSR1]

4350 = Resistoflex 1 [PIN-Code_R6000D1 ||]
4375 = Ring-O 1
4400 = Rockwell 1 [DIA-Type_STD_Unlined ||]
4425 = Rockwell/Edwards 1 [GLOA-Fig_849; GLOA-Fig_849Y; GLOYR-Fig_848;
GLOYR-Fig_848Y; GLOYR-Fig_1048; GLOYR-Fig_1048Y; CKLRY-Fig_36178;
CKLRY-Fig_36278; NEE-Fig_4152; CKST-Fig_302; CKST-Fig_302Y; CKAST-Fig_303
CKAST-Fig_303Y; CKAST-Fig_869; CKAST-Fig_869Y; CKYST-Fig_302; CKYST-Fig_6
BDY-Fig_1641; ||]
4426 = Rockwell/Edwards 2 [CKLRY-Fig_832Y; GLOY-Fig_36124; GLOY-Fig_36128;
CKLRY-Fig_1032Y; CKAST-Fig_605Y; CKAST-Fig_607Y; BDA-Fig_1643Y ||]
4427 = Rockwell/Edwards 3 [GLOY-Fig_7514Y ||]
4450 = Rockwell/McCanna 1 [BAL3W-Type_500-3WAY ||]
4475 = Rockwell/Nordstorm 1 [PLUVP-Fig_4169; PLU3W-Fig_3813; PLU3W-Fig_4812;
PLU3W-Fig_4813; PLU3W-Fig_5115; PLU3W-Fig_5119; PLU3W-Fig_5215;
PLU3W-Fig_5219; PLU4W-Fig_3823; PLU4W-Fig_4822; PLU4W-Fig_5125;
PLU4W-Fig_5129 ||]
4500 = R P & C 1
4520 = Sarco 1
4522 = Saunders 1
4525 = Sella 1
4550 = Serck Audco 1
4575 = Serfilco 1
4600 = Shoritsu 1
4625 = Smith 1 [GATF-Fig_888; GATF-Fig_5870; GATR-Fig_800; GATR-Fig_870;
GATR-Fig_1500; GATR-Fig_1570; GATEX-Fig_811 & 812 MPE/THD; GATEX-Fig_876
641
________________
& 877 MPE/THD; GATEXB-Fig_874 & 875 OLET/THD; GATXBA-Fig_874 & 875 OLET/S
GATXBB-Fig_874 & 875 OLET/THD; GLOR-Fig_G80; GLOR-Fig_G87; GLOR-Fig_G150;
GLOR-Fig_G157; CKLR-Fig_B80; CKLR-Fig_C80; CKLR-Fig_C150; CKLR-Fig_SB80;
CKLR-Fig_SC80 ||]
4626 = Smith 2 [GATEX-Fig_813 & 814 MPE/SW; GATEX-Fig_878 & 879 MPE/SW ||]
4650 = Spraying Systems 1
4675 = Spirax Sarco 1
4700 = Stanco 1
4725 = Standard Fittings 1 [CAPOT; SWGC; SWGE ||]
4750 = Stang Hydronics 1 [M1-Fig BB0309-21 w/shapertip nozzle; ME1-Fig BB3561
4751 = Stang Hydronics 2 [M1-Fig_BB0309-21 w/fog nozzle; ME1-Fig B22999 ||]
4752 = Stang Hydronics 3 [ME1-Fig_BB3561 composite, w/monitor nozzle ||]
4753 = Stang Hydronics 4 [ME1-Fig_BB3377 composite, w/monitor nozzle ||]
4775 = Stockham 1
4800 = Strahman 1
4825 = Swagelok 1
4850 = Tapco 1
4875 = Taylor 1
4900 = Taylor Forge 1
4901 = Taylor Forge 2, Rev 1957 [L; S-STD WT ||]
4950 = Texas Bolt 1
4975 = Thevignot 1
5000 = Titeflex 1
5025 = TK 1
5050 = TKM 1 [GAT-Fig_100 ||]
5060 = Top Line 1
5075 = Triangle 1
5085 = Tri-Clover 1
5100 = Truflo 1
5125 = TRW/Mission 1 [||]
5150 = Tubeturn 1 [FWN; FEWN; FOWNA; FOWNB; CAPBV; E453D; E90LT; E903D; L; SA
5175 = Tufline 1
5200 = Tyler 1 [CPL; REDC; E45LT; E90LT; L ||]
5225 = Valvotecnic 1
5250 = Vanessa 1
5275 = Velan 1 [S3AC-Fig_N675 ||]
5300 = Victaulic 1
5325 = Viking 1
5350 = Vitas 1
5375 = Vogt 1 [GATR-Series_15373; GLOR-Series_15141; CKLR-Series_15701;
NEE-Series_22461; NEE-Series_SW22461; CAPOT; UN; E90U; E90ST; L ||]
5400 = Wada 1
5425 = Wallworth 1
5450 = Watts Regulator 1
5475 = Weco 1
5500 = WFI 1
5525 = Winston 1 [S49AC-T-Strainer Type-59 W/flgd cover; S53AC-Basket-Strain
Fig 51-WIP W/CL150 flgd cover & 3/4" SWE drain||]
5535 = Wirt & Knox 1
5550 = WKM 1
5575 = Worcester 1
5600 = Yarway 1 [CKAR-Fig_5301; CKAR-Fig_5302; BDA-Fig_6909-C; BDY-Fig_6911-C

TKDR-Fig_8106 ||]
5625 = Yoneki 1
642
5650 = Zurn 1
General Specifications
7000 = DIN 2401-1 Pressure, nominal
7001 = DIN 2401-2 Pressure, nominal
7002 = DIN 2402 Diameter,nominal
Pipes
7010 = DIN 2448 ;Steel pipes, seamless

7011 = DIN 2458 ;Steel pipes, welded
7012 = DIN 2440 ;Threaded pipes, medium weight
7013 = DIN 2441 ;Threaded pipes, heavy weight
7014 = DIN 2442 ;Threaded pipes, spec. qualty
B. Codelists
7015 = DIN 2445 ;Seamless steel pipes,dyn. load
7016 = DIN 2460 ;Steel pipes for water
7017 = DIN 2462 ;Seamless ferritic steel pipes
7018 = DIN 2463 ;Seamless austenitic steel pipes
7019 = DIN 2391 ;Seamless precision steel tubes
7020 = DIN 2393 ;Welded precision steel tubes
7025 = DIN 2848 ;Flanged lined pipes

7026 = DIN 2873 ;Flanged lined enamelled pipes
7030 = DIN 2462 ;Seamless stainless steel tubes

7031 = DIN 2463 ;Welded austenitic steel pipes and tubes
7040 = DIN 8062 ;Pipes of unplasticized polyvinyl chlor.

7041 = DIN 8077 ;Polypropylen (PP) pipes
Flanges
7100 = DIN 2530 ;Cast iron flanges, PN 2,5
7101 = DIN 2531 ;Cast iron flanges, PN 6
7106 = DIN 2543 ;Cast steel flanges, PN 16
7115 = DIN 2558 ;Plain face oval screwed flange PN 6
7116 = DIN 2561 ;Oval screwed flange w/ socket PN 10,16
7117 = DIN 2565 ;Screwed flange PN 6 rund
7118 = DIN 2566 ;Screwed flange PN 10,16
7119 = DIN 2567 ;Screwed flange PN 25,40
7120 = DIN 2568 ;Screwed flange PN 64
7121 = DIN 2569 ;Screwed flange PN 100
7122 = DIN 2630 ;Welding neck flange PN 1
643
________________

7134 = DIN 2673 ;Loose flange w/ wldg neck PN 10
7138 = DIN 2573 ;Flange, soldering or wldg PN 6
7139 = DIN 2576 ;Flange, soldering or wldg PN 10
7140 = DIN 2641 ;Flange, lapped, plain collar PN 6
7141 = DIN 2642 ;Slip-on flange, upturned wldg PN 10
7146 = DIN 2501 ;Flanges, Dimensions
7147 = DIN 2512 ;Flanges, tongue & groove
7148 = DIN 2512 ;Rings
7149 = DIN 2513 ;Flanges, projection & recess
7150 = DIN 2514 ;Projection w/ groove & recess
7160 = DIN 2527 ;Flange, blind PN 6,10,16,25,40,64,100
7161 = DIN 2848 ;Reducing flanges, lined
7162 = DIN 2873 ;Reducing and blind flanges, enamelled
Elbows
7200 = DIN 2605 ;Tube bends f. butt wldg
7201 = DIN 2606 ;Tube bends, steel 5d
7202 = DIN 2916 ;Bending radii, seaml.& wld pipes
7203 = DIN 2983 ;Threaded steel pipe fittings, bends
7204 = DIN 2987 ;Threaded steel pipe fittings, elbows
7205 = DIN 2987 ;Threaded steel pipe fittings, elbows, reduced
7206 = DIN 2950 ;Malleable cast iron fittings, elbows
7210 = DIN 2605-1 ;Elbows, bend radius 1d, standard 12.85

7211 = DIN 2605-1 ;Elbows, bend radius 1.5d, standard 12.85
7230 = DIN 2848 ;Flanged lined steel fittings, Bends

7231 = DIN 2873 ;Flanged steel fittings enamelled, Bends
7240 = DIN 16962 ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Pipe bends B1,B2

7241 = DIN 16962 ;Polypropylen (PP) components,Elb. W1,W2,part 6
7242 = DIN 16962 ;Polypropylen (PP) components,Elb.W3,W4,part 10
Reducers
7300 = DIN 2616 ;Steel fittings, reducers
7301 = DIN 2990 ;Threaded steel pipe fittings, Bushings
7302 = DIN 2988 ;Threaded steel pipe fittings, Reducing sockets
7303 = DIN 2950 ;Malleable cast iron fittings, Reducing sockets
7304 = DIN 2950 ; - " - , male and female connections, Bushings
644
7310 = DIN 2848 ;Flanged lined steel fittings, Reducers

7311 = DIN 2873 ;Flanged steel fittings enamelled, Reducers
7320 = DIN 16962 ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Red. R1, part 9

7321 = DIN 16962 ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Red. NRGI, part 9
Branches
7400 = DIN 2615 ;Butt wldg steel fittings;T
7401 = DIN 2618 ;Welding saddles, short
7402 = DIN 2618 ;Welding saddles, long
7403 = DIN 2619 ;Bends for welding
7404 = DIN 2987 ;Threaded steel fittings;cross;T
7405 = DIN 2987 ;Threaded steel fittings;cross;T;redcd
7406 = DIN 2950 ;Malleable cast iron fittings, Tees, Crosses
B. Codelists
7410 = DIN 2848 ;Flanged lined steel fittings, T
7411 = DIN 2873 ;Flanged steel fittings enamelled, T
7420 = DIN 16962 ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Tee, T1,T5 part 2

7421 = DIN 16962 ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Tee, T2, part 7
7422 = DIN 16962 ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Tee, T2G, part 7
7423 = DIN 16962 ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Tee, T3, part 10
Caps
7500 = DIN 2617 ;Butt wldg steel fittings, Caps
7501 = DIN 2991 ;Threaded steel fittings, Caps
7502 = DIN 2950 ;Malleable cast iron fittings, Caps
7510 = DIN 16962 ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Cap K1, part 8

7511 = DIN 16962 ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Cap K2, part 10
Other fittings
7600 = DIN 2981 ;Threaded steel fittings with long screw thread
7601 = DIN 2982 ;Threaded steel fittings, Parallel Nipples
7602 = DIN 2982 ;Threaded steel fittings, Taper Nipples
7603 = DIN 2986 ;Threaded steel fittings, Sockets
7604 = DIN 2990 ;Threaded steel fittings, Hexagon Nipples
7605 = DIN 2991 ;Threaded steel fittings, Plain plugs
7606 = DIN 2993 ;Threaded steel fittings, Pipe unions
7610 = DIN 2950 ;Malleable cast iron fittings, Sockets, Unions,

;Nipples, Plugs etc.
7620 = DIN 16962 ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Soc. M1,MGI, p. 8
7630 = DIN 2848 ;Flanged lined steel fittings, spacers

7631 = DIN 2873 ;Flanged lined steel fittings enamelled, spacers
Bolts and Nuts

8000 = DIN 934
8001 = DIN 931
Gaskets
8100 = DIN 2690 ;Gasket for plain face C
8101 = DIN 2691 ;Gasket for tongue & groove
8102 = DIN 2692 ;Gasket for recessed faces
8103 = DIN 2693 ;Rings for grooved faces
8104 = DIN 2695 ;Diaphragm
8105 = DIN 2696 ;Lenticular gaskets
8106 = DIN 2697 ;Grooved O- rings
8107 = DIN 2698 ;Corrugated steel sheet
645
________________
Valves
9000 = Non conform DIN 3202
9010 = DIN 3202-F ; Teil 1
9020 = DIN 3202-S ; Teil 2
9030 = DIN 3202-K ; Teil 3
9040 = DIN 3202-M ; Teil 4
9050 = DIN 3202-F ; Teil 5
Dummy standard
9999 = Dummy DIN Std ; Used for engineered items and instruments
British Standards geometry standards 12000-16999
sub ranges (provisional) :-

12000-12099 pipes
12100-12199 flanges
12200-12599 fittings
12600-12999 valves
13000-13199 bolts
13200-13499 gaskets
PIPES
12000 = BS3600 table 1 carbon and low alloy steel tubes
12001 = BS3600 table 2 austenitic stainless steel tubes
12002 = BS3600 table 3 high alloy ferritic steel tubes
12003 = BS3600 table 4 cs tubes for compression fitting - tbi
12004 = BS3600 table 5 ss tubes for compression fitting - tbi
12010 = BS1387 tables 3,4 and 5 light,medium and heavy
12015 = BS1600 part 2 steel pipe for petroleum industry
FLANGES
12100 = BS4504 p1 steel flanges for pipe,valves and fittings

12101 = BS4504 p1 iron flanges for pipe,valves and fittings - tbi
12110 = BS1560 p2 steel pipe flanges Metric dimensions
FITTINGS
12200 = BS1740 part 1 screwed wrought steel pipe fittings

12210 = BS1965 part 1 butt welding pipe fittings - CS
12220 = BS3799 steel pipe fittings screwed and socket welding (mm)
12221 = BS3799 steel pipe fittings screwed and socket welding (in)
12230 = BS1640 part 3/4 steel butt-welding pipe fittings
VALVES
12600 = BS2080 flanged and butt-welded steel valves

12620 = BS5150
12625 = BS5151
12630 = BS5152
12635 = BS5153
12640 = BS5154
12645 = BS5155
12646 = BS5155 and app A
12650 = BS5156
12651 = BS5156 and app A
12655 = BS5157
12656 = BS5157 and app A
646
12660 = BS5158
12661 = BS5158 and app A
12665 = BS5159
12666 = BS5159 and app A
12670 = BS5160
12671 = BS5160 and app A
gaskets
13001 = BS4865:part 1 - non-metallic for BS4504 flanges

13002 = BS4865:part 2 - spiral wound for BS4504 flanges
13010 = BS3381 - spiral wound for BS1560 flanges
bolting
13200 = BS4882 metric series bolting
13210 = BS4882 inch series bolting
B. Codelists
dummy
13999 = dummy BS code
CL576, Table Suffix/End Standard - Green (999)

NOTE: Codelist numbers have been reserved as follows:
o US practices 2-99
1 = [Blank]
US Practice Table Suffixes, 2-99

5 = Default [See below for definition]
6 = PDS-1 [See specific table for details]
10 = ID Duct [Nominal diameter based on inside diameter]

40 = ASME BPE-97 (PE)

41 = ASME BPE-97 (MCE)
45 = ASTM-A74 [Cast iron S-XH soil pipe and fittings]

47 = ASTM-C700 [Extra Strength and Standard Strength Clay Pipe and Perfor
Clay Pipe]
647
________________
49 =
AWWA-C110 [Iron fittings]
50 =
AWWA-C115 [Iron pipe and fittings]
55 =
AWWA-C151 [Ductile iron pipe]
60 =
AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, ring
[Steel slip-on flanges CL86, CL150, CL175]
61 = AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, hub
62 = AWWA-C207 Cl.E, hub
[Steel slip-on flanges CL275]

79 = API-605-B [API-605 blind flanges. These are based on API-605 flange
bolt diameters and MSS-SP44 flange thicknesses]
85 = Crosby
86 = Consolidated
87 = Lonergan
88 = Top Line
90 = Tube-Turn
91 = Dow
92 = Aloyco
93 = Yarway
95 = R & G Sloane
98 = Taylor Forge
99 = Vendor 4
CL No. 5 is used to define the "Default for end type", which

represents the basis on which most US-practice generic piping tables
for dimensional parameters will bedefined. The system will default
to table suffix "5" when dimensions from a male termination type
table are required in defining the component but the component ends
are other than male termination. The basis for this table suffix
will be as follows:
End Termination Type Basis for Table Values

Flat-face flanged.................ANSI-B16.1 or B16.5
Raised-face flanged...............ANSI-B16.1, B16.5, API-605 or MSS-SP-42,

in this order of precedence
RTJ-face flanged..................ANSI-B16.5
Tongue/male-face flanged..........ANSI-B16.5
Groove/female-face flanged........ANSI-B16.5
Flat-face lap-flanged.............ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored.
Raised-face lap-flanged...........ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored.
RTJ-face lap-flanged..............ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored.
Tongue/male-face lap-flanged......ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored.
648
Groove/female-face lap-flanged....ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored.
All thru-bolted...................For sizes and ratings for which API-590 applie

the value of parameter "P" shall be taken from
API-590. For sizes and ratings for which API-
does not apply, the bolt circle diameter from
ANSI-B16.1, B16.5, API-605 or MSS-SP-42, in th
order of precendence, less one bolt diameter l
1/8 inch will be used for parameter "P".
Male RTJ-face thru-bolted with cap screws........................None
Flat-face thru-bolted with cap screws........................None
Raised-face thru-bolted with cap screws........................None
B. Codelists
RTJ-face thru-bolted with cap screws........................None
Flat-full-face thru-bolted........DOW
Male..............................ANSI-B36.10M, ANSI-B36-19M, API-5L, API-5LE,

API-5LP, API-5LS or API-5LU
PVC & CPVC socket.................API-5LP, ASTM-D2466 or ASTM-D2467
Socketwelded......................For pressure ratings XXXX#s, per basis defined

in the applicable generic tables;
for pressure ratings CLXXXXs and OTXXXXs, per
ANSI-B16.11 and ANSI-B16.5.
Female threaded
thread engagement per Table 2.4 of 2630-33
..................................Forged steel.For pressure ratings XXXX#s,
defined in the applicable generic tables; for
pressure ratings CLXXXXs and OTXXXXs, per ANSI
and ANSI-B16.5. In all cases, thread engageme
will be per Table 2.4 of 2630-33
descriptions in the applicable generic tables.
In all cases, thread engagement will be per
Table 2.4 of 2630-33
Female grooved....................Victaulic catalog G100E
Female quick connect..............
Female ferrule....................
Female hose.......................
Mechanical joint bell.............AWWA-C110
Gasket............................Not applicable
Bolt..............................Not applicable
Nut...............................Not applicable
User defined......................None
649
________________
Codelist numbers used for DIN European practice

Generic dimension data select flag access starts here
105 = Gen blt & fem end prep dim
111 = Blt dim for cast steel flanges

112 = Blt dim for cast iron flanges
113 = Blt dim for oval screwed flanges
114 = Blt dim for screwed flanges
115 = Blt dim for sold & weld flanges
116 = Blt dim for lap flanges
117 = Blt dim lap flanges w/ plain collars
118 = Blt dim for loose flanges w/ weld neck
119 = Blt dim for loose flanges in enamelled componnents
125 = OD acc to DIN 2631 Reihe 1

129 = OD for plastic pipes
130 = OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 100

131 = OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 160
132 = OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 250
133 = OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 320
134 = OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 400
140 = OD acc to DIN 2445-2 PN 64-100

141 = OD acc to DIN 2445-2 PN 160
142 = OD acc to DIN 2445-2 PN 250
143 = OD acc to DIN 2445-2 PN 320
144 = OD acc to DIN 2445-2 PN 400
150 = OD acc to DIN 2391

179 = OD for threaded components
British Standards
205 = default metric

206 = default converted imperial
210 = plate flanges BS4504
CL577, Table Suffix/End Standard - Red (999)

NOTE: Codelist numbers have been reserved as follows:
o US practices 2-99
650
1 = [Blank]
US Practice Table Suffixes, 2-99

5 = Default [See below for definition]
10 = ID Duct [Nominal diameter based on inside diameter]

B. Codelists
40 = ASME BPE-97 (PE)

41 = ASME BPE-97 (MCE)
45 = ASTM-A74 [Cast iron S-XH soil pipe and fittings]

47 = ASTM-C700 [Extra Strength and Standard Strength Clay Pipe and Perfor
Clay Pipe]
49 =
AWWA-C110 [Iron fittings]
50 =
AWWA-C115 [Iron pipe and fittings]
55 =
AWWA-C151 [Ductile iron pipe]
60 =
AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, ring
61 = AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, hub
62 = AWWA-C207 Cl.E, hub
[Steel slip-on flanges CL275]

79 = API-605-B [API-605 blind flanges. These are based on API-605 flange
bolt diameters and MSS-SP44 flange thicknesses]
85 = Crosby
86 = Consolidated
87 = Lonergan
90 = Tube-Turn
91 = Dow
92 = Aloyco
93 = Yarway
95 = R & G Sloane
98 = Taylor Forge
99 = Vendor 4
CL No. 5 is used to define the "Default for end type", which

represents the basis on which most US-practice generic piping tables
for dimensional parameters will bedefined. The system will default
to table suffix "5" when dimensions from a male termination type
651
________________
table are required in defining the component but the component ends
are other than male termination. The basis for this table suffix
will be as follows:
End Termination Type Basis for Table Values

Flat-face flanged.................ANSI-B16.1 or B16.5
Raised-face flanged...............ANSI-B16.1, B16.5, API-605 or MSS-SP-42,

in this order of precedence
RTJ-face flanged..................ANSI-B16.5
Tongue/male-face flanged..........ANSI-B16.5
Groove/female-face flanged........ANSI-B16.5
Flat-face lap-flanged.............ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored.
Raised-face lap-flanged...........ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored.
RTJ-face lap-flanged..............ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored.
Tongue/male-face lap-flanged......ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored.
Groove/female-face lap-flanged....ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored.
All thru-bolted...................For sizes and ratings for which API-590 applie

the value of parameter "P" shall be taken from
API-590. For sizes and ratings for which API-
does not apply, the bolt circle diameter from
ANSI-B16.1, B16.5, API-605 or MSS-SP-42, in th
order of precendence, less one bolt diameter l
1/8 inch will be used for parameter "P".
Male RTJ-face thru-bolted with

cap screws........................None
Flat-face thru-bolted with

cap screws........................None
Raised-face thru-bolted with

cap screws........................None
RTJ-face thru-bolted with

cap screws........................None
Flat-full-face thru-bolted........DOW
Male..............................ANSI-B36.10M, ANSI-B36-19M, API-5L, API-5LE,

API-5LP, API-5LS or API-5LU
PVC & CPVC socket.................API-5LP, ASTM-D2466 or ASTM-D2467
Socketwelded......................For pressure ratings XXXX#s, per basis defined

in the applicable generic tables;
for pressure ratings CLXXXXs and OTXXXXs, per
ANSI-B16.11 and ANSI-B16.5.
Female threaded
thread engagement per Table 2.4 of 2630-33
..................................Forged steel.For pressure ratings XXXX#s,
defined in the applicable generic tables; for
652
pressure ratings CLXXXXs and OTXXXXs, per ANSI

and ANSI-B16.5. In all cases, thread engageme
will be per Table 2.4 of 2630-33
descriptions in the applicable generic tables.
In all cases, thread engagement will be per
Table 2.4 of 2630-33
Female grooved....................Victaulic catalog G100E
Female quick connect..............
Female ferrule....................
Female hose.......................
Mechanical joint bell.............AWWA-C110
B. Codelists
Gasket............................Not applicable
Bolt..............................Not applicable
Nut...............................Not applicable
User defined......................None
Codelist numbers used for DIN European practice

Generic dimension data select flag access starts here
105 = Gen blt & fem end prep dim
111 = Blt dim for cast steel flanges

112 = Blt dim for cast iron flanges
113 = Blt dim for oval screwed flanges
114 = Blt dim for screwed flanges
115 = Blt dim for sold & weld flanges
116 = Blt dim for lap flanges
117 = Blt dim lap flanges w/ plain collars
118 = Blt dim for loose flanges w/ weld neck
119 = Blt dim for loose flanges in enamelled componnents

129 = OD for plastic pipes
130 = OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 100

131 = OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 160
132 = OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 250
133 = OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 320
134 = OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 400
140 = OD acc to DIN 2445-2 PN 64-100

141 = OD acc to DIN 2445-2 PN 160
142 = OD acc to DIN 2445-2 PN 250
143 = OD acc to DIN 2445-2 PN 320
144 = OD acc to DIN 2445-2 PN 400
653
________________

179 = OD for threaded components
181 = Wallthickness Reihe 1

191 = Wallthickness selection 1

British Standards
205 = default metric

206 = default converted imperial
210 = plate flanges BS4504
CL578, Weight Code (399)

NOTE: Codelist numbers 2-99 have been reserved for values that
apply to US practices. Codelist numbers 100-399 have been reserved
for values that apply to practices in other countries.
1 = [Blank]
US Practice Weight Codes, 2-99

9 = 35 pcf [Vitrified clay]
10 = 57 pcf [Polypropylene]
16 = 88 pcf [PVC]
22 = 97 pcf [CPVC]
28 = 111 pcf [FRP, Kynar]
30 = 150 pcf [Reinforced concrete pipe]
34 = 165 pcf [Aluminum]
40 = 260 pcf [Titanium]
46 = 450 pcf [Iron]
47 = 450 pcf [Standard thk cement linin, ductile iron]
48 = 450 pcf [Double thk cement lining ductile iron]
52 = 490 pcf [Carbon steel, low Cr alloy steel, stainless steel]
58 = 490 pcf [Cement lined carbon steel]
64 = 525 pcf [Brass, Inconel]
70 = 555 pcf [Bronze, copper, Monel, nickel]
76 = 570 pcf [Hastelloy]
European Practice Weight Codes, 101-199

101 = [Blank]
111 = Weight selection flag 1

654
131 = 1 [Acc. to DIN 3202-F1/K1/V1]

132 = 2 [Acc. to DIN 3202-F2/S2/K2/M2/V2]
133 = 3 [Acc. to DIN 3202-F3/S3/K3/M3]
134 = 4 [Acc. to DIN 3202-F4/K4/M4]
135 = 5 [Acc. to DIN 3202-F5/S5/K5/M5]
136 = 6 [Acc. to DIN 3202-F6/M6]
137 = 7 [Acc. to DIN 3202-F7/S7]
138 = 8 [Acc. to DIN 3202-F8/S8/M8]
139 = 9 [Acc. to DIN 3202-F9/S9/M9]
140 = 10 [Acc. to DIN 3202-S10/M10]
141 = 11 [Acc. to DIN 3202-F11/M11]
142 = 12 [Acc. to DIN 3202-S12]
143 = 13 [Acc. to DIN 3202-S13]
144 = 14 [Acc. to DIN 3202-S14/M14]
145 = 15 [Acc. to DIN 3202-F15/M15]
146 = 16 [Acc. to DIN 3202-F16]
B. Codelists
147 = 17 [Acc. to DIN 3202-F17]
148 = 18 [Acc. to DIN 3202-F18]
149 = 19 [Acc. to DIN 3202-F19]
150 = - [Not existent under DIN 3202]
151 = 21 [Acc. to DIN 3202-V21]
161 = 31 [Acc. to DIN 3202-S31]
162 = 32 [Acc. to DIN 3202-F32/M32]
163 = 33 [Acc. to DIN 3202-F33/M33]
164 = 34 [Acc. to DIN 3202-F34]
166 = 36 [Acc. to DIN 3202-M36]
British Standards numbers (200-299)

units kg per cubic metre
201 = [Blank]
209 = 561 km3

210 = 913 km3 [polypropylene]
216 = 1410 km3 [pvc]
222 = 1554 km3 [cpvc]
228 = 1778 km3 [FRP, Kynar]
230 = 2403 km3
234 = 2643 km3 [Aluminium]
240 = 4165 km3 [Titanium]
246 = 7208 km3 [Iron]
247 = 7208 km3
248 = 7208 km3
252 = 7849 km3 [CS]
253 = 7849 km3 [low alloy st]
254 = 7849 km3 [SS]
258 = 7849 km3 [8mm thk cement lined CS]
264 = 8410 km3 [Brass, Inconel]
270 = 8890 km3 [Bronze, copper, Monel, Nickel]
276 = 9130 km3 [Hastelloy]
655
________________
CL990, Types of Piping Commodity Data Forms

1 = General Fittings
2 = Pipe Bends
3 = Orifice Flanges
4 = Branch Nipples
5 = Branch Reinforcement
21 = Valves
41 = Piping
42 = Tubing
61 = Gaskets
62 = Bolts
63 = Nuts
100 - 299 values are for Piping Specialties

100 - 149 range of values are for specific specialties
150 - 199 range of values are for typical specialties
200 - 249 range of values are for specific valves
250 - 299 range of values are for typical valves
100 = Specific - General

150 = Typical - General
200 = Specific - Valve
250 = Typical - Valve
300 - 499 values are for Instruments

300 - 349 range of values are for specific instruments
350 - 399 range of values are for typical instruments
400 - 449 range of values are for specific valves
450 - 499 range of values are for typical values
300 = Specific - General

350 = Typical - General
400 = Specific - Valve
450 = Typical - Valve
CL999, Standard Note Title (2000)

1 = [Blank]
31 = Object Types for Mass Annotation
35 = Approval Status
36 = Structural Approval Status
37 = HVAC Approval Status
50 = Hold Status
69 = Equipment Division
125 = Fluid Code
130 = Construction Status
145 = Materials Grade
148 = Materials Description
160 = Responsibility
180 = Fabrication Category
190 = Coating Requirements
200 = Heat Tracing Requirements
210 = Heat Tracing Media
220 = Insulation Purpose
230 = Cleaning Requirements
656
330 = End Preparation

332 = Schedule / Thickness Override
340 = Safety Classification
360 = Stress Analysis Requirements
365 = Reporting Requirements
366 = Requirement to Reconstruct
380 = Piping Component Type
390 = Action
400 = Commodity Option
420 = Piping Component Data Source
425 = Piping/Tubing Type/Source
430 = Instrument Component Data Source
499 = Piping Notes
530 = Accessory / Item Type
550 = Operator / Actuator Type
570 = Design Standard
B. Codelists
572 = Wall Thickness Equation
575 = Geometry Standard
576 = Table Suffix / End Standard - Green
577 = Table Suffix / End Standard - Red
578 = Weight Code
990 = Spec Writer Data Form Type
999 = Standard Note Title
1010 = Area Units
1028 = Weight Units
1056 = Temperature Units
1064 = Pressure Units
1074 = Density Units
1100 = Weld Type
1162 = Force Units
1201 = Drawing Scale
1202 = Drawing Size
1203 = Interference Manager Approval Status
1204 = Interference Clash Type
1205 = Interference Manager Action
1207 = Interference Manager Approval Method
1208 = Clash Checking Option
1209 = Clash Checking Volume Filter Option
1310 = Report Source
1312 = Report Type
1410 = Design Review Type
1605 = Model Status
1610 = Force Units for FrameWorks Plus
1620 = Drawing View Direction
1630 = Drawing View Composition Status
1710 = Document Type
1720 = Document Sub-Type
1900 = Isometric Drawing Type
2000 = Orthographic Drawing Type
CL1010, Area Units (25)

Convert to Destination Unit Convert To First Unit in CL
No Unit Name Dest. Unit Factor A B
1 ft2 m2 9.290 304* E-02 0.0 1.0* E+00
3 in2 cm2 6.451 6* E+00 0.0 6.944 444 E-03
5 yd2 m2 8.361 274 E-01 0.0 9.0* E+00
7 mi2 km2 2.589 988 E+00 0.0 2.787 840 E+07
10 mm2 mm2 1 0.0 1.076 391 E-05
12 cm2 mm2 1.0* E+02 0.0 1.076 391 E-03
14 m2 cm2 1.0* E+04 0.0 1.076 391 E+01
657
________________
16 km2 m2 1.0* E+06 0.0 1.076 391 E+07

25 [Blank] -9999. -9999.
CL1028, Mass Units (40)

1 lb kg 4.535 924 E-01 0.0 1.0* E+00
3 grain mg 6.479 891 E+01 0.0 1.428 571 E-04
9 USton Mg 9.071 847 E-01 0.0 2.0* E+03
11 UKton Mg 1.016 047 E+00 0.0 2.24* E+03
20 (Mu)g (Mu)g 1 0.0 2.204 622 E-09
22 mg mg 1 0.0 2.204 622 E-06
24 g g 1 0.0 2.204 622 E-03
26 kg kg 1 0.0 2.204 622 E+00
28 Mg Mg 1 0.0 2.204 622 E+03
40 [Blank] -9999. -9999.
CL1056, Temperature Units (15)

1 degF degC (degF - 32)/1.8 0.0 1.0* E+00
2 degC degC 1 +3.2* E+01 1.8* E+00
3 degR K 5/9 -4.596 900 E+02 0.0* E+00
4 K K 1 -4.596 900 E+02 1.8* E+00
15 [Blank] -9999. -9999.
CL1064, Pressure Units (40)

NOTE: New entries in this codelist cannot be added by the user.
Changes will NOT be recognized unless the software is changed to
use them.
1 psig [gage] kPa 0.0 1.0* E+
2 psi [absolute] kPa 6.894 757 E+00 -1.469 595 E+01 1.0* E+00
4 inH2O [absolute] kPa 2.488 4 E-01 -1.469 595 E+01 3.609 119 E-02
6 inH2O @ 32degF kPa 2.491 14 E-01 -1.469 595 E+01 3.613 010 E-02
7 inHg [absolute] kPa 3.376 85 E+00 -1.469 595 E+01 4.897 707 E-01
8 mmHg [absolute] kPa 1.333 22 E-01 -1.469 595 E+01 1.933 672 E-02
9 atm [absolute] kPa 1.013 250* E+02 -1.469 595 E+01 1.469 595 E+01
10 bar [absolute] kPa 1.0* E+02 -1.469 595 E+01 1.450 377 E+01
11 bar (gage) [gage] psig 1.450 377 E+01 0.0 1.450 377 E+01
13 dyn/cm2 [absolute] Pa 1.0* E-01 -1.469 595 E+01 1.450 377 E-05
15 mmH2O [absolute] kPa 9.806 38 E-03 -1.469 595 E+01 1.422 295 E-03
16 inHg @ 32degF kPa 3.386 38 E+00 -1.469 595 E+01 4.911 054 E-01
17 kPa [absolute] kPa 1 -1.469 595 E+01 1.450 377 E-01
18 MPa [absolute] kPa 1.0* E+03 -1.469 595 E+01 1.450 377 E+02
19 Pa [absolute] Pa 1 -1.469 595 E+01 1.450 377 E-04
20 kg/cm*2 (gage) [gage] psig 1.422 334 E+01 0.0 1.422 334 E+01
21 kg/cm*2 [absolute] kPa 9.806 65 E+01 -1.469 595 E+01 1.422 334 E+01
22 Mpa_g psig 1.450 377 E+02 0.0 1.450 377 E+02
40 [Blank] -9999. -9999.
67 kPa_g psig 1.450 377 E-01 0.0 1.450 377 E-01
658
CL1074, Density Units (35)

1 lb/ft3 kg/m3 1.601 846 E+01 0.0 1.0* E+00
3 lb/UKgal kg/m3 9.977 633 E+01 0.0 6.228 834 E+00
5 lb/USgal kg/m3 1.198 264 E+02 0.0 7.480 519 E+00
7 kip/ft3 kg/m3 1.601 846 E+04 0.0 1.0* E+03
9 lb/in3 kg/m3 2.767 990 E+04 0.0 1.728 000 E+03
11 USton/ft3 kg/m3 3.203 692 E+04 0.0 2.0* E+03
17 degAPI kg/m3 Use API2564 Tbl -9999. -9999.
20 kg/m3 kg/m3 1 0.0 6.242 797 E-02
22 g/cm3 kg/dm3 1 0.0 6.242 797 E+01
24 kg/L kg/m3 1.0* E+03 0.0 6.242 797 E+01
26 kg/dm3 kg/m3 1 E+03 0.0 6.242 797 E+01
35 [Blank] -9999. -9999.
B. Codelists
CL1100, Weld Type (100)
NOTE: Codelist numbers 0-19 have been reserved for shop welds,
numbers 20-29 have been reserved for field welds, and 30-39 have
been reserved for offshore welds. In editing this codelist set, do not
change the meaning of existing codelist values.
1 = [Blank]
2 = Pipe connector
11 = Shop weld
21 = Field weld at assembly site
22 = Field weld at job site
23 = Field weld at job site for loose flange
24 = Field fit weld at job site
CL1162, Force Units (40)

1 = lbf
3 = kipf
5 = UStonf
7 = UKtonf
20 = dyn
22 = mN
24 = N
26 = kgf
28 = kN
40 = [Blank]
CL1201, Drawing Scale (540)

(1-499) English System of Units
1 = [Blank]
104 = =1/8"= 1 0"
108 = =1/4"= 1 0"
112 = =3/8"= 1 0"
116 = =1/2"= 1 0"
124 = =3/4"= 1 0"
132 = =1"= 1 0"
164 = =2"= 1 0"
659
________________
(500-599) Metric System of Units

500 = 1:10
510 = 1:4
530 = 1:2
540 = 1:1
CL1202, Drawing Size (199)

(1-99) English System of Units
1 = A
2 = B
3 = C
4 = D
5 = E
6 = F
(100-199) Metric System of Units

101 = A0
102 = A1
103 = A2
104 = A3
105 = A4
CL1203, Interference Manager Approval Status (99)

1 = Unapproved
2 = Approved [User has approved clash]
99 = Cleared [Software detected that clash has been fixed]
CL1204, Interference Clash Type (10)

1 = Hard versus Hard
2 = Hard versus Soft
3 = Hard versus Construction
4 = Soft versus Soft
5 = Soft versus Construction
6 = Construct vs Construct=Construction versus Construction
CL1205, Interference Manager Action (10)

1 = No Action by user
2 = Approve Real Clash
3 = Approve False Clash
4 = Transfer Responsibility
660
CL1207, Interference Manager Approval Method

(10)
1 = Not Approved
2 = Accepted by Graphical Review
3 = Accepted from List
CL1208, Clash Checking Option

1 = Unknown
2 = Project Mode
B. Codelists
3 = Design Area Mode
4 = Pre-defined Volume Mode
CL1209, Clash Checking Volume Filter Option

1 = Volume Filter Is Inactive
2 = Volume Filter Is Active
CL1310, Report Source (99)

existing codelist values. Codelist values are reserved as follows:
0-10 from design data, 11-20 from project data, 21-30 reference
data.
1 = MTO Report
2 = Drawing Report
3 = PID Report Header
11 = Project Control Report
12 = Clash Management Report
21 = Piping Job Spec Report
22 = Table Checker Report
CL1312, Report Type (999)

NOTE: Document types defined below must be numerically identical
to those defined in CL1720, Document Type; codelist numbers used
must not exceed 999. In editing this codelist set, do not change
the meaning of existing codelist values.
601 = Piping RDB Reports

682 = Equipment List
685 = Piping Line List
687 = Piping Segments Report
689 = Piping Components MTO Report
690 = Pipe Supports Report
692 = Instrument List
696 = Piping Release Report
661
________________
CL1410, Design Review Type (10)

1 = Client Review
2 = Informal Review
CL1605, Model Status

1 = Undefined
11 = Preliminary
12 = Temporary
21 = Permanent
CL1610, Force Units for FrameWorks Plus (40)

1 = LBS
2 = KIPS
3 = N
4 = kN
CL1620, Drawing View Directions (7)

1 = Plan
2 = East Elevation
3 = North Elevation
4 = Isometric
5 = West Elevation
6 = South Elevation
7 = Plan (Vertical)
CL1630, Drawing View Composition Status (4)

1 = Drawing View Not Composed
2 = Drawing View Composed
3 = Composite Drawing View Not Composed
4 = Composite Drawing View Composed
CL1710, Document Source (99)

NOTE: Do not make any new entries to this codelist. In editing
this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values.
1 = Process RDB report

2 = Process TDB report
5 = Process TDB drawing
662
11 = P&I RDB report

12 = P&I TDB report
15 = P&I TDB drawing
21 = Vessel RDB report

22 = Vessel TDB report
25 = Vessel TDB drawing
31 = Heat Transfer RDB report

32 = Heat Transfer TDB report
35 = Heat Transfer TDB drawing
41 = Mechanical RDB report

42 = Mechanical TDB report
45 = Mechanical TDB drawing
B. Codelists
46 = Piping Specialty RDB report
47 = Piping Specialty TDB report
51 = Civil/Structural RDB report

52 = Civil/Structural TDB report
55 = Civil/Structural TDB drawing
61 = Piping RDB report

62 = Piping TDB report (PD_Report)
65 = Piping TDB drawing (PD_Draw)
67 = Piping isometric TDB drawing
71 = Instrument RDB report

72 = Instrument TDB report
75 = Instrument TDB drawing
81 = Electrical RDB report

82 = Electrical TDB report
85 = Electrical TDB drawing
91 = HVAC RDB report

92 = HVAC TDB report
95 = HVAC TDB drawing
99 = No planned PDS source
CL1720, Document Type (999)

NOTE: The PDS source of each document type is shown to the right
of the document type separated from it by the character | on the
basis of codelist numbers defined in CL1710, Document Source. In
editing this codelist set, respect the number ranges identified below.
(100-199) Process Documents

101 = Process RDB Reports | 1
121 = Process Flow Diagrams | 5
125 = Materials of Construction Drawings | 5
127 = Temperature/Pressure Diagrams | 5
131 = Equipment Process Datasheets | 2
133 = Instrument Process Datasheets | 2
199 = Other Process Documents | 99
663
________________
(200-299) Vessel Documents

201 = Vessel RDB Reports | 21
205 = Vessel Job Specifications | 99
211 = Vessel Requisitions | 22
231 = Reactor Drawings | 25
233 = Regenerator Drawings | 25
235 = Cyclone Drawings | 25
237 = Transfer Line Drawings | 25
239 = Tower Drawings | 25
241 = Drum Drawings | 25
243 = Tank Drawings | 25
245 = Silo Drawings | 25
247 = Stack Drawings | 25
299 = Other Vessel Documents | 99
(300-399) Heat Transfer Documents

301 = Heat Transfer RDB Reports | 31
305 = Heat Transfer Job Specifications | 99
311 = Heat Transfer Requisitions | 32
331 = Heat Transfer Drawings | 35
399 = Other Heat Transfer Documents | 99
(400-499) Mechanical Equipment Documents

401 = Mechanical RDB Reports | 41
405 = Mechanical Equipment Job Specifications | 99
411 = Mechanical Equipment Requisitions | 42
431 = Mechanical Equipment Drawings | 45
499 = Other Mechanical Equipment Documents | 99
(500-599) Civil/Structural Documents

501 = Civil/Structural RDB Reports | 51
505 = Civil/Structural Job Specifications | 99
511 = Civil/Structural Requisitions | 99
531 = Site Preparation Drawings | 99
535 = Foundation Location Drawings | 65
537 = Piling Drawings | 65
538 = Foundation Drawings | 55
540 = Structural Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details | 65
545 = Concrete Structural Drawings | 55
550 = Steel Structural Drawings | 55
570 = Building Drawings | 99
599 = Other Civil/Structural Documents | 99
(600-699) Piping Documents

601 = Piping RDB Reports | 61
602 = Piping Specialty RDB Reports | 46
605 = Piping Job Specifications | 99
611 = Piping Commodity Requisitions | 99
612 = Piping Specialty Requisitions | 47
631 = P&IDs | 15
633 = Hydrotest P&IDs | 15
641 = Plot Plans | 65
643 = Equipment Arrangement Drawings | 65
651 = Piping Underground Drawings | 65
661 = Equipment Orientations | 65
663 = Piping One Line Drawings | 65
665 = Piping Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details | 65
667 = Pipeline Alignment Drawings | 65
669 = Piping Isometric Drawings | 67
671 = Piping Spool Drawings | 67
673 = Spring Hanger Drawings | 99
675 = Pipe Support Details | 99
664
681 = P&ID Equipment List | 12

682 = Equipment List | 62
684 = P&ID Line List | 12
685 = Piping Line List | 62
687 = Piping Segments Report | 62
689 = Piping Components MTO Report | 62
690 = Pipe Supports Report | 62
692 = Instrument List | 62
696 = Piping Release Report | 62
699 = Other Piping Documents | 99
(700-799) Instrument Documents

701 = Instrument RDB Reports | 71
705 = Instrument Job Specifications | 99
711 = Instrument Requisitions | 72
721 = Instrument Logic Diagrams | 75
B. Codelists
723 = Instrument Loop Diagrams | 75
731 = Instrument Location Plans | 65
733 = Instrument Control House/Panel Drawings | 99
735 = Instrument Hook Up Drawings | 75
737 = Instrument Heat Tracing Drawings | 75
739 = Instrument Wiring Drawings | 99
771 = Instrument Index | 72
799 = Other Instrument Documents | 99
(800-899) Electrical Documents

801 = Electrical RDB Reports | 81
805 = Electrical Job Specifications | 99
811 = Electrical Requisitions | 99
831 = Electrical One Line Diagrams | 99
841 = Electrical Area Classification Drawings | 65
851 = Electrical Underground Drawings | 65
861 = Electrical Power Drawings | 99
863 = Electrical Communications Drawings | 99
865 = Lighting Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details | 65
867 = Electrical Heat Tracing Drawings | 99
899 = Other Electrical Documents | 99
(900-999) HVAC Documents

901 = HVAC RDB Reports | 91
905 = HVAC Job Specifications | 99
911 = HVAC Requisitions | 99
931 = HVAC Flow Diagrams | 99
971 = HVAC Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details | 65
999 = Other HVAC Documents | 99
CL1900, Isometric Drawing Type

1 = Fabrication
2 = Spool
3 = Stress
665
________________
CL2000, PD_Draw Document Type (999)

NOTE: Document types defined below must be numerically identical
to those defined in CL1720, Document Type; codelist numbers used
must not exceed 999. In editing this codelist set, do not change
the meaning of existing codelist values.
535 = Foundation Location Drawings

537 = Piling Drawings
540 = Structural Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details
641 = Plot Plans
643 = Equipment Arrangement Drawings
651 = Piping Underground Drawings
661 = Equipment Orientations
663 = Piping One Line Drawings
665 = Piping Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details
667 = Pipeline Alignment Drawings
731 = Instrument Location Plans
841 = Electrical Area Classification Drawings
851 = Electrical Underground Drawings
865 = Lighting Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details
971 = HVAC Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details
666
________________ Glossary
Glossary
absolute path name The sequence of directories, beginning with the root directory (/) that
locates a file. See also path name and relative path name.
active depth The plane in a 3-D design upon which you can place elements and perform
manipulations.
active process The process which is displayed in the Process ID field; it controls the
message fields, the menus, and the keyboard. The active process has a
highlighted window icon strip.
application software Software designed to meet specific needs, unlike system software which
runs other software.
batch processing A method of processing data which collects a series of operations into a
group (or batch) and executes the group in a continuous stream without
user intervention.
batch queue A queue, or channel for moving requests, created through NQS. A batch
Glossary
queue handles scheduling for processes submitted through the Batch
options screen menu.
branch point A point on a pipeline which separates piping segments so that they can be
assigned different segment parameters. A branch point allows for
placement of branch components.
cancel button The button located in the upper right corner of a form containing a red X or
the word cancel. Select the cancel button to exit the form or option.
cell A permanent association of elements that can be stored and placed as a

group, and then manipulated as individual elements.
character A column data type that stores alphanumeric character data.
client In network operations, a node which accesses data or performs a function on

the remote resource (usually a server). All network operations (database,
NFS, NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server
relationship.
column An attribute of a database table. A group of columns defines a table in a

database.
command Instructions from the user to perform a function on specified data.
confirm button A button that appears in the upper right corner of a form and contains a
green check mark or the word confirm. Select the confirm button to initiate
a specified option.
667
________________
coordinate The location of a point along the X, Y, or Z axis.
coordinate system A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the design
cube. The most common coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate
system, whereby points are located by traversing the X, Y, and Z axes of the
design cube. Normally, coordinate systems have their origin defined as
0,0,0, though this is not required. Other coordinate systems are used to more
easily express the coordinates of specific geometric entities. For example,
you can use a spherical coordinate system to help define points on a sphere,
and you can use a cylindrical coordinate system to help define points on a
cylinder.
coordinates An ordered set of absolute or relative data values that specify a location in a
coordinate system.
core files The image files written by System V for a number of reasons, the most
common of which are memory violations, illegal instructions, bus errors,
and user-generated quit signals.
cursor The pointer that the user moves on the screen to indicate an item or area.
data button The mouse button used to place data points and tentative points, to accept
previously selected elements, and to select commands from forms and
menus.
data entry field The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. Also known as
key-in field.
data point A point placed by pressing the data button on the mouse. Data points select
commands from the panel menus and Menu Bar, place elements, identify
and accept elements, and activate windows and perform window
manipulations.
database A collection of comprehensive informational files having predetermined

structure and organization that can then be communicated, interpreted, or
processed by a specific program.
database table The part of the database that is made of rows and columns and contains
information about the project and design elements.
default The predetermined value of a parameter that is automatically supplied by

the system or program whenever a value is not specified by the user.
delete To remove, destroy, eliminate, or erase.
delimiter A separating mark or space; a character or sequence of contiguous

characters that mark the end of a string of characters.
device A nonaddressable component of a network, that is, a component onto which

a user cannot log, for example, tape drive, disk drive, and floppy disk.
668
________________ Glossary
directory A file that contains the names of other files.
display-list box A small box with horizontal dashes located at the end of a form key-in field.
When selected, a list of the data available for that field is displayed. Input
can then be selected from the list with a data point instead of keying in the
information.
domain The set of acceptable values for a value within a component.
dragging Another term for the dynamic function that attaches the cursor to an element
so you can see it move.
easting A term used in plane surveying that describes an east, or positive, difference
in longitude.
entity An object (project, drawing, element, and so forth.) of interest about which
information is stored; a relational database table.
envelope file See interference envelope.
file specification A UNIX path name that tells the system where to locate a file.
filename A user-defined name given to an interactively created file. The name should
Glossary
be relevant to the contents of the file.
form An interface or screen menu designed with the I/FORMS product. Because
many of the screen menus in the application software are built with
I/FORMS, you must have the FORMS_S product on your workstation.
full path name The name of the entire path or directory hierarchy to a file, including the file
name. See also relative path name.
gadget A portion of a form, such as a button, a field, or a checklist, that responds to

information. Gadgets can display default values or act as data entry areas.
header The first items of information in a file which precede any actual data. The
header contains information on the structure and contents of the file.
hierarchy A classified structure with superiors (roots) and subordinates (dependents)

for grouping files or commands.
icon A pictorial representation or image; a symbol that graphically identifies a

command.
Informix A relational database management system supported by RIS.
Ingres A relational database management system supported by RIS.
interference envelope An equipment modeling primitive or parametric component that is used in

conjunction with or instead of model graphics for interference checking.
Interference envelopes are given different levels and display symbology to
distinguish them from primitives.
669
________________
invert elevation The lowest point on the internal diameter of the pipe.
isometric Relating to or being a drafting system characterized by three equal axes at

right angles; a view in which the horizontal lines of an element are drawn at
an angle to the horizontal and all verticals are projected at an angle from the
base.
key An attribute (column) in a table which is chosen as the access vehicle to

individual rows of the table.
key-in field The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. Also known as a
data entry field.
keypoint A point on an element, including vertices, to which you can snap.
keyword A word recognized by the software that provides access to a certain

function.
menubar The strip at the top of the screen that contains icons for selecting
commands.
message area The area that appears in the MicroStation Command Window when you are
working in a design file. It is divided into the Command Status field, the
Current Command field, the Prompt field, and the Key-in field.
model A graphic representation or schema.
network An interconnection of host computers and workstations that enables them to

share data and control. The term network can mean the devices that connect
the system, or it can mean the connected system.
NFS Network File System, the system that provides access to data that is
distributed among machines through an interconnection of host computers
and workstations. NFS allows you to mount a remote resource to your local
workstation so you can access the data as though it were local. NFS is
usually used to access centralized data on a server.
node Any addressable device (such as a workstation or a server) that is connected

to a network. The network enables the connected nodes to share data and
system control.
node address The hard-wired Ethernet address assigned to each node when it is
manufactured. It is necessary for each node to identify and communicate
with another node in the network.
node name A name, or alias, that can be assigned to the node address of a device on a
network.
northing A term used to describe a north coordinate location in the plant coordinate
system.
670
________________ Glossary
nozzle A special equipment modeling primitive that contains the connection point
to piping. This point does NOT include a gasket allowance, but rather
represents the face-of-flange coordinate.
NQS Network Queuing System, the software package that allows you to define
network-wide batch and device queues. Use of NQS involves setting up
local resource queues on the system(s) where the resources reside and
setting up pipe queues on the systems that are to have access to the
resources.
Oracle A relational database management system supported by RIS.
origin In coordinate geometry, the point where the x, y, and z-axes intersect.
origin point The point at which the coordinate system is placed.
orthogonal view A view which is a projection of the model onto a plane along lines which
are orthogonal to the plane.
parameter A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior of

something.
path A sequence of directories leading to a file or a sequence of menus leading to
Glossary
a command.
path name The sequence of directories leading to a file. See also absolute path name
and relative path name.
PDS Plant Design System
pipe queue A controlled channel for moving requests to batch or device queues on
remote systems and for receiving status and/or data in response.
place data point To identify a specific element, or indicate a specific point in the design file.
plane A spatial element in geometry that may or may not have a boundary, but is
level, having no elevations or depressions, and is three-dimensional.
RDB Reference Database.
reference database A collection of reference data containing information relative to industry

design codes, vendors catalog data, job specifications, commodity libraries,
graphics symbology, label descriptions, report formats and other
information of a similar manner.
relative path name The sequence of directories leading from the current directory to a particular
file. See also path name and absolute path name.
rotate To turn; to change the angular orientation; to transform by revolution about

a specific axis.
671
________________
row A unit of related information in a table. One collection of column values for
a table.
rubberbanding The animation dynamic that enables you to specify the position of a data
point while the element changes as you move the cursor.
schema A description of the overall structure of the rulebase or database.
schema file A file that outlines the overall logical structure of a rule base or a database.
server In network operations, the node which maintains common data or performs
a common task needed by clients. All network operations (database, NFS,
NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship.
Structured Query Language developed by IBM for creating, modifying, and querying
Language SQL relational databases.
style The symbology of an element such as continuous dashes, dash-dot, solid,

and so forth.
surface The skin of a three-dimensional geometric element.
symbology The display style of an element, including color, style, and weight.
table A collection of data for quick reference, either stored in sequential locations
in memory or printed as an array of rows and columns of data items of the
same type.
toggle To switch; to change between two alternatives.
user name A name that provides access to an account on the system.
values Data, either entered by the user or determined by the software, that are
stored in an attribute.
variable A quantity that may assume any one of a set of values.
vector A quantity possessing both magnitude and direction, generally represented

as a line. Vectors can be manipulated geometrically and are represented as
a coordinate triple (x,y,z).
view The defined area of vision on a screen. A view allows you to see a
prescribed volume of the design cube. Views are created with their own x,
y, and z axes. The x,y plane of the view is parallel to the screen, while the
z-axis can be thought of as coming straight out of the view towards you.
The view axes maintain this relationship regardless of the rotation with
respect to the design cube. See also active depth.
virtual memory External memory for a computer that can be used as if it were an extension
of the computers internal memory. The software uses virtual memory to
store data. This means that unneeded files and data, stay on the disk until
they are called for. Because the internal processing memory stores a
minimal amount of data, the software can perform processing more quickly.
672
________________ Glossary
working directory The directory from which you are accessing files.
Glossary
673
________________
674
________________ Index
Index
A bolts 272
abbreviations 314 branch
accessory/item type 634 insertion tables 208
action 625 reinforcement equations 203
actuator type 634
alphanumeric C
labels 466 clash
approval status 573 management
HVAC 573 labels 468
structural 573 clash approval action 660
area units 657 clash approval method 661
assembly clash checking
data management volume filter option 661
create/batch 529 clash checking option 661
create/interactive 528 clash type 660
delete 532 cleaning requirements 613
extract 535 coating requirements 611
list 534 code lists
report 533 sets 449
revise 530 codelist
1010 657
B 1028 658
basic 1056 658
tables 215 1064 658
bend deflection table 219 1074 659
bolt commodity code 230 1100 659
commodity item name 216 1162 659
component mirror 233 1201 659
Index
field fit length 232, 234 1202 660
gasket diameter table 231 1203 660
pipe length threshold table 222 1204 660
preferred bolt length table 223 1205 660
segment pipe run length threshold table 221 1207 661
weld clearance 228 1208 661
weld graphics dimensions 229 1209 661
weld type 226 125 574
batch 1310 661
processes 40 1312 661
bend deflection table 219 1410 662
bends and branches 271 148 603
bolt 160 611
commodity code table 230 1605 662
bolted 1610 662
connections 326, 328 1620 662
ends 324 1630 662
1710 662
675
________________
codelist (continued) connect

1720 663 point
180 611 data 270
190 611 connector type 574
1900 665 construction
200 612 tolerance
2000 666 exclusion data 101
210 612 construction status 578
220 613 conventions
230 613 forms 37
31 572 copy
330 613 report discrimination data 169
332 616 report format 159
340 618 cp type/termination/preparation 613
35 573 create
36 573 assembly data 529
360 618 graphic commodity data 278, 279
365 618 implied material data 141
366 618 instrument
37 573 specification data 134
380 618 label
390 625 attribute data 478
400 625 data 473
420 631 graphic data 475
425 632 material description library 378
430 632 physical commodity data 291, 292
499 632 piping
50 574 specialty
530 634 specification data 130
550 634 piping assembly data 528
570 635 PJS table 243, 244
572 636 report
575 636 discrimination data 165
576 647 report format 159
577 650 standard note type 456
578 654 tap
69 574 properties data 138
990 656 tutorial definition file 441
999 656 create/batch 244
codelist names 656
codelist sets 567 D
comments 569 data
commodity retrieval
code from the physical data library 267
attribute message 467 database
implied data 140 information 30
item name table 216 structure
specification data 67 reference 56
component DBAccess 463
insulation exclusion data 95 default
mirror table 233 project control data 53
676
________________ Index
delete example
graphic commodity data 283 physical data look-up 268
label data 487 extract
physical commodity data 296 assembly data 535
piping assembly data 532 graphic commodity data 286
PJS table 247 physical commodity data 300
spec data 151 PJS tables 251
standard note data 461 standard note type 462
tutorial definition file 446 tutorial definition file 447
delivered reference data 31
density units 659 F
design review type 662 fabrication category 611
design standard 635 female ends 332
dimension data field
example of data look-up 268 fit length table 232, 234
directions fire and safety components 316
drawing view 662 fittings 316
discrimination flange
data file 155, 390 insulation exclusion data 98
displayable attribute flanges 272
labels 466 fluid code 574
message 466 force units 659, 662
document forms
organization 16 conventions 37
purpose 15 piping commodity data 656
document source 662
document type 663, 666 G
drawing scale 659 gadgets
drawing size 660 conventions 37
drawing type gaskets 272
isometric 665 diameter table 231
drawing view separation table 212
Index
composition status 662 generic tables 319
directions 662 bolted ends 324
female ends 332
E male ends 330
empty weight studs in bolted connections 326
GCP and RCP data 352 w/ term type 328
GCP data 348 variables 320
valves 350 weight and thickness data, male ends 333
overflow data 351 geometry standard 636
end prep 613 graphic
end standard commodity
green 647 data 27
red 650 library 254
equation manager 275
wall thickness 636 parametric shape definitions 263
equipment and piping codelist names 656 physical data definitions 259
equipment divisions/form code 574 sub-symbol processor 258
error symbol processors 256
messages 565 data
677
________________
graphic (continued) interference manager approval method 661

data (continued) interference manager approval status 660
library 253 introduction
graphic commodity library 254 database information 30
notes for graphic commodity data 270 delivered reference data 31
physical data tables 266 project organization 22
management reference data overview 23
create/batch 279 reference data setup 32
create/interactive 278 isometric
delete 283 drawing labels 467
extract 286 isometric drawing type 665
list 285
report 284 L
revise 281 label
green and red connect point description
data 342 data management
overflow data 344 create attribute data 478
green connect point create graphic data 475
data 339 delete 487
end standard 647 report 489
overflow data 341 revise 485
table suffix 647 library 29, 465
label types 466
H manager 471
heat tracing media 612 merge 495
heat tracing requirements 612 library manager
help 41 create 473
hold status 574 types 466
hose 273 alphanumeric labels 466
HVAC approval status 573 clash management 468
commodity code attribute message 467
I displayable attribute
implied labels 466
material data 91 message 466
instrument isometric drawing labels 467
component specification data 81 report labels 468
components 318 libraries
data 133 location 48
physical data tables 355 library
body 355 verify RDB 561
operators 358 library manager
instrument component type/source 632 tutorial definition file 438
insulation list
exclusion data 95, 98 assembly data 534
insulation purpose 613 graphic commodity data 285
interactive physical commodity data 299
spec writer 103 PJS tables 250
table check 144 standard note data 460
interference clash type 660 tutorial definition file 445
interference manager action 660 load
spec neutral files 148
678
________________ Index
load (continued) nominal piping diameter

standard note data 463 table 194
load/revise notes
material description data 379, 380 graphic commodity data 270
long material description library 372 bends and branches 271
bolts, gaskets, and flanges 272
M connect point data 270
male ends 330 pipe, tubing, and hose 273
weight and thickness data 333
mass units 658 O
material object types
description orthographic drawings 572
data 28, 361 on-line help 41
long material description library 372 operator type 634
material description library manager 376 operators and actuators 345
short material description library 367 overflow data 347
specialty material description library 374 option code 625
library manager 376 options
create 378 reference data 43
load/revise batch 380 orthographic drawings
load/revise option 379 object types 572
replace option 381, 382 override
report 383 schedule/thickness 616
unapproved ==> approved 378
material reference database 366 P
reference database parametric shape definitions 263
material description data 366 PDS environment 33
structure 56 PD_Shell 34
component insulation exclusion data 95 PD_Shell 34
flange insulation exclusion data 98 form conventions 37
implied data 91 physical
instrument 81 data
Index
piping definitions 259
commodity 67 library
materials class 62 manager 287
specialty 77 management
size-dependent data 88 create 291
tap properties 85 create/batch 292
materials data table 200 delete 296
materials grade 578 extract 300
model status 662 list 299
MTO report 297
tables and functions 237 revise 294
MTO flag 618 tables 266
data look-up 268
N data retrieval 267
naming conventions pipe 273
tables 303 length
neutral files threshold table 222
location 53 piping
spec data 59 assembly
679
________________
piping (continued) piping (continued)

assembly (continued) job specification (continued)
language 506 tables (continued)
examples 521 revise table 245
placing taps in assemblies 520 materials class
library 29, 505 data 113
manager 525 materials class data 62
piping assembly language 506 specialty
commodity data 129
data 117 dimension data 354
implied material data 91 specification data 77
size-dependent material data 88 piping commodity data forms 656
specification data 67 piping component type 618
component tables 334 piping component type/source 631
empty weight piping materials class description 603
GCP and RCP data 352 piping notes 632
GCP data 348 piping/tubing type 632
valves 350 PJS
overflow data 351 tables and functions 189
GCP branch insertion tables 208
data 339 gasket separation table 212
overflow data 341 materials data table 200
green and red cp nominal piping diameters table 194
data 342 temperature and pressure service limits table
overflow data 344 191
operators and actuators 345 thickness data tables 197
overflow data 347 wall thickness and branch reinforcement
specialty components 354 equations 203
variables 336 place
components taps in assemblies 520
required tables 315 preferred bolt length table 223
construction tolerance exclusion data 101 pressure units 658
job specification 27, 55 project
database structure 56 organization 22
manager 145
delete option 151 R
interactive 103 RDB
load and replace options 148 proposed changes report 555
report option 152 tables and functions 215
report manager MTO tables and functions 237
report verify RBD library 561
discrimination data 163 red connect point
tables 189, 190, 239 end standard 650
create/batch 244 table suffix 650
create/interactive 243 reference
data management 239 data
delete table 247 conflict report 540
extract 251 location 47
library management 239 default project control data 53
list 250 reference database management data 48
report 248 manager 43
680
________________ Index
reference (continued) report source 661

data (continued) report type 661
overview 23 reporting requirements 618
graphic commodity data 27 required tables 315
label description library 29 requirement to reconstruct 618
material description data 28 requirements
piping assembly library 29 reporting 618
piping job specification 27 responsibility 611
standard note library 28 revise
setup 32 graphic commodity data 281
data impact report 551 implied material data 141
database instrument
management data 48 specification data 134
revision manager 537, 539 label data 485
proposed RDB changes report 555 physical commodity data 294
reference data impact report 551 piping
table change report 546 specialty
reference data conflict report 540 specification data 130
replace piping assembly data 530
material description data 381, 382 PJS table 245
spec neutral files 148 report format 159
report standard note type 457
assembly data 533 tap
discrimination data 163 properties data 138
copy 169 tutorial definition file 442
create 165 revision manager 537
files 155, 390 reference database
format hierarchy of reported discrepancies 539
copy 159 revision markers 305
create 159
revise 159 S
graphic commodity data 284 safety classification 618
Index
label data 489 sample
labels 468 piping assembly language file 521
material description library 383 table checker output 422
output 155, 390 schedule/thickness override 616
physical commodity data 297 segment
PJS tables 248 pipe run length threshold table 221
proposed RDB changes 555 short material description library 367
records 155, 390 size-dependent material data 88
reference data conflict 540 source files
reference data impact 551 location 53
spec data 152 spec 55
standard note library contents 459 spec tables
table change 546 library 239
tutorial definition file 444 spec writer 103
report data special tables and functions
discrimination data file 155, 390 piping job specification 190
files and records 155, 390 specialty
format file 155, 390 material description library 374
report output 155, 390 piping components 317
681
________________
specialty (continued) table (continued)

specification data 77 requirements (continued)
standard note 449 piping components (continued)
library 28, 449 specialty components 317
create standard note type 456 valves 315
delete 461 revision marks 305
extract 462 table suffix
list 460 green 647
load database 463 red 650
report contents 459 tables
revise standard note type 457 female ends 332
library manager 453 GCP data 339
PID RDB 450 GCP overflow data 341
standard note titles 656 green and red cp data 342
status green and red cp overflow data 344
drawing view instruments 355
composition 662 body 355
model 662 operators 358
stress analysis requirements 618 male ends 330
structural approval status 573 operators and actuators 345
studs tap
in bolted connections 326 properties
w/ term type 328 data 137
sub-symbol processor 258 properties data 85
symbol processors 256 TDF
manager 437
T temperature and pressure service limits table 191
table temperature units 658
201 113 thickness data tables 197
202 117 tubing 273
203 129 tutorial definition file
204 133 create 441
205 137 delete 446
212 140 extract 447
change report 546 library manager 438
checker 144, 385 list 445
conventions 303, 304 report 444
abbreviations 314 revise 442
revision marks 305 tutorial definition manager 437
formats 303 typefaces 17
basic tables 215
generic tables 319 U
instrument components 355 unapproved ==> approved
piping component tables 334 material description library 378
table conventions 304 units
table requirements 315 area 657
requirements 315 density 659
instrument components 318 force 659
piping components 315 FrameWorks Plus 662
fire and safety 316 mass 658
fittings 316 pressure 658
682
________________
Index
units (continued)
temperature 658
units of measure 569
V
valves 315
variables
generic tables 320
specific tables 336
verify
RDB library 561
tables 385
W
wall thickness
equations 203
wall thickness equation 636
weight and thickness data
male ends 333
weight code 654
weld
clearance table 228
graphics dimensions 229
type table 226
weld type 659
Index
683
________________
684
Reference Data Manager
(PD_Data)
Reference Guide Addendum
February 2003
DPDS3-PB-200034B
For PDS version 07.02.00.**
This document supplements DPDS3-PB-200034A.

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide Addendum February 2003
Table of Contents
Branch Insertion Tables (replaces 6.1.6) ................................................................. 687
CL1204, Interference Clash Types .......................................................................... 691
686
Branch Insertion Tables (replaces 6.1.6)
Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding
section of previous versions of the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide (pp 208-
211 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document).
The following information has been modified:
Removed tee with reducing inserts, tee with reducing bushing,
and reducing tee with reducer(s) from list of tee branch
connections
See the following text for details.
A branch insertion table defines the selection criteria for tee and lateral branches. You
must specify the type of wye or cross to be placed in the model and specify the
reinforcement data.
Branch tables define the reinforcement to be used at tee and lateral branches in the piping
system as a function of the acute angle of intersection and the nominal diameters for the
intersecting lines. These tables do not include the reinforcement required at Ys and
crosses.
For them, the required reinforcement must be specified in Piping Design. The types of tee
branch connections include branch weld, coupling, threadolet, reducing tee, nipolet,
branch weld with reinforcing pad, sockolet, tee, and weldolet.
The system accesses the branch table when placing a component at an intersection when
no reinforcement component has been specifically defined.
The system uses the information in this table and the header nominal diameter (first size)
and branch nominal diameter (second size) to provide the item name of the component to
be used at the intersection. Neither interpolation nor extrapolation is allowed.
Neutral File Format
Table_Data_Definition BWWWW_WW
END
687
Example
Table_Data_Definition BA501_90
! Description= A,0.063CA, Use with TA501
! By=DCG Ckd By=DCG Rev=3 Date=17-Aug-1988
0.75 0.75 6Q3C22 - -
1 0.75 6Q3C24 - -
1 1 6Q3C22 - -
1.5 0.75 6Q3C24 - -
1.5 1 6Q3C24 - -
1.5 1.5 6Q3C22 - -
2 0.75 6Q3C74 - -
2 1 6Q3C74 - -
2 1.5 6Q3C74 - -
2 2 6Q3C22 - -
3 0.75 6Q3C74 - -
3 1 6Q3C74 - -
3 1.5 6Q3C74 - -
> 3 2 6Q3C73 - -
3 3 6Q3C22 - -
4 0.75 6Q3C74 - -
4 1 6Q3C74 - -
4 1.5 6Q3C74 - -
> 4 2 6Q3C73 - -
> 4 3 6Q3C73 - -
4 4 6Q3C22 - -
6 0.75 6Q3C74 - -
6 1 6Q3C74 - -
6 1.5 6Q3C74 - -
> 6 2 6Q3C73 - -
> 6 3 6Q3C73 - -
> 6 4 6Q3C73 - -
6 6 6Q3C22 - -
8 0.75 6Q3C74 - -
8 1 6Q3C74 - -
8 1.5 6Q3C74 - -
> 8 2 6Q3C73 - -
> 8 3 6Q3C73 - -
> 8 4 6Q3C73 - -
> 8 6 6Q3C73 - -
8 8 6Q3C22 - -
10 0.75 6Q3C74 - -
10 1 6Q3C74 - -
10 1.5 6Q3C74 - -
> 10 2 6Q3C73 - -
> 10 3 6Q3C73 - -
> 10 4 6Q3C73 - -
10 6 6Q3C82 - -
10 8 6Q3C82 - -
10 10 6Q3C22 - -
12 0.75 6Q3C74 - -
12 1 6Q3C74 - -
12 1.5 6Q3C74 - -
688
> 12 2 6Q3C73 - -
> 12 3 6Q3C73 - -
> 12 4 6Q3C73 - -
12 6 6Q3C82 - -
12 8 6Q3C82 - -
12 10 6Q3C82 - -
12 12 6Q3C22 - -
END
Parameters
Table_Data_Definition - Branch Insertion Table Name (character 6) This field
identifies the name of the table. This name results from the compounding of the
Branch Table entry defined in the Piping Materials Class with the acute angle of
intersection between the header and the branch.
These tables use the following naming conventions:
first character: B
second character: a code which combines the criteria type with the maximum
size for which threaded components are used in the PMC, as defined below.
Criteria 1 applies to carbon steels and low-alloy steels; criteria 2 applies to
aluminum alloys, stainless steels and non-ferrous alloys.
Z= Special criteria
third character: the corrosion allowance of the piping materials class for which
the table is intended, per the following criteria:

7= 0.125" J= 321 clad V= R11 lined
689

fourth and fifth characters: numbers from 01 through 99 used to make the
table name unique.
The second part of the table name defines the acute angle of intersection.
Negative values and values less than 45 degrees or greater than 90 degrees are
not valid.
However, when dealing with branch reinforcements, negative values and
values less than 20 degrees or greater than 90 degrees are not valid (per ANSI
B31.1 and ANSI B31.3).
The data fields are sorted by header NPD and then by branch NPD.
Nom Diam Header - NPD for Run (integer) This field identifies the nominal
diameter of the header at the intersection. This is the member with the largest nominal
diameter.
Nom Diam Branch - NPD for Branch (integer) This field identifies the nominal
diameter of the branch member at the intersection. This is the member with the
smallest nominal diameter.
Preferred Branch AABBCC Codes (character 6) These fields identify the
commodity item name of the component used to reinforce the intersection.
If only one item name is listed, no branch reinforcement calculation is
performed. The specified item is placed at the intersection.
If two or more item names apply in one line, the system calculates the branch
reinforcement thickness. The system tests the listed item names sequentially
(from left to right) until the applicable strength criteria are satisfied.
Therefore, these codes should be arranged in ascending strength sequence (for
example, reinforcing welds, followed by reinforcing pads, followed by
weldolets.)
Typically, the codes are from one of the following types:
Reinforcing elements, such as reinforcing welds and pads.
Weld-on components reinforcing the intersection such as saddles and
weldolets.
Weld-in components actually making the intersection such as laterals and tees.
690
CL1204, Interference Clash Types
Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding
section of previous versions of the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide (p. 660 in
the PDS 7.1 version of the document).
The following information has been added:
New clash types

See the following text for details.

1 = ' Hard versus Hard' ;
2 = ' Hard versus Soft' ;
3 = ' Hard versus Construction' ;
4 = ' Soft versus Soft' ;
5 = ' Soft versus Construction' ;
6 = ' Construct vs Construct=Construction versus Construction' ;
105 = ' Hard vs Fproof' ;
106 = ' Hard vs Insul' ;
110 = ' Hard vs HardMaint' ;
111 = ' Hard vs HardAccess' ;
112 = ' Hard vs HardSafety' ;
113 = ' Hard vs HardOperating' ;
120 = ' Hard vs SoftMaint' ;
121 = ' Hard vs SoftAccess' ;
122 = ' Hard vs SoftSafety' ;
123 = ' Hard vs SoftOperating' ;
206 = ' Soft vs Insul' ;
220 = ' Soft vs SoftMaint' ;
221 = ' Soft vs SoftAccess' ;
222 = ' Soft vs SoftSafety' ;
223 = ' Soft vs SoftOperating' ;
501 = ' Fproof vs Hard' ;
502 = ' Fproof vs Soft' ;
504 = ' Fproof vs CT' ;
505 = ' Fproof vs Fproof' ;
506 = ' Fproof vs Insul' ;
510 = ' Fproof vs HardMain' ;
511 = ' Fproof vs HardAccess' ;
512 = ' Fproof vs HardSafety' ;
513 = ' Fproof vs HardOperat' ;
520 = ' Fproof vs HardMain' ;
521 = ' Fproof vs HardAccess' ;
522 = ' Fproof vs HardSafety' ;
523 = ' Fproof vs HardOperat' ;
602 = ' Insul vs Soft' ;
604 = ' Insul vs CT' ;
606 = ' Insul vs Insul' ;
620 = ' Insul vs SoftMain' ;
621 = ' Insul vs SoftAccess' ;
622 = ' Insul vs SoftSafety' ;
623 = ' Insul vs SoftOperat' ;
1001 = ' HardMain vs Hard' ;
1002 = ' HardMain vs Soft' ;
691
1004 = ' HardMain vs CT' ;

1005 = ' HardMain vs Fproof' ;
1006 = ' HardMain vs Insul' ;
1010 = ' HardMain vs HardMain' ;
1012 = ' HardMain vs HardSafety' ;
1013 = ' HardMain vs HardOperat' ;
1020 = ' HardMain vs SoftMain' ;
1021 = ' HardMain vs SoftAccess' ;
1022 = ' HardMain vs SoftSafety' ;
1023 = ' HardMain vs SoftOperat' ;
1101 = ' HardAcc vs Hard' ;
1102 = ' HardAcc vs Soft' ;
1104 = ' HardAcc vs CT' ;
1105 = ' HardAccess vs Fproof' ;
1106 = ' HardAccess vs Insul' ;
1110 = ' HardAcc vs HardMain' ;
1111 = ' HardAcc vs HardAcc' ;
1112 = ' HardAcc vs HardSafety' ;
1113 = ' HardAcc vs HardOperat' ;
1120 = ' HardAcc vs SoftMain' ;
1121 = ' HardAcc vs SoftAcc' ;
1122 = ' HardAcc vs SoftSafety' ;
1123 = ' HardAcc vs SoftOperat' ;
1201 = ' HardSafety vs Hard' ;
1202 = ' HardSafety vs Soft' ;
1204 = ' HardSafety vs CT' ;
1205 = ' HardSafety vs Fproof' ;
1206 = ' HardSafety vs Insul' ;
1210 = ' HardSafety vs HardMain' ;
1211 = ' HardSafety vs HardAcc' ;
1212 = ' HardSafety vs HardSafety' ;
1213 = ' HardSafety vs HardOperat' ;
1220 = ' HardSafety vs SoftMain' ;
1221 = ' HardSafety vs SoftAccess' ;
1222 = ' HardSafety vs SoftSafety' ;
1223 = ' HardSafety vs SoftOperat' ;
1301 = ' HardOperat vs Hard' ;
1302 = ' HardOperat vs Soft' ;
1304 = ' HardOperat vs CT' ;
1305 = ' HardOperat vs Fproof' ;
1306 = ' HardOperat vs Insul' ;
1310 = ' HardOperat vs HardMain' ;
1311 = ' HardOperat vs HardAccess' ;
1312 = ' HardOperat vs HardSafety' ;
1313 = ' HardOperat vs HardOperat' ;
1320 = ' HardOperat vs SoftMain' ;
1321 = ' HardOperat vs SoftAccess' ;
1322 = ' HardOperat vs SoftSafety' ;
1323 = ' HardOperat vs SoftOperat' ;
2002 = ' SoftMain vs Soft' ;
2004 = ' SoftMain vs CT' ;
2006 = ' SoftMain vs Insul' ;
2020 = ' SoftMain vs SoftMain' ;
2021 = ' SoftMain vs SoftAccess' ;
2022 = ' SoftMain vs SoftSafety' ;
2023 = ' SoftMain vs SoftOperat' ;
2102 = ' SoftAccess vs Soft' ;
692
2104 = ' SoftAccess vs CT' ;
2106 = ' SoftAccess vs Insul' ;
2120 = ' SoftAccess vs SoftMain' ;
2121 = ' SoftAccess vs SoftAccess' ;
2122 = ' SoftAccess vs SoftSafety' ;
2123 = ' SoftAccess vs SoftOperat' ;
2202 = ' SoftSafety vs Soft' ;
2204 = ' SoftSafety vs CT' ;
2206 = ' SoftSafety vs Insul' ;
2220 = ' SoftSafety vs SoftMain' ;
2221 = ' SoftSafety vs SoftAccess' ;
2222 = ' SoftSafety vs SoftSafety' ;
2223 = ' SoftSafety vs SoftOperat' ;
2302 = ' SoftOperat vs Soft' ;
2304 = ' SoftOperat vs CT' ;
2306 = ' SoftOperat vs Insul' ;
2320 = ' SoftOperat vs SoftMain' ;
2321 = ' SoftOperat vs SoftAccess' ;
2322 = ' SoftOperat vs SoftSafety' ;
2323 = ' SoftOperat vs SoftOperat' ;
693
Index
branch codelist
insertion tables, 687 1204, 691
694

PDS Data Manager PDF

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

PDS Data Manager PDF

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Reference Data Manager

Document Number Version Date Pages

RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND

If You Need Assistance

Intergraph General Information

1-256-730-5400 (Outside the U.S.)

You can also reach us by electronic mail at info@intergraph.com.

Mail Intergraph Process, Power & Offshore

General Conventions .................................................................................................................... 17

Keyboard Conventions ......................................................................................................... 18

1.1 Project Organization ............................................................................................................ 22

1.2.1 Piping Job Specification Introduction ..................................................................... 27

1.3 Reference Database Introduction ........................................................................................ 30

2. PDS Environment ........................................................................................................................ 33

PD_Shell Form Conventions .............................................................................................. 37

3. Reference Data Manager .............................................................................................................. 43

3.1 Data Security ....................................................................................................................... 45

4. Reference Data Location .............................................................................................................. 47

4.1 Reference Database Management Data ............................................................................... 48

5. Piping Job Specification ............................................................................................................... 55

5.1 Material Reference Database Structure ............................................................................... 56

5.2.1 Piping Materials Class Data (201) .......................................................................... 62

5.3 Spec Writer .......................................................................................................................... 103

5.3.1 RDB Options File .................................................................................................... 105

5.3.2.1 Create/Revise Piping Materials Class Data .............................................. 114

5.3.3 Piping Commodity Data Command ........................................................................ 117

5.3.3.1 Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data ............................. 119

5.3.4 Piping Specialty Data Command ............................................................................ 129

5.3.4.1 Create/Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data ................................. 130

5.3.5 Instrument Data Command ..................................................................................... 133

5.3.5.1 Create/Revise Instrument Specification Data .......................................... 134

5.3.6 Tap Properties Data Command ............................................................................... 137

5.3.6.1 Create/Revise Tap Properties Data .......................................................... 138

5.3.7 Commodity Implied Data Command ...................................................................... 140

5.3.7.1 Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied Material Data ....................... 141

5.3.8 Table Checker ......................................................................................................... 144

5.4 Piping Job Specification Manager ...................................................................................... 145

5.5 Piping Job Spec Report Manager ........................................................................................ 154

5.5.1 Using the Report Commands .................................................................................. 155

5.5.2.1 Format Creation/Revision Form .............................................................. 159

5.5.3 Report Discrimination Data Form ........................................................................... 163

5.5.3.1 Discrimination Data Creation Form ......................................................... 165

5.5.4 Report Form ............................................................................................................ 173

5.5.4.1 Report Creation Form .............................................................................. 175

5.5.5 Report Management Defaults Form ........................................................................ 186

6. Piping Job Specification Tables ................................................................................................... 189

6.1 PJS Tables and Functions ................................................................................................... 190

6.1.1 Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table ..................................................... 191

Delivered Equations ........................................................................................ 204

6.1.6 Branch Insertion Tables .......................................................................................... 208

6.2 RDB Tables ......................................................................................................................... 215

6.2.1 Commodity Item Name Table (G02) ...................................................................... 216

6.2.4 Pipe Length Threshold Table (G07) ....................................................................... 222

6.3 Piping Job Specification Tables Command ........................................................................ 239

6.3.1 Options .................................................................................................................... 240

7. Graphic Commodity Data ............................................................................................................ 253

7.1 Graphic Commodity Library ............................................................................................... 254

7.1.1 Symbol Processors .................................................................................................. 256

7.2 Physical Data Tables ........................................................................................................... 266

7.3 Notes for Graphic Commodity Data ................................................................................... 270

7.3.1 Connect Point Data ................................................................................................. 270

7.4 Graphic Commodity Library Manager ................................................................................ 275

7.4.1 Create Library ......................................................................................................... 277